2023 Nissan Qashqai E-Power Owners Manual

NISSAN QASHQAI
QASHQAI
OWNER'S MANUAL
OM23EN-HJ12E0EUR
FR
HJ12-EN2
Printing: November 2022 (01)
Publication No.: OM23EN-HJ12E0EUR
Printed in France
Nissan Automotive Europe SAS - France HJ12-EN2
J12
EN
Foreword
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many kilometres (miles) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information & Maintenance Booklet explains in detail the warranty coverage that applies to your vehicle.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, your NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive
resources available for you.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS! READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for Before driving your vehicle, read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure
you and your passengers! familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the
• NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. safe operation of your vehicle.
• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for condi- Throughout this manual the following symbols and words are used:
tions.
WARNING
• ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle fea-
Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious per-
tures or taking other actions that could distract you.
sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures described must be
• ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre- followed precisely.
teen children should be seated in the rear seat.
• ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle. CAUTION
• ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information. Indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate per-
sonal injury, or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
WHEN READING THE MANUAL cedures described must be followed carefully.
This manual includes information for all options available on this model. There-
fore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. NOTE
Throughout this manual, some illustrations may only show the layout for Left- Indicates additional helpful information.
Hand Drive (LHD) models. For Right-Hand Drive (RHD) models, the illustrated
shape and location of some components may differ.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect
at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or
designs at any time without notice and without obligation.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modifications could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be
covered under NISSAN warranties.
HJ12
J12
EN
EN
[ ]:
Square brackets are used to indicate messages, keys, or items displayed on a
screen.
< >:
Chevrons or angle brackets are used to indicate texts on controls like buttons
or switches inside or on the vehicle.
Air bag warning labels (where fitted):
The Blue Citizenship symbol indicates environmentally friendly information and

best practices.
“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE

AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.”
Be sure to read the “Airbag warning labels” description in the Safety section of
this manual; and the “Airbag label” description at the end of this manual.
This symbol means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these point to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the
illustration.
BATTERY DISPOSAL
CAUTION
An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
Examples of the batteries that the vehicle contains:

• Vehicle battery
• Remote controller battery (for Intelligent Key and/or Remote keyless entry
system)
• Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor battery
• Remote controller battery (for Mobile Entertainment system)
If in doubt, contact your local authority, or a NISSAN dealer, or a qualified work-
shop for advice on disposal.
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc

and licensed to Visteon Corporation and Robert Bosch GmbH.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Contents Illustrated table of contents 0
e-POWER system overview e-POWER
Safety — Seats, Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical information 9
Regulatory information 10
Index 11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seat belts and supplemental restraint system..................... 2 Instrument panel ......................................................................................... 8

Exterior front ................................................................................................... 3 Left Hand Drive...................................................................................... 8
Exterior rear ..................................................................................................... 4 Right Hand Drive .................................................................................. 9
Passenger compartment....................................................................... 5 Meters and gauges..................................................................................... 10
Cockpit................................................................................................................. 6 Engine compartment ............................................................................... 12
Left Hand Drive...................................................................................... 6 KR15DDT engine.................................................................................... 12
Right Hand Drive .................................................................................. 7 Driving aids (where fitted) ..................................................................... 14
SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
10. Front supplemental side-impact air bags

(P. 1-63)
11. Front seat belt pre-tensioners (P. 1-45)
12. Rear seats (P. 1-35)
— Child restraints (P. 1-47)
13. Rear Occupant Detection* (P. 1-42)
14. ISOFIX child restraint system (P. 1-54)
15. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether
strap) (P. 1-55)
* where fitted
NIC4092
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags 5. Front central seat-mounted side-impact

(P. 1-63) supplemental air bag* (P. 1-63)
2. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-67) 6. Front seat belts (P. 1-39)
3. Front seats (P. 1-33) 7. Head restraints (P. 1-37)
4. Occupant classification sensor (OCS)* or 8. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags
Occupant detection sensor (ODS)* (front pas- (P. 1-63)
senger seat) (P. 1-69) 9. Rear seat belts (P. 1-39)
— Rear seat belt pre-tensioners (P. 1-45)

EXTERIOR FRONT
7. Tyres
— Tyres and wheels (P. 8-462, P. 9-471)
— Flat tyre (P. 6-418)
— Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
(P. 6-240)
8. Outside rear-view mirrors (P. 3-180)
— Driving Position Memory System* (P. 3-177)
— Side turn signal light (P. 2-130)
— Location and bulb replacement (P. 8-459)
9. Doors
— Keys (P. 3-152)
— Door locks (P. 3-161)
— Remote keyless entry system* (P. 3-154)
* where fitted
NIC4259
1. Bonnet (P. 3-170) 4. Towing eye (P. 6-430)

2. Windscreen wipers and washers 5. Front fog lights*
— Switch operation (P. 2-127) — Switch (P. 2-134)
— Blade replacement (P. 8-454) 6. Front lighting
— Window washer fluid (P. 8-448) — Switch (P. 2-130)
— Windscreen defogger (P. 2-130) — Aiming control (P. 2-130)
— ThermaClear* (P. 2-129) — Location and bulb replacement (P. 8-459)
3. Power windows (P. 2-146)
Illustrated table of contents 3

EXTERIOR REAR
9. Rear turn signal light

— Switch location (P. 2-130)
10. Reversing light (P. 8-459)
11. Rear fog light*
— Switch location (P. 2-134)
12 Number plate lights (P. 8-459)
13. Rear view camera*
— Rear-View Monitor* (P. 4-184)
— Intelligent Around View Monitor (IAVM)*
(P. 4-190)
14 Towing eye (P. 6-430)
15. Tailgate (P. 3-164)
— Power tailgate (P. 3-164)
— Motion activated * (P. 3-166)
* where fitted
NIC4128
1. Rear window (Defogger switch, P. 2-130) 6. Tail light

2. Rear wiper and washer — Switch location (P. 2-130)
— Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-127) 7. Doors
— Wiper replacement (P. 8-454) — Keys (P. 3-152)
— Washer fluid (P. 8-448) — Door locks (P. 3-161)
3. High-mounted brake light (P. 8-459) — Child safety lock (P. 3-163)
— Remote keyless entry system* (P. 3-154)
4. Antenna (P. 4-211).
8. Fuel filler lid (P. 3-170)
5. Brake light

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
14. Driving Position Memory System switches

(driver's side)* (P. 2-177)
15. Front cup holders (P. 2-141)
16. Console box (P. 2-140)
— USB (Universal Serial Bus) power ports*
(P. 2-138)
17. Cargo area
— Adjustable luggage floor* (P. 2-145)
— Luggage hooks* (P. 2-145)
— Parcel shelf (P. 2-142)
— Spare tyre* (P. 6-417)
*: where fitted
**: Refer to the separate NissanConnect Owner's
Manual (where fitted).
NIC4093
1. Inside rear-view mirror (P. 2-179) 7. Interior (room) light* (P. 2-149)
2. Sunglasses holder* (P. 2-140) 8. Rear personal lights* (P. 2-150)
3. Map light (P. 2-149) 9. Coat hooks* (P. 2-141)
— Microphone** 10. Rear cup holders* (P. 2-141)
4. Sunshade switch* (P. 2-148) 11. Power windows controls (P. 2-146
5. eCall button* (P. 6-414) 12. Outside mirror remote control (P. 3-180)
6. Sun visors (P. 3-179) 13. Power door lock switch (P. 2-163)

COCKPIT
6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-127)

7. Steering wheel switches
— ProPILOT Assist switch* (P. 5-315)
— Cruise control* (P. 5-295)
— Speed limiter* (P. 5-297)
— Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio
without NissanConnect* (P. 4-230)
— Mobile phone integration for
NissanConnect* *1
8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-414)
9. Shift lever (P. 5-250)
—P position switch (P. 5-252)
10. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-82)
11. Push button power switch (P. 3-247)
12. Electric parking brake switch (P. 3-173)
13. Automatic brake hold switch (P. 3-174)
14. ProPILOT Park switch* (P. 5-377)
15. EV mode switch* (P. e-POWER-26), e-Pedal Step
switch* (P. e-POWER-27)
16. Drive Mode Selector (P. e-POWER-24)
* where fitted
NIC4212
*1 See the separate NissanConnect Owner's
LEFT HAND DRIVE 4. Steering wheel switches
— Vehicle information display switches (P. 2-96)
1. Steering Assist switch* (models with ProPILOT
— Audio switches* (P. 4-230)
Assist) (P. 5-315)
5. Steering wheel
2. [Head-Up Display] (HUD) switch* (P. 2-125)
— Electric power steering system (P. 5-405)
3. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-130) — Horn (P. 2-136)
— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag
(P. 1-63)

— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag
(P. 1-63)
6. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-130)
7. Steering wheel switches
— Vehicle information display switches (P. 2-96)
— Audio switches* (P. 4-230)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-414)
9. Shift lever (P. 5-250)
—P position switch (P. 5-252)
10. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-82)
12. Electric parking brake switch (P. 3-173)
13. Automatic brake hold switch (P. 3-174)
14. ProPILOT Park switch* (P. 5-377)
15. EV mode switch* (P. e-POWER-26), e-Pedal Step
switch* (P. e-POWER-27)
16 Drive Mode Selector (P. e-POWER-24)
* where fitted
NIC4224
RIGHT HAND DRIVE — Speed limiter* (P. 5-297)

— Mobile phone integration for FM-AM radio
1. Steering Assist switch* (models with ProPILOT
without NissanConnect* (P. 4-230)
Assist) (P. 5-315)
— Mobile phone integration for
2. [Head-Up Display] (HUD) switch* (P. 2-125) NissanConnect* *1
3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-127) 5. Steering wheel
4. Steering wheel switches — Electric power steering system (P. 5-405)
— ProPILOT Assist switch* (P. 5-315) — Horn (P. 2-136)
— Cruise control* (P. 5-295)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Driver supplemental front-impact air bag

(P. 1-63)
11. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-203)
— Defogger switch (P. 2-130)
— Heated seat switches* (P. 2-137)
— Heated steering wheel switch* (P. 2-136)
13. Wireless charger* (P. 2-138)
14. Power outlet (P. 2-137)
15. Glove box (P. 2-140)
16. Secondary fuse box (behind glove box)
(P. 8-455)
*: where fitted
NIC4250
LEFT HAND DRIVE — without NissanConnect* (P. 4-212)

1. Side vent (P. 4-202) 6. Front passenger’s supplemental front-impact
air bag (P. 1-63)
2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-77)
7. Bonnet release handle (P. 3-170)
3. Head Up Display (HUD)* (P. 2-125)
8. Fuse box cover (P. 8-455)
4. Centre vent (P. 4-202)
9. Tilt and telescopic steering lock lever (P. 3-179)
5. Audio system* (P. 4-208)
— NissanConnect* *1

10. Driver supplemental front-impact air bag
(P. 1-63)
11. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-203)
— Defogger switch (P. 2-130)
— Heated seat switches* (P. 2-137)
— Heated steering wheel switch* (P. 2-136)
13. Wireless charger* (P. 2-138)
14. Power outlet (P. 2-137)
15. Glove box (P. 2-140)
16. Fuse box cover (P. 8-455)
*: where fitted
*1: See the separate NissanConnect Owner's
NIC4251
RIGHT HAND DRIVE — without NissanConnect* (P. 4-212)

1. Side vent (P. 4-202) 6. Front passenger’s supplemental front-impact
air bag (P. 1-63)
2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-77)
7. Bonnet release handle (P. 3-170)
3. Head Up Display (HUD)* (P. 2-125)
8. Fuse box cover (inside glove box) (P. 8-455)
4. Centre vent (P. 4-202)
9. Tilt and telescopic steering lock lever (P. 3-179)
5. Audio system* (P. 4-208)
— NissanConnect* *1

METERS AND GAUGES
NIC4357
7 inch display
1. Power gauge (P. 2-80)

2. Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-84)
3. Vehicle information display (P. 2-96
4. Speedometer (P. 2-80)
5. Li-ion battery gauge (P. 2-81)
6. Fuel gauge (P. 2-81)

NIC4358
Full-screen display
1. Power gauge (P. 2-80) The view of the display can be changed from Clas-
2. Vehicle information display (P. 2-96) sic View to Enhanced View to expand the vehicle
information display area. (P. 2-79.)
3. Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-84)
4. Speedometer (P. 2-80)
5. Li-ion battery gauge (P. 2-81)
6. Fuel gauge (P. 2-81)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
KR15DDT ENGINE
1. Inverter coolant reservoir (P. 8-443)
2. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-442)
3. Window washer/headlight cleaner (where fit-
ted) fluid reservoir (P. 8-448)
4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-445)
5. Brake fluid reservoir (RHD) (P. 8-448)
6. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-445)
7. Drive belt (P. 8-452)
8. Brake fluid reservoir (LHD) (P. 8-448)
9. Air cleaner (P. 8-453)
10. Fuses/fusible link box (P. 8-455)
NIC4214

DRIVING AIDS (where fitted)
System name Abbreviation Icon Description Page
Lane Departure
m
LDW The LDW system warns the driver when the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane. 5-279
Warning*
Intelligent Lane The ILI system warns the driver when the vehicle leaves the travelling lane and assists
m
ILI 5-284
Intervention* the driver in returning to the travelling lane.
Emergency Lane The ELA system warns the driver when the vehicle approaches the road edge or solid
m
ELA 5-289
Assist* white line and assists the driver to return the vehicle to the carriageway.
The Steering Assist system assists the driver in keeping the vehicle in the centre of the
Steering Assist* — 5-349
m travelling lane. Steering Assist also incorporates ILI.
m
Cruise Control* — The Cruise Control system allows the driver to set and keep a constant vehicle speed. 5-295
Intelligent Cruise
The ICC system allows the driver to set and keep either a constant distance to the
Control (without ICC 5-299
Steering Assist)* m vehicle ahead or set vehicle speed.
The ProPILOT Assist system combines the Intelligent Cruise Control, Steering Assist,
m
ProPILOT Assist* — 5-315
Intelligent Lane Intervention and Blind Spot Intervention.
m
Speed limiter* — The speed limiter allows you to set the desired vehicle speed limit. 5-297

System name Abbreviation Icon Description Page
Blind Spot Warning* BSW
While driving, the BSW system helps alert the driver to the presence of other vehicles in
m
5-257
adjacent lanes.
The Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system helps alert the driver to the presence of
Intelligent Blind
m
— other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes and helps assist the driver to 5-257
Spot Intervention*
return the vehicle to the centre of the travelling lane
Traffic Sign recogni- The TSR system provides the driver with information about the most recently detected
m
TSR 5-254
tion* speed limit.
Intelligent
The IEB system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the
m
Emergency Brak- IEB 5-359
vehicle ahead in the travelling lane or with a pedestrian or cyclist.
ing*
Rear Cross Traffic When the vehicle is in reverse, the RCTA system is designed to detect other vehicles
m
RCTA 5-269
Alert* approaching from the right or left of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic When the vehicle is in reverse, The RAB system can assist the driver when there is a risk
RAB 5-274
Braking*
m of a collision with an obstacle behind the vehicle.
Anti-lock Braking The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when
ABS 5-407
System
m braking on slippery surfaces.
Electronic Stability
ESP The ESP system adjusts wheel brake pressure to assist in improving vehicle stability. 5-408
Programme
m
The Hill Start Assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the
Hill Start Assist* HSA 5-410
m vehicle from rolling backwards when stopped on a hill.
*: Where fitted

NOTE

e-POWER system overview
NISSAN e-POWER system....................................................................... 18 When driving............................................................................................ 23

Electric motors............................................................................................... 18 Drive modes ..................................................................................................... 24
Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery................................................................... 19 How to change the drive mode................................................ 24
Regenerative brake .................................................................................... 19 Customising [ECO] mode .............................................................. 25
When the vehicle starts the engine ............................................... 19 ECO Pedal Guide function ............................................................. 25
e-POWER system precautions ........................................................... 20 EV mode.............................................................................................................. 26
High voltage components ............................................................ 21 How to use the EV mode................................................................ 26
e-POWER system characteristics............................................. 21 e-Pedal Step..................................................................................................... 27
Noise and vibration ............................................................................ 21 e-Pedal Step System Operation ............................................... 27
Road accident cautions .......................................................................... 22 e-Pedal Step System Limitations............................................. 28
Emergency shut-off system ................................................................ 22 e-Pedal Step System Malfunction........................................... 28
Efficient use of your vehicle ................................................................. 23 Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians (VSP)
Before driving ......................................................................................... 23 system.................................................................................................................. 29
NISSAN E-POWER SYSTEM ELECTRIC MOTORS
This vehicle has two types of electric motors.

• Electric motor for driving
• Power generator
The electric motor for driving generates traction
power to drive the vehicle instead of the engine,
using the electric power stored in the Lithium ion
(Li-ion) battery or the generated electric power by
the engine and power generator.
The power generator is powered by the petrol en-
gine and generates electric power.
NIC4245
1 Petrol engine 6 Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery

2 Inverter, Electric motor for driving and power The NISSAN e-POWER system generates electric
generator power by running the power generator with the
3 Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians petrol engine, and stores the generated electric
(VSP) system power in the Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery or provides
it to the electric motor (for driving) directly. This ve-
4 12-volt battery hicle can be driven by running the electric motor
5 DC/DC converter (for driving) with the electric power, which is stored
or generated.
18 e-POWER system overview

LITHIUM ION (LI-ION) BATTERY REGENERATIVE BRAKE WHEN THE VEHICLE STARTS THE
ENGINE
The Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery is charged with the The regenerative brake is a function that can re- In the e-POWER system, the engine may run under
electric power generated by the power generator duce the vehicle speed by using the electric motor the following conditions:
and/or the regenerative power from the electric
motor for driving. While driving, the Li-ion battery
instead of the engine braking for the petrol engine
vehicle. The Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery can be
• When the Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery charge is
low (to generate electric power).
•
provides the stored electric power to the electric charged by the generated electric power when the
motor for driving. Because the engine charges the vehicle decelerates, saving electric power con- When depressing the accelerator pedal strongly
Li-ion battery when the level of remaining charge in sumption and improving fuel efficiency. (to generate electric power).
the Li-ion battery is low, the battery does not have
NOTE
• When driving on a long downhill (to generate de-
to be charged from an outside source like an all- celeration without using fuel).
electric vehicle. If the vehicle is parked for a long • The regenerative brake may provide less de-
• When the engine is cold (to warm up the engine).
celeration when the Li-ion battery is fully
•
period of time, the Li-ion battery discharges gradu-
ally. To avoid this occurrence, drive the vehicle for charged while driving on a long downhill road, When opening the bonnet with the e-POWER
approximately 30 minutes at least once every two when the outside temperature is low or when system running (to avoid an accident when per-
to three months. Otherwise, the Li-ion battery may driving on a slippery road. forming maintenance).
be damaged. If the Li-ion battery is completely dis- • When turning on the front defogger switch.
charged and the e-POWER system cannot be acti-
vated, contact a NISSAN dealer.
• When engine start is required by maintenance
mode.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed while
the vehicle is stationary and the vehicle is in P
(Park) position.
• When the Li-ion battery is fully charged and re-
generation is continued the electric motor may
turn the engine to dissipate the excess electric-
ity generated. In this mode the engine is not us-
ing fuel, this will maintain vehicle control.
e-POWER system overview 19

E-POWER SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
• The e-POWER system uses high voltage up to
approximately 420 volts. Obey the caution la-
bels attached to the high voltage compo-
nents.
• Never touch high voltage harnesses, their con-
nectors or high voltage parts (electric motor
for driving and Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery,
etc.). Touching, disassembling, removing or re-
placing those parts and harnesses can cause
severe burns or electric shock that may result
in serious injury or death.
NIC4248

HIGH VOLTAGE COMPONENTS E-POWER SYSTEM • If a large amount of liquid is spilled onto the
Li-ion battery area, contact a NISSAN dealer as
The e-POWER system consists of the following high CHARACTERISTICS
soon as possible.
voltage parts.
1) High voltage harnesses (orange)
These harnesses are high voltage and orange- NOISE AND VIBRATION
colored. Be sure not to touch the harnesses or After the e-POWER system is activated, the follow-
remove the connector on the base of the cable. ing noises and vibrations that are unique to the e-
2) Inverter, power generator and electric motor for POWER system may occur. This does not indicate a
driving malfunction.
a. Inverter • Electric motor noise from the engine compart-

This device controls various functions related ment.
to the e-POWER system. Be careful because NIC4236 • Noise and vibration when the engine starts or
it can be hot after driving. stops running.
b. Power generator The air inlets ➀ for cooling the Lithium ion (Li-ion) • Operating noise or electric motor noise when
This motor is for generating electric power. battery are located under the front seats. releasing the accelerator pedal or depressing
Be careful because it can be hot after driving. the brake pedal.
c. Electric motor for driving CAUTION • Engine noise due to rapid acceleration.
This motor is for running the vehicle. Be care-
• Do not cover the air inlets. Otherwise it will re- • Fan noise from under the front seat.
•
ful because it can be hot after driving.
duce output performance of the e- POWER Noise from the vehicle in order to alert pedestri-
3) Service plug system or cause vehicle damage. Additionally, ans to the presence of an approaching vehicle.
This plug is used to cut-off the high voltage do not allow any liquid or sand to get in the air See “Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians
when performing maintenance. Never touch inlet. (VSP) system” later in this section.
this plug.
• Do not spill water onto the Li-ion battery or
NOTE
4) Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery load large amounts of water in open contain-
This battery is charged from the electric power ers (aquariums or buckets) into the vehicle. If Higher engine idling speed is set for this vehicle,
generated by the power generator and/or the the water spills onto the Li-ion battery, it may compared to a conventional petrol engine model.
regenerative power from the electric motor cause a short circuit and damage the Li-ion This is to charge the Li-ion battery with the en-
(driving). The Li-ion battery also supplies the battery. gine during idling, and it is not a malfunction.
electric power to the electric motor (driving)
while driving.
• Do not place any heavy objects under the front
seats or stomp the floor around there, as the
5) DC/DC converter Li-ion battery is located under the front seats.
This converter is for converting Li-ion battery
power to 12-volt battery voltage.

ROAD ACCIDENT CAUTIONS EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SYSTEM
drant is available. Never attempt to extinguish The emergency shut-off system is activated and the
WARNING
a fire in an inappropriate way, as this can be high-voltage system automatically turns off in the
In case of a collision or an accident, be sure to dangerous. following conditions:
• •
observe the following warnings.
•
When towing your vehicle, lift the front wheels Front and side collisions in which the supple-
Pull your vehicle off the road, place the vehicle or all four wheels. If the vehicle is towed with mental air bags are deployed.
•
in the P (Park) position, apply the parking front wheels on the ground, the electric motor
brake and turn the e-POWER system off. Certain rear collisions.
•
for driving may generate electric power and
• Never touch the high voltage parts or cause damage to the vehicle. Certain e-POWER system malfunctions.
harnesses if they are exposed. For the loca-
tions of the high voltage parts and harnesses,
• If you are not able to safely assess the vehicle For the above collisions and the certain e-POWER
system malfunctions, the READY to drive indicator
due to vehicle damage, do not touch the ve-
“High voltage components” earlier in this sec- hicle. Leave the vehicle and contact a NISSAN light will turn off. See “Warning lights, indicator lights
tion. dealer or emergency services. Advise 1st re- and audible reminders” in the “2. Instruments and
• Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you sponders that this is a vehicle equipped with controls” section
noticed liquid spilled from the Lithium ion (Li- e-POWER system. The emergency shut-off system activates for the
ion) battery, contact a NISSAN dealer or emer-
gency services as soon as possible. Ignoring
• In the event of an accident that requires body above collisions to minimize risk of an event that
could cause an injury or an accident. If the emer-
repair and painting, contact a NISSAN dealer.
such conditions may lead to a fire. When the vehicle body is largely damaged or gency shut-off system activates, the power switch
• Never touch the liquid leaked on interior sur- deformed, electrical leakage or shock de- may not switch to the READY to drive position. If this
occurs, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
faces or outside the vehicle. If the liquid spilled pending on the damage condition could oc-
from the Li-ion battery comes into contact cur. Never touch the high voltage parts, such shop. Even if the power switch is switched to the
with skin or clothes, immediately flush the as Li-ion battery, and the orange-colored har- READY to drive position, the system may shut-off
area with plenty of clean water and see a doc- nesses connected to them. suddenly. Therefore, drive cautiously to the nearest
•
tor. NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop or contact a
Do not drive the vehicle with any exterior lights
•
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as soon as
If the vehicle receives a strong impact to the damaged. If water has leaked inside the light, possible.
floor while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe it may lead to fumes or a fire.
location and check the floor. If the floor is dam-
aged, never touch it and contact a NISSAN
NOTE
dealer as soon as possible.
• If a fire occurs in the Li-ion battery or high volt-
If the vehicle collides or a malfunction of the e-
POWER system occurs, the READY to drive indica-
age parts, leave the vehicle as soon as pos-
tor light may be turned off since the high voltage
sible. When extinguishing the fire, use a type
system has been turned off. This is designed to
ABC, BC or C fire extinguisher that is meant for
minimize the risk of injury and accidents and is
use on electrical fires. Water can be used only
not a malfunction.
when a large amount of water from a fire hy-

EFFICIENT USE OF YOUR
VEHICLE
The fuel consumption varies considerably depend- • Do not drive at excessive speeds on a highway. • When starting, accelerating or braking
ing upon road conditions, weather, temperature, Driving at excessive speeds consumes electric abruptly.
and number of occupants, etc. Keeping the follow- power more than necessary.
ing points in mind and reducing electric power con-
sumption will help improve the fuel efficiency.
• Set the air conditioner at a moderate tempera-
ture and turn it off if unnecessary. Redundant
BEFORE DRIVING power consumption can be reduced by the air
•
conditioner.
•
Plan for the route with less power consumption
by the vehicle. Driving on uphill roads increases Do not use the defogger more than necessary.
electric power consumption. If you choose the After removing fog from the windscreen, switch-
route where there are few uphill roads, the ve- ing to the other air flow mode reduces the en-
hicle can reduce electric power consumption. gine operation frequency and improve the fuel
•
economy.
•
Do not leave unnecessary cargo loaded. Remov-
ing unnecessary cargo from the vehicle to re- Drive the vehicle in [ECO] mode for efficient use.
duce vehicle weight can reduce electric power Then the driving force response to accelerator
consumption. operation is gentler than in [STANDARD]/
•
[SPORT] mode; it suppresses unnecessary accel-
Keep the tyres inflated to the correct pressure. eration/deceleration and realizes energy saving.
•
Low tyre pressure increases electric power con-
sumption. The fuel efficiency improves in the following or-
der: [SPORT] mode ̔ [STANDARD] mode ̔ [ECO]
WHEN DRIVING mode. [ECO] mode is the most fuel-efficient
• Drive your vehicle with smooth start and accel- mode. (See “Drive modes” later in this section.)
eration. • When the [ECO] Mode Customize (Air Condition-
– Abrupt starting and acceleration will ing) is turned ON (fuel efficiency- oriented), the
consume more electric power and decrease fuel efficiency is improved by reducing the per-
fuel economy. formance of the air conditioner.
– You can accelerate the vehicle with less NOTE

power consumption by checking the condi- The following are some conditions in which the
tion of the electric power consumption in the fuel economy decreases significantly:
•
power meter.
When driving on a route where there are many
• Keep a distance from the vehicle in front of you. uphill roads.
•
Do not decelerate the vehicle more than neces-
sary so that you can decrease the electric power When continuing driving at a high speed on a
consumption required to accelerate again. highway.

DRIVE MODES
There are three drive modes of the e-POWER system.
Drive Mode Features HOW TO CHANGE THE DRIVE MODE

[STANDARD] This is the standard mode that is most suitable for normal driving.
This mode assists the driver’s economical driving.
• Acceleration profile is optimised for efficient driving.
• Engine running logic is fully optimised for economy.
[ECO] • Optimum regenerative braking profile for cruising or city driving can be
selected by shifting between D and B mode.
• Air conditioning [ECO] mode is selected (this can be switched On/Off in the
[Settings] menu of the vehicle information display).
• Adjusts electric motor torque response to improve driving agility.
• The steering system adapts to give the driver a more engaging experience in
[SPORT] NIC4233
sporty driving scenes (this can be switched On/Off in the Settings menu of the
vehicle information display).
• The drive mode can be changed when the power
switch is in the ON position. Push the drive mode
switch up or down to change the mode as fol-
lows:
[SPORT] ̥ [ECO] ̥ [STANDARD].
• When the mode is switched, the selected mode
is displayed in the vehicle information display.
NOTE
• If the system malfunction occurs when
[SPORT] mode or [ECO] mode is selected, the
deceleration force is weaker than usual. Apply
the foot brake as necessary for the decelera-
tion.
• The mode setting is changed to [STANDARD]
mode every time the power switch is placed in
the ON position.

CUSTOMISING [ECO] MODE [ECO Climate Control] ECO PEDAL GUIDE FUNCTION
[ECO Drive Mode] is a function that can change the This setting can be selected in [ECO Drive Mode]
priority of the air conditioner function and the under the [ECO Settings] menu of the vehicle infor-
Cruise Control (where fitted) or the Intelligent Cruise mation display. Select the menu and turn [ECO Cli-
Control (ICC) function to make fuel efficiency im- mate Control] to ON or OFF. (See “[ECO Settings]” in
provements. the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
[ECO Drive Mode] can be set when [ECO] mode is NOTE
selected. Two menu options are available under
[ECO Drive Mode]: • When the [ECO Drive Mode] ([ECO Climate Con-
trol]) is turned ON (fuel efficiency-oriented),
• [ECO Cruise Control] the fuel efficiency is improved by reducing the
• [ECO Climate Control] performance of the air conditioner. NIC4249
[ECO Cruise Control] • The [ECO Climate Control] setting maintains

The ECO Pedal Guide can be displayed in the vehicle
the status until the setting is changed, even if
This setting can be selected in [ECO Drive Mode] the power switch is placed in the OFF position. information display while driving in [ECO] mode.
•
under the [ECO Settings] menu of the vehicle infor- (See “5. [ECO Pedal Guide] function” in the “2. Instru-
mation display. When the setting is ON, the fuel effi- The air conditioner function will be prioritized
ments and controls” section.)
ciency while cruising will be improved by lowering even when the [ECO Climate Control] is turned
ON under the following conditions. Use the ECO Pedal Guide function for improving fuel
the acceleration target from normal (setting OFF)
economy.
mode. (See “[ECO Settings]” in the “2. Instruments – When the A/C setting temperature is set at
and controls” section. 28°C (82°F) or higher. When the ECO Pedal Guide bar is in the range ➀, it
(When the A/C setting temperature is set indicates that the vehicle is being driven within
NOTE at 27.5°C (82°F) or lower, the fuel efficiency range of the super economy drive.
When the vehicle speed is reduced (for example, will be prioritized again.) When the ECO Pedal Guide bar is in the range ➁, it
when the vehicle is driven on an uphill road from – When the A/C setting temperature is set at indicates that the vehicle is being driven within
a flat road), it will take more time to return to the 18°C (64°F). range of the economy drive.
previously set speed than normal mode. (When the A/C setting temperature is set If the ECO Pedal Guide bar is out of the range ➀ and
at 18.5°C (65°F) or higher, the fuel efficiency
➁, it indicates that the accelerator pedal is
will be prioritized again.) depressed over the range of economy drive.
– When the front defogger is activated.
The ECO Pedal Guide bar is not displayed when:
• The vehicle speed is less than approximately 4
km/h (2 MPH).
• The vehicle is in the P (Park), N (Neutral) or R (Re-
verse) position.

EV MODE
ECO indicator When EV mode is selected, you can drive the vehicle NOTE
with the chance of engine starting reduced as much
as possible. This mode is used when you wish to
• If the system malfunction occurs, EV mode is
automatically turned off.
•
drive the vehicle quietly on a road such as a resi-
dential street in an early morning or a late at night, If the accelerator pedal is depressed when the
since the vehicle is powered by the Lithium ion (Li- shift position is in the P (Park) position, the en-
ion) battery. gine starts and EV mode is turned off.
HOW TO USE THE EV MODE • If the Li-ion battery is fully charged by the re-
generative braking on a long downhill road, EV
mode is turned off to protect the Li-ion bat-
tery.
NIC4238 • When the accelerator pedal is depressed to the
floor on an uphill road or by abrupt accelera-
tion, the engine starts and EV mode is turned
The ECO indicator ➀ will illuminate, flash partially
off.
or turn off according to the accelerator pedal op-
eration while driving. • If the bonnet is opened when the READY to
drive indicator light illuminates, the engine
The ECO indicator will illuminate in the directions of starts automatically and EV mode is turned off.
➁ as the driving pattern becomes more ECO
friendly.
NIC4235 • When the front defogger switch is turned on,
the engine starts due to a warm-up operation,
To activate or deactivate the ECO indicator, see [ECO
• When the READY to drive indicator light illumi-
and EV mode cannot be used or it is turned off.
•
Settings].
nates, EV mode is turned on every time the EV If the system judges that the forced charging
mode switch is pushed. is necessary, EV mode is turned off and the en-
• When the outside temperature is low, the engine

gine starts.
may start. However, when the EV mode is turned • If the system judges that the warm-up opera-
on before the engine starts, the vehicle can be tion is necessary, EV mode is turned off and
driven by only the Li-ion battery due to reduc- the engine starts.
tion of the engine starting. • When the outside temperature is low, EV mode
may not be used.
• When the Li-ion battery charge is low, EV mode
may not be used or is turned off.

E-PEDAL STEP
WARNING your foot off) the accelerator pedal, the vehicle System Deactivation
slows down smoothly without depressing the brake
Never rely solely on the e-Pedal Step system, as To deactivate the e-Pedal Step system, with the
pedal.
there is a performance limit to the system func- power switch in the ON position, press the e-Pedal
tion. Always drive carefully and attentively. The switch.
brake pedal should be operated to slow or stop NOTE
the vehicle, depending on traffic or road
conditions. • When the e-Pedal Step system is switched to
ON or OFF, the degree of vehicle deceleration
will change.
The e-Pedal Step system enables the driver to slow
the vehicle, by operating only the accelerator pedal. • The e-Pedal Step system is automatically
This assists the driver by reducing the number of turned OFF when the E-POWER system is re-
times required to move their foot between the ac- started.
celerator pedal and the brake pedal. NIC4234 e-Pedal Step driving features
e-Pedal Step SYSTEM OPERATION The e-Pedal Step system provides the following
The e-Pedal Step system will be turned ON or OFF driving features:
each time the e-Pedal switch is pressed. (The e- When driving the vehicle:
Pedal indicator in the Vehicle Information Display
shows the status of the e-Pedal Step system.)
• Depressing or returning the accelerator pedal
will change the degree of acceleration and de-
When the e-Pedal Step system is activated, the char- celeration accordingly.
acteristics of the accelerator pedal change signifi-
cantly and the accelerator pedal operates differ-
• Returning the accelerator pedal generates more
deceleration than normal. (The maximum decel-
ently than a conventional one operates. Be sure to
eration changes according to the vehicle speed.)
confirm the status of the e-Pedal Step system (ON
or OFF) in the Vehicle Information Display before • Releasing (taking your foot off) the accelerator
NIC5252
driving. pedal reduces the vehicle speed.
System Activation • The vehicle’s brake lights illuminate when the

➀ Acceleration deceleration level reaches an ordinary braking
To activate the e-Pedal Step system, place the operation.
➁ Deceleration (instead of brake pedal) power switch in the ON position and press the e-
If the deceleration is not sufficient when the accel-
When the e-Pedal Step system is activated, the re- Pedal switch located on the centre console.
erator pedal is returned or released, depress the
generative brake is enhanced and the driver can ad-
brake pedal. The brake pedal can be operated to
just the vehicle speed by only depressing or return-
reduce the vehicle speed in the same way as nor-
ing the accelerator pedal. When you release (take
mal even when the e-Pedal Step system is activated.

When reversing the vehicle: e-Pedal Step SYSTEM LIMITATIONS • Frequent braking may result in overheating
With the shift position in R (Reverse), accelerator the brakes. This can be dangerous. Apply the
pedal operation returns to normal, operating in the WARNING regenerative brake when driving on steep
same way in the same way as when e-Pedal Step is downhill roads.
Listed below are the system limitations for the
deactivated.
e-Pedal Step system. Failure to operate the ve-
Other driving tips for the e-Pedal Step system: hicle in accordance with these system limitations
CAUTION
• For smooth deceleration when the e-Pedal Step could result in serious injury or death.
•
•
Turn the e-Pedal Step system OFF and place
system is activated, it is recommended to adjust If [Press brake pedal to prevent rolling] warn- the vehicle in the N (Neutral) position under
the accelerator pedal while driving with your ing message appears in the Vehicle Informa- the following conditions:
foot on it (depressing or returning, but not re- tion Display, depress the brake pedal. The ve-
leasing). hicle may start moving. – When the vehicle enters an automatic car
• Shifting the shift position from D (Drive) to B or • If the deceleration force provided by the e-
–
wash.
When the vehicle is towed.
from B to D will not affect the e-Pedal Step sys- Pedal Step system is not sufficient, depress
tem feature. the brake pedal. • Be careful not to operate the e-Pedal switch
• The e-Pedal Step system will not function under • Under the following conditions, place the ve- mistakenly or unintentionally.
the following conditions: hicle in the P (Park) position and make sure • At low speed, the motor continues to apply
– When the vehicle is placed in the P (Park) or N the parking brake is securely applied. The ve- torque to move vehicle slowly forward
(Neutral) position. hicle may start moving suddenly. (so-called “creep“), similar to a conventional
– When getting in and out of the vehicle. vehicle with an automatic transmission. Re-
– When cruise control (where fitted), ProPILOT
member to depress the brake pedal firmly to
Assist (where fitted), or Intelligent Emergency – When loading and unloading the vehicle. slow or stop the vehicle.
Braking operates. these Driver Assistance
– When stopping the vehicle for a long pe-
systems have priority over e-Pedal Step
riod of time.
• Brake pedal may move depending on decelera-
• Under the following conditions the e-Pedal
e-Pedal Step SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION
tion, you might hear a noise when the e-Pedal
Step system may not decelerate or may not
Step is active. This is normal and does not indi- If the e-Pedal Step system malfunctions, [e-Pedal
stop the vehicle sufficiently. Depress the brake
cate malfunction system failure! Press brake pedal to slow or stop]
pedal whenever necessary.
• The characteristics of deceleration change ac-
– When excessively heavy baggage is loaded
warning message appears in the Vehicle Informa-
cording to the vehicle speed. At low speed, the tion Display. When the warning message appears,
in the vehicle.
motor continues to apply torque to move ve- the e-Pedal Step system will be turned off automati-
hicle slowly forward (so-called “creep“), similar to – When driving on steep downhill roads. cally. Have the system checked as soon as possible
a conventional vehicle with an automatic trans- – When driving on icy roads. by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
mission. Remember to depress the brake pedal
firmly to slow or stop the vehicle.

APPROACHING VEHICLE SOUND FOR PEDESTRIANS (VSP) SYSTEM
The Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians hicle in the R (Reverse) position with the brake
(VSP) system is a function that uses sound to help pedal firmly depressed. Check that the operating
alert pedestrians of the presence of the vehicle sound can be heard from the front side of the ve-
when it is being driven at a low speed. hicle. If the sound from the VSP system is not
The VSP sounds when the READY to drive indicator heard, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
light is illuminated under the following conditions: workshop.
• When the vehicle speed is within 30 km/h

NOTE
(19 MPH) when starting.
• When the vehicle speed is less than 25 km/h • The VSP also sounds when all of the following
(16 MPH) while decelerating. conditions are met, in order to remind you to
• When the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position.

place the power switch in the OFF position.
– When the shift position is in the P (Park)
The sound stops when the vehicle stops.
position.
If the system malfunction occurs, the VSP warning
– When the READY to drive indicator light il-
light in the meter illuminates. If the VSP warning light
luminates.
illuminates, have the VSP system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop immediately. – When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
– When any door (except the back door) is
opened.
• If you wish to increase the volume of the VSP
system, contact a NISSAN dealer. (It is not pos-
sible to lower the volume.)
NIC4237
WARNING
If the sound from the VSP system is not heard
while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe and quiet
location. Open a window, and then place the ve-

NOTE

1 Safety — seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats...................................................................................................................... 32 Seat belt maintenance .................................................................... 45

Front seats................................................................................................ 33 Pre-tensioner seat belt system......................................................... 45
Driving Position Memory System (where fitted)........... 35 Child safety ....................................................................................................... 46
Seat heater (where fitted) ............................................................. 35 Infants and small children............................................................. 47
Massage seats (where fitted)...................................................... 35 Larger children....................................................................................... 47
Rear seats.................................................................................................. 35 Legal requirements ............................................................................ 47
Armrests (where fitted) ................................................................... 36 Child restraints............................................................................................... 47
Head restraints .............................................................................................. 37 Precautions on child restraints ................................................. 47
Adjustable head restraint components.............................. 37 Child restraint and ISOFIX information ............................... 49
Non-adjustable head restraint components.................. 37 ISOFIX child restraint system...................................................... 54
Remove ....................................................................................................... 38 Child restraint anchorage ............................................................. 55
Install............................................................................................................. 38 Child restraint installation using ISOFIX ............................. 55
Adjust............................................................................................................ 38 Child restraint installation using three-point
Seat belts ........................................................................................................... 39 type seat belt .......................................................................................... 58
Precautions on seat belt usage ................................................ 39 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ......................................... 63
Child safety............................................................................................... 40 Precautions on Supplemental Restraint
Pregnant women................................................................................. 41 System (SRS)............................................................................................ 63
Injured persons...................................................................................... 41 Front passenger air bag status light .................................... 67
Seat belt reminders............................................................................ 41 Repair and replacement procedure ...................................... 73
Three-point type seat belt............................................................ 43
SEATS
jured in an accident or sudden stop. When op-

erating the seatback release always rock the
seatback afterwards to check that it is locked.
• When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo,
properly secure all cargo to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
NIC4103
• Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area
or on the rear seat when it is in the folded-
Sit upright and well back
down position. Use of these areas by passen-
switches or controls, or make the vehicle gers without proper restraints could result in
WARNING move. Unattended children could become in- serious injury or death in an accident or sud-
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seat- volved in serious accidents. den stop.
back is reclined. This can be dangerous. The • To help avoid risk of injury or death through • Depending on vehicle specification, the front
shoulder belt will not be against your body. In unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its passenger seat may be equipped with occu-
an accident, you could be thrown into it and systems, do not leave children, people who re- pant classification sensors that turn the front
receive neck or other serious injuries. You quire the assistance of others, or pets unat- passenger air bag OFF under some conditions.
could also slide under the lap belt and receive tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- These sensors are only used in this seat. Fail-
serious internal injuries. perature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day ure to be properly seated and wearing the seat
• For the most effective protection when the ve- can quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to people and
belt can increase the risk or severity of injury
in an accident. See “Supplemental Restraint
hicle is in motion, the seat should be upright.
pets. System (SRS)” later in this section.
Always sit well back and upright in the seat
with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat • The seatback should not be reclined any more Vehicles not fitted with occupant classifica-
properly. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most tion sensors have an Occupant Detection Sys-
later in this section. effective when the passenger sits well back tem on this seat which cannot turn the front
• Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving. and upright in the seat. If the seatback is re-
clined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and
airbag off automatically. For manual airbag
control details see “Supplemental Restraint
The seat may move suddenly and could cause
being injured is increased. System (SRS)” later in this section.
loss of control of the vehicle.
• After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to • When returning the seatbacks to the upright
make sure it is securely locked. position, be certain that they are completely
•
secured in the latched position. If they are not
Do not leave children unattended inside the completely secured, passengers may be in-
vehicle. They could unknowingly activate
32 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION
• When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not
to contact any moving parts to avoid possible
injuries and/or damage.
• To avoid damage to the seats, seat heating
(where fitted) and occupant detection,
observe the following information:
– Any liquid spilled on the seat should be re-
moved immediately with a dry cloth.
NPA1252
– If the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating (where fitted)
The seat heating must not be used to dry FRONT SEATS the lever fully lifted whilst adjusting the seatback.
the seats. Release the lever when the seatback is stationery
– Clean the seat covers as recommended,
Manual seat adjustment and in the desired recline position.
see “Cleaning interior” in the “7. Appearance Forward and backward: The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seat-
and care” section. Pull the lever ➀ up and hold it while sliding the seat back for occupants of different sizes for added com-
– Do not transport heavy loads on the seats. forward or backward to the preferred position. Re- fort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit, see “Pre-
Do not place sharp objects on the seat lease the lever to lock the seat in position. cautions on seat belt usage” later in this section.
cushions, for example knives, nails or tools. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occu-
Reclining:
pants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the
vehicle is in the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) posi-
CAUTION
tion with the parking brake applied.
When moving the seats forward or backward, or
returning a rear-reclined seatback to its upright Seat lifter (where fitted):
position, make sure you hold onto the seatback Repeatedly pull up or push down the adjusting le-
while operating. If the seatback is not held, the ver ➂, to adjust the seat height to the desired posi-
seat or seatback will move suddenly and could tion.
cause injury.
Head restraints:
Push and hold the lock knob ➃ to remove, install, or
To recline the seatback pull and hold the lever ➁ up,
(where possible) adjust the head restraints. For
keeping the lever fully lifted, and lean back. To bring
proper adjustment see “Head restraints” later in this
the seatback forward pull and hold the lever up,
section.
keeping the lever fully lifted, and lean forward. Keep
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 33

Lumbar support (where fitted):
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver.
Manual adjustment (where fitted): Move the ad-
justing lever ➄ forward or backward to adjust the
seat lumbar area until the desired position is
achieved.
NIC4038
Power seat adjustment (where fitted) Forward and backward:

Move the adjusting switch ➀ forward or backward
WARNING to the desired position.
To help avoid risk of injury or death through unin- Reclining:
Move the adjusting switch ➁ forward or backward
tended operation of the vehicle and/or its sys-
NPA1609
tems, do not leave children, people who require
to the desired position.
the assistance of others or pets unattended in
Power adjustment (where fitted): Push each side your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside The reclining feature allows the adjustment of the
of the adjusting switch to adjust the seat lumbar a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly be- seatback for occupants of different sizes to help ob-
area until the desired position is achieved come high enough to cause a significant risk of tain the proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on
injury or death to people and pets. seat belt usage” later in this section.)
➅ To harden the seatback contour
The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants
➆ To soften the seatback contour
Operating tips: to rest when the vehicle is parked.
• The power seat motor has an auto-reset over- Seat lifter/tilter (where fitted):
load protection circuit. If the motor stops during Move the adjusting switch ➂ as shown to adjust
the seat adjustment, wait 30 seconds, then re- the angle of the front portion or height of the seat.
activate the switch. Pull the front or rear of the adjusting switch ➂ up or
• To avoid discharge of the battery, do not oper- push down to adjust the seat height and angle until
ate the power seats for a long period of time the desired position is achieved.
when the e-POWER system is not ON.

Lumbar support (where fitted): ➃ To harden the seatback contour NOTE
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY Before the massage seat can be operated, the
door must be closed and the e-POWER system
SYSTEM (where fitted) must be ON.
Two positions for the driver’s seat can be stored in
For details of how to control and adjust the mas-
the Driving Position Memory System. For more in-
sage seat functions, see your NissanConnect Own-
formation on the Driving Position Memory System,
er's Manual.
see “Driving Position Memory System (where fitted)”
in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- REAR SEATS
tion.
NIC4039 SEAT HEATER (where fitted)

Type A (with height adjustment) The front seats can be warmed by built-in heaters.
The switches are located on the instrument panel
and can be operated independently of each other.
For more information on the seat heater, see “Seat
heating (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
MASSAGE SEATS (where fitted)

NIC3964
Folding
NIC4040
The luggage compartment loading capacity can be
Type B (without height adjustment) increased by folding the rear seats forward as
shown.
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver.
Push each side of the adjusting switch to adjust the
seat lumbar area until the desired position is
NIC4041
achieved.
Massage seat switch
➀ To raise the seatback contour
Use the massage seat switch on the side of the seat
➁ To soften the seatback contour to turn the massage seat feature on or off.
➂ To lower the seatback contour

To fold the seat: To return the seat to an upright position: ARMRESTS (where fitted)
1. Ensure head restraints are properly stowed, see 1. Make sure the seat belts are clear of the seat latch
“Head restraints” later in this section. mechanism.
2. Lift the seatback up and push firmly to lock.
CAUTION
• If the seatback is not firmly locked, the
seatback will spring forward.
– Make sure that the seat path is clear be-
fore moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or feet to NIC4042
get caught or pinched in the seat.
WAB0084XZ
1. Front armrest j
A
3. Ensure lock button has returned to the closed
position and pull seatback firmly to check it is The console box lid can be used as an armrest.
2. When folding the rear seat forward, the outer seat
belts can be stored out of the way using the seat securely latched. B
2. Rear armrest j
belt hooks as shown in the illustration. On the rear seat, pull the top of the armrest and
CAUTION lay it horizontally.
CAUTION Always ensure that the seat belt is not trapped in
• Take care when releasing the seatback lock, the release lever or any other vehicle part.
the seatback has a folding assist spring and
the seat will spring forward.
• Do not fold down the rear seats when occu-
pants are in the rear seat area or any luggage
is on the rear seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is clear before
moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get
caught or pinched in the seat.
3. Release the seatback lock by lifting the latch.

4. Fold the seat forward as shown.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING – For the non-adjustable type, raise into lock- NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
ing position before use. The seat should not
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
be occupied with the head restraint in the
safety systems. They may provide additional pro- lower storage position.
•
tection against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as If the head restraint has been removed, ensure
specified in this section. Check the adjustment af- that it is reinstalled and locked in place before
ter someone else uses the seat. Do not attach riding in that designated seating position.
anything to the head restraint stalks or remove ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
the head restraint. Do not use the seat if the head
restraint has been removed. If the head restraint
COMPONENTS
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the
head restraint before an occupant uses the seat-
ing position. Failure to follow these instructions
can reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints. This may increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision.
• Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints. On

the front seats they are adjustable. On the rear
seats they are non-adjustable but have a lower
NPA1314
storage position.
• Adjustable head restraints have multiple
1. Removable head restraint
notches along the stalk to lock them in a desired
adjustment position. 2. Multiple notches
• The non-adjustable head restraints have a single 3. Lock knob
locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
4. Stalks NPA1606
• Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head re- 1. Removable head restraint
straint so the centre of your ear is approxi-
2. Single notch
mately level with the centre of the head re-
straint. 3. Lock knob
– If your ear position is still higher than the rec- 4. Stalks
ommended alignment, place the head
restraint at the highest position.

REMOVE INSTALL ADJUST
NPA1316 NPA1607 SSS0997Z
Use the following procedure to remove the head 1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in For adjustable front head restraint
restraint. the seat. Make sure that the head restraint is fac- Adjust the head restraint so the centre is level with
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position. ing the correct direction. The stalk with the ad- the centre of your ears. If your ear position is still
justment notch must be installed in the hole with higher than the recommended alignment, place the
2. Push and hold the lock knob. the lock knob. head restraint at the highest position.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head For non-adjustable head restraint
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure restraint down.
place so it is not loose in the vehicle. Make sure the head restraint is positioned so the
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an oc- lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint cupant uses the seating position. that designated seating position.
before an occupant uses the seating position.

SEAT BELTS
Raise PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT WARNING

USAGE Be sure to observe the following warnings when
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, using seat belts. Failure to do so could increase
and you are sitting upright and well back in your the chance and/or severity of injury in an acci-
seat, your chances of being injured or killed in an dent.
accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of
• Every person who drives or rides in this ve-
hicle should use a seat belt at all times. Chil-
your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, dren should be in the rear seats and in an ap-
regardless of whether or not your seating position propriate restraint.
includes a supplemental air bag.
• The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a
NPA1608 snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system and in-
crease the chance or severity of injury in an
To raise the head restraint, pull it up as shown.
accident. Serious injury or death can occur if
Lower the seat belt is not worn properly.
• Always route the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put the
belt behind your back, under your arm or
across your neck. The belt should be away
SSS0136Z
from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
• Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony
structure of the body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing
NPA1319
the lap section of the belt across the abdomi-
nal area must be avoided. Position the lap belt
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the as low and snug as possible around THE HIPS,
head restraint down as shown. NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in an acci-
dent.
SSS0134Z

• No modifications or additions should be made • Once a seat belt pre-tensioner has been acti- CHILD SAFETY
by the user which will either prevent the seat vated, it cannot be reused and must be re-
belt adjusting devices from operating to replaced together with the retractor. See a
move slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
from being adjusted to remove slack.
• Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner
• Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as pos- seat belt system components should be done
sible, consistent with comfort, to provide the by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
protection for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection
• All seat belt assemblies, including retractors
and attaching hardware, should be inspected
afforded to the wearer. by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop af-
• Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely faster any collision. NISSAN recommends that all
SSS0099Z
tened to the proper buckle. seat belt assemblies in use during a collision
• Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. be replaced unless the collision was minor and
the belts show no damage and continue to op-
Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Infants or small children
•
erate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use
Never carry more people in the vehicle than during a collision should also be inspected and NISSAN recommends that infants or small children
there are seat belts. replaced if either damage or improper opera- should be seated in a child restraint on the rear
• Each belt assembly must only be used by one tion is noted. seats. According to accident statistics, children are
occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt around
a child being carried on the occupant's lap.
• All child restraints and attaching hardware
safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat. See “Child restraints” later in this
should be inspected after any collision. Always
• If the seat belt warning light illuminates con- follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection
section. You should choose a child restraint system
which fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
tinuously while the power switch is ON, with instructions and replacement recommenda-
facturer's instructions for installation and use.
all doors closed, and all seat belts fastened, it tions. The child restraints should be replaced
may indicate a malfunction in the system. if they are damaged. Larger children
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop.
• It is essential to replace the entire assembly Children who are too large for child restraints
after it has been worn in a severe impact even should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
• No changes should be made to the seat belt if damage to the assembly is not obvious. that are provided.
system. For example, do not modify the seat
belt, add material, or install devices that may
• Care should be taken to avoid contamination The use of a booster seat (commercially available)
of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemi- may help to avoid the shoulder belt coming across
change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing cals, and particularly battery acid. It is possible a child's face or neck area. The booster seat should
so may affect the operation of the seat belt to safely clean the seat belts, see “Seat belt raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly
system. Modifying or tampering with the seat maintenance” later in this section. The belt positioned across the top, middle portion of the
belt system may result in serious personal in- should be replaced if webbing becomes shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The
jury. frayed, contaminated or damaged. booster seat should fit the vehicle's seat. Once the

child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on If your vehicle is NOT fitted with Rear Occupant De- If the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (approximately
or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt tection, the Rear Passenger Seat Belt Display will 10 MPH) the light will flash and a chime will sound
without the booster seat. show when the power switch is switched ON while for at least 95 seconds or until all occupants are
any rear seat belt is unfastened. See “Rear passen- deemed to have their seat belts securely fastened.
WARNING ger seat belt display (where fitted)” later in this sec- All occupants are deemed fastened when all front
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and tion. row occupants have their seat belts securely fas-
do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the tened and the number of rear fastened seat belts
vehicle is moving. WARNING matches the maximum number seen during the
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your journey, or in the case of vehicles fitted with Rear
passengers to buckle up every time you drive. Occupant Detection when all occupants have their
PREGNANT WOMEN Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of seat belts securely fastened.
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use the entire restraint system and greatly increase The journey is considered finished and the system
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and the chance or severity of being injured in an acci- will reset when either rear door is opened while the
always position the lap belt as low as possible dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat vehicle is stationary.
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt is not worn.
belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never
put the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Some infants and children may not require use of
Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. the vehicle’s seat belt when using an appropriate
INJURED PERSONS ISOFIX Child Restraint System with integrated re-
straints. See “Child restraints” later in this section.
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat
belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doc- Seat belt warning light
tor for specific recommendations.
The Seat Belt Warning Light located in the instru-
SEAT BELT REMINDERS ment panel will immediately illuminate whenever
Dependent on the vehicle specification, the Seat the power switch is switched ON and any front row
Belt Reminder will either: occupant’s seat belt is not fastened. It will also illu-
• Alert the driver if a front row occupant in the

minate if any rear seat belt changes from fastened
to unfastened, or in the case of vehicles fitted with
vehicle does not have their seat belt securely
Rear Occupant Detection if any rear occupant in the
fastened or if any rear seatbelt changes from
vehicle does not have their seat belt securely fas-
fastened to unfastened.
tened. See “Warning lights, indicator lights and au-
• For vehicles with Rear Occupant Detection, alert dible reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
the driver if any occupant in the vehicle does not section for further details.
have their seat belt securely fastened

Rear passenger seat belt display rear seat belt is unfastened. The driver can acknowl- Occupant status display (where fitted)
(where fitted) edge the display by pushing the <OK> steering
wheel switch.
It will also display if any rear seat belt changes from
fastened to unfastened. The display will remain un-
til the number of rear fastened seat belts matches
the maximum number seen during the journey or
until acknowledged by the driver pushing the <OK>
steering wheel switch.
The journey will reset when either rear door is
opened while the vehicle is stationary.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (approximately
10 MPH) while the number of rear fastened seat belts
remains less than the maximum number seen dur-
ing the journey the Rear Passenger Seat Belt Dis-
play will reappear
It is not possible to acknowledge the display while
the Seat Belt Reminder Chime is audible.
Red Seat with exclamation symbol: The
corresponding seat belt is unfastened.
m
Green Seat with tick symbol: The cor-
m responding seat belt is fastened.

NIC4064
NIC4129
In vehicles fitted with Rear Occupant Detection, in

In vehicles not fitted with Rear Occupant Detection, addition to the Seat Belt Warning Light, the Occu-
the Rear Passenger Seat Belt Display will be shown pant Status Display will be shown in the Vehicle In-
in the Vehicle Information Display (See “Vehicle information Display (See “Vehicle information display”
formation display” in the “2. Instruments and in the “2. Instruments and controls” section) when
controls” section) for approximately 65 seconds any vehicle occupant’s seat belt is not fastened.
when the power switch is switched ON while any

The display will remain until occupants have their cargo, as this may cause damage, reducing Fastening the seat belts
seat belts securely fastened, or until acknowledged their effectiveness during an accident when
1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in this sec-
by the driver pushing the <OK> steering wheel subsequently worn by people.
tion.)
switch.
• When an electrical devices like a smartphone
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and
If an occupant unfastens a seat belt or the vehicle or laptop is placed on front passenger seat,
insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear
speed exceeds 15 km/h (approximately 10 MPH) the Seat Belt Reminder may be triggered.
and feel the latch engage.
while a seat belt is not fastened, the Occupant Sta-
tus Display will reappear. It is not possible to ac-
• If the Seat Belt Warning Light illuminates con-
tinuously while the power switch is ON, with
knowledge the display while the Seat Belt Reminder all doors closed, and all seat belts fastened, it
Chime is audible. may indicate a malfunction in the system.
The driver seat is always considered occupied. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer
Red Seat with exclamation symbol: The
corresponding seat is occupied and seat • No changes should be made to the Seat Belt
m belt is not fastened. Reminder system.
Green Seat with tick symbol: The cor- THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
m responding seat belt is fastened.
WARNING
SSS0292Z
Grey Seat: The corresponding seat is unoc-

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seat- • The retractor is designed to lock during a
m cupied. back is reclined. This can be dangerous. The

shoulder belt will not be against your body. In
sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling
motion permits the belt to move and allows
an accident, you could be thrown into it and you some freedom of movement in the
WARNING seat.
receive neck or other serious injuries. You
• Lighter passengers, including children, may could also slide under the lap belt and receive 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on
not be detected by the Seat Belt Reminder serious internal injuries. the hips as shown.
system. • For the most effective protection when the ve-
• When heavy cargo is placed on the seat, the hicle is in motion, the seat should be upright.
Seat Belt Reminder may be triggered. Such Always sit well back and upright in the seat
cargo should be secured in the boot. Only use with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat
the seat belts to restrain people or universal belt properly.
Child Restraint Systems (See “Child restraints”
later in this section). Never use them to secure

Checking seat belt operation To adjust the shoulder belt anchor height upward,
push up on the seat belt anchor, you will hear a click
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
after it passes each available position. Once in the
movement by two separate methods:
proper position, gently pull on the seat belt web-
• When the belt is pulled quickly from the retrac- bing to ensure the shoulder belt anchor is locked
tor. into position.
• When the vehicle slows down rapidly. To adjust downward press down on the release but-
To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check ton jA and move the shoulder belt anchor down,
the operation as follows: then release the button and gently pull on the seat
SSS0290Z
• Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly.
belt webbing to ensure the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position.
The retractor should lock and restrict further
belt movement. Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor to ensure
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retrac- If the retractor does not lock during this check or if that the seat belt passes over the centre of the
tor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder you have any questions about seat belt operation, shoulder so it is away from your face but not falling
belt is routed over your shoulder and across your see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. off of your shoulder.
chest.
Shoulder belt height adjustment WARNING
Unfastening the seat belts
• After adjustment, release the adjustment but-
ton and then try to move the shoulder belt an-
chor up and down to make sure that it is se-
curely fixed in position.
• The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position that is best for you. Fail-
ure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of
the entire restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident.
NIC4035
SSS0326Z
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the to the position that is best for you. (See “Precau-
buckle. Then guide the seat belt as it automatically tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
retracts.

PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
SYSTEM
Centre of rear seat Rear seat belt storage WARNING

• The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused
after activation. It must be replaced together
with the retractor as a unit.
• If the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision
but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure
to have the pre-tensioner system checked
and, if necessary, replaced by a NISSAN dealer
• No unauthorised changes should be made to
NIC3953 NIC4166 any components or wiring of the pre-
tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent
accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat
When folding the rear seat forward, the outer seat
belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt
belts can be stored out of the way using the seat
operation. Tampering with the pre-tensioner
belt hooks as shown in the illustration.
seat belt system may result in serious per-
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE sonal injury.
• To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild • Work on and around the pre-tensioner system
soap solution or any solution recommended for should be done by an authorised NISSAN
cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then wipe with dealer or qualified workshop. Installation of
a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the electrical equipment should also be done by a
shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Unau-
they are completely dry. thorised electrical test equipment and prob-
NIC4031
• If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of

ing devices should not be used on the pre-
tensioner seat belt system.
the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract
Selecting the correct seat buckle:
slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, • If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or
B has a different shape
The centre seat belt tongue j dry cloth. scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or
to the outer seat belt tongues, and can only be fas-
tened into the centre seat belt buckle. The outer • Periodically check to see that the seat belt and
qualified workshop. Correct pre-tensioner dis-
posal procedures are set forth in the appropri-
the metal components, such as buckles,
seat belt tongues jA can only be fastened into the ate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal
tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors,
outer buckles. procedures could cause personal injury.
work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts
or other damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

CHILD SAFETY
The pre-tensioner seat belt system is activated in Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Re- Children need adults to help protect them.
conjunction with the front air bag system. It helps straint System (SRS) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt They need to be properly restrained.
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle is involved in may not function properly. It must be checked and
certain types of collisions by restraining the seat oc- repaired. In addition to the general information in this
cupants via the seat belt retractor. manual, child safety information is available from
When selling your vehicle, we request that you in- many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt's form the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt government traffic safety offices, and community
retractor. These seat belts are used in the same way system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sec- organisations. Every child is different, so be sure to
as conventional seat belts. tions in this Owner's Manual. learn the best way to transport your child.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt system activates, There are two basic types of child restraint system:
•
smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.
The smoke is harmless, but care should be taken Rear-facing child restraints
not to inhale it. • Front-facing child restraints
After pre-tensioner activation, load limiters allow Please refer to “Child restraint category, size and
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to position” later in this section to check the recom-
reduce forces against the chest. Load limiters are mended child restraint for your child.
fitted to all seat belt retractors except the rear
centre retractor. WARNING
When the power switch is switched ON, the Supple- Infants and children need special protection. The
mental Restraint System (SRS) air bag warning light vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The
will illuminate. The SRS air bag warning light will turn shoulder belt may come too close to the face or
off after approximately 7 seconds if the system is neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip
operational. If any of the following conditions occur, bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat
the air bag and/or pre-tensioner seat belt need ser- belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use
vicing and your vehicle must be taken to the near- appropriate child restraints.
est NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
• The air bag warning light remains on after ap- A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
proximately 7 seconds. using either the ISOFIX child restraint system or with
• The air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

the vehicle seat belt, see “Child restraints” later in
this section for more information.
• The air bag warning light does not come on at
all.

CHILD RESTRAINTS
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and chil- LEGAL REQUIREMENTS PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
dren be restrained in the rear seat. According to
Check any legal requirements applicable in your lo- RESTRAINTS
accident statistics, children are safer when prop-
cation. For example, the U.K. has legal requirements
erly restrained in the rear seat than in the front
to use child restraints based on height and age, see
seat.
“Child restraints” later in this section for more infor-
This is especially important because your vehicle mation
has a supplemental restraint system (air bag sys-
tem) for the front passenger. (See “Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)” later in this section.)
INFANTS AND SMALL CHILDREN

NISSAN recommends that infants and small children
be seated in a child restraint system. You should SSS0099Z
choose a child restraint system that fits your ve-
hicle and the child, and always follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions for installation and use. WARNING
LARGER CHILDREN • Infants and small children should always be
placed in an appropriate child restraint sys-
Children who are too large for a child restraint sys-
tem while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a
tem should be seated and restrained by the seat
child restraint system can result in serious in-
belts that are provided. If the child's seating posi-
jury or death.
tion has a shoulder belt that fits close to the face or
neck, the use of a booster seat (commercially avail- • Infants and small children should never be
able) may help overcome this. The booster seat carried on your lap. It is not possible for even
should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is the strongest adult to resist the forces of a se-
properly positioned across the top, middle portion vere accident. The child could be crushed be-
of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. tween the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also,
The booster seat should also fit the vehicle seat. do not put the same seat belt around a child
Once the child has grown so that the shoulder belt and yourself.
is no longer on or near the face or neck of the child,
use the shoulder belt without the booster seat. In
addition, there are many types of child restraint sys-
tem available for larger children that should be used
for maximum protection.

• Infants and children need special protection. • Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys- • If a child restraint system is not anchored
The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them prop- tem on the front passenger seat without en- properly, the risk of a child being injured in a
erly. The shoulder belt may come too close to suring that the front passenger air bag is de- collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.
the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over
their small hip bones. In an accident, an im-
activated. The vehicle may be equipped with a
manual or an automatic front-passenger
• Improper use of a child restraint system can
increase the risk or severity of injury for both
properly fitting seat belt could cause serious front air bag deactivation system. Where a the child and other occupants in the vehicle.
•
or fatal injury. manual front-passenger air bag deactivation
• system is equipped, the air bag switch must When the child restraint system is not in use,
NISSAN recommends that the child restraint keep it secured with the ISOFIX child restraint
system be installed in the rear seat. According be used to deactivate the passenger air bag.
(For details see “Automatic front-passenger system or a seat belt to prevent it from being
to accident statistics, children are safer when thrown around in case of a sudden stop or
properly restrained in the rear seat rather than air bag deactivation system (where fitted)”
later in this section and “Manual front-passen- accident.
in the front seat.
•
ger air bag deactivation system (where fitted)”
Child restraint systems specially designed for later in this section). The <PASSENGER AIR BAG NISSAN recommends that infants and small children
infants and small children are available from OFF> indicator must be lit. In a frontal be seated in a child restraint system. You should
several manufacturers. When selecting any collision, supplemental front-impact air bags choose a child restraint system that fits your ve-
child restraint systems, place your child in the inflate with great force. An inflating supple- hicle and always follow the manufacturer's instruc-
child restraint system and check the various mental front-impact air bag could seriously tions for installation and use. In addition, there are
adjustments to be sure that the child restraint injure or kill your child. many types of child restraint systems available for
•
system is compatible with your child. Always larger children that should be used for maximum
follow the manufacturer's instructions for in- Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to
protection.
stallation and use. fit the child restraint system, but as upright as
•
possible.
CAUTION
•
Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for installation and use. When If the seat belt in the position where a child
Remember that a child restraint left in a closed
purchasing a child restraint, be sure to select restraint system is installed requires a locking
vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating
one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may device and if it is not used, injuries could result
surface and buckles before placing your child in a
not be possible to properly install some types from a child restraint system tipping over dur-
child restraint.
of child restraint in your vehicle. ing normal vehicle braking or cornering.
• Check the child restraint system in your ve- • After attaching a child restraint system, test it
hicle to be sure that it is compatible with the before you place the child in it. Push it from
vehicle's seat belt system. side to side and tug it forward to make sure
•
that it is held securely in place. The child re-
For a front-facing child restraint system, check straint system should not move more than 25
to make sure the shoulder belt does not fit mm (1 in). If the restraint is not secure, tighten
close to the child's face or neck. the belt as necessary, or install the restraint in
another seat and test it again.

CHILD RESTRAINT AND ISOFIX Examples of child restraint types:
INFORMATION
When selecting any child restraint, keep the follow-
ing points in mind:
• Choose a child restraint that complies with the
latest European safety standard, ECE Regulation
44.04.
• Place your child in the child restraint and check
the various adjustments to be sure the child re-
straint is compatible with your child. Always fol- JVR0373XZ
low all of the recommended procedures. JVR0371XZ Child safety seat categories II and III
• Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

Child safety seat categories 0 and 0+
sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat belt

system.
• Refer to the tables later in this section for a list of
the recommended fitment positions and the ap-
proved child restraints for your vehicle.
NOTE
Child restraints approved to UN Regulation No. 44
(UN R44) or UN Regulation No.129 (UN R129) are
clearly marked with the categories such as Uni-
versal, Semi-universal or ISOFIX. JVR0372XZ
Child safety seat categories 0+ and I
Mass group of child restraint
Mass group Child's weight
Group 0 up to 10 kg
Group 0+ up to 13 kg
Group I 9 to 18 kg
Group II 15 to 25 kg
Group III 22 to 36 kg

Selecting the child restraint system for ➀ Front passenger seat
each seating position
➁ Row 2: left hand outboard seat
Right hand drive vehicles: ➂ Row 2: centre seat
➃ Row 2: right hand outboard seat
Suitable for a universal child restraint
m that is fastened with vehicle seat belt
Suitable for i-Size and ISOFIX child
m restraint system
Prohibit installation of rearward facing
m child restraint system
m
Top tether anchorage equipment seats
a: Adjust the seat backrest to the upright position.

NIC4125 b: Adjust the seat lifter to the uppermost position.
<PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> indicator illuminated c: Adjust the seat slide to the rear most position.
d: Do not install child restraints with a support leg.
NIC4124 e: Move the head restraint to the uppermost posi-
<PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> indicator illuminated tion or remove it (and store securely) if there is
any interference with the child restraint. Do not
remove head restraint when using a booster
cushion only.

Left hand drive vehicles:
➀ Front passenger seat
➁ Row 2: left hand outboard seat
➂ Row 2: centre seat
➃ Row 2: right hand outboard seat
Suitable for a universal child restraint
m that is fastened with vehicle seat belt
Suitable for i-Size and ISOFIX child
m restraint system
Prohibit installation of rearward facing
m child restraint system
m
Top tether anchorage equipment seats
a: Adjust the seat backrest to the upright position.

NIC4127 b: Adjust the seat lifter to the uppermost position.
NIC4126 <PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> indicator illuminated c: Adjust the seat slide to the rear most position.
<PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> indicator illuminated
d: Do not install child restraints with a support leg.
e: Move the head restraint to the uppermost posi-
tion or remove it (and store securely) if there is
any interference with the child restraint. Do not
remove head restraint when using a booster
cushion only.

Child restraint category, size and position:
Age Weight Height CRS Mass Recommended CRS CRS suitable seat position
(approx.) (approx.) (approx.) Category
➀ ➀ ** ➁ ** ➂ ** ➃ **
Air bag Activa- Air bag
tion (ON) Deactivation
(OFF)
0 - 12 Up to 10kg <75 cm 0 Britax Romer Babysafe No No Yes No Yes
months Plus + ISOFIX Base
0 - 18 Maxi Cosi Cabriofix +
Up to 13 kg <85 cm 0+ Isofix Base No No Yes No Yes
months
9 months Britax Romer Duo Plus No Yes (belt only) Yes Yes (belt only) Yes
70 -
- 4 years 9 - 18 kg ˺
100 cm Britax Trifix 2 i-Size No No Yes No Yes
old
4 - 6 years 100 -
15 - 25 kg ˻ Romer KidFix2 R * No Yes (belt only) Yes Yes (belt only) Yes
old 125 cm
6- 10
22 - 36 kg >125 cm ˼ Romer KidFix2 R * No Yes (belt only) Yes Yes (belt only) Yes
years old
* It is recommended to use the backrest and lap belt Secure Guard. In the event that the back rest is removed the lap belt Secure Guard should not be used
** Move the head restraint to the uppermost position or remove it (and store securely) if there is any interference with the child restraint. Do not remove head
restraint when using a booster cushion only.

Detailed information for child restraint system manufacturers:
Front 2nd row

Seat position
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃
Air bag Activa- Air bag
Left ** Centre ** *** Right **
tion Deactivation **
Seat position suitable for universal belted (yes/no) No Yes Yes Yes Yes
i-Size seating position (yes/no) No No Yes No Yes
Seating position suitable for lateral fixture (L1/L2) — — — — —
Largest suitable rearward facing fixture (R1/R2X/R2/R3) — — R3 — R3
Largest suitable forward facing fixture (F2X/F2/F3) — — F3 — F3
Largest suitable booster fixture (B2/B3) — — B3 — B3
** Move the head restraint to the uppermost position or remove it (and store securely) if there is any interference with the child restraint. Do not remove head
restraint when using a booster cushion only.
*** Not suitable for child restraint systems with a support leg

WARNING ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM The ISOFIX anchor points are located, under covers
•
labelled ISOFIX, at the bottom of the rear seat cush-
Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys- Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points
ions as shown. To access an ISOFIX anchor point
tem on the front passenger seat without en- that are used with ISOFIX child restraint systems.
insert your finger into the cover and pull the cover
suring that the front passenger air bag is de-
ISOFIX lower anchor point locations off as shown.
activated. Depending on vehicle specification,
the vehicle may be equipped with an auto- The ISOFIX anchor points are provided to install ISOFIX child restraint anchor
matic front-passenger front air bag deactiva- child restraints in the rear outer seating positions attachments
tion system or a manual front-passenger front only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in
air bag deactivation system. (For details see the centre position using the ISOFIX anchors.
“Automatic front-passenger air bag deactiva-
tion system (where fitted)” later in this section
and “Manual front-passenger air bag deacti-
vation system (where fitted)” later in this sec-
tion. If this system is fitted, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator must be lit. In a fron-
tal collision, supplemental front-impact air
bags inflate with great force. An inflating
supplemental front-impact air bag could seri- SSS0644Z
ously injure or kill your child. Anchor attachment
NIC3955
Refer to the child restraint system tables ear-
Rear ISOFIX anchor point locations ISOFIX child restraints include two rigid attach-
lier in this section.
ments that can be connected to two anchors lo-
cated in the seat. Check your child restraint for a
NOTE label stating that it is compatible with the ISOFIX
Child restraints approved to ECE Regulation NO. child restraints. This information may also be in the
44.04 or UN regulation No. 44 are clearly marked instructions provided by the child restraint manu-
with the categories such as Universal, Semi-uni- facturer.
versal or ISOFIX. ISOFIX child restraints generally require the use of a
top tether strap or other anti-rotation devices such
as support legs. When installing ISOFIX child
restraints, carefully read and follow the instructions
in this manual and those supplied with the child
NPA1597 restraints. See “ISOFIX child restraint system” later in
ISOFIX cover removal (rear seats) this section.

CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORAGE Anchorage location • Do not secure a child restraint in the centre
rear seating position using the ISOFIX lower
Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a child Rear passenger seat anchors:
anchors. The child restraint will not be secured
restraint system on the rear seat. When installing a
properly.
child restraint system, carefully read and follow the
instructions in this manual and those supplied with • Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your
the child restraint system. fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling
to make sure there are no obstructions over
WARNING the ISOFIX anchors, such as seat belt webbing
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to

or seat cushion material. The child restraint
will not be secured properly if the ISOFIX an-
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
chors are obstructed.
rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat belts, • Child restraint anchorages are designed to
harnesses or for attaching other items or NIC3983 withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could dam- rectly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
age the child restraint anchorages. The child stance are they to be used for adult seat belts,
Anchor points are located on the seatback behind
restraint will not be properly installed using harnesses or for attaching other items or
the rear outer seating positions and should only be
the damaged anchorage, and a child could be equipment to the vehicle.
used for child restraints in the rear outer positions.
seriously injured or killed in a collision.
• The child restraint top tether strap may be
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
USING ISOFIX
damaged by contact with the parcel shelf or
items in the luggage area. Remove the parcel
shelf from the vehicle or secure it in the lug- WARNING
gage area. See “Parcel shelf” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section. Also secure any
• Attach ISOFIX child restraints only at the speci-
fied locations. For the ISOFIX lower anchor lo-
items in the luggage area. Your child could be cations, see “ISOFIX lower anchor point
seriously injured or killed in a collision if the locations” earlier in this section. If a child re-
top tether strap is damaged. straint is not secured properly, your child could
be seriously injured or killed in an accident.
• Do not install child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap to seating positions
that do not have a top tether anchor.

Installation on rear outer seats
Front-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions
for the proper use of your child restraint. Follow
these steps to install a front-facing child restraint
on rear outer seats using ISOFIX:
SSS0754AZ SSS0755AZ
Step 4 Step 7
4. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child 7. Test the child restraint before you place the child
restraint firmly tightened; press downward ➂ in it ➄. Push the child restraint from side to side
and rearward ➃ firmly in the centre of the child and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle securely in place.
NPA1604 seat cushion and seatback. 8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
Steps 1 and 2 5. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether properly secured prior to each use. If the child
1. Position the child restraint on the seat ➀. strap, route the top tether strap and secure the restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 7.
tether strap to the tether anchor point. (See
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to “Child restraint anchorage” earlier in this section.)
the ISOFIX lower anchors ➁.
6. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-
3. The back of the child restraint should be secured rotation devices such as support legs, use them
against the vehicle seat back. If necessary, adjust instead of the top tether strap following the child
or remove the head restraint to obtain the cor- restraint manufacturer's instructions.
rect child restraint fit. (See “Head restraints” ear-
lier in this section.) If the head restraint is re-
moved, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the child restraint is re-
moved. If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.

Rear-facing:
Be sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions
these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on
the rear outer seats using ISOFIX:
SSS0756AZ SSS0757AZ
Step 3 Step 6
3. Shorten the rigid attachment to have the child 6. Test the child restraint before you place the child
restraint firmly tightened; press downward ➂ in it ➄. Push the child restraint from side to side
and rearward ➃ firmly in the centre of the child and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
NPA1605
restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle securely in place.
Steps 1 and 2
seat cushion and seatback. If any contact occurs 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
1. Position the child restraint on the seat ➀. between the child restraint and the front seat, properly secured prior to each use. If the child
slide the front seat forward until contact no restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to
the ISOFIX lower anchors ➁. longer occurs.
4. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether
strap, route the top tether strap and secure the
“Child restraint anchorage” earlier in this section.)
5. If the child restraint is equipped with other anti-
rotation devices such as support legs, use them
instead of the top tether strap following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION 4. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt;
press downward ➂ and rearward ➃ firmly in the
USING THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT
centre of the child restraint with your knee to
BELT compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
Installation on rear seats while pulling up on the seat belt.
Front-facing: If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether

strap, route the top tether strap and secure the
“Child restraint anchorage” earlier in this section.)
SSS0493AZ
Step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-

straint and insert it into the buckle ➁ until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is
SSS0758AZ
necessary to secure the seat belt in place with
Step 1
locking devices attached to the child restraint.
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions
SSS0638AZ
Step 5
on the rear seats using 3-point type seat belt: 5. Test the child restraint before you place the child
in it ➄. Push the child restraint from side to side
1. Position the child restraint on the seat ➀. If any
and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
contact occurs between the child restraint and
securely in place.
the front seat, slide the front seat forward until
contact no longer occurs. 6. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the child
restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 5.
SSS0647AZ
Step 4

Rear-facing: 3. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is 5. Test the child restraint before you place the child
necessary to secure the seat belt in place with in it ➄. Push the child restraint from side to side
locking devices attached to the child restraint. and tug it forward to make sure that it is held
securely in place.
6. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
SSS0759AZ
Step 1
SSS0639AZ
Step 4
these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint on 4. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt;
the rear seats using 3-point type seat belt: press downward ➂ and rearward ➃ firmly in the
1. Position the child restraint on the seat ➀. centre of the child restraint with your hand to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
SSS0654AZ
Step 2
SSS0658AZ
Step 5
straint and insert it into the buckle ➁ until you

Front-facing:
on the front passenger’s seat using a 3-point type
seat belt:
SSS0300AZ
Installation on front passenger’s seat • NISSAN recommends that a child restraint be

installed on the rear seat. However, if you must
WARNING install a child restraint on the front passen-
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys-

ger’s seat, move the passenger’s seat to the
rearmost position. NIC4034
tem on the front passenger seat without en-
suring that the front passenger air bag is de- • Child restraints for infants must be used in the
NOTE
activated. Depending on vehicle specification, rear-facing direction and therefore must not
the vehicle may be equipped with an auto- be used on the front passenger’s seat when Depending on vehicle specification, the vehicle
matic front-passenger front air bag deactiva- the front passenger’s air bag has not been may be equipped with an automatic front-pas-
tion system or a manual front-passenger front deactivated. senger front air bag deactivation system or a
air bag deactivation system. (For details see manual front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
“Automatic front-passenger air bag deactivation system. (For details see “Automatic
tion system (where fitted)” later in this section front-passenger air bag deactivation system
and “Manual front-passenger air bag deacti- (where fitted)” later in this section and “Manual
vation system (where fitted)” later in this sec- front-passenger air bag deactivation system
tion. If this system is fitted, the PASSENGER AIR (where fitted)” later in this section
BAG OFF indicator located on the roof 1. If the child restraint is installed on the front pas-
console must be lit. In a frontal collision, senger seat, switch the power switch ON. The
supplemental front-impact air bags inflate <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> light, located
with great force. An inflating supplemental
on the roof console, should illuminate. If the <PAS-
front-impact air bag could seriously injure or
SENGER AIR BAG ON> light is illuminated,
kill your child.
see “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” later

in this section.) Move the child restraint to an- 5. To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it is 7. Test the child restraint before you place the child
other seating position. Have the system checked necessary to secure the seat belt in place with in it. Push the child restraint from side to side and
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. locking devices attached to the child restraint. tug it forward to make sure that it is held securely
in place.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
If the child restraint is still loose, do not use it.
Please check the child restraint system manu-
Seek advice from a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop for correct child restraint installa-
tion.
NPA1602 SSS0647BZ
Rear facing:
Step 2 Step 6
NOTE
2. Move the seat to the rearmost position ➀. 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt;
3. Position the child restraint in the seat. press downward ➃ and rearward ➄ firmly in the Depending on vehicle specification, the vehicle
centre of the child restraint with your knee to may be equipped with an automatic front-pas-
Always follow the child restraint system manu-
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback senger front air bag deactivation system or a
while pulling up on the seat belt. manual front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
tion system. (For details see “Automatic
front-passenger air bag deactivation system
(where fitted)” later in this section and “Manual
front-passenger air bag deactivation system
(where fitted)” later in this section
SSS0360CZ
Steps 4 and 5 NPA1603
Steps 7 and 8
straint and insert it into the buckle ➂ until you

If you must install a child restraint system in the 2. Move the seat to the rearmost position ➀. If the child restraint is still not securely held in
front seat, follow these steps: 3. Position the child restraint system in the front place, do not use it. Please check the child re-
passenger seat. straint system manufacturer's instructions for
Always follow the child restraint system manu- installation and use. Seek advice from a NISSAN
facturer's instructions for installation and use. dealer or qualified workshop for correct child
restraint installation.
NIC4034
1. If the child restraint is installed on the front pas-

senger seat, switch the power switch ON. The SSS0513Z
<PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> light, located

on the roof console, should illuminate. If the <PAS- 4. Route the seat belt tongue through the child re-
SENGER AIR BAG ON> light is illuminated, straint system and insert it into the buckle until
see “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” later you hear and feel the latch engage.
in this section.) Move the child restraint to an- To prevent slack in the lap belt, secure the shoul-
other seating position. Have the system checked A . Use a lock-
der belt in place with a locking clip j
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. ing clip attached to the child restraint system, or
one which is equivalent in dimensions and
strength.
Be sure to follow the child restraint system
manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
5. Slide the seat forwards so that the seat belt fully
tightens the child restraint system and the child
restraint reaches the vehicle dashboard.
6. Test the child restraint system before you place
the child in it. Check that it does not tilt too far
NPA1602 from side to side. Try to tug it forwards and check
Steps 2 and 3 if it is held securely in place.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL Supplemental air bag systems

RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) The SRS is designed to supplement the crash pro-
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section tection provided by the seat belts and is not de-
contains important information concerning the signed to substitute them. Seat belts should al-
driver's and passenger’s supplemental front impact ways be correctly worn and the driver and front
air bags, front seat-mounted side-impact supple- passenger seated a suitable distance away from the
mental air bags, roof-mounted curtain side-impact steering wheel, instrument panel and front door fin-
air bags, and pre-tensioner seat belts. ishers. All occupants should always be seated a suit-
able distance away from the roof side trim. For ad-
Supplemental front-impact air bag ditional information, see “Seat belts” earlier in this
system NPA1601 section.
The supplemental front-impact air bag consists of When the air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be
a Driver Air Bag located at the centre of the steering Supplemental side-impact air bag heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke
wheel and a Front Passenger Air Bag located in the system (where fitted) is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. However,
instrument panel above the glove box. care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause
The Supplemental side-impact air bag system con-
The supplemental front-impact air bag system can irritation and choking. Occupants with a history of
sist of two Front Side Air Bags located in the outside
help cushion the impact to the head and chest area breathing difficulties, such as asthma, should get
of the seatback of the front seats, two Curtain Air
or the driver and/or front passenger in certain fresh air promptly.
Bags located in the roof side trim and dependent
higher severity frontal collisions, although it may in- on vehicle specification one Front Centre Air Bag Supplemental air bags, along with the use of seat
flate if the forces in another type of collision are (where fitted) located in the inside of the seatback belts, help to cushion the impact force on occu-
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. of the driver seat. pants. They can help save lives and reduce serious
It may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle injuries. However, an inflating air bag may cause
The Curtain Airbags system can help cushion the
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of abrasions or other injuries. The supplemental air
head of the driver, front passenger and rear outer
proper supplemental front impact air bag system bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
passengers. The Supplemental side-impact air bag
operation. After switching the power switch ON, the air bag
system can help cushion the pelvis of the driver and
front passenger in certain higher severity side colli- warning light will illuminate. The air bag warning
sions, although it may inflate if the forces in another light will turn off after approximately 7 seconds if
type of collision are similar to those of a higher se- the system is operational. For further details, see
verity side impact. It may not inflate in certain side “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al- reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
ways an indication of proper supplemental side-im- section.
pact air bag system operation. The air bag will operate only when the power
switch is ON.

• The front seat-mounted side-impact supple- riously injured. Be especially careful with chil-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain dren, who should always be properly
side-impact supplemental air bags ordinarily restrained.
will not inflate in the event of a front impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity side col-
• Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks.
They may interfere with the front seat-
lision. Always wear the seat belts to help re- mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
duce the risk or severity of injury in accidents. inflations.
• The seat belts, the front seat-mounted side-
impact supplemental air bags and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
NPA926Z air bags are most effective when you are sit-
Correct (rear) seating positions ting well back and upright in the seat. The front
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact
WARNING supplemental air bags inflate with great force.
• The supplemental front-impact air bags ordi- If you and your passengers are unrestrained,
narily will not inflate in the event of a side im- leaning forward, sitting sideways, or out of po-
pact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity sition in any way, you and your passengers are
frontal collision. Always wear the seat belts to at greater risk of injury or death in an acci- SSS0100Z
help reduce the risk or severity of injury in ac- dent.
cidents.
• Do not allow anyone to place their hands, legs,
• The seat belts and the supplemental front-im- or face near the front seat-mounted side-im- WARNING
pact air bags are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the seat. The
pact supplemental air bags and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact supplemental
• Children may be severely injured or killed
when the air bags inflate if they are not prop-
front-impact air bags inflate with great force. air bags on the sides of the seatback of the erly restrained see “Child restraints” earlier in
If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit- front seats or near the side roof rails. Do not this section.
ting sideways, or out of position in any way,
you are at greater risk of injury or death in an
allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear
outer seats to extend their hands out of the • Never let children ride unrestrained or extend
accident. You may also receive serious or fatal their hands or face out of the window. Do not
windows or lean against the doors.
attempt to hold them in your lap or arms.
injuries from the supplemental front-impact
air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. • When sitting in the rear seats, do not hold onto
the seatback of the front seats. If the front
Always sit back against the seatback and as
seat-mounted side impact supplemental air
far away as practical from the steering wheel.
bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact
Always use the seat belts.
supplemental air bags inflate, you may be se-

11. Seat belt with pre-tensioners
12. Front central seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (where fitted)
13. Rear seat Occupant Detection sensors (where
fitted)
14. Satellite sensors (driver's side shown; front
passenger side similar) (where fitted)
15. Seat belt with pre-tensioners (rear outboard
seats)
WARNING
• Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
pad. Do not place any objects between the
driver and steering wheel pad. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if a supplemental air bag inflates.
• Immediately after inflation, several supple-
mental air bag system components will be hot.
Do not touch them: you may severely burn
yourself.
• No unauthorised changes should be made to
any components or wiring of the supplemen-
NIC4167 tal air bag systems. This is to prevent acciden-
tal inflation of the supplemental air bags or
damage to the supplemental air bag systems.
•
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules 6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag inflators Do not make unauthorised changes to your
2. Occupant classification system control unit vehicle's electrical system, suspension sys-
(where fitted) 7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact tem or front end structure. This could affect
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) supplemental air bag modules proper operation of the supplemental air bag
4. Occupant classification sensor (where fitted) 8. Crash zone sensor systems.
(front passenger seat) 9. Front door pressure sensors (where fitted)
5. Front seat-mounted side-impact 10. Lap outer pre-tensioners (front seats)
supplemental air bag modules

• Tampering with the supplemental air bag sys- Pre-tensioner seat belt system SRS front-impact passenger air bag:
tems may result in serious personal injury.
The pre-tensioner seat belt system may activate The warning label ➀ is located on the sun visor.
Tampering includes changes to the steering
with the supplemental air bag system in certain “NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a
wheel by placing materials over the steering
types of collisions. seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it,
wheel pad and above, and by installing addi-
Working with the seat belt retractor and anchor, it DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can oc-
tional trim materials around the supplemen-
helps tighten the seat belt the instant the vehicle cur.”
tal air bag systems.
• Work around and on the supplemental air bag
becomes involved in certain types of collisions, help-
ing to restrain seat occupants. See “Pre-tensioner
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
aged 12 and under according to accident statis-
systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer or
seat belt system” earlier in this section. tics. Always use an appropriate Child Restraint
qualified workshop. The SRS wiring should not
System for your child, see “Child restraints” ear-
be modified or disconnected. Unauthorised Air bag warning labels
lier in this section. Some infants and children may
electrical test equipment and probing devices
not require use of the vehicle’s seat belt when using
should not be used on the supplemental air
an appropriate ISOFIX Child Restraint System with
bag systems.
integrated restraints, for all other children and
• The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow adults ensure you always use the vehicle's seat
and/or orange for easy identification. belts. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint sys- air bag. Do not place any objects over the air bag or
between the air bag and yourself. If the air bag
tem on the front passenger seat without en-
suring that the front passenger air bag is de- warning light stays on or is flashing when the power
activated. Depending on vehicle specification, switch is ON, go to a NISSAN dealer or qualified
the vehicle may be equipped with an auto- workshop. Air bags can only be removed or dis-
NPA1598 posed of by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
matic front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
tion system or a manual front-passenger front Be sure to read the “AIRBAG LABEL” description at
air bag deactivation system. (For details see ➀ SRS air bag warning label: The warning label the end of this manual.
“Automatic front-passenger air bag deactiva- is located on the surface of the front pas- When installing a child restraint system in your ve-
tion system (where fitted)” later in this section senger sun visor. hicle, always follow the child restraint system manu-
and “Manual front-passenger air bag deacti-
vation system (where fitted)” later in this sec-
➁ SRS side air bag warning label: The warning facturer’s instructions for installation. For informa-
label is located on the side of the passenger tion, see “Child restraints” earlier in this section.
tion. If this system is fitted, the PASSENGER AIR
side centre pillar, and on the base of the front
BAG OFF indicator must be lit. In a fron-
seats.
tal collision, supplemental front-impact air
bags inflate with great force. An inflating When a front centre air bag is fitted there is also a
supplemental front-impact air bag could seri- label on the inside back of the driver's seat.
ously injure or kill your child.

SRS air bag warning light After switching the power switch ON, the supple- FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG
mental air bag warning light illuminates. The air
STATUS LIGHT
bag warning light will turn off after approxi-
mately 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Have the air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat
belt systems serviced at the nearest NISSAN dealer
or qualified workshop if any of the following condi-
tions occur:
• The SRS air bag warning light remains on after
approximately 7 seconds.
SPA1097Z • The SRS air bag warning light flashes intermit-

tently.
•
NIC4168
The SRS air bag warning light does not illumi-
The SRS air bag warning light, displaying in
nate at all.
the instrument panel, monitors the circuits of the
supplemental restraint system. The circuits moni- Under these conditions, the air bag systems and/or WARNING
tored are: pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operate Never install a rear-facing child restraint system
• Crash zone sensor
properly. They must be checked and repaired. Con-
tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop immedi-
on the front passenger seat without ensuring that
•
the front passenger air bag is deactivated. The
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags ately. vehicle may be equipped with a manual or an au-
• Front Side Air Bags tomatic front-passenger front air bag deactiva-
• Front Centre Air Bag (where fitted) tion system. Where a manual front-passenger air
•
bag deactivation system is equipped, the air bag
Curtain Air Bags switch must be used to deactivate the passenger
• Pre-tensioner seat belt retractors air bag. (For details see “Automatic front-passen-
• Front Satellite Sensor (where fitted) ger air bag deactivation system (where fitted)”
•
later in this section and “Manual front-passenger
Rear Satellite Sensor air bag deactivation system (where fitted)” later
• Front Door Pressure Sensor (where fitted) in this section). The <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF>
• Supplemental air bag diagnosis sensor unit indicator must be lit. In a frontal collision,
•
supplemental front-impact air bags inflate with
Occupant classification sensor (where fitted) great force. An inflating supplemental front-im-
• Passenger air bag status indicator pact air bag could seriously injure or kill your
Including all related wiring. child.

Depending on vehicle specification, the front pas-
senger seat may be equipped with an occupant PASSENGER AIR BAG
classification sensor that turns the front passenger INDICATOR LIGHT FRONT PASSENGER AIR
CONDITION DESCRIPTION
air bag on or off depending on the type of occupant BAG STATUS
or object detected on the front passenger seat. The
m ) or m
(
status of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is Empty front passenger
Empty INHIBITED
indicated by the front passenger air bag status seat m illuminated
lights <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> and <PAS-
NISSAN recommended Bag or Child Restraint in
SENGER AIR BAG ON> which are located on INHIBITED
the roof console.
child restraint with child front passenger seat* m illuminated
Adult in the front pas-
After the power switch is switched ON, the <PAS- Adult ACTIVATED
SENGER AIR BAG OFF> and <PASSENGER AIR
senger seat m illuminated
BAG ON> indicator lights must light up simul- * If an approved child restraint system is not being used, the passenger air bag may be active
taneously for approximately 7 seconds. ( illuminated).
The indicator lights display the status of the front-
passenger front air bag:
• <PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> lights up: the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event
of an accident, all deployment criteria are met,
the front-passenger front air bag is deployed.
• <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> lights up: the front-
passenger front air bag is disabled. It will then
not be deployed in the event of an accident.

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on must light up after the system self-test and remain object is detected by the occupant classification
the front passenger seat may also cause the light to lit. The front passenger front air bag is disabled. sensors. Other conditions could also result in air bag
operate as described above. The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or
For additional information related to the normal op- designed to detect the type of occupant or objects if two or more children are on the seat, if the seat is
eration and troubleshooting of this occupant clas- on the seat. For example, if an approved child re- wet, or if an electrical device is on the seat, contrary
sification sensor system (where fitted), please refer straint on the seat, it can be detected together with to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure
to “Troubleshooting” later in this section. the child and cause the air bag to turn OFF. that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and
restrained properly.
Automatic front-passenger air bag Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined Using the front passenger air bag status light, you
deactivation system (where fitted) can monitor when the front passenger air bag is
in this manual should automatically cause the pas-
senger air bag to be turned ON. However, if the oc- automatically turned OFF.
WARNING
cupant is not sitting correctly on the seat cushion If an adult occupant is in the seat but the <PASSEN-
Depending on vehicle specification, the vehicle (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an GER AIR BAG OFF> light is illuminated (indicat-
may be equipped with an automatic front-pas- edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of posi- ing that the front passenger air bag is OFF), it could
senger front air bag deactivation system. tion), this could cause the sensors to turn the air be that the person is not sitting on the seat prop-
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing erly. If a seat cover or additional cushion is used, this
matically turn OFF under some conditions. Read the seat belt properly for the most effective protec- may also prevent the occupant classification sen-
this section carefully to learn how it operates. tion by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. sor from detecting an adult correctly.
Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child re- NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the
straints is necessary for most effective protec- be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> indicator light
tion. Failure to follow all instructions in this recommends that appropriate child restraints and may or may not be illuminated, depending on the
manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If size of the child and the type of child restraint being
and child restraints can increase the risk or se- this is not possible, the occupant classification sen- used. If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> light is
verity of injury in an accident. sors are designed to operate as described above to not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might
turn the front passenger air bag OFF for NISSAN inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint
In order to recognise a child restraint system on the recommended child restraints. Failing to properly or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure
front-passenger seat, the automatic front-passen- secure child restraints may allow the restraint to tip that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat
ger front air bag deactivation system categorises or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned
the person in the front passenger seat using an oc- also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a properly. If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF>
cupant classification sensor. Depending on that re- crash instead of being OFF. (See “Child restraints” light is not illuminated, reposition the occupant or
sult, the front-passenger front air bag is either en- later in this section for proper use and installation.) child restraint in a rear seat.
abled or disabled. If a NISSAN recommended child
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the pas-
restraint system is fitted to the front passenger seat,
senger air bag are designed not to inflate in a crash.
the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> indicator light
However, heavy objects placed on the seat could
result in air bag inflation, because of the way the

If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> light will not • Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing sification system, and is used as an input to de-
illuminate even though you believe that the child or pulling on the back of the front passenger termine occupancy status. So, it is highly recom-
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are prop- seat. mended that the front passenger fastens their
erly positioned, it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
• Make sure that the front passenger seat or seat- seat belt.
back is not forced back against an object on the 4. Remain in this position for several seconds al-
shop. A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop can seat or floor behind it. lowing the system to classify the front passen-
•
check the system status by using a special tool. ger before the vehicle is put into motion.
However, until you have confirmed with your dealer Make sure that there is no object placed under
that your air bag is working properly, reposition the the front passenger seat. 5. Ensure proper classification by checking the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. • Make sure that the front passenger seat head front passenger air bag status light.
The air bag system and front passenger air bag sta- restraint does not contact the roof when adjust- NOTE
tus lights will take a few seconds to register a ing the front passenger seat.
This vehicle’s occupant classification sensor sys-
change in the passenger seat status. This is normal • Make sure the seat is dry. tem generally keeps the classification locked dur-
system operation and does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
• Make sure no electrical devices are placed on ing driving, so it is important that you confirm that
the seat. the front passenger is properly classified prior to
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light
• Make sure additional non-genuine seat covers
driving. However, the occupant classification sen-
sor system may recalculate the classification of
or cushions are not used on the front passenger
, located in the meters and gauges area, will the occupant under some conditions (both while
seat.
driving and when stopped), so the front passen-
•
illuminate (blinking or steadily lit). Also, if the seat is
wet and the system cannot work correctly, the sys- Make sure the occupant of the seat is not wear- ger seat occupant should continue to remain
tem will deactivate the passenger air bag tempo- ing heavily padded clothing items. seated as outlined above.
rarily and illuminate the supplemental air bag warn- • Make sure there are no sharp objects on the seat
ing light until seat is dry. Have the system checked. that could cut the cover and damage the sen- WARNING
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali- sor. If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> indicator
fied workshop for this service. light is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is dis-
Steps:
Normal operation: 1. Adjust the seat as outlined. (See “Seats” earlier in abled. It will not be deployed in the event of an
In order for the occupant classification sensor sys- this section.) Sit upright, leaning against the seat- accident and cannot perform its intended protec-
tem to classify the front passenger, please follow back, and centred on the seat cushion with your tive function. A person in the front passenger seat
the precautions and steps outlined below: feet comfortably extended to the floor. could then, for example, come into contact with
the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is
Precautions: 2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap. sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an
• Make sure that a child restraint or other object is 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined. (See “Seat belts” increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
not pressing against the rear of the seatback. earlier in this section.) Front passenger seat belt
buckle status is monitored by the occupant clas-

When the front-passenger seat is occupied, al- • A child restraint or other object pressing against This may be due to the following conditions that
ways make sure that: the rear of the seatback. may be interfering with the occupant classification
• The classification of the person in the front • The seat is wet or damp. sensors:
passenger seat is correct and that the front
passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled
• An electrical device like a smartphone or tablet • The child restraint is not properly installed, as
PC is placed on the seat. outlined. (See “Child restraints” earlier in this sec-
in accordance with the person in the front pas-
• Non-genuine seat covers or cushions are used tion.)
senger seat. on the front passenger seat. • A child restraint or other object pressing against
• The front-passenger seat has been moved • The occupant of the seat is wearing heavily pad- the rear of the seatback.
back as far back as possible. ded clothing items.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back
• The person is seated correctly. • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
If you secure a child on the front passenger seat
•
of the front passenger seat.
• The seat is wet or damp.
•
in a rearward-facing child restraint system and Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it. An electrical device like a smartphone or tablet
the <PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> indicator
• An object placed under the front passenger seat.
PC is placed on the seat.
lights up, the passenger's air bag could be de-
ployed in the event of an accident. The child could • An object placed between the seat cushion and • Forcing the front seat or seatback against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
be struck by the air bag. There is an increased risk centre console or between the seat cushion and
of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always the door. • An object placed under the front passenger seat.
ensure that the passenger's air bag is disabled. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when • An object placed between the seat cushion and
The <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> indicator it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above centre console.
must light up. conditions. Restart the vehicle.
• The front passenger seat head restraint con-
NOTE tacting the roof.
Troubleshooting:
If you think the front passenger air bag status light A system check will be performed during which If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when
is incorrect: the front passenger air bag status lights will re- it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above
main lit for about 7 seconds initially. conditions. Restart the vehicle.
1. If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> light is
lit with an adult occupying the front pas- If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF> light is still
senger seat: lit after this, the person should be advised not to
This may be due to the following conditions that ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle
may be interfering with the occupant classification should be checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
sensors: mended you visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
• Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against shop for this service.
the seatback, and centred on the seat cushion 2. If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> light is
with his/her feet comfortably extended to the lit with a child restraint occupying the front
floor. passenger seat.

NOTE 4. Switch the power switch ON. The <PASSENGER
A system check will be performed during which AIR BAG OFF> light will illuminate and re-
the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit.
main lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> light is still lit
after this, the child restraint should be repositioned
in the rear seat and it is recommended that the ve-
hicle should be checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop as soon as possible.
3. If the <PASSENGER AIR BAG ON> light is NIC4283
lit with no front passenger and no objects on Left hand drive models
the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
NIC4168
mended you visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop for this service.
To turn on the front passenger air bag:
Manual front-passenger air bag
deactivation system (where fitted) 1. Switch off the power switch.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an automatic 2. Open the glove box (Right Hand Drive models) or
front-passenger air bag deactivation system, the open the front passenger door (Left Hand Drive
vehicle may be equipped with a front passenger models)
airbag switch which can be used to deactivate the 3. Push and turn the front passenger air bag switch
front passenger airbag manually. (See “Automatic NIC4282 to the ON position.
front-passenger air bag deactivation system (where Right hand drive models 4. Switch the power switch ON. The <PASSENGER
fitted)” earlier in this section for details of the auto-
A Air bag switch (where fitted)
j AIR BAG ON> will illuminate and after about
matic system).
60 seconds turn off.
To turn off the front passenger air bag:
The front passenger air bag can be turned off with
the front passenger air bag switch jA located inside 1. Switch off the power switch.
the glove box on right hand drive vehicles, or on the 2. Open the glove box (Right Hand Drive models) or
trim panel at the side of the dashboard on left hand open the front passenger door (Left Hand Drive
drive vehicles. models)
3. Push and turn the front passenger air bag switch
to the OFF position.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT When maintenance work is required on the vehicle,
information about the air bags, pre-tensioner seat
PROCEDURE
belts and related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The power
WARNING switch should always be switched OFF when work-
• Once the air bags have been inflated, the air ing under the bonnet or inside the vehicle.
bag modules will not function and must be re-
placed. The air bag modules must be replaced
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. The
inflated air bag modules cannot be repaired.
• The air bag systems should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if there is
any damage to the front end portion of the
vehicle.
• When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the air bag system and
guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in
this Owner's Manual.
• If you need to dispose of the SRS or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop. Correct disposal procedures are set
forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service
Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could
cause personal injury.
The air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are de-

signed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a
reminder, unless the SRS air bag warning light is
damaged, the SRS air bag warning light remains il-
luminated after inflation has occurred. The repair
and replacement of the SRS should be done only by
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

NOTE

2 Instruments and controls
Meters and gauges..................................................................................... 77 Windscreen ............................................................................................... 127

Models with analogue meter and colour Rear window............................................................................................ 128
display .......................................................................................................... 77 ThermaClear Heated Windscreen (where fitted) ................. 129
Models with full-screen display................................................. 78 Defogger switch............................................................................................ 130
Speedometer and odometer...................................................... 80 Headlight and turn signal switch..................................................... 130
Power gauge ........................................................................................... 80 Headlight switch................................................................................... 130
Li-ion Battery gauge ......................................................................... 81 Turn signal switch ............................................................................... 134
Fuel gauge ................................................................................................ 81 Fog light switch............................................................................................. 134
Instrument brightness control.................................................. 82 Front fog light (where fitted) ....................................................... 134
Shift position indicator.................................................................... 82 Rear fog light (where fitted)......................................................... 135
[ECO Drive Report] .............................................................................. 82 Headlight aiming control ....................................................................... 135
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Headlight aiming control switch (where fitted)............ 135
reminders........................................................................................................... 84 Horn ....................................................................................................................... 136
Checking lights...................................................................................... 85 Heated steering wheel (where fitted)........................................... 136
Warning lights ........................................................................................ 86 Seat heating (where fitted)................................................................... 137
Indicator lights....................................................................................... 91 Power outlets.................................................................................................. 137
Audible reminders ............................................................................... 95 USB (Universal Serial Bus) rear power ports
Vehicle information display.................................................................. 96 (where fitted)........................................................................................... 138
Changing the meter screen view (models with Wireless charger (where fitted).................................................. 138
full-screen display).............................................................................. 96 Storage ................................................................................................................ 140
How to use the vehicle information display.................... 96 Storage trays........................................................................................... 140
Vehicle information display.......................................................... 98 Glove box.................................................................................................... 140
[Settings] .................................................................................................... 102 Sunglasses holder (where fitted)............................................. 140
General information and warnings........................................ 120 Console box ............................................................................................. 140
Vehicle information display driving aids Cup holders.............................................................................................. 141
warnings and guidance messages........................................ 120 Bottle holder............................................................................................ 141
Clock and outside air temperature........................................ 124 Coat hooks (where fitted).............................................................. 141
[Head-up display] (where fitted) ....................................................... 125 Map pocket (where fitted)............................................................. 141
How to use the HUD .......................................................................... 126 Seat pocket (where fitted)............................................................. 142
Driving Aids/Navigation/Traffic Sign/Audio/ Roof rail (where fitted)...................................................................... 142
Telephone linking ................................................................................ 126 Parcel shelf................................................................................................ 142
Wiper and washer switch ...................................................................... 127
Luggage compartment/boot floor (where Interior lights................................................................................................... 149
fitted)............................................................................................................. 145 Interior light switch ............................................................................ 149
Luggage hooks (where fitted).................................................... 145 Map lights .................................................................................................. 149
Windows ............................................................................................................. 146 Room lights (where fitted) ............................................................ 150
Power windows..................................................................................... 146 Rear personal lights (where fitted) ......................................... 150
Fixed glass roof (where fitted)............................................................ 148 Vanity mirror light................................................................................ 150
Sunshade operation.......................................................................... 148 Luggage compartment light ...................................................... 150
METERS AND GAUGES
MODELS WITH ANALOGUE METER AND COLOUR DISPLAY 1. Power gauge

2. Warning and indicator lights
3. Vehicle information display
4. Speedometer
5. Battery gauge
6. Fuel gauge
CAUTION
• For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened with
water. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, ben-
zine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper
towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or cause discolouration to the lens.
• Do not spray any liquid such as water on the
meter lens. Spraying liquid may cause the sys-
tem to malfunction.
NIC4357

MODELS WITH FULL-SCREEN DISPLAY 1. Power gauge
2. Vehicle information display
3. Warning and indicator lights
4. Speedometer
5. Battery gauge
6. Fuel gauge
CAUTION
• For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened with
water. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, ben-
zine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper
towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or cause discolouration to the lens.
• Do not spray any liquid such as water on the
meter lens. Spraying liquid may cause the sys-
tem to malfunction.
NIC4358

Changing the meter screen view (models with full-screen display) For models with full-screen display, the meter
screen view can be changed from Classic Viewj C to
Enhanced View j D to expand the vehicle informa-
tion display area.
To change the meter screen view:
A on the left side of the
1. Push the control switch j
steering wheel.
“Shortcut Menu” appears on the vehicle informa-
tion display area.
2. Select “Change Meter View” by rotating the scroll
dial j
B and push it to change the view.
NIC4218

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Distance to empty (dte): POWER GAUGE
The distance to empty (dte) ➀ provides an estima-
Speedometer tion of the distance that can be driven before refu-
elling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based
on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual
fuel consumption.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning fea-
ture. If the fuel level is low, the warning is displayed
on the screen and the dte display will turn yellow.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display NIC4215
will change to 0. Example
•
NIC2171
If the amount of fuel added is small, the display The power meter displays the power level of the
Example
just before the power switch is switched OFF electric motor for driving when the accelerator
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed. Scale may continue to be displayed. pedal is depressed, as well as the level of power re-
resolution on the meter varies with models.
• When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel generation provided to the Lithium ion (Li-ion) bat-
Distance to empty (dte)/Odometer in the tank shifts, which may momentarily tery by the regenerative brake.
change the display.
Odometer:
The odometer ➁ is displayed in the vehicle infor-
mation display to display the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
WAC0429XZ
Example

LI-ION BATTERY GAUGE FUEL GAUGE NOTE
A low fuel warning comes on in the vehicle infor-
mation display when the fuel level is getting low.
Refuel as soon as it is convenient. There should
be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the
fuel gauge needle reaches the empty level.
The available range or distance to empty is per-
manently shown at the bottom of the vehicle in-
formation display, see “Distance to empty
(dte)/Odometer” earlier in this section.
NIC4216 WAC0431XZ
CAUTION
Full-screen model Full-screen model
Refill the fuel tank before the range displays [0],
or [---], and the gauge registers empty.
NIC4217 JVI0640XZ
Analogue model Analogue model
The gauge indicates the approximate remaining The fuel gauge is active when the power switch is
Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery charge available to drive ON.
the vehicle. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turn-
NOTE ing, acceleration, or when going uphill or downhill.
• Li-ion battery temperature affects the amount The c symbol indicates that the fuel filler lid is
located on the right side of the vehicle.
of remaining Li-ion battery charge.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS Push the - side of the switch jB to dim the lights. [ECO DRIVE REPORT]
The bar ➀ moves to the left side.
CONTROL
The vehicle information display returns to the nor-
mal display when the instrument brightness con-
trol switch is not operated for more than 5 seconds.
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR

The shift position indicator indicates the shift posi-
tion when the power switch is in the ON or READY to
drive position (See “Electric shift control system” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
NIC4244
WAC0566XZ CAUTION Example

Do not hold the shift lever in any position other When the power switch is switched from ON to OFF
than the centre position. Continued driving with and the current journey distance is greater than 5
the shift lever out of position could lead to dam- km (3 miles), the [ECO Drive Report] is displayed.
age to the vehicle. Additionally, if the shift lever is
placed out of position, the position indicator Regen mileage is the total number of miles that ac-
blinks. cumulated due to regenerative braking. To increase
the number of miles use B mode to capture more
energy when braking.
➀ ECO evaluation
More s will appear when you drive more
economically.
WAC0489XZ ➁ History of previous 5 journeys
The average fuel economy for the previous 5
The instrument brightness control switch can be journeys is displayed.
operated when the power switch is ON. When the
switch is operated, the vehicle information display
➂ Current average fuel economy
switches to the brightness adjustment mode. The current average fuel economy since
journey start will be displayed.
A to brighten the in-
Push the + side of the switch j
strument panel lights. The bar ➀ moves to the right
side.

➃ Best fuel economy
The best fuel economy of the past history will
be displayed.
When the [Tyre Pressures] message appears in the
[ECO Drive Report], the display can be switched to
the [Tyre Pressures] display by pushing the scroll
dial on the steering wheel to show an additional
message.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

e-POWER system warning light
m light
m m air bag warning light
Approaching Vehicle Sound for

Hands OFF warning light* Vehicle detected ahead warning light*
m Pedestrians (VSP) OFF warning light
m m
Blind spot warning (BSW)*/Intelligent Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) Automatic brake hold indicator light
m Blind Spot Intervention* warning light m system* warning light*
m (white)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*/Intel-

ligent Lane Intervention (ILI)*/ Automatic brake hold indicator light
Brake warning light
m m Emergency Lane Assist (ELA)* warn-
ing light
m (green)
Charge warning light Low fuel warning light Dipped beam indicator light*
m m m
Brake system warning light (yellow) Low tyre pressure warning light* Door lock indicator light**
m m m
Electric Power Steering warning light Master warning light Electric Parking brake indicator light
m m m
Electric shift control system warning Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)* warn-
e-Pedal ON indicator
m light
m ing light
m
Emergency Lane Assist (ELA)* OFF warn- Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)* OFF
e-Pedal OFF indicator
m ing light
m warning light
m
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)
Engine oil pressure warning light Seat belt warning light
m m m OFF indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTS
Front fog light indicator light* Power limitation indicator light With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fas-
m m ten the seat belts and switch the power switchON
without starting the e-POWER system. The follow-
ProPILOT Assist* indicator light ing lights (where fitted) will illuminate:
m
Front passenger air bag status lights*, ** m Blue/white , , , , , .
The following lights (where fitted) come on briefly
and then go off:
READY to drive indicator light
m m , , , , , , , ,
High beam assist indicator light* , .

Rear fog light indicator light*
m Adaptive driving beam indicator light* m If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-
out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system.
High beam indicator light Side light indicator light Have the system checked, and repaired promptly
m m by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed in
Hill Start Assist (HSA) indicator light* Slip indicator light*
m m the vehicle information display between the speed-
ometer and tachometer see “Vehicle information
display” later in this section.
Malfunction indicator light (MIL) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
m m NOTE
The or light (where fitted), comes on
*: where fitted and stays on depending on the status of the front
**: located on the roof console passenger air bag. The front passenger air bag
status light ( ) will illuminate when the front
passenger air bag is turned OFF. When the front
passenger air bag is turned on, the front passen-
ger air bag status light ON ( ) will illuminate.

WARNING LIGHTS Blind spot warning (BSW) the brake warning light illuminates at any other
(where fitted)/Intelligent Blind time, it may indicate that the hydraulic brake sys-
Also see “Vehicle information display” later in this
Spot Intervention (where fitted) tem is not functioning properly. If the brake warning
section.
light illuminates, stop the vehicle immediately and
warning light
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
For details of the Blind spot warning (BSW) and In-
warning light A buzzer sounds if a malfunction occurs in the brake
telligent Blind Spot Intervention systems, see “Blind
When the power switch is switched ON, the Anti- system power supply.
Spot Warning (BSW) system/Intelligent Blind Spot
lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates Intervention system (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- Low brake fluid warning light:
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera- ing and driving” section). When the power switch is placed in the ON or READY
tional.
Brake warning light (red) to drive position, the brake warning light illuminates,
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the e- and then turns off. If the light illuminates while the
POWER system is running, or while driving, it may power switch is in the READY to drive position with
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have WARNING the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified • Your brake system may not be working prop- perform the following:
workshop. erly if the warning light is on. Driving could be 1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid level is
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function dangerous. Even if you judge the brake sys- low, add fluid and have the system checked by a
is turned off. The brake system then operates nor- tem to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See “Brake
mally, but without anti-lock assistance (see “Brake service station for repairs. Otherwise, have fluid” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
system” in the “5. Starting and driving” section). your vehicle towed because driving it could be section.
dangerous.
Approaching Vehicle Sound for 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, and the Brake
Pedestrians (VSP) OFF warning • Pressing the brake pedal when the e-POWER warning light is still illuminated it may indicate
system is not running and/or when the brake that the brake system is not functioning prop-
The Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians fluid level is low may increase the stopping erly. Have the brake system and the warning sys-
(VSP) warning light illuminates when a malfunction distance, and braking will require greater tem checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
occurs in the VSP system. pedal effort as well as pedal travel. workshop.
Have the VSP system checked by a NISSAN dealer or • If the brake fluid level is below the minimum
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
qualified workshop. or <MIN> mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do indicator:
not drive until the brake system has been
When the parking brake is released and the brake
checked at a NISSAN dealer or qualified
fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light
workshop.
and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not func-
When the power switch is placed in the ON position tioning properly. Have the brake system checked,
or in the READY to drive position, the brake warning and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer or
light remains illuminated for about a few seconds. If

qualified workshop. (See “ Anti-lock Braking System • If the brake fluid level is below the minimum Electric Power Steering
(ABS) warning light” earlier in this section.) or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do warning light
not drive until the brake system has been
Charge warning light checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- WARNING
When the power switch is ON, the charge warning
shop.
• If the e-POWER system is not running or is
light illuminates. After starting the e-POWER system, • The cooperative regenerative brake system turned off while driving, the power assist for
the charge warning light turns off. This indicates may not be working properly if the brake sys- the steering will not work. Steering will be
that the charging system is operational. tem warning light illuminates when the READY harder to operate.
If the charge warning light illuminates while the e-
to drive indicator light is ON. If you judge it to
be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service • When the Electric Power Steering warning
POWER system is running, or while driving, it may light illuminates with the e-POWER system,
station for repairs. Otherwise, have your ve-
indicate that the charging system is not function- there will be no power assist for the steering.
hicle towed because driving could be
ing properly and may need servicing. You will still have control of the vehicle but the
dangerous.
If the charge warning light remains illuminated, steering will be harder to operate. Have the
have the charging system checked by a NISSAN Electric Power Steering system checked by a
The brake system warning light functions for both NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
dealer or qualified workshop promptly.
the cooperative regenerative brake and the elec-
tronically driven intelligent brake systems. When the
CAUTION When the power switch is ON, the Electric Power
power switch is placed in the ON position or in the
Do not continue driving if the charge warning Steering warning light illuminates. After starting the
READY to drive position, the light remains illumi-
light is on. e-POWER system, the Electric Power Steering warn-
nated for about a few seconds. If the light illumi-
ing light turns off. This indicates that the electric
nates at any other time, it may indicate that the
power steering system is operational.
Brake system warning light cooperative regenerative brake and/or the elec-
tronically driven intelligent brake systems are not If the Electric Power Steering warning light illumi-
(yellow) nates while the e-POWER system is running, it may
functioning properly. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. If the brake indicate the Electric Power Steering system is not
WARNING warning light (red) also illuminates, stop the vehicle functioning properly and may need servicing. Have
• Depressing the brake pedal when the power immediately and contact a NNISSAN dealer or quali- the Electric Power Steering system checked by a
switch position is not in the ON or READY to fied workshop. For additional information, see NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. See “Power
drive position and/or low brake fluid level may “Brake system” in the “8. Starting and driving” sec- steering” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
increase the stopping distance and braking tion.
will require greater pedal effort as well as
pedal travel.

Electric shift control system CAUTION If the driver remains unresponsive, the vehicle will
•
warning light automatically turn on the hazard lights and slow to
Running the engine with the engine oil pres- a complete stop. (See “Hands on detection” in the
When the power switch is switched to the ON posi- sure warning light illuminated could cause se- “5. Starting and driving” section.)
tion, the electric shift control system warning light rious damage to the engine.
illuminates, and then turns off. This indicates the
electric shift control system is operational.
• The engine oil pressure warning light is not
Intelligent Emergency Braking
(IEB) system warning light
designed to indicate a low oil level. The oil level
The electric shift control system warning light illu- should be checked using the dipstick. (See (where fitted)
minates to warn when a malfunction occurs in the “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and This light illuminates when the Intelligent
electric shift control system. Have the system do-it-yourself” section.) Emergency Braking (IEB) system is set to OFF in the
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop vehicle information display.
as soon as possible. When any warning message is
displayed on the vehicle information display, follow
e-POWER system warning light If the light illuminates when the IEB system is ON, it
may indicate that the system is unavailable. See “In-
the waning message displayed.
When the power switch is in the ON position, the telligent Emergency Braking (IEB) system (where
Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) e-POWER system warning light illuminates and then fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section for
(where fitted) OFF warning light turns off. more details.
For details about the Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) If the e-POWER system warning light illuminates Disabling the ESP system with the vehicle informa-
system see “Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) system while driving, it may indicate that there is a mal- tion display causes the IEB system to become un-
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec- function in the e-POWER system. available. This is not a malfunction.
tion. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Engine oil pressure warning contact a NISSAN dealer. (where fitted)/Intelligent Lane
light Hands OFF warning light Intervention (ILI) (where fitted)/
When the power switch is switched ON, the engine (where fitted) Emergency Lane Assist (ELA)
oil pressure warning light illuminates. After starting When the Steering Assist is activated, it monitors (where fitted) warning light
the e-POWER system, the engine oil pressure warn- the driver’s steering wheel operation. For details about the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
ing light turns off. This indicates that the oil pres- and Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) systems see
Vehicles fitted with ProPILOT Assist: If the steering
sure sensors in the engine are operational. “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system (where
wheel is not operated or the driver takes his/her
If the engine oil pressure warning light illuminates hands off the steering wheel for a period of time, fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section and
or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the warning light illuminates. If the driver does not “Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) system (where
that the engine oil pressure is low. operate the steering wheel after the warning light fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Stop the has been illuminated, an audible alert sounds and For details about the Emergency Lane Assist (ELA)
e-POWER system immediately and call a NISSAN the warning flashes in the vehicle information dis- system see “Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) system
dealer or qualified workshop. play, followed by a quick brake application to re- (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
quest the driver to take control of the vehicle again. tion.

Low fuel warning light to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tyre pres- TPMS malfunction:
sure warning light. Use a tyre pressure gauge to If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tyre
If the yellow reserve fuel warning light is on while check the tyre pressure. pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1
the e-POWER system is running, the fuel level has The low tyre pressure (e.g., [Low tyre pressure]) minute when the power switch is switched ON. The
dropped into the reserve range. warning appears each time the power switch is light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system
Refuel at the nearest filling station. switched ON as long as the low tyre pressure warn- checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
ing light remains illuminated. The low tyre pressure warning does not appear if
Low tyre pressure warning light the low tyre pressure warning light illuminates to
For additional information, see “Vehicle information
(where fitted) indicate a TPMS malfunction.
display” later in this section and “Tyre Pressure Moni-
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tyre Pressure Moni- toring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- For additional information, see “Tyre Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS) (where fitted) that monitors ing and driving” section. toring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Start-
the tyre pressure of all tyres except the spare. ing and driving” section.
TPMS resetting must also be performed after a tyre
The low tyre pressure warning light warns of low or a wheel is replaced, or the tyres are rotated.
tyre pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not func- WARNING
tioning properly.
For additional information, see “Tyre Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- • Radio waves could adversely affect electric
After the power switch is switched ON, this light illu- medical equipment. Those who use a pace-
ing and driving” section and “Vehicle information
minates for about 1 second and turns off. maker should contact the electric medical
display” later in this section.
equipment manufacturer for the possible in-
Low tyre pressure warning: Depending on a change in the outside temperature, fluences before use.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tyre pressure,
the warning light will illuminate. A low tyre pressure
the low tyre pressure warning light may illuminate
even if the tyre pressure has been adjusted prop- • If the light does not illuminate with the power
switch switched ON, have the vehicle checked
warning (e.g., [Low tyre pressure]) also appears in erly. Adjust the tyre pressure to the recommended
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as
the vehicle information display. COLD tyre pressure again when the tyres are cold,
soon as possible.
and reset the TPMS.
When the low tyre pressure warning light illumi-
nates, you should stop and adjust the tyre pressure If the low tyre pressure warning light still continues • If the low tyre pressure warning light illumi-
nates while driving, avoid sudden steering
of all 4 tyres to the recommended COLD tyre pres- to illuminate after the resetting operation, it may
manoeuvres or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
sure shown on the tyre placard located on the driver indicate that the TPMS is not functioning properly.
speed, pull off the road to a safe location and
side centre pillar see “Tyre placard” in the “9. Techni- Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving
cal information” section. The low tyre pressure qualified workshop.
with under-inflated tyres may permanently
warning light does not automatically turn off when For additional information, see “Tyre Pressure Moni- damage the tyres and increase the likelihood
the tyre pressure is adjusted. After the tyre is in- toring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage could
flated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle ing and driving” section and “Vehicle information occur and may lead to an accident and could
must be driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH) display” later in this section. result in serious personal injury. Check the tyre
pressure for all four tyres. Adjust the tyre pres-
sure to the recommended COLD tyre pressure

shown on the tyre placard, located on the Master warning light Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
driver side centre pillar, to turn the low tyre (where fitted) warning light
pressure warning light off. If the light still illu- When the power switch is ON, the master warning
For details about the Rear Automatic Braking sys-
minates while driving after adjusting the tyre light illuminates if any of the following are displayed
tem see “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (where
pressure, a tyre may be flat. If you have a flat in the vehicle information display (see “Vehicle in-
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
tyre, repair it with the emergency tyre punc- formation display” later in this section):
ture repair kit (where fitted) or replace it with a
spare tyre (where fitted) as soon as possible.
• Door/Boot Open Warning Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
• After adjusting the tyre pressure, be sure to

• Parking Brake release warning
OFF (where fitted) warning light
reset the TPMS. Unless the resetting is per- • Low tyre pressure warning (where fitted)
For details about the Rear Automatic Braking sys-
tem see “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (where
formed, the TPMS will not warn of the low tyre • System Fault Display fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
pressure correctly.
• No key warning (where fitted) Seat belt warning light
• When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
• Key ID incorrect warning (where fitted)
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
low tyre pressure warning light will flash for • Intelligent Key system warning (where fitted) The seat belt warning light reminds you to fasten
•
your seat belts. See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —
approximately 1 minute. The light will remain Chassis Control System fault warning (where fit- Seats, Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
on after 1 minute. Contact a NISSAN dealer or ted) System” section.
qualified workshop as soon as possible for If the Driving Aids system warnings (where fitted)
tyre replacement and/or system resetting. appear in the vehicle information display, the mas-
Supplemental Restraint System
• Replacing tyres with those not originally ter warning light also illuminates. See “Lane Depar- (SRS) air bag warning light
specified by NISSAN could affect the proper ture Warning (LDW) system (where fitted)” in the
operation of the TPMS. “5. Starting and driving” section, and/or “Intelligent WARNING
Emergency Braking (IEB) system (where fitted)” in If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it
the “5. Starting and driving” section. could mean that the front air bag, side air bag
CAUTION (where fitted), curtain air bag (where fitted) and/
• The TPMS is not a substitute for regular tyre or pre-tensioner systems will not operate in an
accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or oth-
pressure checking. Be sure to check the tyre
pressure regularly. ers, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
• If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less

or qualified workshop as soon as possible.
than 25 km/h (16 MPH), the TPMS may not op-
erate correctly.
• Be sure to install the specified size of tyres to
all four wheels correctly.

When the power switch is switched ON, the Supple- INDICATOR LIGHTS Door lock indicator light
mental Restraint System (SRS) air bag warning light (where fitted)
illuminates for approximately 7 seconds and then Automatic brake hold indicator
light (white) The door lock indicator light located on the roof
turns off this indicates the system is operational.
console illuminates when all the doors are locked
If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag The Automatic brake hold indicator light (white) il- while the power switch is ON.
•
systems and pre-tensioner systems need servicing luminates when the Automatic brake hold system
is on standby. When the doors are locked with the power door
and the vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer or
lock switch, the door lock indicator light will illu-
qualified workshop: For additional details see “Automatic brake hold” in minate for 30 minutes.
• The supplemental air bag warning light remains the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
• When the doors are locked by pushing the LOCK
on after approximately 7 seconds.
Automatic brake hold indicator button on the Intelligent Key or any request
• The supplemental air bag warning light flashes light (green) switch (where fitted), the door lock indicator
intermittently. light will illuminate for 1 minute.
The Automatic brake hold indicator light (green) il-
• The supplemental air bag warning light does not luminates while the Automatic brake hold system is • The door lock indicator light turns off when any
come on at all. operating. door is unlocked.
Unless checked and repaired, the SRS air bag sys- For additional details see “Automatic brake hold” in For locking or unlocking doors, see “Doors” in the
tem and/or the pre-tensioner seat belt system may the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section. “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
not function properly.
Dipped beam indicator light
For additional details see “SRS air bag warning light”
in the “1. Safety — Seats, Seat belts and Supplemen-
(where fitted)
tal Restraint System” section. This light comes on when the switch is turned to
the position: The headlights will come on and
Vehicle Ahead Detected front side, tail, number plate and instrument lights
warning light (where fitted) remain on. The light also comes on when the head-
For details about the Vehicle Ahead detected warn- light switch is turned to AUTO and it is dark outside.
ing light, see “Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB)
system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section.

Electric Parking brake indicator
light Meter Switch
The electric parking brake indicator light indicates Warning Master warn-
Indicator Display text Buzzer LED
light ing light
that the electric parking brake system is operating.
When the power switch is switched ON, the electric Parking brake
— — — — LED
parking brake indicator light illuminates. When the
e-POWER system is started and the parking brake is
applied
m
Release
released, the warning light turns off. Dynamic parking
— parking Beep LED
If the parking brake is not fully released, the electric
parking brake indicator light remains on. Be sure
brake
m m brake
that the electric parking brake indicator light has Depends on Warning Depends on
System failure — —
turned off before driving. status light ON
m status
If the electric parking brake indicator light illumi- Parking brake

nates or flashes while the brake system warning switch pressed Press brake
— — — LED
light (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that
the electric parking brake system is not functioning
without brake
pedal pressed
m pedal
properly. Have the brake system checked, and if Parking brake can- Release
necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer or qualified not be released — — parking — LED
workshop promptly. automatically m brake
For further parking brake operation information see

Parking brake Warning LED
“Electric Parking Brake” in the “3. Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section. malfunction m
Flashing
light ON
— — —
Flashing

e-Pedal indicator lights Front fog light indicator light Hill Start Assist (HSA) on
(where fitted) indicator light (where fitted)
These indicators show the status of the e-Pedal
The light comes on when the front fog lights are The light illuminates when the conditions of the Hill
Step system.
switched on (see “Fog light switch” later in this sec- Start Assist (HSA) system are satisfied when the ve-
Electronic Stability Programme tion). hicle is stopped on a hill.
(ESP) OFF indicator light Front passenger air Then, the light blinks when the brake pedal is re-
(where fitted) / leased, which indicates that the Hill Start Assist
bag status light
(HSA) system is activated.
(where fitted)
WARNING For additional information, see “Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The front passenger air bag status light OFF ( )
The ESP should remain on unless freeing a ve- (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
will illuminate when the front passenger air bag is
hicle from mud or snow. tion.
turned OFF. When the front passenger air bag is
turned on, the front passenger air bag status light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)
The light comes on when the Electronic Stability
ON ( ) will illuminate.
Programme (ESP) is turned OFF. This indicates that When the power switch is switched ON, the orange
the ESP system and traction control system are not For more details, see “SRS air bag warning light” in
Malfunction Indicator light illuminates. This means
operating. the “1. Safety — Seats, Seat belts and Supplemental
that the system is operational.
Restraint System” section.
Turn the ESP on using the vehicle information dis- If the orange Malfunction Indicator light comes on
play, or restart the e-POWER system and the system High beam assist indicator light while the e-POWER system is running, it may indi-
will operate normally. (See “Electronic Stability Pro- (where fitted)/Adaptive driving cate an engine control system malfunction or mis-
gramme (ESP) system” in the “5. Starting and driving” beam indicator light (where fire.
section.) fitted) On steady and message [Engine malfunction
The light also comes on when switching the power The indicator light illuminates when the headlights Power reduced Service now]:
switch ON. The light will turn off after about 2 sec- come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO An engine malfunction has been detected. STOP
onds if the system is operational. If the light stays position with the High Beam Assist/Adaptive Driv- the e-POWER system. Have the vehicle inspected
on or comes on along with the indicator light ing Beam button pushed. This indicates that the by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. You need
while you are driving, have the ESP system checked high beam assist system and/or adaptive driving to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. beam is operational. (See “Headlight and turn signal
While the ESP system is operating, you might feel a switch” later in this section)
slight vibration or hear the system working when
starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is not a
High beam indicator light
malfunction.
This light comes on when the headlight high beam
is on, or ADB system is active (where fitted), and goes
out when the low beam is selected.

On steady and message [Engine malfunction when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe This light also illuminates in the following condition.
Service Now]:
An engine malfunction has been detected which
driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe
area.
• If the accelerator pedal is depressed when the
vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is placed in
may damage the engine control system. the N (Neutral) position.
To reduce or avoid engine control system dam- In this case, even if the shift lever is shifted into the
When the power switch is in the ON position, the
age: D (Drive) position, the acceleration will be reduced.
power limitation indicator light illuminates and then
• Do not drive at speeds above 70 km/h (43 turns off. While the accelerator pedal is depressed, the light
MPH). illuminates and a message appears in the vehicle
When the power limitation indicator light is illumi-
• Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. nated with the power switch in the READY to drive
information display, and chime will sound. When the
•
accelerator pedal is released, the indicator light and
Avoid steep uphill grades. position, the power provided to the electric motors
the message will turn off and chime will stop.
• If possible, reduce the load being carried or
(for driving and power generator) is reduced. There-
fore the vehicle is not as responsive when the accel- If the light illuminates in a situation other than those
towed. described above, or if it does not turn off, there may
erator pedal is depressed while the power limita-
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer or tion indicator light is illuminated. be a system malfunction. Contact a NISSAN dealer
qualified workshop. You do not need to have your or qualified workshop.
When this light illuminates and any message ap-
vehicle towed to the dealer.
pears on the vehicle information display, follow the ProPILOT Assist indicator light
instructions. (where fitted)
CAUTION
This light illuminates in the following conditions. For details of the ProPILOT Assist system see “ProPI-
Continued vehicle operation without having the
engine control system checked and repaired as • Li-ion battery charge is extremely low. LOT Assist (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced • Li-ion battery temperature is extremely low.
driving” section).
fuel economy and possible damage to the engine
control system, which may affect your warranty • When the temperature of e-POWER system is READY indicator light
high (motor, coolant system, Li-ion battery, etc.).
coverage.
•
The READY to drive indicator light illuminates when
When the power generator output is limited. the e-POWER system is powered and the vehicle
Power limitation indicator light Before the Li-ion battery is discharged and when may be driven.
the Low Fuel warning is also displayed in the vehicle If the light is blinking, keep pushing the power
information display, refuel as soon as possible. switch with the brake pedal depressed until the light
WARNING
If this light illuminates because the Li-ion battery is stops blinking (illuminates).
Power limitation mode can result in reduced cold due to low outside temperatures, move the ve-
power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may hicle to a warmer location.
be lower than other traffic, which could increase
the chance of a collision. Be especially careful If the light illuminates because the Li-ion battery
temperature is extremely high, stop the vehicle in a
safe location and wait until the light turns off.

Rear fog light indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator Door open reminder chime
(where fitted) lights The chime will sound if any door other than the driv-
The light comes on when the rear fog light is The direction indicator lights will flash when the er's door is left open and the power door lock switch
switched on (see “Rear fog light (where fitted)” later turn signal switch or hazard warning flasher switch is held down.
in this section). is turned on. See “Headlight and turn signal switch” Intelligent Key models: The external buzzer will
later in this section and see “Hazard warning flasher sound if the vehicle is being locked remotely or us-
Side light indicator light switch” in the “6. In case of emergency” section for ing an outside door lock switch and any door is
further details. open.
This light comes on when the side light position is
selected, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” later AUDIBLE REMINDERS Parking brake reminder buzzer
in this section for further details.
In addition to the audible reminders described in A buzzer will sound when driving away if the park-
SLIP indicator light this section, a number of other vehicle systems also ing brake has not been released. Stop the vehicle
(where fitted) provide audible warnings or reminders. These in- and release the parking brake.
clude:
When the power switch is switched ON, the SLIP Light reminder chime
indicator light illuminates and then turns off. • Moving Object Detection (MOD) (where fitted)
•
A chime will sound for 10 seconds if the driver's door
The light will blink when the Electronic Stability Pro- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (where fitted) is opened while the external lights are turned on
gram (ESP) system or the traction control system is • Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (where fitted) and the power switch is OFF.
operating, thus alerting the driver that the vehicle is
nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be • Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (where fitted) See “Headlight and turn signal switch” later in this
slippery. • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (where fitted) section for further details on the headlight opera-
•
tion.
You may feel or hear the system working, this is nor- Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) (where fitted)
mal. • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (where fitted)
Fog light reminder chime
If the light illuminates when the ESP system is on, it
alerts the driver to the fact that the system's fail-
• Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) (where fit-
A chime will sound if the power switch is switched
OFF and the headlight switch is in the <AUTO> posi-
ted)
tion (where fitted) and the fog lights are left on.
safe mode is operating, for example the ESP system
may not be functioning properly. Have the system • Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
See “Fog light switch” later in this section for further
(where fitted)
checked by your NISSAN dealer or qualified work- details.
shop. If an malfunction occurs in the system, the • Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (where fitted)
Seat belt reminder chime
ESP system function will be cancelled, but the ve-
hicle is still drivable.
• Driver Attention Alert (DAA) (where fitted)
The seat belt reminder chime reminds you to fasten
For additional information, see “Electronic Stability your seat belts. See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —
Programme (ESP) system” in the “5. Starting and Seats, Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
driving” section. System” section.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
Key reminder buzzer (Intelligent Key CHANGING THE METER SCREEN

models) VIEW (MODELS WITH FULL-SCREEN
The external buzzer will beep 3 times if: DISPLAY)
• The Intelligent Key is removed from the vehicle For the model with full-screen display, the meter
while the power switch is not switched to LOCK. screen view can be changed to expand the vehicle
• The vehicle is being locked remotely or using an information display area. See “Changing the meter
screen view (models with full-screen display)” ear-
outside door lock switch and the Intelligent Key
has been left inside the vehicle. lier in this section for how to change the view.
Park reminder chime HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

JVI1272XZ
A chime will sound if the e-POWER system is Example
INFORMATION DISPLAY
switched OFF and the vehicle is not in the P (Park)
position. The vehicle information display ➀ is located as
shown above, and it displays warnings and infor-
Electric shift control system reminder mation. The following items are also displayed if the
chime vehicle is equipped with them:
If an improper shift operation is performed, for • Drive computer
safety reasons a chime will sound and at the same
time, depending on the conditions, the operation
• Vehicle settings
will be cancelled or the shift position will switch to • Trip computer information
the N (Neutral) position. • Driver Assistance
See “Driving the vehicle” in the “5. Starting and • Cruise control system information
WAC0313XZ
driving” section.
• ProPILOT Assist
• Intelligent Key operation information
The vehicle information display can be changed us-
ing the scroll dial ➀, ➁, and ➂ lo-
• Audio information cated on the steering wheel.
• Navigation - turn by turn ➀ Scroll dial - navigate through the items and
• Guidance and warnings change or select an item in vehicle informa-
• Tyre pressure information

tion display. This scroll dial allows up/down
navigation and push to select
• Other information
➁ - go back to the previous menu
➂ - change from one display screen to
the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
NIC4219

When the power switch is switched ON, the vehicle 3. Speed (where fitted)
information display may display the following
The Speed mode shows the following information.
screens if the vehicle is equipped with them:
• 1. [Home]
• Vehicle speed
• 2. [Blank]
• Average Speed
• 3. [Speed] (where fitted) 4. Drive Computer

• 4. [Drive Computer] — [Average Speed] (Distance The Drive computer shows the average fuel
economy, average vehicle speed, driving time and
& Time)
•
driving distance. You can switch between [Since Re-
5. [ECO Pedal Guide] set], [Since Start] and [Since Refuel] by pushing the
•
WAC0313XZ
6. [Fuel Economy History] <OK> button.
• 7. [Tyre Pressures]
Switches for the vehicle information display are lo-
[Since Reset] can be reset manually by pressing the
• 8. [Energy Flow] cated on the left side of the steering wheel.
<OK> button for more than 2 secs or until reset page
•
appears.
9. [Navigation] (where fitted) ➀ Scroll dial - navigate through the items and
•
[Since Start] will reset after 30 minutes from last
10. [Navigation] (where fitted) change or select an item in vehicle informa-
power OFF. It can be also reset manually by press-
• 11. [Compass] (where fitted)
tion display. This scroll dial allows up/down
navigation and push to select
ing the <OK> button for more than 2 secs or until
• 12. [Audio]
➁ - go back to the previous menu
reset page appears.
• 13. Telephone screen (displays when there is an

➂ - change from one display screen to
[Since Refuel] will be reset automatically each time
when refuelling and when vehicle speed is greater
incoming call)
the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)
•
than 10 km/h (6 MPH) or if vehicle travelled 500m or
14. [Driving Aids] (where fitted) more. It can be also reset manually by pressing the
The displayed images may differ depending on the
• 15. ProPILOT Assist (where fitted) model. <OK> button for more than 2 secs or until reset page
• 16. [Traffic sign] (where fitted)
1. Home
appears
• Warnings. Warnings will only display if there are

The Home mode shows the following information.
Average fuel consumption:
any present. For more information on warnings The average fuel consumption shows the average
and indicators, see “Warning lights, indicator • Vehicle speed fuel consumption since the last reset.
lights and audible reminders” earlier in this sec- • Navigation (where fitted) Average speed:
tion.
• Audio The average speed shows the average vehicle
• 17. [Settings]
2. Blank speed since the last reset.
To control what items display in the vehicle infor-
mation display, see “[Personal Display] (where Blank display.
fitted)” later in this section.

Trip odometer: The [ECO Pedal Guide] bar is not displayed when: 8. Energy Flow
The trip odometer shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven since the last reset.
• The vehicle speed is less than approximately 4
km/h (2 MPH).
Elapsed time: • The shift is in the P (Park), N (Neutral) or R (Re-
The elapsed time shows the time since the last reverse) position.
set.
6. Fuel Economy History
5. [ECO Pedal Guide] function
NIC4351
Classic view
NIC4220
NIC4249
The Fuel Economy History display shows recent fuel

The [ECO Pedal Guide] display can be selected in economy data recorded at 2 minute intervals.
the vehicle information display in the [ECO] mode.
7. Tyre Pressures
Use the [ECO Pedal Guide] function for improving
fuel economy. The tyre pressure mode shows the pressure of all NIC4243
four tyres while the vehicle is driven. Enhanced view
When the [ECO Pedal Guide] bar is in the green range
➀, it indicates that the vehicle is being driven within With the [Tyre ECO advice] function ON, when the
The Energy Flow shows the current energy flow be-
range of the super economy drive. tyre pressure is getting low, [Check Tyre Pressures
tween engine, Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery and front
for Best Energy Economy] ] appears.
When the [ECO Pedal Guide] bar is in the light green wheels.
range ➁, it indicates that the vehicle is being driven When the [Low Tyre Pressure] warning appears, the
➀ Engine
within range of the economy drive. display can be switched to the tyre pressure mode
by pushing the scroll dial to reveal additional details ➁ Li-ion battery
If the [ECO Pedal Guide] bar is out of the green range on the displayed warning.
(➀ and ➁), it indicates that the accelerator pedal is
depressed over the range of economy drive.

The current energy status of the engine, Li-ion bat- 12. Audio 15. ProPILOT Assist (where fitted)
tery and Li-ion battery charge is shown by color or
The audio mode shows the status of audio infor- The ProPILOT Assist mode shows the operating
illumination pattern as follows:
mation. conditions for the following systems:
➀ Engine display colour: 13. Telephone • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
• Grey: When fuel is NOT being consumed
• Steering Assist
•
The telephone mode shows the status of telephone
Orange: When fuel is being consumed information. The display will also be shown when the ProPILOT
➁ Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery display colour: 14. Driver Assistance Assist is turned on. For additional information, see
• Blue: The remaining battery level is normal.
The Driver Assistance mode shows the operating
“ProPILOT Assist (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
• Yellow: The remaining battery level is low. (When condition for the following systems.
driving” section.
16. Traffic Sign Recognition
•
the remaining battery level is low, less power
may be provided to drive than usual.) Forward:
(where fitted)
– Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) (where
NOTE The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides
fitted)
• For the e-POWER system, the engine may also – Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
the driver with information about the most recently
detected speed limit. See “Traffic sign recognition
start when the electric motor is not generat- (where fitted) (where fitted)” later in this section for more details.
•
ing power. The energy flow is not displayed
Lane:
when the electrical power is not generated. 17. [Settings]
• When the vehicle’s brake lights come on, the – Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (where fitted)
The setting mode allows user to change the infor-
brake lights j
A in the Energy Flow also come – Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) (where fit- mation displayed in the vehicle information display
on. ted) and some settings. See the next section.
The charge level display will continuously change • Blind Spot:
as the Li-ion battery charge level increases or de- – Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (where fitted)
creases during normal vehicle operation.
– Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (where fit-
9 and 10. Navigation (where fitted) ted)
When the route guidance is set in the navigation For more details, see “Intelligent Lane Intervention
system, this item shows the navigation route infor- (ILI) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and
mation. driving” section, and/or “Intelligent Emergency
Braking (IEB) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Start-
11. Compass (where fitted)
ing and driving” section.
This display indicates the heading direction of the
vehicle.

[SETTINGS] [Shortcut Menu] [Driver Assistance]
The setting mode allows user to change the infor- A [Shortcut Menu] is available to quickly access cer- To change the status, warnings or turn on or off any
mation displayed in the vehicle information display tain items. The menu can be accessed by pressing of the systems/warnings displayed in the [Driver As-
and some settings: the shortcut switch j A on the steering wheel and sistance] menu, use the scroll dial to select and
• [ESP Setting]
using the scroll dial j
B to select the required item. change a menu item:
•
The following items are available:
• [Steering Assist] (where fitted)
•
[Driver Assistance]
•
[Emergency Lane] (where fitted)
• [Lane]
•
[Personal Display] (where fitted)
•
[Change Display View]
• [Blind Spot] (where fitted)
•
[Head-Up Display] (where fitted)
•
[Audio Source]
• [Emergency Brake]
•
[ECO Settings]
•
[Driver Assistance]
• [Traffic Sign] (where fitted)
•
[Tyre Pressures]
• [Clock]
[Personal Display]
• [CRUISE Navi Link] (where fitted)
• [Vehicle Settings]
[ESP Setting] • [Speed Limit Link] (where fitted)
• [Maintenance]
To change the setting, use the scroll dial to select • [Speed Link Offset] (where fitted)
•
and push it.
• [Parking Aids]
[Display Settings]
• [System]
•
• [Unit/Language]
[Rear Cross Traffic Alert] (where fitted)
• [I-key Link] (where fitted)

Allows user to turn the Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP) system ON or OFF. By default the ESP
• [Driver Attention Alert] (where fitted)
• [Factory Reset] system will be turned ON. If the ESP system is • [Timer Alert]
turned off, the ESP OFF indicator light will illumi- • [Low Temp. Alert]
nate.
• [Steering Effort] (where fitted)
(For more information, see “Electronic Stability Pro-
gramme (ESP) system” in the “5. Starting and driving”
• [Chassis Control]
section) [Steering Assist] (where fitted):
NOTE
• Allows user to turn the [Steering Assist] ON/OFF.
[Lane]:
•
The vehicle should be driven with the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP) system ON for most driv- [Warning]
ing conditions. Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning
NIC4116 (LDW) system ON/OFF. See “Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) system (where fitted)” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section.

• [Intervention] [Emergency Brake]: [Speed Limit Link] (Without Navi-link)
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Lane Interven- • [Front] (where fitted):
Allows user to customise the [Speed Limit Link]
tion (ILI) system ON/OFF. See “Intelligent Lane In- Allows user to turn the Intelligent Emergency
tervention (ILI) system (where fitted)” in the (without Navi-link) options.
Braking (IEB) with pedestrian detection system
“5. Starting and driving” section. (where fitted) ON/OFF. See “Intelligent Emer- • [ON]/[OFF]
• [Vibration Level] (where fitted) gency Braking (IEB) system (where fitted)” in the
(See “Speed Limit Link - ProPILOT Assist (where
Allows user to adjust the level of steering wheel fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
vibration for the LDW system. It can be set to • [Rear] [Speed Link Offset] (where fitted):
[High], [Medium] or [Low]. See “Lane Departure Allows user to turn the Rear Automatic Braking Allows user to set whether the speed limit used by
Warning (LDW) system (where fitted)” in the (RAB) system (where fitted) ON/OFF. See “Rear [Speed Limit Link] should be accepted exactly, or
“5. Starting and driving” section. Automatic Braking (RAB) (where fitted)” in the with a tolerance of -10 km/h (–5 MPH) to +10 km/h
• [Emergency Lane] (where fitted) “5. Starting and driving” section. (+5 MPH) adjust. (See “Speed Limit Link - ProPILOT
[Traffic Sign] (where fitted): Assist (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
Allows user to turn the Emergency Lane Assist
section.)
(ELA) system ON/OFF. See “Emergency Lane As- Allows user to turn the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
sist (ELA) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- ON/OFF. [Parking Aids]:
ing and driving” section. To change the status or turn on or off any of the
[CRUISE Navi Link] (where fitted):
• [Lane Sensitivity] (where fitted) Allows user to turn the [CRUISE Navi Link] (ProPILOT
systems displayed in the [Parking Aids] menu, use
the scroll dial to select and change a menu item:
Allows user to adjust the sensitivity of the ELA Assist with Navi-link) function ON/OFF. (See “Cruise
system (where fitted). It can be set to [Normal], Navi Link - ProPILOT Assist with Navi Link (where • [Moving Object] (where fitted)
[Strong] or [Mild]. See “Emergency Lane Assist fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection
(ELA) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and (MOD) ON/OFF.
[Speed Limit Link] (ProPILOT Assist with
driving” section. Navi-link) (where fitted): • [Display] (where fitted)
[Blind Spot] (where fitted): Allows user to customise the [Speed Limit Link] (Pro-
Allows user to turn the sonar system or the Rear
• [Warning] PILOT Assist with Navi-link) options.
Sonar System (RSS) display ON/OFF.
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) • [OFF]
• [Front ] (where fitted)
system ON/OFF. • [Prompt]
Allows user to turn the front sonar sensors ON/
• [Intervention] (where fitted) • [Auto] OFF.
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Blind Spot In-
tervention system ON/OFF.
(See “Speed Limit Link - ProPILOT Assist (where • [Rear]
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
Allows user to turn the rear sonar sensors ON/
See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Intelligent OFF.
Blind Spot Intervention system (where fitted)” in the

• [Distance] (where fitted) [Chassis Control]: • [Rotation]
Allows user to select the sonar sensor’s detec- • [Trace Control] • [Contents selection]
tion distance ([Far], [Medium] or [Near]). Allows the user to turn the [Trace Control] func- – [Navigation] (where fitted)
• [Volume] tion ON/OFF. (See “Intelligent Trace Control” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
– [Driving Aids] (where fitted)
Allows user to select the volume of the sonar – [Traffic Sign] (where fitted)
tone ([High], [Medium] or [Low]). [Personal Display] (where fitted)
– [Audio] (where fitted)
[Rear Cross Traffic Alert]: To change the display in the [Personal Display]
menu, use the scroll dial to select and change a – [Telephone] (where fitted)
Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) system ON/OFF. (See “Rear Cross Traffic Alert menu item: • [Reset]
(RCTA) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and • [Blank] (See “[Head-up display] (where fitted)” later in this
driving” section.)
• [Navigation] section.)
[Driver Attention Alert]:
• [Time to Destination] [ECO Settings]
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness
on or off. (See “Intelligent Driver Alertness (where • [Trip] This setting allows user to change the [ECO] mode
system settings.
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.) – [Since Reset]
To change the status or turn on or off any of the
[Timer Alert]: – [Since Start]
systems displayed in the [ECO Settings] menu, use
Allows user to adjust the [Timer Alert] or reset. – [Since Refuel] the scroll dial to select and change a menu item:
[Low Temp. Alert]: • [Gear position] • [ECO Drive Mode]
Allows user to turn the Low Temperature Alert func- • [Average speed] – [ECO Cruise Control]
tion ON/OFF. – [Since Reset] – [ECO Climate Control]
[Steering Effort] (where fitted):
Allows user to adjust the power steering to reduce
– [Since Start] • [ECO Info Settings]
– [Since Refuel] – [ECO Indicator]
•
or increase steering effort.
•
[Brake Lamp] – [ECO Drive Report]
[Drive Mode]
• [Standard]
[Head-Up Display] (where fitted) • [View History]
• [Sport]
To change the status or turn on or off any of the
systems displayed in the [Head-Up Display] (HUD),
To reset the [View History]:
1) Select [View History] using the scroll dial.
use the scroll dial to select and change a menu item:
2) Push the scroll dial.
• [Brightness]
3) Select [Yes] by pushing the scroll dial.
• [Height]

• [Tyre ECO advice] [Tyre Pressure Unit]: [Calibrate]:
Push the scroll dial to turn the [Tyre ECO advice] The unit for tyre pressure that displays in the Ve- The tyre pressure is affected by the temperature of
ON/OFF. hicle Information Display can be changed to: the tyre; the tyre temperature increases when the
[Tyre Pressures] • [psi] vehicle is driven. The TPMS system uses tempera-
•
ture sensors in the tyres to compensate for changes
[bar] in temperature in order to prevent false TPMS warn-
The settings in the [Tyre Pressures] menu are all re-
lated to the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System TPMS • [kPa] ings.
(see “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
• [kgf/cm²] The [Calibrate] function resets the previously stored
Use the scroll dial to select and change the unit. temperature value. It is recommended that this
tion). function is performed after the tyre pressures are
• [Target Front] Pressure units conversion table adjusted.
• [Target Rear] kPa psi bar kgf/cm2 See “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
• [Tyre Pressure Unit]
200
210
29
30
2.0
2.1
2.0
2.1
tion.
• [Calibrate] 220 32 2.2 2.2 Use the scroll dial to start or cancel the calibration
[Target Front]: 230 33 2.3 2.3 process. While the calibration process is active, the
The [Target Front] tyre pressure is the pressure 240 35 2.4 2.4 message: [Calibrate] will be displayed.
specified for the front tyres on the tyre placard (see 250 36 2.5 2.5
“Tyre placard” in the “9. Technical information” sec-
[Clock]
250 36 2.5 2.5
tion and “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time
260 38 2.6 2.6
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec- within the vehicle information display.
270 39 2.7 2.7
tion).
280 41 2.8 2.8 • [Display] (where fitted)
Use the scroll dial to select and change the value for 290 42 2.9 2.9 • [Clock Mode] (where fitted)
the [Target Front] tyre pressure.
300 44 3.0 3.0 • [Clock Format]
[Target Rear]: 310 45 3.1 3.1
• [Summer Time] (where fitted)
•
The [Target Rear] tyre pressure is the pressure speci- 320 46 3.2 3.2
fied for the rear tyres on the tyre placard (see “Tyre [Time Zone] (where fitted)
330 48 3.3 3.3
placard” in the “9. Technical information” section and 340 49 3.4 3.4 • Set Clock Manually
“Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where The clock may also be set in the centre display. For
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section). additional information, refer to the separate Nissan-
Use the scroll dial to select and change the value for Connect Owner’s Manual.
the [Target Rear] tyre pressure.

[Vehicle Settings] [Lighting]: • [Auto Door Unlock] (where fitted)
The vehicle settings allows user to change settings The [Lighting] menu has the following options: The [Auto Door Unlock] feature allows user to
for the following menus. • [Welcome Light] customise the auto door unlock options. Use the
• [Power Back Door] (where fitted) The welcome lighting causes the lights to be
scroll dial to change the mode.
• [Lighting] turned on when the doors are unlocked using – [Shift to Park]
•
the Intelligent Key. Use the scroll dial to turn this – [Power OFF]
[Locking] feature ON or OFF.
• [Wipers]
•
– [OFF]
• [Alarm System] (where fitted)

[Mood Lighting] (where fitted)
The brightness of the [Mood Lighting] can be
• [Horn Beeps on Lock] (where fitted)
• [Driving Position] (where fitted) adjusted. Use the scroll dial to select the bright-
When this item is turned on, the horn will beep
and the hazard indicators will flash twice when
• [Rear Door Alert] ness.
locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Use
• [Mirror Fold] [Locking]: the scroll dial to activate or deactivate this func-
The [Locking] menu has the following options: tion.
The vehicle settings can be changed using the scroll
dial. • [I-Key Door Lock] (where fitted) • [Auto Door Lock] (where fitted)
[Power Back Door] (where fitted): When this item is turned on, the request switch The [Auto Door Lock] feature allows user to cus-
This allows user to turn the power tailgate ON or on the door is activated. Use the scroll dial to tomise the auto door lock options. Use the scroll
OFF. activate or deactivate this function. dial to change the mode.
When [Power Back Door] is turned off, the power • [Selective Unlock] (where fitted) • [Vehicle Speed] (where fitted)
tailgate can still be opened and closed by pressing When this item is turned on, and the driver's side • [Shift out of Park] (where fitted)
the open button and moving the tailgate by hand.
Note that the effort required to open/close the
door handle request switch is pushed, only the
driver's side door is unlocked. All the doors can
• [OFF]
power tailgate will be higher than for a non-power be unlocked if the door handle request switch is [Wipers]:
tailgate model pushed again within 1 minute. When this item is The [Wipers] menu has the following options:
turned to off, all the doors will be unlocked when
the door handle request switch is pushed once.
• [Speed Dependent]
The [Speed Dependent] feature can be activated
Use the scroll dial to activate or deactivate this
or deactivated. Use the scroll dial to turn this
function.
feature ON or OFF.

• [Auto Wipe] • [Disable Once] [Mirror Fold]:
The [Auto Wipe] wiper feature can be set to be When this option (where fitted) is selected, the There are three options (where fitted) in the [Mirror
ON or OFF. Use the scroll dial to turn this feature interior movement sensors (where fitted) will be Fold] menu:
ON or OFF. disabled until the next time the alarm system is
• [Auto Fold Off] (where fitted)
•
disarmed.
[Reverse Link] (where fitted) When this item is turned on, the auto fold fea-
The Reverse Link wiper feature can be set to be [Driving Position] (where fitted): ture for the outside rear-view mirrors is disabled.
ON or OFF. From the [Wipers] menu, select [Re- • [Exit Seat Slide] Use the scroll dial to select this function.
verse Link]. Use the scroll dial to turn this feature
ON or OFF. If set to ON, the rear wiper will oper-
This allows user to turn the entry/exit function • [Unfold at Power on] (where fitted)
ON or OFF. Use the scroll dial to turn this func- When this item is turned on, the outside rear-
ate if the front wipers are switched on and the tion ON or OFF. (See “Driving Position Memory view mirrors automatically fold when the power
shift position is in the R (Reverse) position. System (where fitted)” in the “3. Pre-driving switch is switched OFF, and unfold when the
• [Drip Wipe] checks and adjustments” section.) power switch is switched ON. Use the scroll dial
to select this function.
The [Drip Wipe] feature can be set to be ON or [Rear Door Alert] (where fitted):
OFF. From the [Wipers] menu, select [Drip Wipe]. The [Rear Door Alert] feature allows user to custom- • [Unfold at Unlock] (where fitted)
Use the Scroll dial to turn this feature ON or OFF. ise the Rear Door Alert options. Use the scroll dial to When this item is turned on, the outside rear-
If set to ON, the wiper will operate once about 3 change the mode. view mirrors automatically fold when the vehicle
doors are locked, and unfold when the vehicles
seconds after using the washer. This operation
is to wipe washer fluid that has dripped on the • [Horn & Alert] doors are unlocked. Use the scroll dial to select
windscreen. When selected, the alert is displayed and the this function.
horn sounds.
[Alarm System] (where fitted):
The [Alarm System] menu has the following options: • [Alert Only]
• [Always ON] When selected, only the alert is displayed.
• [Ask on Exit] • [OFF]

When this option (where fitted) is selected, the When selected, no alert or horn will be active.
alarm system will provide the choice to disable
the interior movement sensors (where fitted) af-
ter the e-POWER system is switched OFF. Use
the scroll dial to select the preferred function.

Display will also be reset to initial value. Please change the
when engine oil when Factory Reset is selected.
Display timing Action Required
power is
ON CAUTION
Remaining oil life If the oil replacement indicator is displayed,
is less than change the engine oil within two weeks or less
1,500 km than 800 km (500 miles).
(940 miles),
Operating the vehicle with deteriorated oil can
1,000 km
damage the engine.
(625 miles),
Engine Oil
NIC4117 500 km
Service
(312.5 miles), Plan to have your To reset oil control system:
due in
400 km vehicle serviced. 1. Place the power switch in the ON position.
xxx km
[Maintenance] (miles)
(250 miles),
300 km 2. Push the and buttons on the steering
The maintenance mode allows user to set alerts for wheel until [Settings] appears in the vehicle in-
(187.5 miles),
the reminding of maintenance intervals. To change formation display. Use the scroll dial to select
200 km
an item: (125 miles), [Maintenance]. Then push the scroll dial.
Select [Maintenance] using the scroll dial and push 100 km 3. Select the [Service] option and push the scroll
the scroll dial. (62.5 miles). dial.
1. [Service] Have your vehicle
Engine Oil serviced within 4. Push the scroll dial according to the reset instruc-
2. [Air Filter] Remaining oil life tions displayed at the bottom of the [Service]
Service two weeks or less
is 0 km (0 miles). maintenance screen.
3. [Tyre] due than 800 km
(500 miles). For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, see
4. [Other]
your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.
[Service]: The oil change interval cannot be adjusted manu-
ally. [Air Filter] (where fitted):
The [Service] indicator (Oil Control System) displays
the remaining distance to the next oil change. Never The distance to oil change interval is calculated de- This indicator appears when the customer set dis-
exceed one year or 10,000 km (6,250 miles) between pending on the driving conditions and set auto- tance comes for changing the air filter. You can set
oil change intervals. matically by the oil control system. A reminder will or reset the distance for checking or replacing these
be displayed when approaching the end of the ser- items.
vice interval. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, see
When the Factory Reset option is selected in the your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.
vehicle information display, the oil control system

[Tyre]: [Display Settings] – [Rear]
This indicator appears when the customer set dis- The display settings allows user to choose from the • [High Beam Assist] (where fitted)
tance comes for replacing tyres. You can set or re-
set the distance for replacing tyres.
various meter selections. • [Adaptive Headlight] (where fitted)
The display settings can be changed using the scroll • [Seat Memory] (where fitted)
WARNING dial.
• [Speed limiter] (where fitted)
The tyre replacement indicator is not a substitute [Contents Selection]:
Displays available screens that can be shown in the
[Unit/Language]
for regular tyre checks, including tyre pressure
checks. See “Wheels and tyres” in the “8. Mainte- vehicle information display. The units that are shown in the vehicle information
nance and do-it-yourself” section. Many factors display can be changed:
[Route Guidance] (where fitted):
including tyre inflation, alignment, driving habits
To change the setting, use the scroll dial to select • [Distance/Fuel]
and road conditions affect tyre wear and when
tyres should be replaced. Setting the tyre replace-
and push it. • [Tyre Pressure]
ment indicator for a certain driving distance does • [Alert(s)] • [Temperature]

not mean your tyres will last that long. Use the The [Alert(s)] setting allows user to turn the Naviga- • [Language]
tyre replacement indicator as a guide only and tion Settings alerts on or off. Use the scroll dial to select and change the units of
always perform regular tyre checks. Failure to
[AUTO Cruise Display] (where fitted): the vehicle information display.
perform regular tyre checks, including tyre pres-
sure checks could result in tyre failure. Serious ve- The [AUTO Cruise Display] item allows user to turn [Distance/Fuel]:
hicle damage could occur and may lead to a colli- the cruise screen transition on or off. The unit for the fuel consumption that is shown in
sion, which could result in serious personal injury [Welcome Effect]: the vehicle information display can be changed.
or death.
The [Welcome Effect] displays the available • [miles, MPG]
welcome effect settings.
• [km, km/l]
[Other]:
• [Gauges] (where fitted)
• [km, l/100km]
This indicator appears when the customer set dis-
tance comes for checking or replacing maintenance • [Animation] Use the scroll dial to select and change the unit.
items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tyres. • [Sound] [Tyre Pressures]:
Other maintenance items can include such things [Operation guidance]: The unit for tyre pressures that is shown in the ve-
as air filter or tyre rotation. You can set or reset the
The [Operation guidance] displays the available op- hicle information display can be changed to:
distance for checking or replacing the items.
eration guidance settings.
• [psi]
• [Lights]
• [bar]
• [Wiper]
• [kPa]
– [Front]
• [kgf/cm²]

[Temperature]:
The temperature that is shown in the vehicle infor-
mation display can be changed from:
• [°C]
• [°F]
Use the scroll dial to toggle choices.
[Language]:
The language of the vehicle information display can
be changed.
Use the scroll dial to select and change the lan-
guage of the vehicle information display.
[I-Key Link] (where fitted)
The [I-Key Link] can be turned ON/OFF using the
scroll dial. It will display the key synchronised and in
use for this vehicle.
[Factory Reset]
The settings in the vehicle information display can
be reset back to the factory default. To reset the
vehicle information display:
1. Select [Factory Reset] using the scroll dial and
push it.
2. Select [Yes] to return all settings back to default
by pushing the scroll dial.

GENERAL INFORMATION AND WARNINGS
NIC4240

NIC4264

See “Intelligent Key system (where fitted)” in the 7. [Key System Fault See Owner’s
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for Manual] warning
more details.
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the
4. [No Key] [Press and Hold to Stop Intelligent Key system.
Engine] warning If this warning appears while the e-POWER is
This warning appears you try to turn off the e- stopped, the e-POWER system cannot be started. If
POWER system when the door is closed with the this warning appears while the e-POWER system is
Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the e- running, the vehicle can be driven. However, it is rec-
POWER system is ON. Press and hold the start but- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali-
NIC4265 ton to turn off the e-POWER system. fied workshop for repair as soon as possible.
See “Intelligent Key system (where fitted)” in the 8–9. [Tyre Pressure] guidance messages
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for
The displayed images may differ depending on the The tyre pressure mode shows the pressure of all
more details.
model. four tyres while the vehicle is driven.
1. Start operation guidance 5. [Key Battery Low] warning With the [Tyre ECO advice] function ON, when the
This warning appears when the Intelligent Key bat- tyre pressure is getting low, [Check Tyre Pressures
This message appears when the shift position is in
tery is running out of power. for Best Energy Economy] or appears.
the P (Park) position.
This message means that the e-POWER system will
If this warning appears, replace the battery with a 10. [Low Tyre Pressure] warning
new one. See “Intelligent Key battery replacement”
start by pushing the power switch with the brake This warning appears when the low tyre pressure
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
pedal depressed. warning light in the meter illuminates and low tyre
2. Start operation guidance 6. Start operation for Intelligent Key pressure is detected. The warning appears each
system guidance time the power switch is switched ON as long as
This message indicates that the power switch is un- the low tyre pressure warning light remains illumi-
able to unlock the steering lock. Turn the steering This message appears when the Intelligent Key bat-
nated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and
wheel slightly while pushing the power switch. tery is running out of power and when the Intelli-
adjust the pressure to the recommended COLD tyre
gent Key system and vehicle are not communicat-
pressure shown on the tyre placard. (See “ Low tyre
3. [No Key Detected] warning ing normally.
pressure warning light (where fitted)” earlier in this
This warning appears when the door is closed with If this message appears, touch the start button with section and “Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
e-POWER system is ON. Make sure that the Intelli- (See “Push-button power switch” in the “5. Starting section.)
gent Key is inside the vehicle. and driving” section.)
If the Intelligent Key has not moved for more than 2
minutes, move the key and check if the warning
message is still displayed.

11. Occupant Status Display 14. [Headlights] guidance 20. [Parking Aids] Parking Sensor
(where fitted) This message is displayed when a change is made System guidance
In vehicles fitted with Rear Occupant Detection, in to the position of the headlight switch. See “Head- This message appears to indicate the status of the
addition to the Seat Belt Warning Light, the Occu- light and turn signal switch” later in this section. Parking Sensor system (where fitted) or the Rear
pant Status Display will be shown in the Vehicle In- Parking sensor System (where fitted).
15. [Reminder Turn OFF Headlights]
formation Display when any vehicle occupant’s seat Press <OK> on the steering wheel to disable park-
belt is not fastened. The display will remain until oc-
warning
ing sensors and associated systems, such as Rear
cupants have their seat belts securely fastened, or This warning appears when the driver side door is
Automatic Braking (RAB).
until acknowledged by the driver opened with the headlight switch is left ON and the
e-POWER system is switched OFF. Place the head- See “Front and Rear Ultrasonic Parking Sensors
For precautions on seat belt usage, see “Seat belts” (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
light switch in OFF (where fitted) or AUTO position.
in the “2. Safety — Seats, Seat belts and Supplemen- tion.
For additional information, (See “Headlight and turn
tal Restraint System” section.
signal switch” later in this section.) 21. [Parking sensor system fault See
12. Rear Passenger Seat Belt Display Owner's Manual] warning
16. [Headlight System Fault See Owner’s
(Where Fitted)
Manual] warning This warning appears when there is a malfunction
Dependent on vehicle specification, this warning will with the Parking Sensor system (where fitted) or the
This warning appears if the LED headlights are mal-
appear for 65 seconds after the e-POWER system is Rear Parking sensor System (where fitted). (See
functioning. Have the system checked. It is recom-
switched ON. It will also display if the total number “Front and Rear Ultrasonic Parking Sensors (where
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified
of rear buckled seat belt is less than the maximum fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
workshop for this service.
seem during the journey.
For precautions on seat belt usage, see “Seat belts” 17. [Not Available Requires AUTO lights] 22. [Driver Attention Alert] [Take a
in the “2. Safety — Seats, Seat belts and Supplemen- warning Break?] guidance
tal Restraint System” section. This warning is displayed of you try to turn on the This message appears when the Intelligent Driver
dynamic high beam assistant and/or adaptive driv- Alertness (IDA) system detect that the driver atten-
13. [Low fuel level] warning tion is decreasing. (See “Intelligent Driver Alertness
ing beam but the Headlight switch is not in the AUTO
This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank position. (See “Dynamic high beam assistant (where (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, fitted)” in the “5. Instruments and controls” section.) tion.)
preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty
(0) position. 18–19. [Front Wipers] guidance 23. [Driver Attention Alert] [System
This message is displayed when a change is made
fault] (IDA) warning
There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the
tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (0) to the position of the wiper switch. See “Wiper and This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver
position. washer switch” later in this section. Alertness (IDA) system malfunctions. (See “Intelli-
gent Driver Alertness (where fitted)” in the “5. Start-
ing and driving” section.)

24. Door/tailgate open warning Braking (IEB) system (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- 32. [Drive Mode Selector] indicator
ing and driving” section, “Intelligent Forward Colli-
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or the When a driving mode is selected using the [Drive
sion Warning (I-FCW) system (where fitted)” in the
tailgate are open or not closed securely. The vehicle Mode Selector], the selected mode indicator is dis-
icon indicates which door or the tailgate is open on played.
the display. 27. [Power will turn off to save the • [SPORT]
25. Shift position indicator battery] warning
• [STANDARD]
This indicator shows the shift position when the Under the specific conditions, this warning may ap-
pear after the power switch is ON for a certain pe-
• [ECO]
power switch is ON.
riod of time. 33. [Interior Movement Sensors] status
See “Electric shift control system” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section for further details. 28. [Power turned off to save the This screen allows you to turn the [Interior Move-
battery] warning ment Sensors] on or off. Use the scroll dial to select
26. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/ the required option.
Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI)/Blind Under the specific conditions, this warning may ap-
pear after the power is automatically turned OFF to (See “[Alarm System] (where fitted)” in the “5. Instru-
Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent Blind ments and controls” section.)
save the battery.
Spot Intervention/Intelligent
Emergency Braking (IEB)/Intelligent 29. [Release parking brake] warning 34. [Interior Movement Sensors
Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) Enabled] guidance
This warning appears when the accelerator pedal is
guidance depressed when the electric parking brake auto- This message is displayed when the interior move-
matic release function cannot be used. Release the ment sensors for the system have been enabled in
This appears when one or more of the following
electric parking brake manually. the Settings menu.
systems are engaged:
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 30–31. [Driving Position] guidance (See “[Alarm System] (where fitted)” in the “5. Instru-
ments and controls” section.)
• Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) (where fitted)
35. [Interior Movement Sensors
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW) These messages are displayed when a change is
Disabled] guidance
•
made to the Driving Position Memory System set-
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (where fitted) tings. (See “Driving Position Memory System (where This message is displayed when the interior move-
• Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB (where fitted) fitted)” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and ment sensors for the system have been disabled in
• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) adjustments” section.) the Settings menu.
(where fitted) (See “[Alarm System] (where fitted)” in the “5. Instru-
See “Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) system (where ments and controls” section.)
fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section, “Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) system/Intelligent Blind Spot
Intervention system (where fitted)” in the “5. Start-
ing and driving” section, “Intelligent Emergency

36. [Check position of gear lever] 40. [Autohold] [Caution Steep slope] 43. [Exhaust filter maintenance See
warning guidance owner's manual] warning (where fitted)
This warning is displayed when the shift lever is held This message appears and a chime sounds when Your vehicle may also be fitted with a Gasoline Par-
in a position other than the centre position. the Automatic brake hold function is activated while ticulate Filter (GPF). Under certain less-favourable
Make sure that the shift lever is placed in the centre the vehicle is on a steep hill. Apply the foot brake to driving conditions, the GPF may become saturated
position. stop the vehicle moving. (See “Automatic brake or clogged because these driving conditions pre-
hold” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” vent automatic regeneration of the filter. In this
If the warning appears when the shift lever is placed section) case, a warning message (where fitted) will be dis-
in the centre position, contact a NISSAN dealer or played in the vehicle information display. For addi-
qualified workshop immediately. 41. [Autohold] [Steep Slope Apply foot tional details, see “Gasoline particulate filter (GPF)
brake] guidance (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-
37. [Press Brake Pedal] warning
(where fitted) This message appears and a chime sounds if the tion.
[Caution Steep slope] guidance has appeared for
The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill and there is a over about 3 minutes. Then, the parking brake will
44. [Shift to Park] warning
possibility of moving backward, even if the electric automatically be applied and the braking force of This warning appears when the driver's door is
parking brake is applied. Depress the brake pedal to Automatic brake hold will be released, and vehicle opened while the shift is in any position other than
stop the vehicle moving. (See “Electric Parking may move or roll away unexpectedly. Apply the foot P (Park).
Brake” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and brake to stop the vehicle moving. (See “Automatic If this warning appears, push the P position switch
adjustments” section). brake hold” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and to engage the P (Park) position.
38. [Press Brake Pedal] guidance adjustments” section).
An inside warning chime will also sound. (See “Push-
(where fitted) 42. [Autohold] [Press brake to operate button power switch” in the “5. Starting and driving”
This message appears if an attempt is made to re- switch] guidance section.)
lease the electric parking brake manually without This message appears if the Automatic brake hold 45. [Shipping Mode On Push Storage
depressing the brake pedal. (See “Electric Parking switch is pushed without depressing the brake
Brake” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
Fuse] warning (where fitted)
pedal while the Automatic brake hold function is
adjustments” section). This warning may appear if the extended storage
activated. Apply the foot brake and push the switch
switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears,
39. [Press Brake Pedal to prevent to deactivate Automatic brake hold. (See “Automatic
push in the extended storage switch to turn off the
rolling] warning brake hold” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
warning. (See “Fuses” in the “8. Maintenance and
adjustments” section)
This warning appears and a chime sounds if the do-it-yourself” section.)
vehicle moves while the Automatic brake hold func-
tion is activated. Apply the foot brake to stop the
vehicle moving. (See “Automatic brake hold” in the
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section).

46. [Battery Management Fault Service 53. [Chassis Control System Fault See 55. [Temporary Power Control
Now] warning Owner’s Manual] warning Activated] warning
This warning appears if a fault is detected with the This warning appears if the chassis control module This warning appears when the power limitation
battery management system. Have the system detects a malfunction in the chassis control sys- indicator light illuminates. If this warning appears,
checked. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN tem. Have the system checked. It is recommended acceleration performance will be temporarily
dealer or qualified workshop for this service. that you visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop reduced in certain circumstances.
for this service. (See “Chassis control ” in the “5. Start- This warning will also appear if the accelerator pedal
47–50. Engine warning (where fitted) ing and driving” section.) is depressed when the vehicle is stopped and the
Malfunctions or high engine temperature will result
54. [T/M system malfunction Service shift lever is placed in the N (Neutral) position.
in one of these warning messages being displayed.
For additional details, see “If your vehicle overheats” now] warning 56. [Engine Malfunction Power reduced
in the “6. In case of emergency” section. This warning appears if a malfunction occurs in the Service now] warning
electric shift control system.
51. [Stop the vehicle safely] warning This warning appears if an engine malfunction oc-
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as curs. The engine power will be reduced to protect
This warning appears when the system detects that
soon as possible. the engine from further damage. Contact a NISSAN
the vehicle is moving backwards on an uphill road
Since the shift position may not be switched imme- dealer or qualified workshop as soon as possible.
with the shift position in D (Drive), or moving for-
ward on a downhill road with the shift position in R diately, hold the shift lever in that position and con- 57. [e–POWER System Failure Power
(Reverse). The e-POWER system may stall, so stop firm that the shift position has been switched, and reduced] warning
vehicle movement by depressing the brake pedal. then release the shift lever.
52. [When parked apply parking brake] If the vehicle does not automatically apply the P e-POWER system and the power provided to the
(Park) position when the power switch is placed in
warning electric motor is reduced. The displayed message
the OFF position, push the P position switch when will vary depending on the condition of the system
This warning appears if a malfunction occurs in the parking the vehicle, and then confirm that the shift malfunction. Be sure to follow the displayed instruc-
electric shift control system. Contact a NISSAN position indicator is P in the vehicle information dis- tion.
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as possible. play.
When parking the vehicle, make sure that the park-
ing brake is applied during power switch on. If the
parking brake is not applied, the power switch may
not be turned off.

58. [e–POWER System off Stop safely] 62. [e–POWER System Fault Stop Safely] 71. [High Coolant Temp Stop Vehicle See
warning warning Owner’s manual] warning
This warning is displayed when the e-POWER sys- This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the This warning appears when the engine coolant
tem is off due to an error while driving. e-POWER system and the power provided to the temperature is extremely high.
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. electric motor is reduced. The displayed message
will vary depending on the condition of the system CAUTION
59. [e–POWER System Fault Unable to
Restart after power off] warning
malfunction. Be sure to follow the displayed instruc-
tion.
• If this warning appears when the power switch
is ON, stop the vehicle safely as soon as pos-
This warning is displayed if the e-POWER system 63. [Service e–POWER system] warning sible.
cannot be restarted due to an error. Contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop immediately.
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the • If the vehicle is overheated, continuing vehicle
e-POWER system. Contact a NISSAN dealer or quali- operation may seriously damage the engine.
60. [e–POWER System Error Power fied workshop immediately. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “6. In case
reduced Stop Safely] warning of emergency” section for the immediate ac-
64. [e–POWER system off] warning tion required.
This warning is displayed when the e-POWER sys-
e-POWER system and the power provided to the
tem is off due to an error while the vehicle is 72. e–Pedal system failure warning
electric motor is reduced. The displayed message
stopped.
will vary depending on the condition of the system This warning appears when the e-Pedal Step sys-
malfunction. Be sure to follow the displayed instruc- Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. tem is malfunctioning. Have the system checked by
tion. 65–70. EV Mode warnings a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
61. [Service e–POWER System Apply These warnings appear when the EV mode is not
Parking Brake] warning under operating conditions. The displayed message
This message is displayed when the e-POWER sys- will vary depending on the condition of the system.
tem is stopped because an error has occurred in To use the EV mode, correct the condition or wait
the e-POWER system while the vehicle is stopped. until the warning disappears, and then push the EV
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop im- mode switch. If the warning persists, have the sys-
mediately. tem checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
shop as soon as possible.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY DRIVING AIDS WARNINGS AND GUIDANCE MESSAGES
NIC4368

1–5. [Not Available] [System Fault]
warning
This warning appears is one or more of the follow-
ing systems malfunction.
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (where fitted)
• Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) (where fitted)
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (where fitted)
• Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (where fitted)
• ProPILOT Assist (where fitted)
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (where fitted)
• Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) (where fitted)
If the warning continues to display, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop for this service.
6–7. [System fault] warning
This warning appears when the following systems
malfunction.
• Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (where fitted)
• Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) (where fit-
ted)
NIC4147
dealer or qualified workshop for this service.

8–9. [System fault See Owner’s Manual] 13–16. [Temporarily Disabled Front 18–21. [Currently not available] warning
warning (where fitted) Radar Blocked] warning This warning appears when the Intelligent Lane In-
This warning appears when the following systems If the front radar sensor area on the front of the tervention (ILI), Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention
malfunction. vehicle is covered with dirt or obstructed, making it (where fitted) or the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
• Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (where fitted) impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the following system (where fitted) becomes unavailable in the
following conditions:
•
system is automatically turned off.
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (where fitted)
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (ProPILOT Assist • The Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system
system) (where fitted) is turned off
•
dealer or qualified workshop for this service. Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) (where fit- 22–25. [Unavailable Slippery Road]
ted) warning (where fitted)
10–12. [Unavailable Camera
Temperature High] warning
• Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) (where fitted) This warning appears when the following systems
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (where fitted) become unavailable because the road is slippery.
This warning appears if the interior temperature of
the vehicle has reached such a high temperature If the warning message appears, park the vehicle in • Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) (where fitted)
that the sensors for the following systems can no a safe location and turn the e-POWER system off. • Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (where fitted)
longer function reliably. Check to see if the sensor area is blocked. If the sen- • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (where fitted)
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (where fitted) sor area is blocked, remove the blocking material.
• ProPILOT Assist (where fitted)
•
Restart the e-POWER system. If the warning mes-
Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) (where fitted) sage continues to appear, have the system checked. 26–28. [Not available Side Radar
• Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (where fitted) It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or Obstructed] warning (where fitted)
• Steering Assist (where fitted) qualified workshop for this service.
This warning appears when the following systems
Once the interior temperature has reached normal 17. [Steering Assist Not Available Cannot become unavailable because a radar blockage is
levels, the warning should disappear. Detect Lane] guidance (where fitted) detected.
If the warning continues to display, have the system This message may appear when the Steering Assist • Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (where fitted)
checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN system is engaged. The Steering Assist system is • Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (where fitted)
dealer or qualified workshop for this service. automatically cancelled when the lane markers in
the travelling lane cannot be correctly detected for • Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (where fitted)
a period of time due to such items as a snow rut, • Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) (where fitted)
reflection of light on a rainy day or several unclear
lane markers are present.
If you want to use the Steering Assist system again,
cancel the ProPILOT Assist system and set it again
when lane markers are clearly visible.

29–30. [Not Available Front Camera 32. [Not Available, Parking Brake On] 35. [System OFF] warning
Obstructed] guidance (where fitted) guidance (where fitted) This warning is displayed if the RCTA is switched off.
This message may appear when the Steering Assist This message may appear when the Intelligent See “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system (where
and/or Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) system is acti- Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged. fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
vated. Under the following condition, the ICC system is au- 36. [Unavailable Select Driving Aids in
Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist tomatically cancelled: Settings] warning
and/or Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) system is au-
tomatically cancelled:
• The Electric Parking Brake is applied. This warning is displayed if no Driver Assistance fea-
tures are enabled.
•
The above system cannot be used when the Elec-
The camera area of the windscreen is fogged up tric Parking Brake is activated.
or covered with dirt, water, drops, ice, snow, etc. 37–39. Hands on detection warning
• Strong light, such as sunlight or high beams from
33. [Not Available Seat Belt Not
Fastened] guidance (where fitted)
(where fitted)
oncoming vehicles, enter the front camera This warning may appear when the Steering Assist
This message may appear when the Intelligent system is engaged and the following condition(s)
31. [Not Available Visibility is impaired] Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged. occur:
guidance (where fitted)
Under the following condition, the ICC system is au- • When not holding the steering wheel
This message may appear when the Steering Assist tomatically cancelled: • When there is no steering wheel operation
•
system is engaged.
When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. Hold on the steering wheel immediately. When the
Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist
The ICC system cannot be used when the driver’s steering operation is detected, the warning turns
system is automatically cancelled:
off. For additional information, refer to “ProPILOT As-
•
seat belt is not fastened.
When the wiper (HI) operates. sist (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
• When lane markers in the travelling lane cannot
34. [Press Brake Pedal] guidance
(where fitted)
section.
be correctly detected for a period of time due to
40. Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB)
such items as a snow rut, reflection of light on a This message may appear when the ProPILOT As-
rainy day or several unclear lane markers are sist Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is en-
emergency warning (where fitted)
present. gaged and the following condition occurs: This warning appears along with an audible warn-
If you want to use the Steering Assist system again, • While the vehicle is stopped by ProPILOT Assist,
ing, when the Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB)
system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
cancel the ProPILOT Assist system and set it again the driver’s door is opened but the Electric Park-
when lane markers are clearly visible. ing Brake was not activated. See “Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) system
Step on the brake pedal immediately.
tion.

41. Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) CLOCK AND OUTSIDE AIR Outside air temperature (°C or °F)
system guidance (where fitted) TEMPERATURE The outside air temperature is displayed in °C or °F
This screen appears to indicate the status of the in the range of −40 to 60°C (−40 to 140°F).
Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) system. The outside air temperature mode includes a low
See “Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) system temperature warning feature. If the outside air tem-
(where fitted)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section perature is below 3°C (37°F), the indicator ➂ is dis-
played.
42–43. Steering Assist guidance
(where fitted) The outside temperature sensor is located in front
of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road
This message appears when the Steering Assist sys- or engine heat, wind directions and other driving
tem is turned on or off. conditions. The display may differ from the actual
See “ProPILOT Assist (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- outside temperature or the temperature displayed
WAC0521XZ
ing and driving” section. on various signs or billboards.
44. [Only Available with Cruise Control The clock ➀ and outside air temperature ➁ are dis-
ON] guidance (where fitted) played on the upper side of the vehicle information
This message appears when the Steering Assist display.
switch has been pressed while the Cruise Control is
not switched on. Clock
See “ProPILOT Assist (where fitted)” in the “5. Start- For clock adjustment, see “FM/AM radio (with DAB)
ing and driving” section. (where fitted)” in the “4. Display screen, heater and
air conditioner, and audio system” section or the
separate NissanConnect Owner’s Manual (where fit-
ted).

[HEAD-UP DISPLAY]
(where fitted)
jects, which could cause an accident leading • To prevent scratches to the projector glass, do
to severe injury or death. not place any sharp objects on or near the pro-
jector opening.
The [Head-Up Display] (HUD) can display one or • Do not place any objects on the instrument
more of the following features (where fitted): panel which may obstruct the display of the
• Vehicle speed HUD.
• [Navigation] • If you wear polarised sunglasses, the display
• [Driving Aids]
may be difficult to see. Increase the brightness
of the HUD in the vehicle information display
• [Traffic Sign] or remove your sunglasses.
• •
NIC4006
[Audio] Depending on weather conditions (rain, snow,
• [Telephone] sunlight, etc.), the display may be difficult to
see.
NOTE
• For cleaning, use a soft clean dry cloth. If this
• Do not place any type of liquid on or near the is not sufficient, use a soft clean dry cloth
projector. Doing so may cause malfunction of dampened with water, after that use a soft
the equipment. clean dry cloth. Never use a rough cloth, alco-
hol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or
paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent.
They will scratch or cause discolouration of the
projector lens. Do not spray any liquid such as
water on the projector lens. Spraying liquid
NIC4005
may cause the system to malfunction.
• If the displayed image appears distorted, it is
recommended you have the system checked
WARNING by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
• Failure to properly adjust the brightness and
WAC0515XZ
• The HUD has a special windscreen to allow the
position of the displayed image may interfere image to be displayed clearly. If your wind-
with the driver's ability to see through the screen needs replacing, this should be com-
windscreen, which could cause an accident • Do not touch any internal parts of the projec- pleted by a NISSAN dealer.
leading to severe injury or death. tor. Doing so may cause malfunction of the
• Do not use the [Head-Up Display] (HUD) for ex- equipment.
tended periods of time as that can cause you
to not see other vehicles, pedestrians or ob-

HOW TO USE THE HUD NOTE
Emergency information may display even if the
HUD is turned off. For more information see “Driv-
ing Aids/Navigation/Traffic Sign/Audio/Tele-
phone linking” later in this section.
This product includes the following software.
(1) Panasonic Corporation or software developed for
Panasonic Corporation
(2) Third-party software licensed to Panasonic Cor-
poration WAC0516XZ
JVI1787XZ (3) Open source software

Regarding (3) Open source software, it includes NOTE
To turn the HUD on, push the HUD switch. To turn open source software (OSS), including various soft- • The HUD has a built-in sensor ➀ that controls
the HUD off, push the switch again. ware to which license information applies. the brightness of the displayed image. If you
If the HUD is turned off, it will remain off even if the Refer to the license web site at: http://car. block the sensor with an object, the display
vehicle is restarted. panasonic.jp/oss/i02lln39 will darken, making it difficult to see.
The following settings can be changed in the ve- Display brightness • Do not apply strong light to the sensor of the
hicle information display: HUD. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
The brightness of the display may be controlled in
• [Brightness] the vehicle information display. The brightness will DRIVING AIDS/NAVIGATION/
• [Height] also be adjusted automatically according to the ex- TRAFFIC SIGN/AUDIO/TELEPHONE
• [Rotation]
terior ambient lighting brightness.
LINKING
• [Contents selection] The HUD will display Driving Aids and navigation in-
– [Navigation] (where fitted) formation.
– [Driving Aids] The Driving Aids display will show warning situa-
tions for the following systems:
•
– [Traffic Sign]
Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB)
•
– [Audio]
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
•
– [Telephone]
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
•
Reset
Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI)
For more information see “[Settings]” earlier in this
section.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
• Hands-on warning (for vehicles with ProPILOT WINDSCREEN CAUTION

•
Assist) (where fitted)
•
Do not open/release the bonnet when the
Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) front wiper arms are raised from their original
The Navigation System linking display will show the position.
following items:
• Do not operate the washer continuously for
• Junction names more than 15 seconds.
• Arrows indicating turning direction • Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank
• Distance to the next junction is empty or frozen.
• Recommended lane indicator

The windscreen wiper and washer can be operated
The Traffic Signs Recognition (TSR) system linking NIC3986 when the power switch is ON.
display will show the following item: Type A (without <AUTO> mode)
Wiper operation
• Speed Limit Sign
Move the lever up or down to operate the wiper at
The Audio System linking display will show the fol-
the following speeds:
lowing items:
• Songs
• ➀: Intermittent ( ) — Type A
or <AUTO> — Type B (where fitted)
• Radio stations operates the rain-sensing auto wiper system.
The Telephone linking display will show the follow- (See “Rain sensor (where fitted)” later in this sec-
ing item: tion.).
• Caller’s name or phone number – The intermittent operation speed can be ad-
justed by rotating the ring forward j A
NIC3987 (slower) or backward j
B (faster).
Type B (with <AUTO> mode) – The wiper operation speed will vary in accor-
dance with the vehicle speed in the <AUTO>
WARNING position. For example, when the vehicle
In freezing temperatures the washer fluid may speed is high, the intermittent operation
freeze on the windscreen and obscure your vi- speed will be faster.
sion. Warm the windscreen with the defogger be-
fore you wash it.
• ➁: Low ( ) – for continuous low speed op-
eration.
• ➂: High ( ) – for continuous high speed op-
eration.
• ➃: — for a single sweep operation of the wiper.

Washer operation • Leaving the lever in <AUTO> position will not
WARNING
harm the rain sensor system, although occa-
Pull the lever towards you ➄ to operate the washer. In freezing temperatures the washer solution
sional unexpected activation of the wipers
Wiper drip wipe system (where fitted): may occur. may freeze on the rear window and obscure your
•
vision. Warm the rear window with the rear win-
The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds If the switch is left in the <AUTO> position, the dow defogger before using the rear wipers.
after using the washer. This operation is to wipe wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt,
washer fluid that has dripped on the windscreen. fingerprints, oil film or insects are covering the
Rain sensor (where fitted) windscreen of the rain sensor location. The CAUTION
wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or
moisture affects the rain sensor. • Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than 15 seconds.
• Do not touch or cover the windscreen where
• Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank
the rain sensor is located. The wipers may op-
is empty or frozen.
erate unexpectedly when the wiper switch is
in the <AUTO> position and the power switch
is ON. This can cause an injury or may damage The rear window wiper and washer operates when
a wiper. the power switch is ON.
REAR WINDOW Wiper operation

Turn the switch clockwise to the intermittent ( ,
NIC4018
➀) position or continuous ( , ➁) position for
wiper operation.
The sensor ➀ of the rain-sensing auto wiper sys- To stop the wiper operation, turn the switch back to
tem located on the upper part of the windscreen, in the OFF position.
front of the rear view mirror, can automatically turn
on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depend- Washer operation:
ing on the rainfall intensity and the vehicle speed To operate the washer, push the lever towards the
when the lever in the <AUTO> position. front of the vehicle ➂ until the desired amount of
washer fluid is spread on the rear window. The wiper
The sensitivity can be adjusted by rotating the ring
NIC4135 will automatically operate several times.
of the wiper switch forward j A — less sensitive, or
backward j B — more sensitive. Wiper drip wipe system (where fitted):
The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds
NOTE
after using the washer. This operation is to wipe
• Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper washer fluid that has dripped on the windscreen.
system when the car is in the car wash.
The mode can be turned off. For details, see “Vehicle
information display” earlier in this section.

THERMACLEAR HEATED
WINDSCREEN (where fitted)
Reverse synchronisation function • Before activating the ThermaClear system

(where fitted) make sure to remove excess snow/ice from
the windscreen
When the windscreen wiper switch is in either the
intermittent or <AUTO> (where fitted), low or high • Electrical conductors embedded in the wind-
speed position, shifting to the R (Reverse) position screen provide the heating of the windscreen.
will operate the rear window wiper. If damage occurs to the windscreen have the
ThermaClear system checked by a NISSAN
The mode can be turned off. For details, see “Vehicle
dealer or qualified workshop.
information display” earlier in this section.
NOTE
• Reduced performance or deactivation of the
ThermaClear Heated Windscreen may be no-
NAA2062
In the <AUTO> position (where fitted), the rear ticed to preserve the battery. This is not a mal-
Automatic air conditioning system
wiper will not begin to sweep when the vehicle is function.
shifted to the R (Reverse) position. It waits until
the front wipers have made the first sweep.
A ThermaClear Heated Windscreen On/Off
j • NISSAN recommends using the ThermaClear
To defog/defrost the windscreen glass, start the e- system to support defogging of the wind-
POWER system and push the ThermaClear button screen. For more information, see “Heater and
A . The indicator light will come on. Push the button
j air conditioner” in the “4. Display screen,
again to turn the ThermaClear system off. heater and air conditioner, and audio system”
section.
If the ambient temperature is lower than +5°C, the
ThermaClear system will turn off automatically af-
ter approximately 8 minutes. If the ambient tem-
perature is higher than +5°C, it will turn off after ap-
proximately 4 minutes. If the windscreen clears be-
fore this time, push the button again to turn the
ThermaClear system off.
NOTE
• Switch position (where fitted) may vary
slightly from the illustrations above depend-
ing on vehicle specification.
• The ThermaClear system can only be
activated while the e-POWER system is run-
ning.

DEFOGGER SWITCH HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
When the defogger switch is pushed, the indicator NISSAN recommends you to consult the local regu-
light j
A illuminates and the defogger operates for lations concerning the use of lights.
approximately 20 minutes. After the preset time has
passed, the defogger will turn off automatically.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
To turn off the defogger manually, push the defog-
ger switch again.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the electrical
NIC4061
conductors on the surface of the window.
Type A
NIC4136
Type A
NIC4062
Type B
The rear window defogger switch will only operate

when the e-POWER system is running. NIC4137
The defogger is used to reduce the moisture, fog or Type B

frost on the rear window surface and outside door
mirror surface (where fitted) to improve the rear
view.

Lighting Autolight system (<AUTO> —
Turn the switch to the m position ➀: where fitted)
The front side, tail, number plate and instrument

lights will come on. The indicator light in the
instrument panel will come on. The daytime run-
ning lights will turn off.
Turn the switch to the m position ➁:
The headlights will come on and all the other lights

WAC0522XZ
remain on. The daytime running lights will turn off.
CAUTION NIC4138
NOTE
Type A
Never leave the light switch on for extended peri- Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo
ods of time while the e-POWER system is not sensor j A located on the top of the instrument
running. panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight
system; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as
Daytime light system (where fitted) if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.
The front daytime running lights will come on when To activate the autolight system:
the e-POWER system is running. 1. Turn the headlight switch to the <AUTO> position
When the light switch is turned to the or ➀
position, the daytime running lights will turn off. 2. Switch the power switch ON.
To disable the autolight system:
NIC4139
Turn the switch to the , or position.
Type B
The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically. When ac-
tive, the autolight system will:
• Turn on the headlights, front side, tail, number
plate and instrument panel lights automatically
when it gets dark.
• Turn off all the lights when it gets light.

High beam select DYNAMIC HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT
(where fitted)
A camera-controlled high beam assistant which
changes from low beam to high beam automati-
cally.
Precautions:
WARNING
The dynamic high beam assistant cannot com-
pensate for road and weather circumstances WAC0322XZ
while driving. The system saves the driver from
NIC4070
having to operate the switch. The driver always
remains responsible for choosing the correct Dynamic high beam assistant activation:
➀ To select the high beam when in the light setting. To activate the high beam assist system, push the
position, push the lever forward. The high Specific situations in which to operate the head- switch as illustrated when it is in the AUTO position.
beam lights come on and the indicator light switch manually: The high beam assist indicator light in the in-
light illuminates. • In heavy rain, snowy conditions. (general poor
strument panel will illuminate
The system operates as follows:
➁ visibility and bad weather conditions).
•
Push the lever forwards again to select the
low beam ( position). • When the vehicle sensors are dirty, covered or
High beam comes on automatically in dark con-
ditions:
➂ Pulling the lever towards you will flash the broken.
If the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25 MPH)
headlight high beam. • When oncoming or preceding vehicle lights and no other road users are recognised.
are obscured, for example by a solid barrier. The high beam light (blue) comes on addi-
tionally.
• High beam turns off automatically:
If the vehicle speed drops below 30 km/h (18
MPH) or other road users are detected.
The High beam light (blue) turns off.
NOTE
If the dynamic high beam assistant cannot func-
tion (for example: up to 15 seconds after start up,
snow covering front camera or similar) the head-
lights will operate at night in low beam until the

system can activate. At all times, the status of the Precautions: The system will now detect oncoming traffic and
dynamic high beam assistant status system is automatically adjust the beam of the headlights to
shown by the indicator lights in the instrument WARNING avoid blinding drivers of oncoming vehicles. At the
panel. Full dynamic high beam assistant opera- The Adaptive Driving Beam cannot compensate same time it will provide maximum illumination of
tion is shown by the indicator light. If the for road and weather circumstances while driv- the road ahead.
system cannot function, only the
beam indicator light is illuminated.
dipped ing. The system. The driver always remains re-
sponsible for choosing the correct light setting.
• Adaptive Driving Beam comes on automatically
in dark conditions if the vehicle speed is over 40
To disable the dynamic high beam assistant: Specific situations in which to switch off the km/h (25 MPH).
To turn the dynamic high beam assistant off, push
Adaptive Driving Beam:
• Adaptive Driving Beam turns off automatically If
the switch again, or turn the headlight switch to the • In heavy rain, snowy conditions. (general poor the vehicle speed drops below 30 km/h (18 MPH).
, or position. visibility and bad weather conditions).
The light indicates that the Adaptive Driving
ADAPTIVE DRIVING BEAM (where fitted) • When the vehicle sensors are dirty, covered or Beam system is active.
broken.
•
A camera-controlled system which automatically NOTE
maximises night time forward visibility, while pre- When oncoming or preceding vehicle lights
are obscured, for example by a solid barrier. If the Adaptive Driving Beam is not active (for ex-
venting bright light from shining directly at oncom-
ample: up to 15 seconds after start up, camera
ing traffic and blinding drivers of oncoming vehicles.
view blocked, speed below activation threshold,
or in an area well lit by street lighting) the head-
lights will operate in low beam until the system
can activate. The indicator light remains il-
luminated to show that the system is switched
on, but the light remains off until the activa-
tion criteria are met.
To disable the Adaptive Driving Beam:
To turn the Adaptive Driving Beam off, push the
WAC0322XZ
switch again, or turn the headlight switch to the
NSD594 , or position.
Adaptive Driving Beam
Adaptive Driving Beam activation:
To switch on the Adaptive Driving Beam system,
push the switch as illustrated when it is in the AUTO
position. The Adaptive Driving Beam indicator light
in the instrument panel will illuminate.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH
“Friendly Lighting” It is possible to leave the external lights on perma- FRONT FOG LIGHT (where fitted)
nently by switching them back on using the head-
The “Friendly Lighting” function is a convenience fa-
light switch while the power switch is still switched
cility. It allows you to provide lighting from the ve-
OFF. In this case, the light reminder chime will sound
hicle after the power switch has been switched to
when the driver's door is opened.
OFF and the headlight switch is in the <AUTO>
(where fitted) position. Pulling the headlight switch Battery save function for interior light:
toward you once when the power switch is OFF will The interior light will automatically be switched off
activate the headlight for approximately 30 sec- after a period of time if it has been accidentally left
onds. After that period of time, it will automatically on.
switch off.
It is possible to pull the headlight switch up to four
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
NIC3990
times to increase the lighting period up to 2 min-
utes.
NOTE The front fog lights should only be used when vis-
ibility is seriously reduced – generally, to less than
The “Friendly Lighting” function can be cancelled 100 m (328 ft).
by switching the power switch ON again.
The front fog lights can be operated in any head-
Battery save function light switch position ( or or <AUTO>), but
The battery save feature prevents your vehicle from will not operate if the headlight switch is in the
discharging the battery after you have left the ex- <AUTO> position and low beam is not activated.
ternal lights, map lights or room lights on when ex- WAC0323XZ To turn the front fog lights on, turn the fog light
iting the vehicle. This occurs when the power switch switch to the position. The front fog lights and
is switched to OFF after the e-POWER system has indicator light will come on. The fog light switch will
been running.
Direction indicator return to the neutral position ( — ). For additional
Move the lever up or down ➀ to indicate right or information, see “Warning lights, indicator lights and
NOTE left. When the turn is completed, the turn signal is audible reminders” earlier in this section.
The next time the e-POWER system is started the automatically cancelled.
To turn the front fog lights off, turn the fog light
external lights, map lights or room light will come
on again
Lane change signal switch to the position again. The front fog lights
and indicator light will turn off. The fog light switch
Move the lever only part of the way up or down ➁
Battery save function for external lights: will return to the neutral position.
to signal a lane change (right or left). The indicator
If the power switch is switched OFF after driving lights will flash three times before cancelling auto-
but the external lights are accidentally left on, the
matically.
external lights will automatically be switched off as
soon as the driver's door is opened.

HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL
REAR FOG LIGHT (where fitted) To turn the rear fog light on, turn the fog light switch HEADLIGHT AIMING CONTROL
to the position. The rear fog light and indicator
SWITCH (where fitted)
light will come on. The fog light switch will return to
the neutral position ( — ). For additional information,
see “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders” earlier in this section.
To turn the rear fog light off, turn the fog light switch
to the position again.
NIC3989
Type A: Rear fog light only NIC4060
Left hand drive models
NIC3990
Type B: Front and rear fog lights NIC4169
The rear fog light should only be used when visibil- Right hand drive models
ity is seriously reduced – generally, to less than 100 Depending on the number of occupants in the ve-
m (328 ft). hicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight aim-
The rear fog lights can be operated in any headlight ing may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is trav-
switch position ( or or <AUTO>), but will elling on a hilly road, the headlights may directly hit
not operate if the headlight switch is in the <AUTO> the rear-view mirror of the vehicle ahead or the
position and low beam is not activated. windscreen of an oncoming vehicle. The headlight

HORN HEATED STEERING WHEEL
(where fitted)
aiming can be lowered using the switch located on

the driver's side of the instrument panel, next to the
steering wheel.
The higher the number designated on the switch,
the lower the headlight aiming.
When travelling with no heavy load on a flat road,
select position 0.
NISSAN recommends consulting local regulations
on the use of lights.
WAC0565XZ NAA2063
Front (where fitted)
To sound the horn, push the centre pad area of the Push the heated steering wheel switch j A to warm
steering wheel. the steering wheel after the e-POWER system starts.
The indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is
below 30°C (86°F), the system will heat the steering
wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a tempera-
ture between 25 and 45°C (77 to 113°F) dependent
on cabin temperature. The indicator light will remain
on as long as the system is on.
The heated steering wheel system is automatically
turned off after 30 minutes. Push the switch again
to turn the heated steering wheel system off manu-
ally. The indicator light will turn off.

SEAT HEATING (where fitted) POWER OUTLETS
CAUTION
• The battery could run down if the seat heater
is operated while the e-POWER system is not
running.
• Do not use the seat heater for extended peri-
ods or when no one is using the seat.
• Do not put anything on the seat which insu-
lates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, non-
genuine seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
WAC0524XZ may become overheated. NIC4048
Front (where fitted)
• Do not place anything hard or heavy on the
Instrument Panel
The front seats can be warmed by built-in heaters. seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object.
The switches are located on the heater and air con- This may result in damage to the seat heater.
ditioning unit and can be operated independently
of each other.
• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be
removed immediately with a dry cloth.
1. Start the e-POWER system. • When cleaning the seat, never use petrol, thin-
2. Select heat range. ner, or any similar materials.
• For high heat, push the button once (three • If any malfunctions are found or the heated
indicator lights ➀ will illuminate). seat does not operate, turn the switch off and
• For medium heat, push the switch twice (two

have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer
indicator lights ➀ will illuminate). WAC0421XZ
• For low heat, push the button again (one indi- Luggage area
cator light ➀ will illuminate).
12V power outlets are located in the lower part of
3. To turn off the heater, push the button again. the instrument panel and in the luggage area.
Make sure the indicator lights turn off.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automati- WARNING
cally turning the heater on and off. The indicator Take care as the power outlet and plug may be
light will remain on as long as the switch is on. hot during or immediately after use.
NOTE
Switching the e-POWER system off resets the seat
heater to the off position.

CAUTION USB (UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS) REAR screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio
•
system” section.
This power outlet is not designed for use with POWER PORTS (WHERE FITTED)
a cigarette lighter unit.
CAUTION
• Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12
• Do not force a USB device into the connector.
volt, 120 W (10 A) power draw. Do not use Inserting the USB device tilted or upside-down
double adaptors or more than one electrical into the connector may damage the connec-
accessory. tor. Make sure that the USB device is
• Use this power outlet with the e-POWER sys- connected correctly into the connector.
tem running (do not use for extended periods
of time with the e-POWER system stopped).
• Do not use a reversible USB cable. Using the
reversible USB cable may damage the
• When not in use, be sure that the cap is closed. connector.
Do not allow water to come into contact with NIC4253
the outlet.
WIRELESS CHARGER
• Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be Two USB power ports (where fitted) are provided on (WHERE FITTED)
sure to turn off the power switch of the elec- the rear of the console box/armrest unit.
trical accessory being used or switch the e-
These ports are for power supply only. They do not
POWER system power switch OFF to turn the
support data transfer.
power of the vehicle off.
• Fully push the plug in sufficiently. If sufficient
The maximum output current for each port is 2.4A.
Please note that actual output current will depend
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or
on the device connected to the port(s). The charger
the internal temperature fuse may blow.
will provide the appropriate current value to the de-
vice connected based on the protocol used by the
mobile device.
The external device will be charged continuously
NIC4134
while the vehicle power switch is ON.
Some mobile devices cannot be charged depend-
ing on their specifications. 1 Charging pad
2 Indicator
NOTE
A <Qi> logo
j
There are two USB data connection ports (where
fitted) in the console box. See “USB (Universal Se- The wireless charger is located on the front of the
rial Bus) connection ports” in the “4. Display centre console. Lay the smartphone on the <Qi>
logo j
A on the charging pad of the wireless charger.

Charging will start automatically. The smartphone Wireless charger Indicator this occurs, remove the smartphone from the
will be charged continuously while the vehicle wireless charging pad and let it cool down be-
The indicator will illuminate in orange when
power switch is ON. fore putting it back on the charging pad.
the charging process is started.
WARNING When the charging has completed, the indicator il- • The wireless charging process may be
stopped by the status of the smartphone (bat-
•
luminates in green (not applicable to all wireless
Never put metallic materials between the tery temperature, etc.).
charge devices).
wireless charger and a smartphone.
• If a radio noise interference occurs during
•
If a malfunction occurs or the charging process has
Those who use a pacemaker or other medical charging process, put the smartphone onto
stopped, the indicator will blink in orange for 8 sec-
equipment should contact the electric medi- the centre (<Qi> logo) position of the wireless
onds then turn off.
cal equipment manufacturer for the possible charger.
influences before use. Operation of the wireless charger • The wireless charging process will stop during
• Never put cloth over the smartphone during To use the wireless charger, it is necessary to seat process of searching the Intelligent Key.
charging process. the smartphone well within the charging pad. To
• The wireless charging process will not be
• Never charge a smartphone when it is wet.
maximise charging performance, ensure the smart-
phone is fully seated on the centre of the charging
started when a USB (Universal Serial Bus)
• Never put metallic materials or small goods pad over the <Qi> logo j A . Because the location of
cable is connected to the smartphone. The in-
dicator may illuminate in orange or blink if the
such as a cigarette lighter, Intelligent Key or the power receiver may vary depending on the smartphone is put on the wireless charger
memory drive on the charging pad. smartphone, you will need to try and find the area with a USB cable connected. However, charg-
that suits your smartphone. ing is not performed.
CAUTION Because some smartphone cases or accessories • Depending on the type of the smartphone, the
• Do not put an RFID/NFC/credit card between
may adversely affect charging, remove them before
wireless charging.
indicator may remain illuminated in orange
even when the charging process has been
the wireless charger and a smartphone. This
could cause data corruption in the card. Turn off the vibration function of the smartphone completed.
• Do not use the wireless charger with dust ac-

before wireless charging.
cumulated or dirt on the pad. NOTE
• Do not hit the surface of the wireless charger. • Only a <Qi> certified smartphone can be used.
• Do not spill liquid (water, drinks, etc.) on the • The smartphone may become warm during
charging pad. the charging process and the charging may
• Do not use grease, oil or alcohol for cleaning be stopped by the protection function of the
wireless charger. The indicator will blink in or-
charging pad.
•
ange then turn off. This is not a malfunction. If
Do not remove rubber mat (including non
wireless charger mat).

STORAGE
STORAGE TRAYS SUNGLASSES HOLDER CONSOLE BOX

(where fitted)
WARNING
To help prevent injury in an accident or sudden
stop, do not place sharp objects in the trays.
GLOVE BOX
NIC4071
WAC0425XZ Type A
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving
to avoid obstructing the driver's view and to help
NIC2136
prevent an accident.
WARNING
CAUTION
Keep the glove box lid closed while driving to help
Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.
prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
NIC4072
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. Type B
To open the glove box, lift the latch and lower the
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
lid.
WARNING
The centre console box should not be used while
driving so that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.

Type A:
CAUTION CAUTION
To open the console box lid, pull the lever ➀ and • Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the • Do not use the bottle holder for any other ob-
pull up the lid.
cup holder is being used to prevent spillage. If jects that could be thrown about in the vehicle
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches. the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your pas- and possibly injure people during sudden
Type B: senger. braking or an accident.
To open the console box lid, lift the lever ➀ or ➁ • Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard ob- • Do not use the bottle holder for open liquid
and pull up the lid. jects can injure you in an accident. containers.
When the upper lever ➀ is lifted, the upper case is
available for storing small items. When the lower le- BOTTLE HOLDER COAT HOOKS (where fitted)
ver ➁ is lifted, the bottom case is available for stor-
ing larger items.
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.
CUP HOLDERS
NIC4050
SIC3505Z
Front door
CAUTION
Do not apply a load of more than 1 kg (2 lb) to the
NIC4221 hook.
The coat hooks are fitted at the rear assist grips.

WARNING
Cup holders should not be used while driving so MAP POCKET (where fitted)
that full attention may be given to vehicle Map pockets are located in the doors.
operation.
NIC3957
To access the rear cup holders (where fitted), lower Rear door
the centre armrest.

SEAT POCKET (where fitted) WARNING CAUTION
• Always install the cross bars onto the roof side Use care when placing or removing items from
rails before loading cargo of any kind. Loading the roof rack. If you cannot comfortably lift the
cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a
vehicle’s roof may cause vehicle damage. ladder or stool.
• Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded
at or near the cargo carrying capacity, espe- PARCEL SHELF
cially if the significant portion of that load is
carried on the cross bars/roof rack.
• Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle
NIC1835 weight. This is the combined weight of the ve-
Seat pocket (where fitted) hicle, driver, passengers, cargo, and load on
the towing coupling device (where fitted). You
A seat pocket (where fitted) is located on the back can find the maximum gross vehicle weight
of the driver and/or passenger seat. on the vehicle identification label (see “Vehicle
ROOF RAIL (where fitted) identification label” in the “9. Technical
information” section).
• Heavy loading of the cross bars/roof rack has
the potential to affect the vehicle stability and
handling during sudden or unusual handling
manoeuvres.
• Roof rack load should be evenly distributed.
• Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross bar
load capacity.
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps
NIC1452 to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a
sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
Luggage can be carried on the roof by securing
crossbars to the roof rail. Follow all crossbar manu-
facturers instructions for installing and use of the NIC3959
crossbars. The roof rail is designed to carry loads
(luggage plus crossbars) below 75 kg (165 lb). Over-
loading may cause damage to the vehicle.

3. Detach the parcel shelf by simply pulling it rear-
WARNING
wards ➁ through the tailgate opening.
• Never put anything on the parcel shelf, no mat-
ter how small. Any object on it could cause an
injury in case of an accident or if the brakes
are applied suddenly.
• Do not leave the parcel shelf in position when
it is disengaged from the grooves.
• Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury. NIC3960
• Properly secure cargo and do not allow it to

contact the top tether strap when it is
attached to the top tether anchor. Cargo that CAUTION
is not properly secured or cargo that contacts
Make sure the parcel shelf is carefully stored
the top tether strap may damage the top
when not in use in order to prevent any damage.
tether strap during a collision. If the cargo
cover contacts the top tether strap when it is
attached to the top tether anchor, remove the NOTE
cargo cover from the vehicle or store it in its The parcel shelf can be securely stored under the
storage space. If the cargo cover is not luggage compartment floor boards (for vehicles
removed, it may damage the top tether strap without a full size spare wheel).
during a collision. Your child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision if the child re- Installation
straint top tether strap is damaged. 1. Open the tailgate.
2. Insert the parcel shelf by pushing it forwards as
Removal far as possible through the tailgate opening.
1. Open the tailgate (see “Tailgate” in the “3. Pre-driv- 3. Attach the corresponding ropes to each side ➀
ing checks and adjustments” section). of the tailgate.
2. Detach both of the ropes (left and right) ➀ from 4. Close the tailgate (see “Tailgate” in the “3. Pre-
the inside of the tailgate. driving checks and adjustments” section).

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT/BOOT
FLOOR (where fitted)
WARNING
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps
to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do
not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
• Do not put objects heavier than 50 kg (110 lb)
on the load floor.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a luggage
area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
• Only two anchorage points identified by the
top tether labels can be used for top tether
strap anchorage. Under no circumstances
should the luggage hooks be used for top
tether strap anchorage.
The luggage (cargo) compartment or boot floor has

a dual surface (wet and dry), or dual position sys-
tem with loose floorboards that allow different lug-
gage compartment arrangements.
CAUTION
• The carpet finish should face up for all dry use
applications.
• The smooth surface should be used only when
loading wet objects.
NIC4130

• The load should be distributed evenly and Moving the rear board LUGGAGE HOOKS (where fitted)
should not exceed 50 kg (110 lb) on any of the
boards/panels.
• To avoid any damage, the panels/boards
B for
should be placed in the lower position j
heavy loads and securely held with ropes or
straps to prevent any load shift.
Upper position j
A
This position provides a flat load floor when the rear
seat backs are folded forward. It also serves as a NIC3962
concealed load area for objects placed below the
boards.
The luggage hooks are for shopping bags, etc.
NOTE
The parcel shelf can be securely stored under the WARNING
luggage compartment floor boards. • Do not apply a total load of more than 3 kg
Move the boards as illustrated by lifting and sliding (7 lb) to the hook.
each board into the upper position j A.
1) Remove the larger floorboard as illustrated by
A.
lifting and sliding it into the upper position j
2) Repeat the operation with the smaller board.
Lower position j
B
NIC4247
This position maximises the load space in the lug-
gage compartment.
Move both boards as illustrated by lifting and slid- Before the rear board can be moved to the upper or
ing each board into the lower position jB. lower position, it must first be slid forward towards
the lower front area while holding the sides of the
Vertical positions j
C board (A).
These positions provide further subdivisions of the Then slide it backwards to the lower or upper posi-
luggage space by standing either one of the boards tion (B).
vertically in the midway slots provided in the side
trim.

WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS Driver's side main window switch Passenger's window switch
The power window switches are located on the
door panels.
WARNING
• Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle before operating
the power windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of the
power windows.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through WAC0426XZ WAC0535XZ
unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its
systems, do not leave children, people who re-
quire the assistance of others or pets unat- 1. Window lock button The passenger's switch can control its correspond-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- 2. Driver side window ing window. When the window lock button on the
perature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day driver’s switch is pushed, rear passenger’s switches
3. Rear left passenger side window cannot be operated, but the front passenger's
can quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to people and 4. Front passenger side window switch can still be operated.
pets. 5. Rear right passenger side window Automatic function
• It is recommended to instruct all occupants in To open or close the window, push down j A or pull
the safe operation of power windows with par- up jB the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver
ticular emphasis given to the safety and su- side switches) will open or close all the windows.
pervision of children.
Locking rear passenger windows:
When the window lock button is pushed (the indi-
The power windows operate when the e-POWER
cator illuminates), the rear passenger windows can-
system power switch is ON or for approximately 45
not be operated with the rear passenger power
seconds after the e-POWER system power switch is
window switches. The rear passenger windows can
switched OFF. If the drivers or front passenger’s
only be operated with the main switch (driver side
door is opened during this period of approximately
switches). To cancel the rear passenger windows
45 seconds, power to the windows is cancelled. WAC0427XZ
lock, push the window lock button again.
To open a window, push down the power window
switch. The automatic function enables a window to fully
To close a window, pull up the power window switch. open or close without holding the switch down or
up.

To fully open the window, push the power window Operating windows with Intelligent Key If the windows do not close
switch down to the second detent and release the automatically
The windows can be opened or closed (where fit-
switch. To fully close the window, pull the power
ted) by pushing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the If the power window automatic function (closing
window switch up to the second detent and release
key. This function will not operate while the window only) does not operate properly, perform the follow-
the switch. The switch does not have to be held
timer is activated or when the windows need to be ing procedure to initialise the power window sys-
during window operation.
initialised. For details about the key button usage, tem.
To stop the window open/close operation during see “Remote keyless entry system (where fitted)” in
1. Switch the e-POWER system power switch ON.
the automatic function, push down or pull up the the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
switch in opposite direction. 2. Close the door.
Opening:
Window timer: 3. Open the window completely by operating the
To open the windows, push the UNLOCK but-
The window timer allows the window switch to be power window switch.
ton on the key for about 3 seconds after the door is
operated for approximately 45 seconds even if the unlocked. 4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close
e-POWER system power switch is switched OFF. The the window, and then hold the switch more than
To stop opening, release the UNLOCK button.
window timer will be cancelled when the driver’s or 3 seconds after the window is closed completely.
front passenger’s door is opened or the preset time If the window open operation is stopped on the way
5. Release the power window switch. Push the
has expired. while pushing the UNLOCK button, release and
power window switch down and hold it until the
push the button again until the windows open com-
Auto-reverse function: window is fully open.
pletely.
6. Operate the window by the automatic function
WARNING Closing:
to confirm the initialisation is complete.
There is a small distance just before the closed To close the windows, push the LOCK button
7. Perform steps 2 through 6 above for other win-
position which cannot be detected. Make sure on the Intelligent Key for about 3 seconds after the
dows.
that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside door is locked.
the vehicle before closing the windows. If the power window automatic function does not
To stop closing, release the LOCK button.
operate properly after performing the procedure
If the window close operation is stopped on the way above, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
The auto-reverse function enables a window to au- while pushing the LOCK button, release and dealer or qualified workshop.
tomatically reverse when something is caught in push the button again until the windows close com-
the window as it is closing. When the control unit pletely.
detects an obstacle, the window will be lowered im-
mediately.
Depending on the environment or driving condi-
tions, the auto-reverse function may activate if an
impact or load similar to something being caught in
the window occurs.

FIXED GLASS ROOF
(where fitted)
CAUTION WARNING If the sunshade does not operate

• Do not place heavy objects on the glass roof Never allow hands or fingers, or any part of your Due to electrical or mechanical issues, the sunshade
could require initialisation to return it to normal
or surrounding area. body within operating range of the sunshade. You
• Do not hang from the sunshade or hang any could be injured. working order.
objects from it. It may cause damage or defor- Initialisation of the sunshade:
mation to the sunshade. Opening and closing If the sunshade is not functional at all (no move-
• Close the sunshade when you leave the ve- Manual control:
ment is possible) implement the following initialisa-
tion procedure:
hicle for extended periods of time to prevent
To close the sunshade, press and hold the CLOSE
side of the switch ➀. To stop the sunshade from
the inside of the vehicle from reaching high 1. Switch power switch ON.
temperatures.
closing fully, release the switch. 2. Irrespective of sunshade position, press and hold
the CLOSE side of the switch ➀. After 5 seconds
To open the sunshade press and hold the OPEN side
SUNSHADE OPERATION of the switch ➁. To stop the sunshade from open- a step-by-step closing movement starts until the
ing fully, release the switch. front of the sunshade makes contact with the
frame.
Automatic operation:
3. Release the button when the movement has
To fully open or close the sunshade automatically, stopped.
press briefly on the open or close side of the switch
and then release. To stop the sunshade from open- At this point the sunshade should be fully functional.
ing or closing, press either side of the switch. Re-initialisation of the sunshade:
Auto-reverse function: If the sunshade is partially closed, but movement is
When the control unit detects something caught in still possible, implement the following re-initialisa-
the sunshade, the sunshade will open automati- tion procedure:
NIC4044 cally. 1. Switch power switch ON.
NOTE 2. Press and hold the CLOSE side of the switch ➀

➀ Close sunshade and close the sunshade as far as possible.
The auto-reverse function remains active
➁ Open sunshade whether the sunshade is being closed manually 3. Release the button when the movement has
The sunshade operates only when the e-POWER or automatically. stopped.
power switch is ON.

INTERIOR LIGHTS
4. Press and hold the CLOSE side of the switch ➀ MAP LIGHTS
CAUTION
•
again. After 5 seconds a step-by-step closing
movement starts until the front of the sunshade To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the light switch on when the e-
makes contact with the frame.
POWER system is not running for extended
5. Release the button when the movement has periods of time.
stopped.
At this point the sunshade should be fully functional.
• Turn off the lights when you leave the vehicle.
Anti-pinch (auto-reverse) learning of the INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH

sunshade:
After the initialisation or re-initialisation procedure,
it is recommended to perform the anti-pinch learn- WAC0067XZ
ing procedure.
Within 5 seconds of completing the initialisation or
Push the button to turn the map lights on. To turn
re-initialisation procedure described above:
them off, push the button again.
1. Press and hold the CLOSE side of the switch ➀. A
The lights will also turn off after a period of time
complete continuous opening movement fol-
when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the
lowed by a complete continuous closing move-
battery from becoming discharged.
ment will occur.
WAC0066XZ
2. Release the button when the movement has
stopped.
➀ The interior light can be turned ON regardless
of door position. The light will go off after a
period of time unless the power switch is ON
when any door is opened.
➁ The interior lights can be set to operate when
the doors are opened. To turn off the interior
lights when a door is open, push the switch,
the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless
of door position. The lights will go off when
the power switch is switched ON, or the
driver’s door is closed and locked.

ROOM LIGHTS (WHERE FITTED) REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
(WHERE FITTED)
WAC0090XZ WAC0492XZ
WAC0509XZ
Push the button to turn the room lights on. To turn The light over the vanity mirror will turn on when
them off, push the button again. To turn the rear personal lights on, push the button. the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.
The lights will also turn off after a period of time To turn them off, push the button again. When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.
when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the The lights will also turn off after a period of time The lights will also turn off after a period of time
battery from becoming discharged. when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the
battery from becoming discharged. battery from becoming discharged.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

The light comes on automatically when the tailgate
is opened. When the tailgate is closed, the light goes
off.

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys ........................................................................................................................ 152 Garage mode system (where fitted)...................................... 167

NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* key................................ 152 Auto closure (where fitted)........................................................... 168
Intelligent Key (where fitted) ....................................................... 152 Tailgate release lever ........................................................................ 168
Key number.............................................................................................. 153 Security system............................................................................................. 168
New keys .................................................................................................... 153 Alarm system (where fitted) ........................................................ 168
Emergency/mechanical key ....................................................... 153 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) (where fitted).......... 169
Remote opening or closing windows .................................. 153 Bonnet.................................................................................................................. 170
Remote keyless entry system (where fitted)........................... 154 Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................... 170
Using the remote keyless entry system ............................. 155 Opening the fuel-filler lid................................................................ 171
Key operation failure ......................................................................... 155 How to refuel........................................................................................... 171
Intelligent Key system (where fitted) ............................................ 156 When refuelling from a portable fuel container ........... 172
Intelligent Key operating range ................................................ 157 Electric Parking Brake............................................................................... 173
Using Intelligent Key system....................................................... 157 Driving away when towing a trailer....................................... 174
Door locks/unlocks precaution ................................................ 157 Automatic brake hold............................................................................... 174
Doors locking/unlocking ............................................................... 158 How to activate/deactivate Automatic brake
Starting the vehicle with the Intelligent Key................... 159 hold................................................................................................................. 175
Intelligent Key sleep function (where fitted) ................... 159 How to use the Automatic Brake Hold function .......... 176
Troubleshooting guide .................................................................... 160 Driving Position Memory System (where fitted)................... 177
Doors..................................................................................................................... 161 Memory Storage................................................................................... 177
Super Lock system (RHD models) ........................................... 161 Entry/Exit function ............................................................................. 178
Locking/unlocking with the key (vehicle Steering wheel ............................................................................................... 179
battery discharged) ........................................................................... 162 Tilt and telescopic operation ...................................................... 179
Inside door handle.............................................................................. 162 Sun visors........................................................................................................... 179
Power door lock switch .................................................................. 163 Mirrors .................................................................................................................. 179
Child safety lock — rear doors.................................................... 163 Inside rear-view mirror .................................................................... 179
Tailgate ................................................................................................................ 164 Automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror (where
Operating manual tailgate (where fitted) ......................... 164 fitted)............................................................................................................. 180
Operating power tailgate (where fitted) ............................ 164 Outside rear-view mirrors ............................................................. 180
Motion-activated tailgate (where fitted)............................ 166 Vanity mirror............................................................................................ 181
KEYS
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi-
ately wipe until it is completely dry.
(NATS)* KEY
– Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come
Your vehicle can only be driven with the keys spe-
into contact with water or salt water this
cific to your vehicle. Only NISSAN Anti-Theft System
could affect the system function.
(NATS)* keys can be used with your vehicle (see “Se-
curity system” later in this section). – Do not bend, drop or strike it against an-
other object.
INTELLIGENT KEY (where fitted)
– Do not place the Intelligent Key for an ex-
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent tended period in a place where tempera-
Keys, which are registered to your vehicle's Intelli- tures exceed 60°C (140°F).
NPA1625
gent Key system components and NISSAN
Type A – Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Anti-Theft System (NATS*) components. As many as
Key.
4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with
one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a – Do not use a magnetic key holder.
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop prior to use – Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-
with the Intelligent Key system and NATS of your ment that produces a magnetic field such
vehicle. Since the registration process requires eras- as a TV, audio equipment and personal
ing all memory in the Intelligent Key components computers.
when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intel-
ligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer or • If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intel-
qualified workshop.
ligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent Key
*: Immobiliser from unauthorised use to unlock the vehicle.
NPA1626
For information regarding the erasing proce-
Type B CAUTION dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-
1. Intelligent Key • Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. fied workshop.
Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelligent
2. Emergency/Mechanical key (inside the Intel-
Key inside.
ligent Key), see “Emergency/mechanical key”
later in this section • Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you
when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision
3. Key number plate
device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid
damaging it, please note the following.
– The Intelligent Key is water resistant; how-
ever, wetting may damage the Intelligent

KEY NUMBER EMERGENCY/MECHANICAL KEY REMOTE OPENING OR CLOSING
A key number plate ➂ is supplied with your key WINDOWS
Record the key number on the “Security Informa- The windows can be opened or closed with the key.
tion” page at the end of this manual and keep it in a This function will not operate while the window
safe place, but not in the vehicle. The key can only timer is activated or the windows need to be initia-
be duplicated using an original key or the original lised. See, “Windows” in the “2. Instruments and
key number. The key number is required when you controls” section.
have lost all of the keys and do not have the original
Opening
key to duplicate from. If the key is lost, or you need
extra keys, provide an original key or the key num- To open the windows, push and hold the UNLOCK
ber to a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. button on the key for about 3 seconds after
WBD0016XZ the door is unlocked.
NISSAN does not record key numbers, so it is very
important that you keep a record of your key num- To stop opening, release the UNLOCK button.
ber. Intelligent Key and emergency/mechanical key: If the window open operation is stopped mid-op-
The emergency key can be used to unlock the driv- eration while pushing the UNLOCK button, re-
NEW KEYS er's door in emergency situations (e.g. Intelligent lease and push the button again until all the win-
As many as four NATS keys can be registered to one Key dead battery). dows are opened completely.
vehicle at any one time. New keys must be regis-
tered to the NATS components of your vehicle by a
• To remove the mechanical key, release the lock Closing
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.
NISSAN dealer. To close the windows, push and hold the LOCK
When registering a new key at a NISSAN dealer, you
• To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into button on the key for about 3 seconds after the
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to door is locked.
are requested to bring all of your NATS keys with
the lock position.
you. This is necessary because the registration pro- To stop closing, release the LOCK button.
cess will erase and reprogram the memory of your Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
If the window closing operation is stopped mid-op-
vehicle's NATS components. (See “Doors” later in this section.)
eration while pushing the LOCK button, re-
NOTE NOTE lease and push the button again until all the win-
dows are closed completely.
A key number is only required if you have lost all For the driver's side door, it is normal for the key
of your keys and do not have one to duplicate not to go all the way into the key cylinder.
CAUTION
from. If you still have a key, this key can be dupli-
cated by a NISSAN dealer. Always ensure that all windows are fully closed
after remote operation.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM (where fitted)
As many as 4 remote controllers can be used with

CAUTION
•
one vehicle. For information about the purchase
and use of additional remote controllers, contact a When locking the doors using the Intelligent
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key will not function under the fol- • Always remove the Intelligent Key, close all
lowing conditions: windows before operating the Intelligent Key
• When the distance between the Intelligent Key door lock system.
and the vehicle is more than approximately 5 m • Ensure that the driver's door is securely closed
(15 ft). before operating the Intelligent Key door lock
• When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged. system for correct operation of the system.
Type A
NPA1621
All doors can be locked or unlocked from the out- • Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which con-
side by pressing the (LOCK) or (UNLOCK) tains electrical components, to come into con-
button on the Intelligent Key. tact with water or salt water. This could affect
the system function.
WARNING • Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
Super Lock system equipped models: • Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
Failure to follow the precautions below may lead against another object.
to hazardous situations. Make sure the Super
Lock system activation is always conducted
• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tempera-
safely. tures exceed 60°C (140°F).
• When the vehicle is occupied, never super lock
NPA1622
the doors. Doing so will trap the occupants, If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recom-
since the Super Lock system prevents the mends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key
Type B
doors from being opened from the inside of from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorised
A LOCK button
j the vehicle. use of the Intelligent Key to unlock the vehicle. For
B UNLOCK button
j • Only super lock by double-pressing the Intel- information regarding the erasing procedure, con-
ligent Key “LOCK” button when there is a clear tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
C Power tailgate button
j (where fitted)
view of the vehicle. This is to prevent anybody For information regarding the replacement of a bat-
The remote keyless entry system can operate all from being trapped inside the vehicle through tery, see “Intelligent Key battery replacement” in the
door locks (including the tailgate) using the Intelli- the Super Lock system activation. “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
gent Key). The Intelligent Key can operate at a dis-
tance of approximately 5 m (15 ft) from the vehicle For further details on the Super Lock system see
(the effective distance depends upon the conditions “Doors” later in this section.
around the vehicle and the state of the key battery).

USING THE REMOTE KEYLESS Selective door unlock mode: KEY OPERATION FAILURE
ENTRY SYSTEM Selective door unlock mode allows the remote un-
The Intelligent Key may not work properly if:
locking of only the driver's door to prevent an at-
m Locking the doors tacker from entering the vehicle via an unlocked • The Intelligent Key battery is low.
passenger door. See “Intelligent Key battery replacement” in the
1. Switch the power switch OFF and make sure you
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for
have the Intelligent Key with you when exiting 1. Push the button. key battery replacement instructions and the
the vehicle.
– The driver’s door unlocks. required battery type.
2. Close all doors (including the tailgate) and win-
dows.
– Hazard indicator lights flash twice quickly. • The locking/unlocking system has been used
2. Push the button again (if necessary): continuously.
3. Push the button. An anti lock-abuse system prevents the lock mo-
– All doors and the tailgate will be unlocked. tors from overheating and disables the key lock-
– All the doors and the tailgate will lock.
– Hazard indicator lights flash twice slowly. ing operation for a short period of time if the
– Hazard indicator lights flash once for confir-
system is used continuously.
mation. NOTE
4. Operate the door handles to confirm that the Pushing twice on the button all doors will be
• The door handle is being pulled while the key
is being operated.
doors have been securely locked. unlocked.
If the button is pushed with all the doors Switching between convenience and selective
• The vehicle's battery is discharged.
locked, the direction indicators will flash once to re- door lock mode: NOTE
mind you that the doors are already locked. For details, see “Vehicle information display” in the See [No key Detected] warning, [Key battery low]
m Unlocking the doors “2. Instruments and controls” section. indicator, [Key ID Incorrect] warning or Intelligent
Auto-relock (where fitted): Key system warning in “Vehicle information
Convenience door unlock mode:
An auto-relock function will operate a short period display” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
As default, the door unlock (convenience) mode is tion for more information.
set to unlock all the doors and the tailgate with one after a full or partial unlock, if no further user action
push on the button. is taken. The auto-relock will be cancelled if any door
is opened.
Push the button:
– All doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
– Hazard indicator lights flash twice.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
(where fitted)
WARNING In such cases, correct the operating conditions be- • Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
•
fore using the Intelligent Key function or use the extended period in an area where tempera-
Radio waves could adversely affect electric mechanical key. tures exceed 60°C (140°F).
•
medical equipment. Those who use a pace-
maker should contact the electric medical Although the life of the Intelligent Key battery varies If the outside temperature is below -10°C
equipment manufacturer for the possible in- depending on the operating conditions, the bat- (14°F), the Intelligent Key may not function
fluences before use. tery’s life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is properly.
• The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves

discharged, replace it with a new one.
• Do not attach the Intelligent Key to a key
when the buttons are pushed. The radio waves For information regarding replacement of a battery, holder that contains a magnet.
may affect aircraft navigation and communi- see “Intelligent Key battery replacement” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key near equip-
cation systems. Do not operate the Intelligent ment that produces a magnetic field, such as
Key while on an aeroplane. Make sure the but- When the Intelligent Key battery is almost a TV, audio equipment, personal computer or
tons are not operated unintentionally when discharged, firmly apply the footbrake and touch mobile phone.
the unit is stored during a flight. the power switch with the Intelligent key. Then push
the power switch while depressing the brake pedal
• Make sure the Intelligent Key battery is in good
condition. Note that battery life may vary de-
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. For depending on condition, amount of use, ambient
locks and the tailgate by using the Intelligent Key or tails, see “Push-button power switch” in the “5. Start- temperature, etc.
pushing a request button on the vehicle without ing and driving” section.
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The oper- Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not
ating environment and/or conditions may affect completely discharged.
the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following items before using the CAUTION
Intelligent Key system. • Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which con-
tains electrical components, to come into con-
CAUTION tact with water or salt water. This could affect
• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you the functioning of the system.
when operating the vehicle. • Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
• Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle • Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
when you leave the vehicle. against another object.
• Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
• The Intelligent Key may be damaged if it gets
wet. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi-
ately wipe until it is completely dry.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING USING INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
RANGE PRECAUTION
NIC4019
NPA1362 WBD0035XZ
The request button will not function under the fol-

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when lowing conditions: • Do not push the door handle request button
the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating • When the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle. with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as il-
range from the request (lock/unlock) button ➀. If another intelligent key is outside the vehicle, it lustrated. The close distance to the door handle
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or can be locked/unlocked. will cause the Intelligent Key system to have dif-
strong radio waves are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating
• When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera-
ficulty recognising that the Intelligent Key is out-
side the vehicle.
tional range
range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key
may not function properly. • When any door is open or not closed securely • After locking with the door handle request but-
ton, verify the doors are securely locked by op-
The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in) from • When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged erating the door handles.
each request button ➀.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
• To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in-
side the vehicle, make sure you carry the key with
door handle or rear bumper, the request button may
you and then lock the doors.
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating • Do not pull the door handle before pushing the
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who door handle request button. The door will be un-
does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the re- locked but will not open. Release the door handle
quest button to lock/unlock the doors including the once and pull it again to open the door.
tailgate.

DOORS LOCKING/UNLOCKING The request button will not function under the fol-
CAUTION
lowing conditions:
•
Do not leave the duplicate Intelligent Key inside
When the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle. the vehicle as the locking procedure logic will not
If another intelligent key is outside the vehicle, it work.
can be locked/unlocked.
• When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera-
NOTE
tional range.
• When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
If the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle and the
door/tailgate request button is pressed, a buzzer
• When the doors are open or not closed securely. will sound to indicate that the Intelligent Key is
NIC4287
• e-POWER system is running. still inside the vehicle. If another intelligent key is
outside the vehicle, it can be locked/unlocked.
Locking the doors
1. Make sure you have the Intelligent Key when exit-
Unlocking the doors
ing the vehicle. For details about the selective or convenience door
unlock mode settings, see “Vehicle information
2. Close all doors.
display” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
3. Press any of the request button (front doors or
Convenience door unlock mode:
tailgate).
As default, the door unlock (convenience) mode is
– All doors and the tailgate will be locked.
set to unlock all the doors and the tailgate with one
– Hazard indicator lights flash once for confir- push on the door/tailgate request button.
mation.
– All doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
– Super Lock system equipped models: The
– Hazard indicator lights flash twice quickly.
NIC4288 Super Lock system will be activated if the re-
quest button or the Intelligent Key lock but- Selective door unlock mode:
ton is double-pressed. Hazard indicator lights Selective door unlock mode allows the remote un-
Request button (where fitted) flash longer to indicate Super Lock activation. locking of only the driver's door to prevent an at-
When the Intelligent Key is within the range of op- 4. Pull the door handles to confirm that the doors tacker from entering the vehicle via an unlocked
eration, the door locks can be locked or unlocked by have been securely locked. passenger door.
pushing the door handle request button on the 1. Push the door/tailgate request button.
driver’s or front passenger’s door or the tailgate re-
quest button (where fitted). – If the driver's door request button was pressed,
only the driver's door unlocks.
– If the passenger door request button was
pressed, only the passenger door unlocks.

– If the tailgate request button was pressed, only INTELLIGENT KEY SLEEP FUNCTION
the tailgate unlocks.
(where fitted)
– Hazard indicator lights flash twice quickly.
The Intelligent Key has a sleep function where if the
2. Push the request button again within 5 seconds. key is physically not moved for 2 or more minutes, it
– All the doors and the tailgate will be unlocked. will stop transmitting.
– Hazard indicator lights flash twice slowly. If the Intelligent Key has not been physically moved
for 2 or more minutes, the message [No Key De-
NOTE tected] may appear on the Vehicle Information Dis-
• External interference may impair the Intelli- play. Should this occur, physically move the intelli-
gent key to stop the sleep function.
gent Key's operation. In this case, use the
emergency key located in the Intelligent Key.
See “Doors” later in this section for further de-
tails.
• If the vehicle is unlocked and no doors are
opened for a period of time, the doors will au-
tomatically be locked.
STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE

INTELLIGENT KEY
See “Push-button power switch” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
CAUTION
• Make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with
you when starting and driving the vehicle.
• If the Intelligent Key is too far away from the
passenger compartment, the vehicle may not
start. See “Intelligent Key operating range” in
the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”
section.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible cause Action to take

Replace the battery with a new one. See
The [Key battery low] warning appears in
The Intelligent Key battery charge is low. “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and
When pushing the power switch to the vehicle information display.
do-it-yourself” section.
start the e-POWER system
The [Hold key near start button] message
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
appears in the vehicle information display.
The [Shift to Park] warning appears in the
The shift system is not in the P (Park) Press the P position switch to shift to the P
vehicle information display and the inside
position. (Park) position.
warning chime sounds continuously.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you. If you
When pushing the power switch to
The [No Key Detected] warning appears in cannot carry the Intelligent Key, push the
stop the e-POWER system The e-POWER system is running and the
the vehicle information display, the outside power switch 3 consecutive times or push
Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
chime sounds 3 times and the inside warn- and hold the power switch for more than 2
ing chime sounds for a few seconds. seconds.
Intelligent Key sleep function activated. Physically move the intelligent key.
The [Shift to Park] warning appears in the
When closing the door after get- The power switch is OFF and the shift Press the P position switch to shift to the P
vehicle information display and the outside
ting out of the vehicle system is not in the P (Park) position. (Park) position.
warning chime sounds continuously.
When closing the door with the
The outside chime sounds for a few seconds The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
inside lock button (where fitted) in Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
and all the doors unlock. cargo area.
the LOCK position
When pushing the request switch
The outside chime sounds for a few seconds
or the m button on the Intel- and all the doors unlock.
A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
ligent Key to lock the door

DOORS
SUPER LOCK SYSTEM (RHD models) Emergency situations Locking without activating the Super
If the Super Lock system is activated while you are Lock system
WARNING inside the vehicle, for example by a traffic accident
Super Lock system equipped models: or other unexpected circumstances, follow the in- WARNING
structions below. Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when leav-
Failure to follow the precautions below may lead
to hazardous situations. Make sure the Super To release the Super Lock system: ing the vehicle.
Lock system activation is always conducted – Switch the power switch ON.
safely. Locking the doors using the door key cylinder, or by
All doors can now be unlocked and opened from
• When the vehicle is occupied, never super lock inside the vehicle.
a single press of the “LOCK” button on the Intelli-
gent Key. or by a single press of one of the request
the doors. Doing so will trap the occupants,
– Unlock the doors using the Intelligent Key “UN- buttons will not activate the Super Lock system. See
since the Super Lock system prevents the
LOCK” button ( ). “Locking/unlocking with the key (vehicle battery
doors from being opened from the inside of
All doors can now be opened from inside the discharged)” later in this section for further infor-
the vehicle.
mation.
• Only super lock by double-pressing the Intel-
vehicle.
ligent Key “LOCK” button when there is a clear To unlock and open the driver's door from inside
view of the vehicle. This is to prevent anybody the vehicle while the Super Lock system is
active:
from being trapped inside the vehicle through
the Super Lock system activation. 1. Open or break the driver's door window.
2. Insert the key into the outside door key cylinder
Double-pressing the “LOCK” button ( ) on the and turn it towards the rear of the vehicle.
Intelligent Key, or locking the doors by double- 3. The driver's door will unlock and can now be
pressing one of the request buttons (Intelligent Key opened from inside the vehicle.
models) will activate the Super Lock system. Hazard
warning lights flash longer to indicate Super Lock
activation.
When the Super Lock system is active, none of the
doors can be opened from inside the vehicle. This
provides additional security in case of theft or
break-in.
The Super Lock system will be released when all the
doors are unlocked using the Intelligent Key or a
request button.

LOCKING/UNLOCKING WITH THE To lock the door, insert the key into the driver's door INSIDE DOOR HANDLE
key cylinder and turn it towards the rear of the ve-
KEY (vehicle battery discharged)
hicle ➁.
To unlock the door, turn the key towards the front
of the vehicle ➀.
See “Emergency/mechanical key” in the “5. Pre-driv-
ing checks and adjustments” section for instruc-
tions on accessing the Intelligent Key system Emer-
gency key.
CAUTION
NIC3951
The alarm system will be triggered when the door
NIC3795
is opened using the key (NISSAN alarm equipped
models). To stop the alarm, turn the power switch To unlock and open the door, pull the inside door
ON or press the unlock button ( ) on the Intel- handle as illustrated.
WARNING ligent Key.
• When leaving the vehicle, do not leave the key Models with Super Lock system
(where fitted)
inside the vehicle.
Initialising the system after vehicle
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through battery loading or replacement
The door cannot be opened when the Super Lock
system is activated.
systems, do not leave children, people who re- After recharging or replacing the battery, you
quire the assistance of others or pets unat- should release (initialise) the system by:
tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- • Switch the power switch ON.
perature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
• Unlocking the vehicle using the Intelligent Key.

pets.
The driver's door can be locked/unlocked from out-

side using the key/emergency key if the vehicle's
battery is discharged.

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH WARNING CHILD SAFETY LOCK — REAR
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave the key in- DOORS
side the vehicle.
The power door lock switch, located on the door

trimming, can be used to lock ➀ or unlock ➁ all
doors simultaneously from inside the vehicle.
The door lock indicator light ( ) on the roof con-
sole comes on when the doors are locked.
NOTE
NIC4046
Models without the Super Lock system: If a door
Power door lock light NPA1599
is manually opened from inside after having
pressed the Intelligent Key “LOCK” button ( ),
the door will unlock and the power door lock indi- The child safety lock helps prevent doors from be-
cator light ( ) goes out. ing opened accidentally, especially when small chil-
Super Lock equipped models (RHD dren are in the vehicle.
models) When the switch is in the LOCK position, the rear
If the doors are locked by double-pressing the Intel- door can only be opened from the outside by the
ligent Key lock button ( ) or by double-pressing outside door handle.
a request button (Intelligent Key models), the Super Make sure the child safety lock is working prop-
Lock system will be activated. The indicator erly.
NIC4254
light on the roof console comes on to indicate that
all doors are locked, but it will not be possible to use
the button of the power door lock switch to
➀ Press to lock unlock the doors.
➁ Press to unlock Locking the doors with the power door lock switch
will not activate the Super Lock system.
A LHD vehicles
j
B RHD vehicles
j

TAILGATE
WARNING OPERATING MANUAL TAILGATE OPERATING POWER TAILGATE

• Always be sure the tailgate has been closed (where fitted) (where fitted)
securely to prevent it from opening while driv- To operate the power tailgate, the vehicle must be
ing. in the P (Park) position.
• Do not drive with the tailgate open. This could The power tailgate will not operate if the battery
allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn voltage is low.
into the vehicle.
The power tailgate operation can be activated or
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through deactivated in the vehicle information display. (See
unintended operation of the vehicle and or its “Vehicle information display” in the “2. Instruments
systems, including entrapment in windows or and controls” section.)
inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of NOTE
•
NIC4022
others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Ad- For models with motion-activated tailgate:
ditionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- When washing, waxing or maintaining your
hicle on a warm day can quickly become high To open the tailgate, unlock it. Pull up the tailgate to vehicle, placing or replacing the body cover, or
enough to cause a significant risk of injury or open. splashing water to the area around the kick
death to people and pets. The tailgate can be unlocked by: motion sensor, turn off the power tailgate.
• Always be sure that hands and feet are clear • Pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelli- • If the power open or close operation is per-
of the door frame to avoid injury while closing gent Key. formed consecutively, the safety mode acti-
the tailgate.
• Pushing the tailgate request switch (where fit-
vates and the operation cannot be performed
for a certain period of time. In this case, wait
ted).
for a while and then perform the operation.
CAUTION • Pushing the door handle request switch (where
Do not use accessory carriers that attach to the fitted).
tailgate. Doing so will cause damage to the To close the tailgate, pull down until it securely locks.
vehicle.

Power open (using switches) NOTE
The tailgate can be opened by the power tailgate
switch j A or the power tailgate button jC
even if the tailgate is locked. The tailgate can be
unlocked and opened independently of the other
doors, even when they are locked. The tailgate
must be unlocked (or the Intelligent Key must be
within range) to open with the tailgate opener
switch jB.
WBD0026XZ Power close (using switches)

NIC4088 Power tailgate button - Key (example) When the tailgate is fully opened, the tailgate will
Power tailgate switch — Instrument panel fully close automatically by:
• Pushing the power tailgate switch j
A on the in-
strument panel for more than 1 second.
• Pushing the power tailgate button j
C on the key
for more than 1 second.
• Pushing the power tailgate close switch j D on
the lower part of the tailgate for 1 second.
The outside chime sounds when the tailgate starts
closing.
NIC4047
Power close and lock
NIC4023 Power tailgate close and lock switches — Tailgate
Tailgate opener switch
When the tailgate is fully opened and the Intelligent
When the tailgate is fully closed, the tailgate will fully Key is carried with you near the tailgate, the tailgate
open automatically by: will fully close and lock automatically by pushing
A on the in- the power tailgate lock switch j E on the lower part
strument panel for more than 1 second. of the tailgate.
• Pushing the tailgate opener switch j

B. The outside chime sounds when the tailgate starts

C on the key
closing.
for more than 1 second.
The outside chime sounds when the tailgate starts
opening.

Stop and reverse function WARNING MOTION-ACTIVATED TAILGATE
(where fitted) There is a small distance immediately before the (where fitted)
The power tailgate will stop immediately if one of closed position that cannot be detected. Make
the following actions is performed during power sure that all passengers keep their hands, etc.,
open or close. clear from the tailgate opening before closing the
A. tailgate.
• Pushing the tailgate opener switch j

B.
• Pushing the power tailgate close switch j
D on
Manual mode
If power operation is not available, the tailgate can
the lower part of the tailgate.
C on the key.
be operated manually. Power operation may not be
available if multiple obstacles have been detected
And then the power tailgate will move in the re- in a single power cycle or if the battery voltage is NIC4024
verse direction if one of the above actions is per- low. When the power tailgate is turned off, the tail-
formed again. gate can be opened manually by pushing the tail-
The outside chime sounds when the tailgate starts gate opener switch. If the power tailgate opener
to reverse. switch is pushed during power open or close, the
power operation will be cancelled and the tailgate
Auto reverse function can be operated manually. This will allow normal
The auto-reverse function enables the tailgate to power operation functions to resume.
automatically reverse when something is caught in
the tailgate as it is opening or closing. When the
control unit detects an obstacle, the tailgate will re-
verse 5% and stop.
When the switch is operated again the tailgate will
JVP0487XZ
travel in the opposite direction.
A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the tail-
gate. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch sensor The tailgate can be operated using a quick kicking
during power close, the tailgate will reverse and re- motion under the centre of the rear bumper.
turn to the full open position immediately. The kick motion sensor ja is located on the back of
the rear bumper. when you move your foot under
NOTE
and then away from the operating range j b similar
If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed, the to a kicking motion, while carrying the Intelligent
power close function will not operate. Key with you, the tailgate will open or close auto-
matically.

Proper operation technique – When the vehicle is parked near a parking The power tailgate can be reversed when you carry
• While at the rear of the vehicle, begin making a meter. the Intelligent Key.
quick forward kicking motion. • The power tailgate may not operate when Do not apply excessive force when manually op-
• Raise your foot straight under the centre of the your foot remains in the operating range j
b. erating the power tailgate. Excessive force ap-
plied may cause damage to the vehicle.
rear bumper then immediately return your foot
to the ground in a continuous motion. CAUTION GARAGE MODE SYSTEM
• You do not need to hold your foot under the • When the Intelligent Key is carried with you
(where fitted)
bumper or move it side to side. Immediately re- near the tailgate, even someone, who does not
carry the Intelligent Key, may be able to open The tailgate can be set to open to a specific height
turn your foot to the ground.
by performing the following:
•
or close the tailgate with a kick motion.
The kicking motion should be straight, smooth
and consistent. • Do not perform a kick motion near the exhaust 1. Open the tailgate.
•
system components while they are hot. You 2. Pull the tailgate down to the desired position and
After your kick motion is complete, step back may severely burn yourself. hold the tailgate (the tailgate will have some re-
and allow the tailgate to open/close.
• Three beeps will sound and the tailgate will be-
• Do not perform a kick motion on an unstable sistance when being manually adjusted).
place (for example, on a slope or a muddy 3. While holding the tailgate in position, press and
gin moving within 2 seconds after the kick. ground, etc.). hold the power tailgate close and lock switch
D located on the tailgate for approximately 3
j
WARNING Power open or close function seconds or until 2 beeps are heard.
Prevent unintentional tailgate opening/closing. The tailgate will fully open automatically using the
There may be conditions when opening/closing The tailgate will open to the selected position set-
kick motion sensor.
the tailgate is not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key ting. To change the position of the tailgate, repeat
1. Carry the Intelligent Key. steps 1-3 for setting the position of the tailgate.
out of range of the tailgate, (2 m (7 ft) or more) or
inside the vehicle, when washing or working 2. Move your foot under and away from the rear Do not apply excessive force when the auto clo-
around the back of the vehicle. bumper similarly to a kicking motion within the sure is operating. Excessive force applied may
operation range of the kick motion sensor. cause the mechanism to malfunction.
NOTE 3. The tailgate will automatically open or close.
CAUTION
• The kick motion sensor may not function un- Stop and reverse function
Do not set the height of the tailgate below ap-
der the following conditions: The power tailgate will stop immediately if a kick proximately 1/3 of the way to the floor using ga-
– When operating near a location where motion is performed during power open or close. rage mode. Even if you set the height below ap-
strong radio waves are transmitted, such The tailgate can be stopped even if you do not carry proximately 1/3 of the way to the floor, the height
as a TV tower, power station or broadcast- the Intelligent Key. will automatically be set to approximately 1/3 of
ing station. And then the power tailgate will move in the re- the way to the floor.
verse direction if a kick motion is performed again.

SECURITY SYSTEM
AUTO CLOSURE (where fitted) TAILGATE RELEASE LEVER ALARM SYSTEM (where fitted)
When the tailgate reaches the secondary position, The alarm system provides visual and audible alarm
the closure motor engages and pulls the tailgate to signals if parts of the vehicle are disturbed.
its primary latch position.
How to arm the alarm system
Do not apply excessive force when the auto clo-
1. Close all doors, windows, tailgate and bonnet.
sure is operating. Excessive force applied may
cause the mechanism to malfunction. 2. Lock the vehicle using the Intelligent Key (lock
button), for additional information, see “Remote
CAUTION keyless entry system (where fitted)” in the “3. Pre-
• The tailgate will automatically close from the

driving checks and adjustments” section.
secondary position. To avoid pinching, keep WAD0155XZ
3. The Alarm system will arm 20 seconds after the
hands and fingers away from tailgate open- vehicle has been locked.
ing.
Alarm system operation
• Do not let children operate the tailgate.
If the tailgate cannot be opened with the power
door lock switch due to a discharged battery, follow The system will give the following alarm:
these steps.
• The siren sounds intermittently and all direction
1. Fold the rear seats down. (See “Rear seats” in the indicators will flash.
“1. Safety — Seats, Seat belts and Supplemental
Restraint System” section.)
• The alarm automatically turns off after 28 sec-
onds.
2. Insert a suitable tool in the access opening. Move
The alarm is activated when:
•
the release lever to the left. The tailgate will be
The volumetric sensing system (interior move-
unlatched.
ment sensors, where fitted) is triggered.
•
3. Push the tailgate up to open.
Any door/the tailgate is opened.
•
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop as
The bonnet is opened.
soon as possible for repair.
• The power switch is turned on without the own-
er's key being used.

The alarm system will stop when: • Ask on Exit] NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS)
• The vehicle is unlocked using the intelligent key When this option (where fitted) is selected, the
alarm system will provide the choice to dis-
(where fitted)
unlock button.
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)* will not allow
• The power switch is switched ON with a regis-
able the interior movement sensors (where
fitted) after the power switch is switched OFF. the e-POWER system to start without the use of the
tered NATS key. registered NATS key.
Use the scroll dial to select the preferred func-
If the system does not operate as described tion. * Immobiliser
above, have it checked by your NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop. • [Disable Once] If the e-POWER system fails to start using the regis-
When this option (where fitted) is selected, tered NATS key, it may be due to interference from
Interior Movement Sensors The interior movement sensors (where fitted) another NATS key, an automated toll road device or
(where fitted) will be disabled until the next time the alarm an automated payment device on the key ring. Re-
system is disarmed. start the e-POWER system using the following pro-
The interior movement sensors (volumetric sens-
ing) detect movements in the passenger's com- Use the and buttons on the steering cedure:
partment. When the alarm system is set to the wheel to highlight the desired option and press 1. Leave the power switch ON for approximately 5
armed position, it will automatically switch on the the <OK> button. seconds.
interior movement sensors. 2. Switch the power switch OFF and wait approxi-
NOTE
To disable the interior movement sensors: mately 5 seconds.
When the windows are opened by a long press of
1. Press the or buttons on the steering the Intelligent Key unlock button and the ve- 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
wheel until the [Settings] menu is displayed in the hicle automatically re-locks, see “Auto-relock 4. Restart the e-POWER system while holding the
Vehicle Information Display and press the <OK> (where fitted)” earlier in this section, the interior device (which may have caused the interference)
button. movement sensors are disabled to avoid any nui- separated from the registered NATS key or NATS
2. Use the and buttons on the steering sance alarm. Intelligent Key (where fitted).
wheel to highlight [Vehicle Settings] and press If this procedure allows the e-POWER system to
the <OK> button. WARNING start, NISSAN recommends placing the regis-
3. Use the and buttons on the steering To help avoid risk of injury or death through unin- tered NATS key or NATS Intelligent Key (where fit-
wheel to highlight [Alarm System] and press the tended operation of the vehicle and/or its sys- ted) on a separate key-ring to avoid interference
<OK> button. tems, do not leave children, people who require from other devices.
the assistance of others or pets unattended in
4. Three options are available:
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside
• [Always ON] a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.

BONNET FUEL-FILLER LID
• Never open the bonnet if steam or smoke is

CAUTION
•
coming from the engine compartment to
avoid injury. Avoid applying direct water pressure, such as
high-pressure sprayer, on or around the fuel-
filler lid.
CAUTION • Be sure to close the fuel-filler lid and lock it by
The engine will start if the bonnet is opened when locking the vehicle doors before using an au-
e-POWER system is running (to avoid accidents tomatic car wash or a high-pressure car wash.
when performing maintenance).
1. Pull the bonnet lock release handle ➀ located be-

low the driver’s side instrument panel; the bon-
net springs up slightly.
2. Push the lever ➁ underneath the front of the
bonnet sideways as illustrated with your finger-
tips.
3. Raise the bonnet.
NIC3984
4. Remove the support rod and insert it into the
slot ➂.
Hold the coated parts jA when removing or reset- • Do not spray high-pressure water onto the
ting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the capless unit jA when fuel-filler door is open.
metal parts, as they may be hot immediately af- Failure to observe this caution may cause the
ter the engine has been stopped. capless unit to malfunction or cause damage
NIC4030
to fuel system or engine.
When closing the bonnet:
A LHD models
j 1. While supporting the bonnet, return the support
rod to its original position.
B RHD models
j
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to about 8 to 12 in (20 to
30 cm) above the bonnet lock, then let it drop.
WARNING
• Make sure the bonnet is completely closed 3. Make sure it is securely latched.
and latched before driving. Failure to do so
could cause the bonnet to fly open and result
in an accident.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER LID HOW TO REFUEL
NIC4106
WAD0231XZ NIC4105
Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position A (shown).
Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position B may
To open the fuel-filler lid, push the middle left side of The fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel-filler cap. cause fuel pump nozzle to shut off before the tank
the lid. After opening the fuel-filler lid, insert the fuel pump is full.
nozzle directly into the fuel-filler opening and only
NOTE Never move the nozzle during refuelling.
to the first notch on the bottom of the nozzle. When
If the fuel filler lid is locked, it should unlock auto- the fuel pump nozzle is pulled out, the fuel-filler Pull out the nozzle approximately 5 seconds after
matically together with the driver's door during opening will be sealed. the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically (initial
normal use. If selective unlock is selected and shut-off).
To refuel:
only the driver's door is unlocked, the unlock but- Close the fuel-filler lid after refuelling.
ton on the key or the power door lock switch in- Be sure to insert the fuel pump nozzle slowly into
the fuel-filler opening and only to the first notch on If you need to refuel from a portable fuel container,
side the vehicle must be pressed to unlock the
the bottom of the nozzle, before fuelling. Inserting use the funnel supplied with your vehicle. (See
fuel filler lid.
further may cause the fuel pump to stop filling pre- “When refuelling from a portable fuel container”
maturely. later in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not attempt to open the flaps on the fuel-
filler opening using any tool other than the
fuel pump nozzle.
• This fuel-filler opening is only conformable to
normal fuel pump nozzles at gas stations. Us-
ing a nozzle with a small diameter may dam-
age the opening and the fuel system.

• If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it WHEN REFUELLING FROM A Be sure to insert the funnel into the fuel-filler open-
away with water to avoid paint damage. ing slowly and fully. Insert the nozzle of the portable
PORTABLE FUEL CONTAINER
fuel container into the opening along the funnel and
fill the fuel tank.
WARNING After refuelling, remove the funnel from the fuel-
• Petrol is extremely flammable and highly ex- filler opening. Wipe the funnel clean and return it to
plosive under certain conditions. You could be the tool storage area.
burned or seriously injured if it is misused or
mishandled. Always stop the e-POWER system CAUTION
and do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when refuelling.
• Do not insert the nozzle of the portable fuel
container directly into the fuel-filler opening.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after Doing so may damage the opening and the
the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. fuel system.
Continued refuelling may cause fuel overflow,
resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
• Use only the funnel provided with your vehicle.
Otherwise, the fuel-filler opening and the fuel
• Never pour fuel into the throttle body to at- system may be damaged.
tempt to start your vehicle.
• Make sure you remove the funnel before clos-
• Do not fill a portable fuel container in the ve- ing the fuel filler lid and driving the vehicle. Do
hicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an not drive with funnel still inserted in fuel-filler
explosion of flammable liquid, vapour or gas opening.
in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the ground
when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when filling. NIC3985
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the

container while you are filling it. If you need to refuel from a portable fuel container,
– Use only approved portable fuel contain- use the funnel j A stored in the tool storage area
ers for flammable liquid. (located under the luggage board).

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
NOTE tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

When the Automatic brake hold function is active perature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
(Auto Hold indicator is green), under the following can quickly become high enough to cause a
conditions, the Electric Parking Brake will auto- significant risk of injury or death to people and
matically be applied and the braking force of Au- pets.
tomatic brake hold will be released: • Before leaving the vehicle, confirm that the ve-
• The braking force is applied by the Automatic hicle is held by the parking brake.
brake hold function for 3 minutes or longer.
• The shift system is in the P (Park) position. NOTE
NIC4222 • The Electric Parking Brake is applied manually. • Do not start driving while the parking brake is
• The driver's seat belt is unfastened.

applied this may cause the parking brake to
overheat or reduce its effectiveness, which
The Electric Parking Brake can be applied or re- • The driver's door is opened. could result in an accident.
leased by operating the parking brake switch j
A.
A up ➀ the indicator light
• The power switch is switched OFF. • A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with-
To apply: Pull the switch j
will illuminate. • A malfunction occurs in the Automatic brake out releasing the parking brake. See “Audible
reminders” in the “2. Instruments and
hold function.
To release: With the power switch ON, depress the controls” section.
To keep the Electric Parking Brake released after
A down ➁. The
brake pedal and push the switch j
indicator light will turn off.
switching off the power switch: While the power • While the Electric Parking Brake is applied or
switch isON, press the brake pedal, deactivate Auto- released, an operating sound is heard from the
Before driving, check that the brake indicator light matic brake hold if activated and push the parking lower side of the rear seat. This is normal and
goes out. For additional information, see “Warn- brake switch jA before switching the power switch does not indicate a malfunction.
ing lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
OFF. • When the Electric Parking Brake is frequently
applied and released in a short period of time,
The Electric Parking Brake also has an auto release WARNING the parking brake may not operate in order to
function. • Be sure the Electric Parking Brake is released prevent the parking brake system from over-
heating. If this occurs, operate the Electric
The parking brake will automatically release when before driving. Failure to do so could cause
brake failure and lead to an accident. Parking Brake switch again after waiting ap-
you drive away using the accelerator with the shift
system in D (Drive) or R (Reverse). For safety rea- • Do not release the parking brake from outside
proximately 1 minute.
sons, parking brake will not release automatically the vehicle. • The Electric Parking Brake can only be
when the driver's door is open.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through
released with the power switch ON.

quire the assistance of others or pets unat-

AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD
• If the Electric Parking Brake must be applied DRIVING AWAY WHEN TOWING A The Automatic brake hold function maintains the
while driving in an emergency, pull up and hold braking force without the driver having to depress
TRAILER
the parking brake switch. When you release the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped at a
the parking brake switch, the parking brake Please note the following points to prevent the ve- traffic light or an intersection.
will be released. hicle from rolling back unintentionally on a gradi-
As soon as the driver depresses the accelerator
• While pulling up the Electric Parking Brake
ent.
pedal again, the Automatic brake hold function is
switch while driving, the parking brake is ap- • Pull and hold the parking brake switch and press deactivated and the braking force is released. The
plied and a chime sounds. The parking brake the accelerator. The parking brake will remain operating status of Automatic brake hold can be
indicator light in the meter and in the parking engaged and prevent any tendency to roll back displayed.
brake switch illuminate. This does not indicate down the slope.
a malfunction. The Electric Parking Brake indi- • You can release the parking brake switch as WARNING
cator lights in the meter and in the parking
brake switch turn off when the parking brake
soon as the e-POWER system is delivering
enough power to the wheels.
• The Automatic brake hold function is not de-
signed to hold the vehicle on a steep hill or
is released. slippery road. Never use the Automatic brake
Depending on the weight of the vehicle and trailer
• When pulling the Electric Parking Brake switch and the steepness of the slope, there may be a ten- hold function when the vehicle is stopped on
up with the power switch OFF, the parking dency to roll back downhill when driving away from a steep hill or a slippery road. Failure to do so
brake switch indicator light will continue to il- a standstill. You can prevent this by pulling up the may cause the vehicle to move.
luminate for a short period of time. parking brake switch as you press the accelerator
(in the same way as with a conventional handbrake).
• Warnings may appear to request that the
driver retake control by depressing the brake
CAUTION pedal.
To park the vehicle in cold climates press the Park
(P) button, and place suitable chocks at both the
• When the Automatic brake hold function is ac-
tivated, but fails to maintain the vehicle at a
front and back of a wheel with the Electric Park- standstill, depress the brake pedal to stop the
ing Brake released. If the Electric Parking Brake is vehicle. If the vehicle unexpectedly moves due
applied in cold climates, the brake may become to the outside conditions, the chime may
frozen and cannot be released. sound and warnings may appear.
• Be sure to deactivate the Automatic brake
hold function when using a drive-through car
wash or towing your vehicle.
• Make sure the shift is in the P (Park) position
and apply the Electric Parking Brake when
parking your vehicle, exiting the vehicle. or
loading or unloading luggage. Failure to do so

could cause the vehicle to move or roll away NOTE • The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill.
unexpectedly and result in serious personal To maintain the braking force to keep the vehicle NOTE
injury or property damage. to a standstill, a noise may be heard. This is not a
• If any of the following conditions occur, the malfunction. The Automatic brake hold function retains the
last state until the driver changes the option even
Automatic brake hold function may not func-
tion. Have the system checked promptly by a HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE if the power switch is switched off.
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Failure AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD How to deactivate the Automatic brake
to operate the vehicle in accordance with hold function
Activation of the Automatic brake hold
these conditions could cause the vehicle to
move or roll away unexpectedly and result in
function While the Automatic brake hold function is acti-
serious personal injury or property damage vated, push the Automatic brake hold switch to turn
off the Automatic brake hold indicator light and de-
– A warning message appears. activate the Automatic brake hold function. To de-
– The indicator light on the Automatic brake activate the Automatic brake hold function while
hold switch does not illuminate when the the braking force has been maintained by the Auto-
switch is pushed. matic brake hold function, depress the brake pedal
• When the vehicle stops on a slope, depress the
and push the Automatic brake hold switch.
brake pedal firmly until the Automatic brake
hold indicator light (green) illuminates. CAUTION
• The Automatic brake hold function will not be
NIC4223
Make sure to firmly depress and hold the brake
pedal when turning off the Automatic brake hold
activated if the slip indicator light, Electric
function while the braking force is applied. When
Parking Brake indicator light, Brake system
the Automatic brake hold function is deactivated,
warning light (yellow), or master warning light 1. With the power switch switched ON, press the Au-
tomatic brake hold switch ➀. The indicator light
the braking force will be released. This could
illuminates and the [Chassis Control System
cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpect-
Fault See Owner’s Manual] warning message on the Automatic brake hold switch illuminates.
edly.
appears.
2. When the Automatic brake hold function goes
Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling may re-
into standby, the Automatic brake hold indicator
The Automatic brake hold function is operated by sult in serious personal injury or property
light (white) illuminates.
applying sufficient braking force to hold the vehicle damage.
To use the Automatic brake hold function, the
in its place, so there are cases when this hold func-
following conditions need to be met:
tion is maintained even if the accelerator pedal is
depressed. In this situation, it is advised to depress • The driver's seat belt is fastened.
the brake pedal first, then to turn off the Automatic • The Electric Parking Brake is released.
brake hold switch. This will cancel the hold function
• The vehicle is not in the P (Park) position.

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC To start the vehicle from standstill – The driver's seat belt is unfastened.
BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION With the vehicle not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) – The driver's door is opened.
For additional information on using Automatic position, depress the accelerator pedal while the – The power switch is switched OFF.
brake hold, refer to the instructions outlined in this braking force is maintained. The braking force will
– A malfunction occurs in the Automatic
section. automatically be released to restart the vehicle. Au-
brake hold function.
tomatic brake hold indicator light (white)
To maintain braking force illuminates and Automatic brake hold will return to • When the vehicle stops, but the braking force
automatically standby. is not automatically applied, depress the
brake pedal firmly until the Automatic brake
With the Automatic brake hold function activated Parking hold indicator light (green) illuminates.
and the Automatic brake hold indicator light (white)
When the vehicle is in the P (Park) position with the
illuminated, depress the brake pedal to stop the ve-
braking force maintained by the Automatic brake
hicle and the Automatic brake hold indicator light
hold function, the Electric Parking Brake will auto-
(green) illuminates.
matically be applied and the braking force of Auto-
The braking force is automatically applied without matic brake hold will be released. The Automatic
your foot pressing on the brake pedal. While the brake hold indicator light turns off. When the Elec-
braking force is maintained, the Automatic brake tric Parking Brake is applied with the braking force
hold indicator light (green) illuminates. See “Warn- maintained by the Automatic brake hold function,
ing lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the braking force of Automatic brake hold will be
the “2. Instruments and controls” section. released. The Automatic brake hold indicator light
turns off.
NOTE
The Automatic brake hold indicator light (green) NOTE
will not illuminate if the brake pedal is not de-
pressed with sufficient force to hold the vehicle
• Under the following conditions, the Electric
Parking Brake will automatically be applied
or is released too quickly when the vehicle is and the braking force of Automatic brake hold
stopped. will be released and the Automatic brake hold
indicator light turns off.
CAUTION – The braking force is applied by the Auto-
Confirm the Automatic brake hold indicator light matic brake hold function for 3 minutes or
(green) is illuminated before removing your foot longer.
from the brake pedal.
– The vehicle is in the P (Park) position.
– The Electric Parking Brake is applied manu-
ally.

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
The Driving Position Memory System features two If a new position is stored in the same memory • When the shift system is shifted from P (Park) to
functions: switch, the previous memory will be deleted. any other position.
• Memory Storage Confirming memory storage Linking user profile to a stored memory
• Entry/exit function Push the <SET> switch. If the main memory has not position (models with navigation
been stored, the indicator light will come on for ap- system)
MEMORY STORAGE
proximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has a The user profile can be linked to a stored memory
position stored, the indicator light will stay on for position with the following procedure.
approximately 5 seconds.
1. Switch the power switch ON while carrying the
Selecting memorised position Intelligent Key that was registered to the vehicle
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location and apply the with a user profile function.
parking brake. NOTE
2. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least Make sure the other Intelligent Key is far apart.
1 second. Otherwise, the vehicle may detect the wrong
The driver’s seat will move to the memorised po- Intelligent Key.
NIC3980 sition with the indicator light flashing, and then 2. Adjust the position of the driver's seat and out-
the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds. side mirrors.
Two positions for the driver’s seat and outside mir- System operation 3. Switch the power switch OFF.
rors can be stored in the Driving Position Memory The Driving Position Memory System will not work The next time you log in (selecting the user on the
System memory. Follow these procedures to use or will stop operating under the following condi- display) after switching the power switch ON while
the memory system. tions: carrying the Intelligent Key, the system will auto-
1. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside mirrors to the • When the vehicle is moving.
matically adjust to the memorised driving position.
(See the separate NissanConnect Owner’s Manual.)
desired position by manually operating each ad-
justment switch. • When the adjusting switch for the driver’s seat is
operated while the Driving Position Memory Sys-
2. Push the <SET> switch and, within 5 seconds, tem is operating.
push the desired memory switch (1 or 2).
The indicator light for the pushed memory
• When the memory switch 1 or 2 is pushed for
less than 1 second.
switch will stay on for approximately 5 seconds
after pushing the switch. • When the seat has already been moved to the
memorised position.
When the memory is stored in the memory, a
buzzer will sound. • When no position is stored in the memory
switch.

Linking an Intelligent Key to a stored ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION 4. Use the and buttons on the steering
memory position (models without wheel to highlight [Exit Seat Slide] and press the
This system is designed so that the driver's seat will
navigation system) <OK> button.
automatically move. This allows the driver to get
Each Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored into and out of the driver's seat more easily. Use the scroll dial to turn the [Exit Seat Slide]
memory position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the function ON or OFF.
Operation
following procedure.
The driver's seat will slide backward:
1. Follow steps 1-3 in “Memory Storage” earlier in this
section for storing the memory position. • When the driver's door is opened and the power
switch is OFF.
2. The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come on. While the indicator light is on • When the power switch is switched OFF with the
for 5 seconds, press the button and the driver's door open.
button on the Intelligent Key in succession. The driver's seat will return to the previous position:
The hazard warning light will blink and the indi-
cator light of the linked memory switch will blink
• When the power switch is switched ON.
twice. After the indicator light goes off, the Intel- NOTE
ligent Key is linked to that memory setting.
The driver's seat will not return to the previous
Once it is linked, when the power switch is OFF, position if the seat switch is operated when the
pressing the button on the Intelligent Key will seat is at the exit position.
move the driver’s seat and outside mirrors to the
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or cancelled
linked memory switch position.
through the [Vehicle settings] the vehicle informa-
NOTE tion display by performing the following:
• If a new memory position is stored in the 1. Press the or buttons on the steering
wheel until the [Settings] menu is displayed in the
linked memory switch, then the Intelligent Key
will link the new position and overwrites the Vehicle Information Display and press the <OK>
previous position. button.
• The linked memory feature can be turned ON 2. Use the and buttons on the steering
wheel to highlight [Vehicle Settings] and press
of OFF using the [I-Key Link] setting in the ve-
hicle information display. See “[Settings]” in the <OK> button.
the “3. Instruments and controls” section. 3. Use the and buttons on the steering
wheel to highlight [Driving Position] and press
the <OK> button.

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS MIRRORS
WARNING INSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRROR

• Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
• Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to
you than is necessary for proper steering op-
eration and comfort. The driver’s air bag in-
flates with great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of po-
sition in any way, you are at greater risk of in- NIC3968
jury or death in a crash. You may also receive
SPA2143Z
serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you
are up against it when it inflates. Always sit CAUTION
back against the seatback and as far away as
Do not store the sun visor before returning it to its ➀ Day position
practical from the steering wheel. Always use
the seat belts.
original position. ➁ Night position
The night position ➁ will reduce glare from the
1. To block out glare from the front, move the main headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
TILT AND TELESCOPIC OPERATION sun visor downwards.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the main WARNING
sun visor from the centre mount and move it to Only use the night position ➁ when necessary, as
the side. it reduces rear-view clarity.
WAD0127XZ
Pull the lock lever ➀ down and adjust the steering

wheel up, down, forward or rearward to the desired
position. Push the lock lever up securely to lock the
steering wheel in place.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE OUTSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRRORS Adjusting — Remote control
MIRROR (where fitted) (where fitted)
WARNING Select the left or right outside rear-view mirror us-
• Check the position of all mirrors before driving the appropriate selection switch ➀ (the indica-
ing. Altering their position while driving could tor light jA on the selected mirror switch illumi-
distract your attention from the driving opera- nates), then adjust the mirror to the desired position
tion. by pushing the control as illustrated ➁.
• Objects viewed in the outside mirrors are Folding — Manual control
closer than they appear.
•
Fold the outside rear-view mirror by pushing it to-
Never touch the outside rear-view mirrors wards the rear of the vehicle.
while they are in motion. Doing so may pinch
your fingers or damage the mirror. Folding — Remote control (where fitted)
NPA1273
• Never drive the vehicle with the outside rear- The outside rear-view mirrors fold when the out-
view mirrors folded. This reduces rear view vis- side rear-view mirror folding button ➂ is pressed.
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- ibility and may lead to an accident. To unfold, push the button again.
cally adjusts the reflection according to the inten-
sity of the following vehicle's headlights on the sen- NOTE
sor jC. If the mirror becomes displaced from its adjusted
The automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror will oper- position, use the following procedure to return it
A shows
ate when the power switch is ON. The light j to the correct geared position:
the system is activated. 1. Fold the mirrors electronically using the outside
The automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror can be rear-view mirror folding button.
deactivated by pressing the power button j B . The 2. Wait until the mirror emits a strong noise, this
light j
A will turn off to show system deactivation. confirms that the mirror has correctly engaged.
3. Fold out the mirrors electronically using the out-
CAUTION NIC3995 side rear-view mirror folding button.
Do not cover the sensor, hang any object on the
4. Adjust the mirror to the correct driving angle us-
mirror or spray glass cleaner directly on the mir-
ing the remote control, see “Adjusting — Remote
ror. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sen-
control (where fitted)” earlier in this section.
sor, resulting in improper operation.

Reverse tilt-down feature (where fitted) VANITY MIRROR
When reversing the vehicle, the right or left outside
mirror will turn downward automatically to provide
better rear visibility.
1. Switch the power switch to the ON position.
2. Shift to the R (Reverse) position.
3. Choose the right or left outside mirror by operat-
ing the outside mirror control switch.
4. The selected outside mirror surface tilts down-
NIC4119
ward
NPA842Z
When one of the following conditions has occurred, Left hand drive
Folding — Auto Fold (where fitted) the outside mirror surface will return to its original
The outside rear-view mirrors automatically unfold position.
when the power switch is switched on or when the
vehicle doors are unlocked. Use the [Mirror Fold]
• The vehicle is shifted out of the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
menu of the Vehicle Information Display to select
the moment that the mirrors are to be automati- • The vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h (5 MPH).
cally folded and unfolded. The Auto Fold feature can • The selected outside mirror is deselected using
also be switched off. See “[Mirror Fold]” in the “2. In- the outside mirror control switch.
struments and controls” section. • The power switch is switched to the OFF posi-
tion.
NOTE
The outside rear view mirror folding button can • The e-POWER system is stopped.
NPA910Z
be used to override the Auto Fold feature. Right hand drive
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun

visor and lift up the cover.
The light over the vanity mirror will turn on when
the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.
When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.
The lights will also turn off after a period of time
when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the
battery from becoming discharged.

NOTE

4 Display screen, heater and air
conditioner, and audio system
Safety precautions...................................................................................... 184 Heater and air conditioner.................................................................... 203

Rear-view Monitor (where fitted)..................................................... 184 Operating tips (for automatic air conditioner) .............. 203
Rear-view Monitor system operation................................... 185 Automatic air conditioner............................................................. 204
How to read the displayed lines ............................................... 185 Servicing air conditioner ................................................................ 207
Difference between predictive and actual Audio system .................................................................................................. 208
distances.................................................................................................... 185 Audio operation precautions...................................................... 208
How to park with predictive course lines .......................... 187 Antenna ...................................................................................................... 211
Adjusting the display......................................................................... 188 FM/AM radio (with DAB) (where fitted) ........................................ 212
How to turn on and off predictive course lines ............ 188 Audio main operation....................................................................... 213
Rear-view Monitor system limitations................................. 188 Radio operation .................................................................................... 215
System maintenance........................................................................ 189 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port .................... 217
Intelligent Around View Monitor (IAVM) ...................................... 190 iPod® player operation (where fitted)................................... 218
Intelligent Around View Monitor system Bluetooth® operation ....................................................................... 219
operation.................................................................................................... 191 Apple CarPlay and Android Auto (where fitted).................... 223
Difference between predictive and actual NissanConnect (where fitted)............................................................. 224
distances.................................................................................................... 194 Safety information.............................................................................. 224
How to park with predictive course lines .......................... 195 Navigation (where fitted) ............................................................... 226
How to switch the display............................................................. 196 Audio operation precautions...................................................... 226
How to adjust the screen view .................................................. 197 How to update map data (where fitted) ............................ 226
Intelligent Around View Monitor system Updating system software (where fitted)......................... 226
limitations.................................................................................................. 197 Regulatory information .................................................................. 227
System maintenance........................................................................ 198 Trademarks .............................................................................................. 229
Moving Object Detection (MOD) ....................................................... 199 Licences ...................................................................................................... 229
MOD system operation ................................................................... 199 Steering wheel switches for audio control (where
Turning MOD on and off ................................................................. 201 fitted)..................................................................................................................... 230
MOD system limitations.................................................................. 201 Control buttons .................................................................................... 230
System maintenance........................................................................ 201 Mobile phone integration for FM AM radio (where
Vents...................................................................................................................... 202 fitted)..................................................................................................................... 230
Centre vents ............................................................................................ 202 Bluetooth® mobile phone feature........................................... 230
Side vents .................................................................................................. 202 Hands-free telephone control ................................................... 233
Rear vents.................................................................................................. 202
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS REAR-VIEW MONITOR (where fitted)
WARNING
• Do not adjust the heater and air conditioner
controls or audio controls while driving so that
full attention may be given to vehicle opera-
tion.
• If you notice any sparks, smoke, fumes, or fire,
immediately stop the vehicle and contact your
nearest NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Ignoring such conditions may lead to an acci-
dent, fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
To prevent battery discharge, do not use the sys-
tem for extended periods of time when the e-
POWER system is not running.
WAE0334X
1. <CAMERA> button Always turn and look out the windows, and
check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move
WARNING before operating the vehicle. Always reverse
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for slowly.
proper use of the Rear-view Monitor could result • The system is designed as an aid to the driver
in serious injury or death. in showing large stationary objects directly
• Rear view Monitor is a convenience feature behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the
vehicle.
and is not a substitute for proper reversing.
184 Display screen, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
• The distance guide line and the vehicle width REAR-VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM Predictive course lines ➅:
line should be used as a reference only when
OPERATION Indicate the predictive course when reversing. The
the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The dis- predictive course lines will be displayed on the
tance viewed on the monitor is for reference When the power switch is switched ON, shift to the
monitor when the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) posi-
only and may be different than the actual dis- R (Reverse) position to operate the Rear-view Moni-
tion and if the steering wheel is turned. The predic-
tance between the vehicle and displayed tor.
tive course lines will move depending on how much
objects.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED the steering wheel is turned and will not be dis-
LINES played while the steering wheel is in the straight
ahead position.
CAUTION
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the
There is a transparent cover over the camera lens.
predictive course lines are wider than the actual
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or
width and course.
snow from it.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE
The Rear-view Monitor system automatically shows AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
a view from the rear of the vehicle when the vehicle
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the
is shifted into the R (Reverse) position.
ground are for approximate reference only. Objects
The radio can still be heard while the Rear- view on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects
Monitor is active. NAA1452 will be actually located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to the guide-
lines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and
around and view the objects as you are reversing, or
distances to objects with reference to the bumper
park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of
line j
A are displayed on the monitor.
objects behind the vehicle.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
➀ approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft) – red
➁ approximately 1 m (3 ft) – yellow
NIC4107 ➂ approximately 2 m (7 ft) – green
➃ approximately 3 m (10 ft) – green
To display the rear view, the Rear-view Monitor sys- Vehicle width guide lines ➄:
tem uses a camera ➀ located just above the vehi-
cle's number plate. Indicate the vehicle width when reversing.
Reversing near a projecting object
NAA2076 NAA2077
NAA1349
Reversing up a steep hill Reversing down a steep hill

When reversing a vehicle up a hill, the distance guide When reversing the vehicle down a hill, the distance The predictive course lines j A do not touch the ob-
lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are ject in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the
closer than the actual distance. For example, the shown further than the actual distance. For object if it projects over the actual moving course.
display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place j A , but the ac- example, the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place
tual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place jB . Note jA , but the actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the
that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor place j B . Note that any object on the hill is viewed in
further than it appears. the monitor closer than it appears.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE
COURSE LINES
WARNING
• If the tyres are replaced with different sized
tyres, the predictive course lines may be dis-
played incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may
be a difference between the predictive course
line and the actual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or becomes dis-
charged, the predictive course lines may be
displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please per-
form the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock
while the e-POWER system is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for
more than 5 minutes.
• When the steering wheel is turned with the
power switch switched ON, the predictive
course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
NAA2078 NIC4108
Reversing closer to a projecting object 1. Visually check that the parking space is safe be-
The position j C is shown further than the position fore parking your vehicle.
jB in the display. However, the position jC is actually 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the
at the same distance as the position j A . The vehicle screen jA when the vehicle is shifted to the R
may hit the object when moving toward the posi- (Reverse) position.
tion jA if the object projects over the actual moving
course.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space com- jects below the bumper, and may not show
pletely, push the P position switch and apply the objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
parking brake.
• Objects viewed in the Rear-view Monitor differ
ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY from actual distance because a wide-angle
lens is used.
•
To adjust the display brightness of the Rear-view
Monitor, use the settings described in the separately Objects in the Rear-view Monitor will appear
provided NissanConnect owner's manual. visually opposite compared to when viewed in
the rear view and outside mirrors.
NOTE
• Use the displayed lines as a reference. The
Do not adjust any of the display settings while lines are highly affected by the number of oc-
the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking cupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road con-
brake is firmly applied. ditions and road grade.
HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF • Make sure that the tailgate is securely closed
when reversing.
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES
Pushing the <CAMERA> button while the vehicle is • Do not put anything on the rear view camera.
The rear view camera is installed above the
in the R (Reverse) position can turn on and off the
number plate.
predictive course lines.
REAR-VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

• When washing the vehicle with high-pressure
water, be sure not to spray it around the cam-
LIMITATIONS era. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on the lens,
WARNING a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
NIC4109 Listed below are the system limitations for Rear- • Do not strike the camera. It is a precision in-
view Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac- strument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or
cordance with these system limitations could re- cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric
3. Slowly reverse the vehicle adjusting the steering sult in serious injury or death. shock.
the parking space jC.

B enter
wheel so that the predictive course lines j
• The system cannot completely eliminate blind
The following are operating limitations and do not
spots and may not show every object.
4. Manoeuvre the steering wheel to make the ve-
• Underneath the bumper and the corner areas
represent a system malfunction:
hicle width guide lines j
space j
D parallel to the parking
C while referring to the predictive course
of the bumper cannot be viewed on the Rear- • When the temperature is extremely high or low,
view Monitor because of its monitoring range the screen may not clearly display objects.
lines. limitation. The system will not show small ob- • When strong light directly shines on the camera,
objects may not be displayed clearly.
• Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
screen. This is due to strong reflected light from
the bumper.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
• The colours of objects on the Rear view Monitor
may differ somewhat from the actual colour of
objects.
• Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark environment.
• There may be a delay when switching between
views. NIC4107
• If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera,

the Rear view Monitor may not display objects
clearly. Clean the camera. CAUTION
• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted the camera. This will cause discolouration.
mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth. • Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera ➀,

Rear-view Monitor may not display objects clearly.
Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth damp-
ened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then
wiping it with a dry cloth.
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (IAVM)
your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to

move before operating the vehicle. Always op-
erate the vehicle slowly.
• The driver is always responsible for safety dur-
ing parking and other manoeuvres.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt or
snow from the front of the camera.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is de-

signed as an aid to the driver in situations such as
slot parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the position
of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views
are available at all times.
Available views:
• Front view
A view of the front of the vehicle
• Rear view
A view of the rear of the vehicle
•
NIC4260
Bird's-eye view
1. <CAMERA> button • The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a con-

The surrounding view of the vehicle from above
venience feature and is not a substitute for • Front-side view
WARNING proper vehicle operation because it has areas The view around and ahead of the front passen-
• Failure to follow the warnings and instructions where objects cannot be viewed. The four cor- ger's side wheel
for the proper use of the Intelligent Around ners of the vehicle in particular, are areas
where objects do not always appear in the
• Front-wide view
View Monitor system could result in serious in-
bird's-eye, front, or rear views. Always check A wider area view of the front view
jury or death.
• Rear-wide view
A wider area view of the rear view
Available views • The distance between objects viewed in the
rear view differs from actual distance because
WARNING a wide-angle lens is used.
• The distance guide lines and the vehicle width • On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may
guide lines should be used as a reference only be a difference between the predictive course
when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. line and the actual course line.
The apparent distance viewed on the monitor
may be different than the actual distance be-
• The vehicle width and predictive course lines
are wider than the actual width and course.
tween the vehicle and displayed objects.
NAA2075
• Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-eye view
as a reference. The lines and the bird’s-eye
view are greatly affected by the number of oc-
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around cupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road con-
View Monitor system uses cameras ➀ located on dition and road grade.
the front grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and
one just above the vehicle’s rear number plate.
tyres, the predictive course lines and the
bird’s-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION • When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are farther than they
When the power switch switched ON, push the appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill,
<CAMERA> button on the instrument panel or shift objects viewed in the monitor are closer than
to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent they appear.
•
Around View Monitor.
Objects in the rear view will appear visually
The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View opposite compared to when viewed in the
Monitor will automatically return to the previous rearview and outside mirrors.
•
screen 3 minutes after the <CAMERA> button has
been pushed with the shift system in a position Use the mirrors or actually look to properly
other than the R (Reverse) position. judge distances to other objects.
Front and rear view: Distance guide lines: Bird’s-eye view:
• Red line ➀: approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
• Yellow line ➁: approx. 1 m (3 ft)
• Green line ➂: approx. 2 m (7 ft)
• Green line ➃: approx. 3 m (10 ft)
Vehicle width guide lines ➄:
Indicate the vehicle width.
WAE0538XZ
Predictive course lines ➅: WAE0530XZ
Front view Indicate the predictive course when operating the
vehicle. The predictive course lines will move de-
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of the
pending on how much the steering wheel is turned.
vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle position and
The predictive course lines in the rear view will not
the predictive course to a parking space.
be displayed while the steering wheel is in the
straight ahead position. The vehicle icon ➀ shows the position of the ve-
hicle. Note that the distance between objects
The front view will not be displayed when the ve-
viewed in the bird’s-eye view differs from the actual
hicle speed is above 10 km/h (6 MPH).
distance.
NOTE The areas between the camera views ➁ (where fit-
• When the monitor displays the front view and ted) are indicated in black.
the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or After the power switch is switched ON, the non-
NAA1452
Rear view (example)
less from the straight ahead position, both the viewable area ➁ (where fitted) is highlighted in yel-
right and left predictive course lines ➅ are dis- low for a few seconds after the bird’s-eye view is
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle played. When the steering wheel turns about displayed.
width and distances to objects with reference to 90 degrees or more, the predictive course line
A , are displayed on the moni-
the vehicle body line j is displayed only on the opposite side of the The amber markers ➂ are displayed when the so-
tor. turn. nar is turned off or the sonar is not available at the
corner.
The predictive course lines ➃ indicate the predicted
course when operating the vehicle.
The front-of-vehicle line ➀ shows the front part of
WARNING
•
the vehicle.
Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear far-
ther than the actual distance. The side-of-vehicle line ➁ shows the vehicle width
•
including the outside mirrors.
Tall objects, such as a kerb or vehicle, may be
misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the The extensions ➂ of both the front ➀ and side ➁
views. lines are shown with a green dotted line.
• Objects that are above the camera cannot be

CAUTION
displayed.
• The view for the bird’s-eye view may be mis-
The turn signal light may look like the side-of-ve-
hicle line. This is not a malfunction. NAA1452
aligned when the camera position alters.
•
Rear-wide view
A line on the ground may be misaligned and is
Front-wide/rear-wide view: While the front view/rear view shows a normal view
not seen as being straight at the seam of the
views. The misalignment will increase as the on the split screens, the front-wide view/rear-wide
line proceeds away from the vehicle. view shows a wider area on the entire screen and
allows checking of the blind corners on the right
and left sides.
Front-side view:
Distance guide lines ➀ - ➃:
• Red line ➀: approx. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
• Yellow line ➁: approx. 1 m (3 ft)
WAE0540XZ • Green line ➂: approx. 2 m (7 ft)
Front-wide view
• Green line ➃: approx. 3 m (10 ft)
Vehicle width guide lines ➄:
Indicate the approximate vehicle width.
Predictive course lines ➅:
WAE0501XZ
Indicate the predictive course when operating the

Guiding lines: vehicle. The predictive course lines will move de-
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width pending on how much the steering wheel is turned.
and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on The predictive course lines in the rear-wide view will
the monitor. not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the
straight ahead position.
The front-wide view will not be displayed when the Reversing up a steep hill Reversing down a steep hill
vehicle speed is above 10 km/h (6 MPH).
NOTE
• When the monitor displays the front-wide
view and the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or less from the straight ahead posi-
tion, both the right and left predictive course
lines ➅ are displayed. When the steering
wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, the
predictive course line is displayed only on the
opposite side of the turn.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guide lines and their locations on the
ground are for approximate reference only. Objects
on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects
will be actually located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to the guide
lines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn
around and view the objects as you are reversing, or
park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of
objects behind the vehicle.
NAA2076 NAA2077
When reversing a vehicle up a hill, the distance guide When reversing the vehicle down a hill, the distance
lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are
closer than the actual distance. For example, the shown further than the actual distance. For
display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place j A , but the ac- example, the display shows 1 m (3 ft) to the place
tual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the place jB . Note jA , but the actual 1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is the
that any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor place j B . Note that any object on the hill is viewed in
further than it appears. the monitor closer than it appears.
Reversing near a projecting object Reversing closer to a projecting object HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE
COURSE LINES
WARNING
tyres, the predictive course lines may be dis-
played incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may
be a difference between the predictive course
line and the actual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or becomes dis-
charged, the predictive course lines may be
displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please per-
form the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock
while the e-POWER system is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road for
more than 5 minutes.
• When the steering wheel is turned with the
power switch switched ON, the predictive
course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
NAA1349 NAA2078
The predictive course lines j A do not touch the ob- The position jC is shown farther than the position
ject in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the B in the display. However, the position j
j C is actually
object if it projects over the actual reversing course. at the same distance as the position jA . The vehicle
may hit the object when reversing to the position
A if the object projects over the actual moving
j
course.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space com-
pletely, push the P position switch and apply the
parking brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the power switch switched ON, push the
<CAMERA> button or shift to the R (Reverse) posi-
tion to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays differ-
ent split screen views depending on the selected
shift position. Push the <CAMERA> button to switch
between the available views.
If the shift system is in the R (Reverse) position, the
available views are:
• Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
• Rear view/front-side view split screen
• Rear-wide view
If the shift system is out of the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
• Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
• Front view/front-side view split screen
NIC4108 NIC4109
• Front-wide view
The display will switch from the Intelligent Around
View Monitor screen when:
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe be-
fore parking your vehicle.
3. Slowly reverse the vehicle adjusting the steering
wheel so that the predictive course lines j
B enter
• The shift system is in a forward drive position
and the vehicle speed increases above approxi-
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the the parking space jC.
mately 10 km/h (6 MPH).
screen jA when the vehicle is shifted to the R
(Reverse) position.
4. Manoeuvre the steering wheel to make the ve-
hicle width guide lines j
D parallel to the parking
• A different screen is selected.
space jC while referring to the predictive course

lines.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN VIEW • Do not strike the cameras. They are precision There are some areas where the system will not
instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunc- show objects and the system does not warn of
To adjust the display brightness of the Around View
tion or cause damage resulting in a fire or an moving objects.
Monitor, use the settings described in the separately
provided NissanConnect owner's manual.
electric shock. ➀ When in the front or the rear view display, an
object below the bumper or on the ground may not
NOTE be viewed.
Do not adjust any of the display settings of the ➁ When in the bird's-eye view, a tall object near the
seam ➂ of the camera viewing areas will not ap-
IAVM while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly applied. pear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and do not
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW represent a system malfunction:
MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
• There may be a delay when switching between
views.
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for Intel-
• When the temperature is extremely high or low,
the screen may not display objects clearly.
ligent Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system limita- • When strong light directly shines on the camera,
tions could result in serious injury or death. objects may not be displayed clearly.
• Do not use the Intelligent Around View Moni- • The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
tor with the outside mirrors in the stored posi- • The colours of objects on the Intelligent Around
tion, and make sure that the tailgate is se- View Monitor may differ somewhat from the ac-
curely closed when operating the vehicle us- tual colour of objects.
ing the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
• Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor
• The apparent distance between objects may not be clear and the colour of the object
viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ in a dark environment.
differs from the actual distance.
• There may be differences in sharpness between
• The cameras are installed on the front grille, each camera view of the bird’s-eye view.
the outside mirrors and above the rear num-
ber plate. Do not put anything on the cameras.
NAA2079
• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any
wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened
• When washing the vehicle with high pressure with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe
water, be sure not to spray it around the cam- with a dry cloth.
eras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on the lens,
a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
System temporarily unavailable SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
NIC4111
NIC4110 NAA2075
When the “ ” icon is displayed on the screen, the

When the “ ” icon is displayed on the screen, there camera image may be receiving temporary elec-
will be abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around tronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This CAUTION
View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving op- will not hinder normal driving operation but the sys- • Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
eration but the system should be inspected. It is tem should be inspected. It is recommended you the camera. This will cause discolouration.
recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. • Do not damage the camera as the monitor
workshop. screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cam-

eras ➀, the Intelligent Around View Monitor may
not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wip-
ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild clean-
ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
• The MOD system is not designed to detect the

surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of moving

objects near the vehicle when driving out of ga-
rages, manoeuvring in parking lots and in other
such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by using
image processing technology on the image shown
in the display.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt or
snow from the front of the camera.
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically under
the following conditions:
• When the shift system is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
• When the <CAMERA> button is pushed to acti-
vate the Intelligent Around View Monitor system
NIC4260 on the display.
• When vehicle speed decreases below approxi-
1. <CAMERA> button vent contact with objects surrounding the ve- mately 8 km/h (5 MPH).
hicle. When manoeuvring, always use the out- The MOD system operates in the following condi-
WARNING side mirror and rearview mirror and turn and tions when the camera view is displayed:
• Failure to follow the warnings and instructions check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to
manoeuvre.
• When the shift system is in the P (Park) or N (Neu-
for proper use of the Moving Object Detection tral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD
system could result in serious injury or death. • The system is deactivated at speeds above 8 system detects the moving objects in the bird’s-
• The MOD system is not a substitute for proper km/h (5 MPH). It is reactivated at lower speeds. eye view. The MOD system will not operate if ei-
ther door is opened. If outside mirrors are folded,
vehicle operation and is not designed to pre-
MOD may not operate properly.
• When the shift system is in a forward drive posi-
tion, and the vehicle speed is below approxi-
mately 8 km/h (5 MPH), the MOD system detects
moving objects in the front view or front-wide
view.
• When the shift system is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion and the vehicle speed is below approxi-
mately 8 km/h (5 MPH), the MOD system detects
moving objects in the rear view or rear-wide
view. The MOD system will not operate if the tail-
gate is open. JVH0872XZ WAE0549XZ
Front and bird’s-eye views Rear and front-side views
The MOD system does not detect moving objects in
the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed
on the screen when in this view.
When the MOD system detects a moving object near
the vehicle, the yellow frame will be displayed on
the view where the object is detected and a chime
will sound once. While the MOD system continues to
detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues
to be displayed.
NOTE
While the RCTA chime (where fitted) is beeping, JVH0873XZ WAE0550XZ
the MOD system does not chime. Rear and bird’s-eye views Front-wide view/rear-wide view
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame ➀ is dis-

played on each camera image (front, rear, right, left)
depending on where moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame ➁ is displayed on the front view,
rear view, front-wide view and rear-wide view.
A green MOD icon ➂ is displayed in the view where
the MOD system is operative. A grey MOD icon ➂ is
displayed in the view where the MOD system is not
operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon ➂ is – When there is dirt, water drops or snow on SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
not displayed. the camera lens.
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF – When the position of the moving objects in
the display is not changed.
•
The MOD system can be turned on and off using the
The MOD system might detect flowing water
vehicle information display. (See “Vehicle informa-
droplets on the camera lens, white smoke
tion display” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
section.)
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS • The MOD system may not function properly
depending on the speed, direction, distance or
shape of the moving objects.
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for MOD.
• If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts NAA2075
where the camera is installed, leaving it mis-
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with aligned or bent, the sensing zone may be al-
these system limitations could result in serious tered and the MOD system may not detect ob- CAUTION
•
injury or death. jects properly. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean
• Do not use the MOD system when towing a
• When the temperature is extremely high or the camera. This will cause discolouration.
•
trailer. The system may not function properly. low, the screen may not display objects clearly. Do not damage the camera as the monitor
• Excessive noise (for example, audio system This is not a malfunction. screen may be adversely affected.
volume or open vehicle window) will interfere
with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
NOTE If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cam-
• The MOD system performance will be limited
The green MOD icon will change to orange if one eras ➀, the MOD system may not operate properly.
according to environmental conditions and Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened
of the following has occurred.
surrounding objects such as:
– When there is low contrast between back-
• When the system is malfunctioning.
with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping
with a dry cloth.
ground and the moving objects. • When the component temperature reaches a
high level.
– When there is blinking source of light.
– When strong light such as another vehicle’s
• When the rear view camera has detected a
blockage.
headlight or sunlight is present.
If the icon light continues to illuminate in orange,
– When camera orientation is not in its usual
have the MOD system checked. It is recom-
position, such as when the outside mirror
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali-
is folded.
fied workshop for this service.
VENTS
CENTRE VENTS SIDE VENTS REAR VENTS
WAE0346XZ WAE0347XZ JVH0940XZ

Right side Right side
Open/close the vents by moving the control to ei- Open/close the vents by moving the control to ei- Open/close the vents by moving the control to ei-
ther direction. ther direction. ther direction.
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by moving Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by moving This symbol indicates that the vents
the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de- the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de- m: are open. Moving the side control to
sired position is achieved. sired position is achieved. this direction will open the vents.
This symbol indicates that the vents
m: are closed. Moving the side control to
this direction will close the vents.
Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by moving

the centre knob (up/down, left/right) until the de-
sired position is achieved.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
NOTE
WARNING
• The heater and air conditioner operate only • Condensation forms inside the air condition-
when the e-POWER system is running. ing unit when the air conditioner is running,
•
and is safely discharged underneath your ve-
Never leave children or adults who would nor- hicle. Traces of water on the ground are there-
mally require the support of others alone in fore normal.
•
the vehicle. Pets should not be left alone ei-
ther. They could unknowingly activate Odours from inside and outside the vehicle
switches or controls and inadvertently can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odour
become involved in a serious accident and in- can enter the passenger compartment
jure themselves. On hot, sunny days, tempera- through the vents.
tures in a closed vehicle could quickly become • When parking, set the heater and air condi-
high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to
injuries to people or animals. allow fresh air into the passenger compart-
• Do not use the recirculation mode for long pe- ment. This should help reduce odours inside
the vehicle.
riods as it may cause the interior air to become
stale and the windows to fog up. OPERATING TIPS (for automatic air
• Do not adjust the heating and air conditioning conditioner)
controls while driving so that full attention
The sensors, located on the instrument panel and
may be given to vehicle operation.
beneath the steering wheel, help maintain a con-
stant temperature. Do not put anything on or
The heater and air conditioner operate when the around the sensors.
e-POWER system is running. The air blower will op-
erate when the power switch is ON even if the e-
POWER system is not running.
11. <A/C> (Air Conditioner) button
NAA2055
Type A
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER 6. Front defogger MAX button

7. Rear window defogger button (see
Type A
“Defogger switch” in the “2. Instruments and
1. Temperature control dial (left side) controls” section)
2. <AUTO> button 8. Air recirculation button
3 SYNC (synchronise) button 9. Fan speed control ( ) buttons
4. Temperature control dial (right side) 10. Air flow control buttons
5. <ON OFF> button
8. Front right seat heater button (see “Seat heat-
ing (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.)
9. <ON OFF> button
10. Front defogger MAX button
controls” section)
12. Fan speed control ( ) buttons
13. Air flow control buttons
NAA2057
Type B (with seat heater and steering wheel heater, without Thermaclear heated windscreen)
Type B (with seat heater and steering 3. <AUTO> button

wheel heater, without Thermaclear 4. Steering wheel heater button (see “Heated
heated windscreen) steering wheel (where fitted)” in the “2. Instru-
1. Front left seat heater button (see “Seat heat- ments and controls” section)
ing (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and 5. Air recirculation button
controls” section) 6 SYNC (synchronise) button
2. Temperature control dial (left side) 7. Temperature control dial (right side)
7. Temperature control dial (right side)
8. Front right seat heater button (see “Seat heat-
ing (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.)
9. <ON OFF> button
10. Front defogger MAX button
controls” section)
12. Air recirculation button
13. Fan speed control ( ) buttons
14. Air flow control buttons
Automatic operation (AUTO)
The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the
system automatically controls constant tempera-
ture, air flow distribution and fan speed after the
desired temperature is set manually.
Turning off the heater and air conditioner:
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push the
NAA2058
<ON OFF> button.
Type C (with seat heater, steering wheel heater and Thermaclear heated windscreen) Cooling and dehumidified heating:
Type C (with seat heater, steering 4. Thermaclear heated windscreen heater but- 1. Push the <AUTO> button.
wheel heater and Thermaclear heated ton (see “ThermaClear Heated Windscreen 2. If the A/C indicator light does not illuminate, push
windscreen) (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and the <A/C> button. (The A/C indicator light will il-
controls” section) luminate.)
1. Front left seat heater button (see “Seat heat-
ing (where fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and 5. Steering wheel heater button (see “Heated 3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the de-
controls” section) steering wheel (where fitted)” in the “2. Instru- sired temperature.
ments and controls” section)
2. Temperature control dial (left side)
6 SYNC (synchronise) button
3. <AUTO> button
4. If the indicator light on the air recirculation 3. Push the front defogger MAX button again Air recirculation:
button is illuminated, push the button with the to return to the previous mode or the <AUTO> Push the air recirculation button to circulate
light illuminated to switch the air recirculation button for auto climate control mode. (The the air flow inside the vehicle. (The indicator
mode OFF. MAX indicator light will turn off.) light will illuminate.)
A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in Manual operation Push the air recirculation button again to draw
hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. the air flow from outside the vehicle. (The indi-
The manual mode can be used to control the heater
This does not indicate a malfunction. cator light goes off.)
and air conditioner to your desired settings.
Heating (A/C off): Automatic air intake control (where fitted):
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, push the
1. Push the <AUTO> button. <ON OFF> button. If the indicator light on the air recirculation
2. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, push the <A/ button is illuminated, push and hold the button with
Fan speed control:
C> button. (The A/C indicator light will turn off.) the light illuminated (the indicator light will blink
Turn the fan speed control dial. Turn the dial clock- twice). The automatic air intake control mode is set.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the de- wise to increase the fan speed. Turn the dial counter
sired temperature. clockwise to decrease the fan speed. SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
• Do not set the temperature lower than the out- Push the <AUTO> button to change the fan speed
side air temperature. Doing so may cause the to the automatic mode. WARNING
temperature to not be controlled properly. The air conditioner system contains refrigerant
•
Air flow control:
If the windows fog up, use dehumidified heating under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any
Push air flow control button to select/change the air conditioner service should be done only by an
instead of the A/C off heating.
air flow outlet. More than one air flow control but- experienced technician with the proper
Dehumidified defrosting/defogging: ton can be selected. equipment.
1. Push the front defogger MAX button. (The
MAX indicator light will illuminate.) Air flows from the centre and side vents.
m The air conditioner system in your vehicle is charged
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the de- with a refrigerant designed with the environment in
Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
sired temperature. m mind.
• To remove frost from the outside surface of the Air flows mainly from the defogger This refrigerant will not harm the earth's ozone
windscreen quickly, set the temperature to a m outlets. layer. However, it may contribute in a small part to
high temperature. global warming.
• The system will set the fan speed to maximum
Temperature control:
Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired
Special charging equipment and lubricant are re-
automatically. quired when servicing your vehicle's air conditioner.
•
temperature. Turn the dial clockwise to increase the
The air recirculation mode will automatically Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause
temperature. Turn the dial counter clockwise to de-
turned off and the air conditioner will be acti- severe damage to the air conditioner system. (See
crease the temperature.
vated automatically. “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in
• Air flows mainly from the defogger outlets.

the “9. Technical information” section.)
AUDIO SYSTEM
A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will be able

WARNING
to service your environmentally friendly air condi-
tioner system. Do not adjust the audio system while driving.
Air conditioner filter The audio system operates when the power switch
The air conditioner system is equipped with an air is ON. Do not use for an extended period of time
conditioner filter which collects pollen. To make sure with the e-POWER system stopped.
the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates effi-
ciently, replace the filter according the specified AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
maintenance intervals listed in a separate mainte- NOTE
nance booklet. To replace the filter, contact a NISSAN NIC4051
dealer or qualified workshop. Models with navigation system, see the audio op-
eration precautions in the separately provided
The filter should be replaced if the air flow decreases navigation system owner's manual.
significantly or if windows fog up easily when oper- USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
ating the heater or air conditioner. Radio ports
• Radio reception is affected by station signal
WARNING
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external in- Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB
fluences. Intermittent changes in reception device while driving. Doing so can be a distrac-
quality are normally caused by these external tion. If distracted you could lose control of your
influences. vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
• Using a mobile phone in or near the vehicle may
influence radio reception quality.
CAUTION
• Use the antenna for the best reception.
• Do not force the USB device into the USB con-
nection port. Inserting the USB device tilted or
up-side-down into the USB connection port
may damage the USB connection port. Make
sure that the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB connection port (some USB de-
vices come with a mark as a guide, make
sure that the mark is facing the correct direc-
tion before inserting the device).
• Do not grab the USB connection port cover Notes for iPod use: • Audiobooks may not play in the same order as
(where fitted) when pulling the USB device out “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”, and “Made for they appear on an iPod.
of the USB connection port. This could dam-
age the USB connection port and USB connec-
iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been • Large video files cause slow responses in an
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPod. The vehicle centre display may momen-
tion port cover (where fitted). iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the de- tarily black out, but will soon recover.
• Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it veloper to meet Apple performance standards.
• If an iPod automatically selects large video files
can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable Apple is not responsible for the operation of this while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle centre dis-
may damage the USB connection port. device or its compliance with safety and regulatory play may momentarily black out, but will soon
standards. recover.
The USB sockets ➀ are located in the centre con-
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod,
sole underneath the armrest.
iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod
devices should be purchased separately as neces- shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
sary. registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning
This system cannot be used to format USB devices. is a trademark of Apple Inc.
To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
• NISSAN audio system supports only accessories
In some areas, the USB device for the front seats that Apple has certified and that come with the
plays only sound without images for regulatory rea- “Made for iPod/iPhone/iPad” logo.
sons, even when the vehicle is parked.
• Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause a
This system supports various USB connection port checkmark to be displayed on and off (flicker-
devices, USB hard drives and iPod players. Some USB ing). Always make sure that the iPod is
devices may not be supported by this system. connected properly.
• Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly. • An iPod nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast
• Some characters used in other languages (Chi- forward or rewind mode if it is connected during
a seek operation. In this case, please manually
nese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in
the display. Using English language characters reset the iPod.
with a USB device is recommended. • An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will continue to
General notes for USB use: fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected dur-
ing a seek operation.
Refer to your device manufacturer's owner infor-
mation regarding the proper use and care of the • An incorrect song title may appear when the
device. Play Mode is changed while using an iPod nano
(2nd Generation)
Playback order:
CAUTION
Music playback order of the USB device with MP3/
WMA (where fitted)is as illustrated above. • Do not force the USB device into the USB con-
nection port. Inserting the USB device tilted or
• The names of folders not containing MP3/WMA up-side-down into the USB connection port
(where fitted) files are not shown in the display. may damage the USB connection port. Make
• If there is a file in the top level of the device, sure that the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB connection port (some USB de-
FOLDER is displayed.
• The playback order is the order in which the files
vices come with a mark as a guide, make
sure that the mark is facing the correct direc-
were written by the writing software, so the files
tion before inserting the device).
might not be played in the desired order.
• Do not grab the USB connection port cover
(where fitted) when pulling the USB device out
of the USB connection port. This could dam-
age the USB connection port and USB connec-
tion port cover (where fitted).
• Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it
can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable
may damage the USB connection port.
Two USB power ports (where fitted) are provided on

NIC4253 the rear of the console box/armrest unit.
Rear USB power ports (where fitted)
These ports are for power supply only. They do not
USB (Universal Serial Bus) rear power support data transfer.
NAA984
ports (where fitted) The maximum output current for each port is 2.4A.
Please note that actual output current will depend
A Root folder
j WARNING on the device connected to the port(s). The charger
B Folder
j Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB will provide the appropriate current value to the de-
device while driving. Doing so can be a distrac- vice connected based on the protocol used by the
C MP3/WMA (where fitted)
j mobile device.
tion. If distracted you could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
Bluetooth® Audio player (where fitted) ANTENNA
• Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be used The shark fin antenna is located on the rear part of
with this system. For detailed information about the vehicle roof.
Bluetooth® audio devices that are available for
The radio performance may be affected if cargo car-
use with this system, contact a NISSAN dealer or
ried on the roof blocks the radio signal. If possible,
qualified workshop.
do not put cargo near the shark fin antenna.
• Before using a Bluetooth® audio system, the ini-
A buildup of ice on the antenna can affect radio per-
tial registration process for the audio device is
formance. Remove the ice to restore radio recep-
necessary.
tion.
• Operation of the Bluetooth® audio system may
vary depending on the audio device that is con- CAUTION
nected. Confirm the operation procedure before
use.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply high
pressure water directly to the seal of the an-
• The playback of Bluetooth® audio will be paused tenna. It may damage the seal of the antenna.
under the following conditions. The playback will
be resumed after the following conditions are
• When removing snow from the roof, do not ap-
ply excessive force to the shark fin antenna.
completed.
This may cause damage to the shark fin an-
– while using a hands-free phone tenna and the roof panel.
– while checking a connection with a mobile
phone
• The in-vehicle antenna for Bluetooth® commu-
nication is built in the system. Do not place the
Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded
by metal, far away from the system or in a nar-
row space where the device closely contacts the
body or the seat. Otherwise, sound degradation
or connection interference may occur.
• While a Bluetooth® audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
• This system is compatible with the Bluetooth®
AV profile (A2DP and AVRCP).
FM/AM RADIO (with DAB) (where fitted)
10. Confirmation <OK> button/<MENU> dial

11. Display brightness (Day/Night mode)
button
Turn the <MENU> dial to set the display
brightness.
The illumination brightness level is linked to
the headlight switch. When the headlights are
switched ON the brightness is dimmed
automatically. Press the button to toggle
illumination brightness levels between
daytime setting and night time setting
independent of headlight status.
12. Fast Forward (Cue)/Forward Track and
Rewind/Previous Track buttons
13. <RADIO> button
14. <MEDIA> button
Switch between the audio sources (USB, BT
Audio) (if connected)
15. <DISP> button
Provides on screen information when available
(music tags, RDS, etc.)
16. (Telephone) button
NAA2002
17. Back button
1. Power button/Volume control <VOL> dial 5. Radio mode: Preset button

2. <SETTINGS> button <MIX> button
3. Display 6. Radio mode: Preset button
4. Radio mode: Preset button 7. Radio mode: Preset button

iPod/USB/Bluetooth audio mode: Repeat 8. Radio mode: Preset button
<RPT> button 9. Radio mode: Preset button
USB or Phone mode: Quick search button
AUDIO MAIN OPERATION <SETTINGS> button [Sound] menu:
To configure [Audio], [Clock], [Radio], and [Language] Submenus in the sound menu:
The audio unit operates when the e-POWER system
power switch is ON. settings, perform the following procedure: [Bass] Use this control to enhance or
1. Press the <SETTINGS> button. attenuate bass response sound.
m Power ON/OFF button Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise
2. Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise or anticlockwise, or anticlockwise to adjust the
Press the button to switch on the audio unit. If the display will appear in the following order: bass settings then press <OK> to
the audio unit was switched off using the e-POWER confirm.
[Audio] ̥ [Clock] ̥ [Radio] ̥ [Language]
system power switch, it can also be switched on [Treble] Use this control to enhance or
with the e-POWER system power switch. The source After the desired levels have been set, press either
attenuate the treble.
that was playing immediately before the unit was the (Back) button repeatedly, or the <SET-
Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise
switched off will resume playing and the volume will TINGS> button. or anticlockwise to adjust the
be set to the previous volume level. Audio adjustments treble settings then press <OK> to
The audio unit can be switched off by pressing , confirm.
1. Press the <SETTINGS> button to enter the set-
or by switching the e-POWER system power switch [Bal.] Use this control to adjust the bal-
tings menu screen, then select [Audio].
OFF. ance of the volume between the
2. Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise or anticlockwise, left and right speakers.
Volume (VOL) level control the display will appear in the following order: Turn the <MENU> dial
anticlockwise or clockwise to
[Sound] ̔ [Speed Vol.] ̔ [Bass Boost] ̔ [Audio
Turn the <VOL> dial clockwise or anticlockwise to adjust the left/right balance then
Reset]
adjust the volume level. press <OK> to confirm.
The audio unit is equipped with a speed control vol- [Fade] Use this control to adjust the bal-
ume function, this means that the audio system au- ance of the volume between the
front and rear speakers.
tomatically adjusts the volume level in relation to
Turn the <MENU> dial
vehicle speed. For details, see “[Speed Vol.] menu”
anticlockwise or clockwise to
later in this section.
adjust the front/rear balance then
press <OK> to confirm.
[Speed Vol.] menu: Setting the clock [Radio] menu
Set the audio system to automatically adjust the The clock menu screen set up screen will appear For activation or deactivation details, see
volume level in relation to vehicle speed. when selecting the [Clock] item from the set up “<SETTINGS> button” earlier in this section.
This mode controls the volume output from the menu. [TA] Use this control to switch Traffic
speakers automatically in relation to vehicle speed. [Set Time]: Announcements on or off when
When [Speed Vol.] is displayed, turn the <MENU> dial the unit starts.
Select [Set Time] then adjust the clock as follows:
clockwise or anticlockwise to adjust the volume Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise
level. 1. The hour display will start flashing. Turn the or anticlockwise to select then
Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off the speed <MENU> dial to adjust the hour. press <OK> to confirm.
volume feature. Increasing the speed volume set- 2. Press the <OK> button. The minute display will [DAB. Inter- For models fitted with DAB
ting results in the audio volume increasing more start flashing. rupt] (where functionality only.
rapidly with vehicle speed. Once chosen, press <OK> fitted) Switch on or off specific listed
3. Turn the <MENU> dial to adjust the minute. Digital Interruptions. When
to save the setting.
4. Press <OK> to finish the clock adjustment. selected the DAB radio stations
[Bass Boost] menu: will be interrupted if a specific
Switch [Bass Boost] [ON] or [OFF] [ON/OFF]:
message is available.
Set the clock display between on or off when the Turn the <MENU> dial clockwise
[Audio Reset] menu:
audio unit is turned off. or anticlockwise to adjust then
The audio unit has a saved preset settings as a fac- press <OK> to select.
tory default. Select [YES] to change all settings back If set in the [ON] position, the clock will be displayed
when the audio unit is turned off either by pressing [Ref. FM List] Manually update the FM station
to the factory preset settings. Select [NO] to exit the
the button or when the e-POWER system power list
menu keeping the current settings. Press <OK> to start the search of
switch is switched OFF.
the stations. A confirmation mes-
[Format]: sage appears. In a short period of
Set the clock display between 24-hour mode and time the stations are updated and
12-hour clock mode. the last station (if possible) starts
playing.
[Ref. DAB List] Manually update the DAB station
(where fitted) list
Press <OK> to start the search of
the stations. A confirmation mes-
sage appears. In a short period of
time the stations are updated and
the last station (if possible) starts
playing.
[EPG] (where Electronic Program Guide (EPG) RADIO OPERATION Manual tuning
fitted) for DAB is designed to offer similar When the (power ON/OFF) button is pressed,
features for the user as television When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency
the audio unit will switch on with the last received
EPG, but for radio and associated manually access the FM list and turn the <MENU>
radio station, if the audio unit was previously
data services, for example: dial to select the desired station and press <OK> to
switched off in radio mode.
- display of schedules with select it.
programs and events The radio is able to receive multiple kinds of audio
The frequency increases or decreases in steps of
- searching through current and transmissions:
100 kHz on the FM band, and 9 kHz on the AM band.
future programs lists – FM
[Intellitext] Intellitext messages are a special
(where fitted) format of DL (Dynamic Label) – DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) (where fitted) WARNING
messages that provide data like – AM The radio should not be tuned while driving in or-
sport or news. der for full attention to be given to the driving
Radio band select button operation.
Language settings Press the <RADIO> button to change the audio
Select the appropriate language and press the transmission source as follows:
SEEK tuning buttons
<OK> button. Upon completion, the screen will au- For models with DAB:
tomatically adapt the language setting. FM mode:
FM1 ̔ FM2 ̔ DAB1 ̔ DAB2 ̔ AM ̔ FM1
• [English (UK)]
Pushing and holding the <RADIO> button will up-
Pressing the or button starts the tuning
• [Français] date the station lists.

mode. A short press of the button will increase or
decrease the frequency a single step. Pressing the
• [Deutsch] For models without DAB: button longer will activate the seek mode. The radio
• [Italiano] FM1 ̔ FM2 ̔ AM ̔ FM1 tuner seeks from low to high or high to low fre-
• [Português] When the <RADIO> button is pressed, the radio will

quencies and stops at the next broadcasting sta-
tion. During seek mode, the audio output is muted.
• [Nederlands] come on at the last received radio station. If audio is If no broadcasting station can be found within the
• [Español]
already playing using one of the other input sources
(iPod, Bluetooth, USB) pressing the <RADIO> button
complete band cycle, it will return to the initial fre-
• [Türkçe] will switch off the playing source mode and the last
quency.
• [русский] received radio station will be selected. DAB mode:

Press or to select the next or previous sta-
When the <RADIO> button is pressed for more than tion. A long press triggers seek by ensemble.
1.5 seconds while in FM/DAB modes the current sta-
tions list will automatically be updated.
Preset station buttons ➀➁➂➃➄➅ Occasionally, in areas of poor DAB signal strength, TA Traffic announcement
the full station name in the DAB List and DAB main
Pressing a preset button for less than 2 seconds will This function operates in FM/DAB (Radio) mode.
screen might be distorted. In this situation it may
select the stored radio station. This function will still operate in the background if
still be possible to listen to the particular radio sta-
Pressing a preset button for more than 2 seconds any media source is selected.
tion, at a reduced level of sound quality, but this is
while in the FM list or radio main screen will cause not always possible. • Pressing the <TA> button selects the TA mode.
the station currently being received to be stored The TA indicator is displayed while TA mode is
against that preset button. NOTE on.
• Twelve stations (if available) can be stored in the • When in DAB mode, operation is similar to FM • When <TA> or <BACK> is pressed again. The
FM bands. (Six each for FM1 and FM2) mode but may slightly differ. mode will be switched off and the TA indicator
• Twelve stations (if available) can be stored in the • In some countries or regions, some of these will disappear from the display.
DAB bands. (Six each for DAB1 and DAB2) (where services may not be available. Traffic announcement interrupt function:
fitted) Alternative Frequency (AF) mode: When a traffic announcement is received, the an-
• Six stations (if available) can be set for the AM The AF mode operates in the FM (radio) mode. nouncement is tuned in and the display shows a
band.
• The AF mode operates in the FM (radio), and will
notification message with the radio station name.
Once the traffic announcement has finished, the
If the battery is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, continue to operate in the background if any
the radio memory will be erased. In that case, reset media source is selected. unit returns to the source that was active before
the desired stations after battery connection or
fuse replacement.
• The AF function compares signal strengths and
the traffic announcement started.
If the <BACK> button is pressed during a traffic an-
selects the station with the optimum reception
DAB and Radio Data System (RDS) conditions for the currently tuned-in station. nouncement, the traffic announcement interrupt
mode is cancelled. The TA mode returns to the
operation (where fitted) DAB and RDS functions standby mode and the audio unit returns to the pre-
The RDS is a system through which encoded digital vious source.
Programme Service (PS) function (station name
information is transmitted by FM radio stations in display function):
addition to the normal FM radio broadcasting. The
– FM:
RDS provides information services such as station
When an RDS station is tuned in with seek or
name, traffic information, or news.
manual tuning, the RDS data is received and the
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcast): PS name is displayed.
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a standard for – DAB:
digital radio broadcast. When a station is tuned in with seek or manual
Various information selected by the driver (Travel, tuning, the data is received and the PS name is
Warning, News, Weather, Sport, etc.) can be received displayed.
and will be provided to the driver.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) If the audio system has been turned off while the Track up/down buttons:
USB memory was playing, pressing will start the
CONNECTION PORT
USB device operation. Pressing the or button once, the track will
be skipped forward to the next track or backward
WARNING MEDIA button
to the beginning of the current played track. Press
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB To operate the USB device press <MEDIA> once or the or button more than once to skip
device while driving. Doing so can be a distrac- repeatedly until USB is available. through the tracks.
tion. If distracted you could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. Audio main operation Folder browsing:
• List view If the recorded media contains folders with music
CAUTION
• Quick search
files, pressing the or button will play in
sequence the tracks of each folder.
• Do not force the USB device into the USB port.
• ,
To select a preferred folder:
Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side- • MIX (Random play)
1. Press the <ENTER> button or turn the <MENU>
down into the port may damage the port. • RPT (Repeat track) dial and a list of tracks in the current folder is dis-
Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB port.
• Folder browsing played.
•
2. Press the button to enter the Folder screen.
Do not grab the USB port cover (where fitted)
when pulling the USB device out of the port. 3. Press <ENTER> to access the folder. Press
This could damage the port and the cover. <ENTER> again to start playing the first track or
•
turn the <MENU> dial, and press <ENTER> to se-
Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it lect another track.
can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable List view:
may damage the port. If the current selected folder contains sub folders,
While the track is being played, either press the press <ENTER>, a new screen with a list of sub fold-
<ENTER> button or turn the MENU dial to display ers will be displayed. Turn the <MENU> dial for the
Connecting a device to the USB the available tracks in a listed view mode. To select sub folder then press <ENTER> to select. Select the
Refer to your device manufacturer's owner infor- a track from the list, or a track to start listening from, Root folder item when songs are recorded addition-
mation regarding the proper use and care of the turn the <MENU> dial then press <ENTER>. ally in the root folder.
device. Press the button to enter the Folder screen.
To return to the previous folder screen, press .
The USB connection port is located on the lower Fast Forward (Cue), Fast
part of the instrument panel. Connect a USB Reverse (Review) buttons: <RPT> Repeat button:
memory device into the USB connection port. The When the (Cue) or (Review) button is Push the <RPT> button and the current track will be
USB memory device will be activated automatically. pressed continuously, the track will be played at played continuously.
The display will show the notification message [USB high speed. When the button is released, the track
Detected Please Wait...] for a few seconds, while it is will be played at normal playing speed.
reading the data.
<MIX> button: iPod® PLAYER OPERATION If the audio system has been turned off while the
Push the <MIX> button and all the tracks in the cur- iPod® was playing, pressing will start the iPod®
(where fitted)
rent folder (MP3/USB) or playlist (iPod) will be played operation. During the connection, the iPod® can
in a random order. Connecting iPod® only be operated with the audio controls.
When the entire folder/playlist has been played the Notes for iPod use:
system will start playing the next folder/playlist.
WARNING
“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”, and “Made for
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
<DISP> button:
device while driving. Doing so can be a distrac- designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or
While a USB device with recorded music information. If distracted you could lose control of your iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the de-
tion tags (ID3–text tags) is being played, the title of vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. veloper to meet Apple performance standards.
the played track is displayed. If the title information
is not provided then [Songs] is displayed. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this
CAUTION device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
When the <DISP> button is pressed repeatedly, fur-
ther information about the track can be displayed • Do not force the USB device into the USB port.
standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod,
along with the track title as follows: Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-
down into the port may damage the port. iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
Track time ̔ Artist name̔ Album title ̔ Track time
Make sure that the USB device is connected iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod
The track name is always displayed.
correctly into the USB port. shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
Track details:
A long press on the <DISP> button will turn the dis-
• Do not grab the USB port cover (where fitted) registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
when pulling the USB device out of the port.
play into a detailed overview. Press the but- This could damage the port and the cover. NISSAN audio system supports only accessories
ton briefly to return to the main display.
• Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it that Apple has certified and that come with the
“Made for iPod/iPhone/iPad” logo.
Quick search: can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable
When a USB device with recorded music informa- may damage the port. Compatibility:
tion tags (ID3–text tags) is being played from list The system unit shall be compatible with all devices
view mode, a quick search can be performed to find Refer to your device manufacturer's owner infor- (past and future) supporting Apple Accessory Pro-
a track from the list. mation regarding the proper use and care of the tocol on USB link.
Push the <A-Z> button then turn the <MENU> dial device.
It includes (and not limited to):
•
for the first alphabetic/numerical letter of the track Open the console lid and connect the iPod® cable to
title then press <OK>. When found, a list of the avail- iPod touch 5th (iOS 9.3.5)
the USB connector. The battery of the iPod® will be
able tracks will be displayed. When there is no match charged during the connection to the vehicle. The • iPhone 7 Plus (iOS 10.1.1, 11.0.3, 11.1.2)
(the display shows [No match] the next item will be display will show the notification message [iPod • iPhone 8 (iOS 11.2)
•
shown. Select, and press <OK> to play the preferred <Name> Detected...] for a few seconds, while it is
track. iPhone 8 Plus (iOS 11.2.5)
reading the data.
• iPhone X (iOS 11.2, 12.0.1) For further information about each item, see the BLUETOOTH® OPERATION
iPod® owner’s manual.
NOTE
The following operations are identical to the audio
This audio system does not support iPad charg- main operation of the USB device operation. For de-
ing. tails, see “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
MEDIA button Port” earlier in this section.
To operate the iPod press <MEDIA> once or repeat- • List view
edly until [iPod <Name>] is shown. • ,
• MIX (Random play)
• RPT (Repeat track)
• Folder browsing
*: a device with Bluetooth capabilities
NIC3996
<DISP> button
Audio main operation Bluetooth® settings
While a track with recorded music information tags
Interface: To pair a device, make sure the Bluetooth is
(ID3–tags) is being played, the title of the played
switched on and use the [Scan devices] key or the
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the au- track is displayed. If the tags are not provided then
[Pair device] key. For details, see “[Scan devices]” later
dio system display is similar to the iPod® interface. a notification message is displayed.
in this section.
Use the <MENU> dial and the <OK> button to play a When the <DISP> button is pressed repeatedly, fur-
track on the iPod®. When an Apple device is connected via the USB con-
ther information about the track can be displayed
nection port and Bluetooth, the device will be rec-
The following items can be chosen from the menu along with the track title as follows:
ognised as a USB device. The battery of the Apple
list screen. Track time ̔ Artist name ̔ Album title ̔ Track device is charged while the cable is connected to
• [Playlists] time the USB connection port.
• [Artists] Track details: Up to 5 different Bluetooth devices can be con-
• [Albums] A long press on the <DISP> button, the screen dis- nected. However, only one device can be used at a
• [Songs]
plays the song title, artist name, and album title.
Press the button briefly to return to the main
time. If 5 different Bluetooth registered devices are
registered, a new device can only replace one of the
• [More...] (Which provides access to the following) display. 5 existing paired devices. Use [Del. device] key to de-
• [Composers] lete one of the existing paired devices. For details,
• [Genre]
see “[Del. device]” later in this section.
• [Podcasts]
• [Audiobooks]
When successfully paired a notification message will • [Sel. device] Confirm the PIN code on the device and
be displayed, then the audio system display will re- Paired Bluetooth devices are listed and can be the audio unit.
turn to the current audio source display. During con- selected for connection. The Bluetooth connection will be made.
•
nection the following status icons will be displayed If the countdown timer reaches 0, the at-
(top left of the display): Signal strength ( ), Bat- [Del. device] tempt to pair the device will be cancelled.
tery status* ( ) and Bluetooth ON ( ). A registered Bluetooth device can be deleted. – Type B:
*: If the low battery message comes on, the Blue- • [Bluetooth] The message [Pairing request] [Confirm
tooth® device must be recharged soon. If this setting is turned off, the connection be- password] together with a 6 digit code
The pairing procedure and operation may vary ac- tween the Bluetooth devices and the in-vehicle will be displayed. The unique and identi-
cording to device type and compatibility. See the Bluetooth module will be cancelled. cal code should be displayed on the de-
Bluetooth® owner’s manual for further details. vice. If the code is identical confirm on the
[Scan devices]: device and on the audio unit.
NOTE 1) Press the button. Select [Scan devices] The Bluetooth connection will be made.
• For device details, see your audio/mobile The audio unit searches Bluetooth devices and
[Pair device]:
phone Owner's Manual. shows all visible devices. Pressing the <BACK>
• button cancels the search. Turn on the Bluetooth® on the audio unit. See
For assistance with the Bluetooth® audio/mo- “[Bluetooth]” later in this section.
•
bile phone integration, please visit your local Make sure your Bluetooth device is visible at this
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. time. The audio unit will wait for a connection Use the Bluetooth® audio device/mobile phone
request from the Bluetooth device. to pair:
To set up the Bluetooth system with a device the
following items are available: 2) Select the device to be paired. 1) Switch on the search mode for Bluetooth® de-
Use the <MENU> dial and press <OK> to select. vices. If the search mode finds the audio unit, it
will be shown on the device display.
3) The pairing procedure may depend on the de-
vice to be connected: 2) Select the unit device shown as [My Car].
1) Device without PIN code: 3) Two different ways of pairing are possible de-
pending on the device. For the correct proce-
The Bluetooth connection will be automati-
•
dure details, see “[Scan devices]” earlier in this
[Scan devices] cally connected without any further input. section.
Shows all available visible BT devices and initia- 2) Device with PIN code: When an Apple device is connected via the USB con-
lises BT connection. Two different ways of pairing are possible de- nection port and Bluetooth®, the device will be rec-
• [Pair device] pending on the device: ognised as a USB device. The battery of the Apple
Bluetooth devices can be paired with the sys- – Type A: device is charged while the cable is connected to
tem. A maximum of 5 Bluetooth devices can be The message [To pair] [Enter Pin] 0000 the USB connection port.
registered. will be displayed.
[Sel. device]: Bluetooth® audio streaming main <DISP> button
The paired device list shows which Bluetooth® au- operation If the song contains music information tags (ID3–
dio or mobile phone devices have been paired or Switch the e-POWER system power switch ON. If the tags), the title of the played song will be displayed. If
registered with the Bluetooth® audio system. If the audio system was turned off while the Bluetooth® tags are not provided then the display will not show
list contains devices then select the appropriate de- audio was playing, pressing the < any messages.
> button will
vice to connect to the Bluetooth® audio system.
start the Bluetooth® audio streaming. When the <DISP> button is pressed repeatedly fur-
The following symbols (where fitted) indicate the ther information about the song can be displayed
<MEDIA> button:
capability of the registered device: along with the song title.
•
To operate the Bluetooth® audio streaming use the
: Mobile phone integration following method: A long press on <DISP> will turn the display into a
• : Audio streaming (A2DP – Advanced Audio
• Press <MEDIA> repeatedly until [BT Audio] is
detailed overview. Press the button briefly to
Distribution Profile) return to the main display.
shown.
[Del. device]: The type of display shown on the audio system can Bluetooth® mobile phone feature
A registered device can be removed from the Blue- vary depending on the Bluetooth® version of the This system offers a hands-free facility for your mo-
tooth audio system. Select a registered device then device. bile telephone with Bluetooth® to enhance driving
press <OK> to confirm to deletion. safety, and comfort.
Fast Forward (Cue), Fast
[Bluetooth]: Reverse (Review) buttons: For details, see “Mobile phone integration for FM AM
If Bluetooth® has been switched off a notification radio (where fitted)” later in this section.
When the (Cue) or (Review) button is
message [ON/OFF] appears when you select [Blue- pressed continuously, the track will be played at
tooth] from the phone menu (press ). To switch high speed. When the button is released, the track
the Bluetooth® signal on, press <OK> and a follow will be played at normal playing speed.
up screen will appear. Then select [ON] and press
Track up/down buttons:
<OK> to display the Bluetooth® settings menu
screen.
Pressing the or button once, the track will
be skipped forward to the next track or backward
to the beginning of the current played track. Press
the or button more than once to skip
through the tracks.
Specification chart
Supported media USB 2.0

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System Component (on a Windows Vista-based
computer) are not supported.
Supported versions *1 MP3 Version MPEG1, MPEG2
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 448 kbps, VBR*4
WMA *3 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9, WMA9 Pro (except WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Voice)
AAC Version MPEG-4, AAC
Tag information (Song title and Artist MP3 ID3 tag ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 (MP3 only)
and Album name) WMA (where fitted) WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 2500 (including root folder), Files: 32000
Displayable character codes *2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE
(UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16
BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 Kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*3 Where fitted. Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied to VBR.
APPLE CARPLAY AND ANDROID
AUTO (where fitted)
Apple CarPlay: Android Auto:

WARNING
• Stop your vehicle in a safe location and apply With Apple CarPlay, your in-vehicle system can be
used as a display and a controller for some of the
With Android Auto, your in-vehicle system can be
used as a display and a controller for some of your
the parking brake before connecting your mo-
bile device to the vehicle or operating your iPhone functions. Apple CarPlay features Siri which Android phone functions. Android Auto supports
connected mobile device for setup. enables operations via voice controls. Wireless Apple Talk to Google which enables operations via voice
•
CarPlay (where fitted) is also available for certain controls. Refer to the NissanConnect Owner's
Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use iPhone models. Refer to the NissanConnect Own- Manual and visit the Android Auto website for infor-
of some of the applications and features, such er's Manual and visit the Apple website for informa- mation about the functions that are available and
as social networking and texting. Check local tion about the functions that are available and other other details.
regulations for any requirements. details.
• If you are unable to devote full attention to
NOTE
vehicle operation while using your mobile de-
vice, pull off the road to a safe location and To ensure efficient wireless charging (where fit-
stop your vehicle. ted), do not use wireless Apple CarPlay and wire-
less charging simultaneously for long periods.
Use a USB connection in these circumstances.
NISSANCONNECT (where fitted)
For details, see the separately provided SAFETY INFORMATION

NissanConnect Owner's Manual.
This system is primarily designed to help you sup-
• Online: port pleasant driving as outlined in this manual.
– Type A However, you, the driver, must use the system safely
Go to: https://uqr.to/16959 and properly. Information and the availability of ser-
Or scan the QR code vices may not always be up to date. The system is
not a substitute for safe, proper and legal driving.
Before using the system, please read the following
safety information. Always use the system as out-
NAA2093
lined in this manual.
Type A
WARNING
• To operate the system, first park the vehicle in
a safe location and set the parking brake. Op-
erating the system while driving can distract
the driver and may result in a serious accident.
– Type B
Go to: https://uqr.to/1695g
• Exercise extreme caution at all times so full
attention may be given to vehicle operation. If
Or scan the QR code the system does not respond immediately,
please be patient and keep your eyes on the
road. Inattentive driving may lead to a crash
resulting in serious injuries or death.
NAA2011
Type B • Do not rely on route guidance (where fitted)
alone. Always be sure that all driving manoeu-
vres are legal and safe in order to avoid acci-
dents.
• Do not disassemble or modify this system. If
you do, it may result in accidents, fire or elec-
trical shock.
• Printed version: Please contact your NISSAN
• If you notice any foreign objects in the system Hands-free telephone control • If you are unable to devote full attention to
hardware, spill liquid on the system or notice vehicle operation while using the text mes-
smoke or a smell coming from it, stop using WARNING saging feature, pull off the road to a safe loca-
the system immediately and it is recom-
mended you contact a NISSAN dealer or quali-
• Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a
tion and stop your vehicle.
safe location. If you have to use a phone while
fied workshop. Ignoring such conditions may
driving, exercise extreme caution at all times
lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock.
so full attention may be given to vehicle op-
CAUTION
eration. This feature is disabled if the connected device
CAUTION • If you find yourself unable to devote full atten-

does not support it. See the phone's Owner's
Manual for details and instructions.
• Some jurisdictions may have laws limiting the
tion to vehicle operation while talking on the
phone, pull off the road to a safe location and
use of video screens while driving. Use this
stop your vehicle before doing so. Liquid crystal display
system only where it is legal to do so.
• Extreme temperature conditions (below −20°C
The display on this unit is a liquid crystal display and
should be handled with care.
(−4°F) and above 70°C (158°F) ) could affect the CAUTION
performance of the system.
To avoid draining the vehicle battery (12V battery), WARNING
• The display screen may break if it is hit with a use a phone only after starting the e-POWER Never disassemble the display. Some parts utilise
hard or sharp object. If the display screen system. extremely high voltage. Touching them may re-
breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in
sult in serious personal injury.
an injury.
Hands-free text messaging assistant
Maintenance of display:
NOTE WARNING To clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If
Do not keep the system running with the • Use the text messaging feature after parking additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount
e-POWER system stopped. Doing so may your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray
discharge the vehicle battery (12V battery). When use the feature while driving, exercise extreme the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the
you use the system, always keep the e-POWER caution at all times so full attention may be cloth first, then wipe the screen.
system running. given to vehicle operation.
Models with NissanConnect Services: • Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use CAUTION
NissanConnect Services may not be available in of “Text-to-Speech.” Check local regulations • To clean the display, never use a rough cloth,
some regions. Completing the NissanConnect Ser- before using this feature. alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent
vices registration is necessary to use NissanCon-
nect Services related functions.
• Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent.
They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.
of some of the applications and features, such
as social networking and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
• Do not splash any liquid, such as water or car AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS UPDATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
fragrance, on the display. Contact with liquid
(where fitted)
will cause the system to malfunction. CAUTION
• Operate the audio system only when the e- WARNING
NAVIGATION (where fitted) POWER system is running. Operating the au- TO AVOID RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS PERSONAL
The navigation system is primarily designed to help dio system for extended periods of time with INJURY WHEN UPDATING THE SYSTEM SOFTWARE:
you reach your destination. However, you, the driver, the e-POWER system turned off can discharge
If you choose to park the vehicle within range of a
must use the system safely and properly. Informa- the vehicle battery (12V battery).
Wi-Fi connection (where fitted), park the vehicle
tion concerning road conditions, traffic signs and • Do not allow the system to get wet. Excessive in a secure, safe, well-ventilated location that is
the availability of services may not always be up to moisture such as spilled liquids may cause the open to the air. During the update process, if you
date. The system is not a substitute for safe, proper, system to malfunction. choose to park your vehicle, it should be kept in a
and legal driving. well ventilated area to avoid exposure to carbon
HOW TO UPDATE MAP DATA monoxide. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
WARNING contain colourless and odourless carbon monox-
(where fitted)
• Do not rely on route guidance alone. Always ide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause
be sure that all driving manoeuvres are legal unconsciousness or death.
and safe in order to avoid accidents.
WARNING
• Always stop the vehicle in a safe location be-
TO AVOID RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY WHEN UPDATING THE MAP SOFTWARE:
How to update from the system menu
fore modifying the route conditions. Modify-
ing the route conditions while driving may If you choose to park the vehicle within range of a WARNING
cause an accident. Wi-Fi connection (where fitted) or a TCU (Telemat-
To operate the system for software update, first
• The navigation system's visual and voice
ics Control Unit) (where fitted), park the vehicle in
a secure, safe, well-ventilated location that is
park the vehicle in a safe location.
guidance is for reference purposes only. The
open to the air. During the update process, if you
contents of the guidance may be inappropri-
choose to park your vehicle, it should be kept in a
ate depending on the situation.
well ventilated area to avoid exposure to carbon
• Follow all traffic regulations when driving monoxide. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
along the suggested route (e.g. one-way contain colourless and odourless carbon monox-
traffic). ide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause
unconsciousness or death.
REGULATORY INFORMATION Frequency Band
2400 MHz - 2480 MHz
Radio approval number and
information 5490 MHz - 5600 MHz
For Europe: 5650 MHz - 5710 MHz ≤ 100 mW

Type A: 5735 MHz - 5835 MHz ≤ 25 mW
Hereby, Robert Bosch GmbH declares that the radio Radiated Power [EIRP]
equipment type AIVI2SBXM is in compliance with Di- Bluetooth < 10 mW
rective 2014/53/EU.
WLAN < 100 mW
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is
Hints/Restrictions
available at the following internet address: Frequency Band
Internal Antenna
https://eu-doc.bosch.com 2400 MHz - 2480 MHz
Internal antenna not accessible by user. Any change
by the user will violate the legal approval of this Radiated Power [EIRP]
product. Bluetooth < 10 mW
Type B: WLAN < 100 mW
Hereby, Robert Bosch GmbH declares that the radio Hereby, Robert Bosch GmbH declares that the radio Hints/Restrictions
equipment type AIVI2SBXM is in compliance with of equipment type AIVIP33A0 is in compliance with Di- Internal Antenna
Radio Equipment Regulations 2017. rective 2014/53/EU.
Internal antenna not accessible by user. Any change
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is by the user will violate the legal approval of this
available at the following internet address: product.
https://eu-doc.bosch.com
Hereby, Robert Bosch GmbH declares that the radio

equipment type AIVIP33A0 is in compliance with of
Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.
For Ukraine:
Type A:
NAVI0008 PBH0015X
PHB0263XZ
Type B:
NAVI0008
NAVI0007
PBH0015X
TRADEMARKS Siri
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Google/Android/Google Play/Android Auto
Google, Android, Google Play, Android Auto, and
other marks are trademarks of Google LLC.
LICENCES
SOFTWARE LICENCES
Open Source Software Licences
Music recognition technology and related data are http://oss.bosch-cm.com/nissan.html
Apple, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-
Telematics Control unit (TCU)
standard in music recognition technology and re-
tries. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. Use lated content delivery. For more information, visit
(where fitted)
of the Apple CarPlay logo means that a vehicle user www.gracenote.com. Music related data from http://opensourceautomotive.com/IC/
interface meets Apple performance standards. Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present tZ7T3eE6AiV4
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 or
vehicle or its compliance with safety and regulatory to present Gracenote.
standards. Please note that the use of this product https://www.oss-valeo.com/nissan/default. html
One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to
with iPhone or iPod may affect wireless
this product and service. See the Gracenote website
performance.
for a nonexhaustive list of applicable Gracenote pat-
ents. Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype
are either a registered trademark or a trademark of
Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries.
App Store
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed to Robert Bosch GmbH. Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. App
Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCHES FOR AUDIO CONTROL (where fitted) MOBILE PHONE INTEGRATION
FOR FM AM RADIO (where fitted)
CONTROL BUTTONS Volume control switches Not for models with NissanConnect system, see the
separately provided Owner's Manual.
Push the volume control switch to increase or de-
crease the volume. BLUETOOTH® MOBILE PHONE
FEATURE
WARNING
While driving, using the mobile phone is
extremely dangerous because it significantly im-
pairs your concentration and diminishes your re-
action capabilities to sudden changes on the
NAA2067 road, and it may lead to a fatal accident. This ap-
plies to all phone call situations such as when re-
ceiving an incoming call, during a phone conver-
➀ Volume buttons sation, when calling through the phone book
➁ Tuning switch search, etc.
Play Control (Tuning switch)

Push the tuning switch left or right to select a chan- CAUTION
nel, track, CD or folder when they are listed on the Certain country jurisdictions prohibit the use of
display. the mobile phone in the car without hands-free
RADIO: support.
• Pushing Left/Right longer Next or previous pre-

This chapter provides information about the
set channel
• Pushing Left/Right shorter Next or previous sta-
NISSAN hands-free phone system using a
Bluetooth® connection.
tion/channel
Bluetooth® is a wireless radio communication stan-
iPod (where fitted), USB device (where fitted) or dard. This system offers a hands-free facility for your
Bluetooth® Audio (where fitted):
•
mobile telephone to enhance driving comfort.
Pushing Left/Right shorter
Next track or the beginning of the current track In order to use your mobile phone with the Blue-
(the previous track if the button is pushed im- tooth® of the audio system, the mobile phone must
mediately after the current track starts playing) first be setup. For details, see “Bluetooth® settings”
•
later in this section. Once it has been setup, the
Pushing Left/Right longer
Forward or rewind.
hands-free mode is automatically activated on the • For assistance with your mobile phone inte- Steering wheel mounted control:
registered mobile phone (via Bluetooth®) when it gration, please visit your local NISSAN dealer
comes into range. or qualified workshop.
A notification message appears on the audio dis- Control buttons and microphone
play when the phone is connected, when an incom-
ing call is being received, as well as when a call is ini- Instrument panel:
tiated.
When a call is active, the audio system, microphone
(located in the ceiling in front of the rear view mir-
ror), and steering wheel switches enable hands-free
communication.
NAA2068
If the audio system is in use at the time, the radio,
CD, iPod, USB audio, Bluetooth® audio or AUX source
mode will be muted and will stay muted until the ➀ Volume up/down buttons
active call has ended. ➁ Phone send/answer button
The Bluetooth® system may not be able to connect NAA2003
➂ Phone call end button
with your mobile phone for the following reasons: The hands-free mode can be operated using the
• The mobile phone is too far away from the ve- ➀ Phone book quick search button A-Z steering wheel switches.
hicle.
➁ <MENU> or <OK> button (rotate and push to Microphone:
• The Bluetooth® mode on your mobile phone has select) The microphone is located near the map light.
not been activated.
➂ (Back) button
• Your mobile phone has not been paired with the
➃ Phone button
Bluetooth® system of the audio unit.
• The mobile phone does not support Bluetooth®
technology (BT Core v2.0).
NOTE
• For models with NissanConnect (Audio with
Navigation system) see the separately
provided Owner's Manual.
• For details, see your mobile phone's Owner's
Manual.
Bluetooth® settings • A maximum of 5 Bluetooth® devices can be [Scan devices]:
paired with the system. 1) Press the button. Select [Scan devices]
Enter the phone setup menu via the (phone)
button, select the [Bluetooth] key, and then check if To set up the Bluetooth® system with a device the The audio unit searches Bluetooth® devices and
the Bluetooth® is set to on (default setting is on, following items are available: shows all visible devices.
push the <OK> button if not). Pressing the button cancels the search.
To setup the Bluetooth® system to pair (connect or
2) Select the device to be paired.
register) your preferred mobile phone, follow the fol-
Use the <MENU> dial and press to select.
lowing procedure.
To pair a device, use the [Scan devices] key or the 3) The pairing procedure depends on the device to
[Pair device] key. be connected:
Up to 5 different Bluetooth® devices can be con- • [Scan devices] 1) Device without PIN code:
nected. However, only one device can be used at a Shows all available visible Bluetooth® devices The Bluetooth® connection will be automati-
time. If 5 different Bluetooth® registered devices are and initialises Bluetooth® connection from the cally connected without any further input.
registered, a new device can only replace one of the audio unit.
2) Device with PIN code:
5 existing paired devices. Use [Del. device] key to de-
lete one of the existing paired devices. For details, • [Pair device] Two different ways of pairing are possible de-
see “[Del. device]” later in this section. Initialises Bluetooth® connection from the mo- pending on the device:
bile device. – Type A:
When successfully paired a notification message will
be displayed, then the audio system display will re- • [Sel. device] The message [To pair] [Enter Pin] 0000
and a countdown timer will be displayed.
turn to the current audio source display. During con- Paired Bluetooth® devices are listed and can be
nection the following status icons will be displayed Confirm the PIN code on the device.
selected for connection.
The Bluetooth® connection will be made.
(top left of the display): Signal strength (
tery status* ( ) and Bluetooth® “ON” ( ).
), Bat-
• [Del. device]
If the countdown timer reaches 0 the at-
*: If the low battery message comes on, the Blue- A registered Bluetooth® device can be deleted. tempt to pair the devices will be cancelled.
tooth® device must be recharged soon. • [Bluetooth] – Type B:
The pairing procedure and operation may vary ac- The message [Pairing request] [Confirm
If this setting is turned off, the connection be-
cording to device type and compatibility. See the password] together with a 6 digit code
tween the Bluetooth® devices and the in-vehicle
Bluetooth® owner’s manual for further details. will be displayed. The unique and identi-
Bluetooth® module will be cancelled.
NOTE cal code should be displayed on the de-
vice. If the code is identical confirm on the
• For device details, see your audio/mobile device.
phone Owner's Manual. The Bluetooth® connection will be made.
• For assistance with the Bluetooth® audio/mo-
bile phone integration, please visit your local
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
[Pair device]: Refer to the relevant Bluetooth® device Owner’s
Turn on the Bluetooth® on the audio unit. See Manual for further details.
“[Bluetooth]” later in this section. [Sel. device]:
• Use the audio unit to pair: The paired device list shows which Bluetooth® au-
Push the button on the instrument panel. dio or mobile phone devices have been paired or
Select the [Pair Device] key. registered with the Bluetooth® audio system. If the
list contains devices then select the appropriate de-
The pairing procedure depends on the
vice to connect to the Bluetooth® audio system.
Bluetooth® device to be connected: Receiving a call
The following symbols (where fitted) indicate the
1) Device without PIN code: When receiving an incoming call, the display will
capability of the registered device:
show the caller's phone number (or a notification
The Bluetooth® connection will be automati-
cally connected without any further input.
• : Mobile phone integration message that the caller's phone number cannot be
2) Device with PIN code:

• : Audio streaming (A2DP – Advanced Audio shown) and three operation icons.
Distribution Profile) 1. Answering and during a call:
Two different ways of pairing are possible de-
[Del. device]: Answer the call by pressing <OK> (the is high-
pending on the device. For the correct proce-
A registered device can be removed from the Blue- lighted).
dure details, see “[Scan devices]” earlier in this
section. tooth® audio system. Select a registered device then By pressing <OK>, you can select the following op-
•
press <OK> to confirm the deletion. tions:
Use the Bluetooth® audio/cellular phone device
to pair: [Bluetooth]: • Ending the call by selecting and press
If Bluetooth® has been switched on a notification <OK>.
1) Switch on the search mode for Bluetooth® de-
vices. If the search mode finds the audio unit, it message [ON/OFF] appears when you select [Blue- • Put the call on hold by selecting and press
will be shown on the device display. tooth] from the phone menu (press ). To switch <OK>.
2) Select the unit device shown as [My Car].
the Bluetooth® signal on, press <OK> and a follow
up screen will appear. Then select [ON] and press
• [ ]
Use this item (the transfer handset command)
3) Enter the number code shown on the relevant to display the Bluetooth® settings menu
to transfer the call from the audio system to your
Bluetooth® device with the device's own keypad, screen.
mobile phone.
and push the confirmation key on the device and
the <MENU>/<OK> dial on the audio unit. HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE To transfer the call back to hands-free via the
audio system select [ ].
When an Apple device is connected via the USB con-
CONTROL
The hands-free mode can be operated using the 2. Put a call on hold:
nection port and Bluetooth®, the device will be rec-
ognised as a USB device. The battery of the Apple telephone button on the audio system, or the Rotate the <MENU> dial until is highlighted,
device is charged while the cable is connected to button (where fitted) on the steering wheel. press <OK>. The call is on hold. Pressing <OK> ac-
the USB connection port. cepts the call, rotate the <MENU> dial clockwise and
press <OK> to reject.
3. Rejecting a call: • The registered mobile phone is deleted from
Rotate the <MENU> dial until is highlighted, the audio system.
press <OK>. The call is rejected. 1. Press < >.
2. Turn the <MENU> dial and scroll down to [Phone-
book] then press <OK>.
3. Scroll down through the list, select the appropri-
ate contact name (highlighted), and press <OK>.
4. A following screen will show the number to be
Initiating a call
dialled. If correct, press <OK> again to dial the
A call can be initiated using one of the following number. Manually dialling a phone number:
methods:
– Making a call from the phone book
WARNING
Park the vehicle in a safe location, and apply the
– Manually dialling a phone number
parking brake before making a call.
– Redialling
– Using call history (Call List menu) Alternatively, the quick search mode can be used as To dial a phone number manually use the audio sys-
• Outgoing follows: tem display (virtual keyboard pad) as follows:
• Incoming 1. While in the phonebook screen press <A-Z/➅>. 1. Press , and turn the <MENU> dial to high-
•
light [Dial Number].
Missed 2. Turn the <MENU> dial for the first alphabetic or
numerical letter of the contact name. Once high- 2. Press <OK> to select [Dial Number].
Making a call from the phone book:
lighted, press <OK> to select the letter. 3. Turn the <MENU> dial to scroll along, and select
Once the Bluetooth® connection has been made,
3. The display will show the corresponding contact each number of the phone number. Once high-
between the registered mobile phone and the au-
name(s). Where necessary, use the <MENU> dial lighted, press <OK> after each number selection.
dio system, phone book data will be transferred au-
tomatically to the audio system. The transfer may again to scroll further for the appropriate con- To delete the last number entered scroll to the
take a while before completion. tact name to call. [̒] (Backspace) symbol, and once highlighted
4. A following screen will show the number to be press <OK>. The last number will be deleted.
NOTE Pressing <OK> repeatedly will delete each subse-
dialled. If correct, press <OK> again to dial the
Phone book data will be erased when: number. quent number.
• Switching to another registered mobile 4. After entering the last number, scroll to the
symbol, and press <OK> to dial the number.
phone.
• Mobile phone is disconnected.
Redial: Press <OK> to confirm.
To redial or call the last number dialled, press Menu items:
for more than 2 seconds. • [Volume]
– [Ring]
Set the phone ringing volume
– [Call]
Second incoming call Set the volume of the conversation during a
call.
Using call history (Call List menu): Whenever there is a second incoming call is shown
A number from the dialled, received, or missed call in the display. By selecting the icon the call is • [Ring]
lists can also be used to make a call. accepted and the current call is put on hold. – [Vehicle]
• [Outgoing]
Selecting by rotating <MENU> and pressing
<OK> rejects the second incoming call. When this is
Choose the in car ringtone.
– [Phone]
Use the dialled call mode to make a call which is done during the conversation it ends the call.
Choose the phone ringtone.
based on the list of outgoing (dialled) calls. Selecting the key using the <MENU> dial and
• [Incoming] pressing <OK> switches between the phone con- • [PB download]
versations. Download the phonebook of the mobile device
Use the received call mode to make a call which to the audio unit manually.
(For the other selections, see Making a call from the
is based on the list of received calls.
phone book earlier) Standby mode operation
• [Missed]
The audio system is in standby mode when the au-
Use the missed call mode to make a call which is
dio system is inactive but the clock is displayed on
based on the list of missed calls.
the screen.
1. Press , and select [Call History].
When a mobile device is connected to the in-vehicle
2. Turn the <MENU> dial to scroll to an item, and audio system via Bluetooth with the audio system
press <OK> to select it. General settings in the standby mode, the audio system will turn on
3. Scroll to the preferred phone number then press From the phone menu select [Settings] automatically under the following instances:
<OK>, or press to dial the number. Volume settings and manually downloading the
phonebook can be done using this menu.
• The connected mobile device receives an incom-
ing call.
Menu operation:
Press <OK> to select, rotate the <MENU> dial to in- • An outgoing call is made with the connected
crease or decrease the volume. phone.
The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System operation
will become possible on the audio system once it is
turned on. The audio system will automatically re-
turn to standby mode after the call is disconnected.
5 Starting and driving
Before starting the e-POWER system........................................... 239 Electric shift control system........................................................ 250
Precautions when starting and driving ...................................... 239 Traffic sign recognition (where fitted) .......................................... 254
Exhaust gas (Carbon Monoxide) .............................................. 240 System Operation ............................................................................... 256
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (where Turning the TSR system on and off ....................................... 256
fitted)..................................................................................................................... 240 System temporarily unavailable............................................... 256
Meter information ............................................................................... 243 System Malfunction........................................................................... 257
Activation................................................................................................... 243 Maintenance............................................................................................ 257
New and repositioned TPMS sensors (includ- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Intelligent Blind
ing fitment of alternative wheels) ........................................... 243 Spot Intervention system (where fitted) .................................... 257
Adjusting TPMS target pressure (where The BSW and Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
possible)...................................................................................................... 244 tion systems ............................................................................................ 258
Tyre pressure units ............................................................................. 244 BSW system operation..................................................................... 259
[Check Cold Tyre] message.......................................................... 244 Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system
TPMS temperature calibration (where possible).......... 244 operation.................................................................................................... 262
Three-way catalyst..................................................................................... 245 BSW/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention
To help prevent damage................................................................ 245 system precautions ........................................................................... 264
Gasoline particulate filter (GPF) (where fitted)....................... 245 BSW/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention driving
Turbocharger system ............................................................................... 246 situations ................................................................................................... 265
Care when driving ....................................................................................... 246 System maintenance........................................................................ 268
Loading luggage .................................................................................. 246 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system (where
Driving on wet roads......................................................................... 246 fitted)..................................................................................................................... 269
Driving under winter conditions............................................... 246 RCTA system operation .................................................................. 270
Push-button power switch .................................................................. 247 How to enable/disable the RCTA system.......................... 271
Precautions on push-button power switch RCTA system limitations................................................................. 272
operation.................................................................................................... 247 System temporarily unavailable............................................... 273
Intelligent Key system...................................................................... 247 System malfunction .......................................................................... 273
Power switch positions................................................................... 248 System maintenance........................................................................ 273
Emergency system shut off......................................................... 248 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (where fitted) ......................... 274
Steering lock............................................................................................ 249 RAB system operation ..................................................................... 275
Intelligent Key battery discharge ............................................ 249 Turning the RAB system ON/OFF............................................ 276
Starting the e-POWER system ........................................................... 250 RAB system limitations ................................................................... 277
Driving the vehicle....................................................................................... 250 System malfunction .......................................................................... 278
System maintenance........................................................................ 278 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system (where mode ............................................................................................................. 312
fitted)..................................................................................................................... 279 ProPILOT Assist (where fitted)............................................................ 315
LDW system operation..................................................................... 280 ProPILOT Assist system operation.......................................... 316
LDW temporary disabled status ............................................... 282 ProPILOT Assist switches............................................................... 336
LDW malfunction.................................................................................. 283 ProPILOT Assist System Display and Indicators ........... 318
Multi-sensing camera unit maintenance .......................... 283 Turning the ProPILOT Assist Conventional
Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) system (where (fixed speed) Cruise Control mode on ................................. 319
fitted)..................................................................................................................... 284 Operating the ProPILOT Assist system ............................... 320
Intelligent Lane Intervention System ProPILOT Assist Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
Operation................................................................................................... 285 system.......................................................................................................... 322
Intelligent Lane Intervention ProPILOT Assist Steering Assist ................................................ 335
Activation/Deactivation ................................................................. 286 ProPILOT Assist Conventional (fixed speed)
Intelligent Lane Intervention Limitations.......................... 287 Cruise Control Mode.......................................................................... 340
Intelligent Lane Intervention temporarily ProPILOT Assist Speed limiter (where fitted)................... 342
unavailable................................................................................................ 288 ProPILOT Assist Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
System malfunction .......................................................................... 288 system.......................................................................................................... 345
Multi-sensing camera unit maintenance .......................... 288 ProPILOT Assist Intelligent Lane Intervention
Emergency Lane Assist (ELA) system (where system.......................................................................................................... 349
fitted)..................................................................................................................... 289 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
ELA System Operation ..................................................................... 290 system (where fitted) ................................................................................ 354
ELA Activation/Deactivation ....................................................... 291 I-FCW system operation ................................................................. 355
ELA Limitations...................................................................................... 292 Turning the I-FCW system ON/OFF........................................ 356
System temporarily unavailable............................................... 294 I-FCW system limitations ............................................................... 357
System malfunction .......................................................................... 294 System temporarily unavailable............................................... 358
System maintenance........................................................................ 295 System malfunction .......................................................................... 359
Cruise control (where fitted)................................................................ 295 System maintenance........................................................................ 359
Precautions on cruise control.................................................... 296 Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) system (where
Cruise control system operations........................................... 296 fitted)..................................................................................................................... 359
Speed limiter (where fitted).................................................................. 297 IEB system operation........................................................................ 361
Speed limiter operations................................................................ 298 System maintenance........................................................................ 367
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (where fitted)......................... 299 Intelligent Driver Alertness (where fitted).................................. 368
Cruise control operations..............................................................300 System operation ................................................................................ 368
How to select Cruise Control modes....................................300 Parking................................................................................................................. 370
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ....................... 301 Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) (where fitted) .......................... 371
Deactivation of the IPA system ................................................. 372
Parking procedure using the IPA system........................... 373 Rear Ultrasonic Parking Sensors (where fitted) .................... 399
Operating tips ........................................................................................ 377 System operation ................................................................................ 399
ProPILOT Park (where fitted) ............................................................... 377 How to enable/disable the parking sensor
ProPILOT Park switch........................................................................ 378 (sonar) system .......................................................................................400
ProPILOT Park screen ....................................................................... 378 Parking sensor (sonar) system limitations....................... 401
Selecting the parking method................................................... 379 System temporarily unavailable............................................... 402
ProPILOT Park operation................................................................ 380 System maintenance........................................................................ 402
ProPILOT Park pause......................................................................... 383 Trailer towing .................................................................................................. 403
ProPILOT Park deactivation ......................................................... 383 Operating precautions .................................................................... 403
About the ProPILOT Park parking methods .................... 384 Tyre pressure........................................................................................... 403
Adjusting the parking position.................................................. 386 Safety chains........................................................................................... 403
Changing the direction of parking control Trailer brakes........................................................................................... 403
travel.............................................................................................................. 387 Installation of coupling device................................................... 404
Parking position detection function ..................................... 387 Vehicle security ............................................................................................. 405
Cameras and parking sensors (sonar) used for Power steering............................................................................................... 405
ProPILOT Park......................................................................................... 389 Brake system................................................................................................... 406
ProPILOT Park precautions........................................................... 389 Braking precautions .......................................................................... 406
ProPILOT Park malfunction .......................................................... 390 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ........................................................ 407
ProPILOT Park settings.................................................................... 390 Using system........................................................................................... 407
Parking sensor (sonar) detection conditions Self-test feature .................................................................................... 407
and limitations....................................................................................... 391 Normal operation ................................................................................ 407
Intelligent Around View Monitor detection Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system........................ 408
conditions and limitations............................................................ 391 Brake force distribution .................................................................. 409
ProPILOT Park detection conditions and How to turn off the ESP system................................................ 409
limitations.................................................................................................. 392 Chassis control .............................................................................................. 409
Front and Rear Ultrasonic Parking Sensors (where Intelligent Trace Control ................................................................. 409
fitted)..................................................................................................................... 394 Hill Start Assist (HSA) (where fitted)................................................ 410
System operation ................................................................................ 395 Cold weather driving................................................................................. 411
How to enable/disable the parking sensor Battery ......................................................................................................... 411
(sonar) system ....................................................................................... 396 Engine coolant....................................................................................... 411
Parking sensor (Sonar) system limitations ...................... 397 Tyre equipment..................................................................................... 411
System temporarily unavailable............................................... 398 Special winter equipment ............................................................. 411
System maintenance........................................................................ 398 Corrosion protection ........................................................................ 412
BEFORE STARTING THE PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
E-POWER SYSTEM AND DRIVING
WARNING • Do not place hard or heavy objects on the dash-

WARNING
•
board or rear parcel shelf in order to prevent in-
The driving characteristics of your vehicle can be jury in the event of a sudden stop. Do not leave children or adults who would nor-
changed remarkably by any additional load and mally require the support of others alone in
its distribution as well as by adding optional your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone.
equipment (trailer couplings, roof racks, etc.). Your They could accidentally injure themselves or
driving style and speed have to be adjusted ac- others through inadvertent operation of the
cordingly. Especially when carrying heavy loads, vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures
your speed must be reduced adequately. in a closed vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly fatal inju-
• Make sure the area around the vehicle is free of ries to people or animals.
obstacles. • To prevent luggage or packages from sliding
• Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, forward during braking, do not stack anything
in the cargo area higher than the seatbacks.
brake fluid, and window washer fluid as
frequently as possible, at least whenever you re- • Secure all cargo with ropes or straps to pre-
fuel. vent it from sliding or shifting.
• Visually inspect tyres for their appearance and • Failure to follow proper seating instructions
condition. Also check the tyre pressure for see “Seats” in the “1. Safety — Seats, Seat belts
proper inflation. and Supplemental Restraint System” section,
• Maintenance items in the “8. Maintenance and could result in serious personal injury in an ac-
cident or sudden stop.
do-it-yourself” section should be checked peri-
odically.
• Check that all windows and light lenses are NOTE
clean. During the first few months after purchasing a
• Check that all doors are closed. new vehicle, if you smell strong odours of Volatile
• Position the seat and adjust the head restraints. Organic Compounds (VOCs) inside the vehicle,
ventilate the passenger compartment thor-
• Adjust the inside and outside mirrors. oughly. Open all the windows before entering or
• Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers to while in the vehicle. In addition, when the tem-
do likewise. perature in the passenger compartment rises, or
• Check the operation of the warning/indicator
when the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight for a
period of time, turn off the air recirculation mode
lights when the power switch is switched ON.
of the air conditioner and/or open the windows
to allow sufficient fresh air into the passenger
compartment.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (where fitted)
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon Monoxide) • If a special body or other equipment is added

for recreational or other usage, follow the
WARNING manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent
• Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain

carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. (Some
recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves,
colourless and odourless carbon monoxide.
refrigerators, heaters, etc. may also generate
Carbon monoxide is a dangerous gas and can
carbon monoxide.)
cause unconsciousness or death.
• If you suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-
• The exhaust system and body should be in-
spected by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
ing the vehicle, drive with all windows fully
shop whenever:
open and have the vehicle inspected immedi- NIC4118
ately. – The vehicle is raised for service.
• Do not run the engine in closed spaces, such – You suspect that exhaust fumes are enter-
ing into the passenger compartment.
as a garage, for any longer than is absolutely a TPMS indicator light
j
necessary. – You notice a change in the sound of the ex- b TPMS tyre location indicator
j
• Do not park the vehicle with the engine run- haust system.
ning for any extended length of time. – You have had an accident involving dam-
• Keep the tailgate closed while driving, other- age to the exhaust system, underbody, or
rear of the vehicle.
wise exhaust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must drive in
this way for some reason, take the following
steps:
1) Open all the windows.
2) Set the air recirculation mode ( ) to the
“OFF” position. NDI1751
3) Set the fan speed control to the maximum
position to circulate the air.
A Tyre valve with sensor
j
• If electrical wiring or other cable connections
The tyre pressure monitoring system monitors the
must pass to a trailer through the seal of the
tyre pressure of the four wheels while the vehicle is
body, follow the manufacturer's recommen-
in motion. Following a loss in pressure, the system
dations to prevent carbon monoxide entry
will warn the driver using a visual warning. Each
into the vehicle.

TPMS sensor j A has a registered wheel location and The TPMS indicator light flashes for a short period • Following a change in the outside temperature,
sends pressure and temperature data via radio to a and then turns on continuously if the system is not the TPMS indicator light may illuminate even if
receiver inside the vehicle. operating properly. This sequence will continue the tyre pressure has been adjusted properly.
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the Adjust the tyre pressure to the recommended
Each tyre, including the spare (where fitted), should
malfunction exists (missing or faulty TPMS sensor COLD tyre pressure again when the tyres are
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
or TPMS system malfunction). When the malfunc- cold, and reset the TPMS.
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
tion warning light is illuminated, the system may For additional information, see “[Check Cold
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tyre infla-
not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure as Tyre] message” later in this section.
tion pressure label. (If your vehicle has tyres of a dif-
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ferent size than the size indicated on the vehicle
ety of reasons including the installation of replace-
placard or tyre inflation pressure label, you should
ment or alternate tyres or wheels on the vehicle
determine the proper tyre inflation pressure for
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
those tyres.)
Always check the TPMS indicator light after replac-
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) con- ing one or more tyres or wheels on your vehicle to
trols the TPMS indicator light j a , which will illumi- ensure that the replacement or alternate tyres and
nate when one or more tyres are significantly un- wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
der-inflated. A warning and tyre location indicator erly.
jb will also appear in the vehicle information display
to identify the tyre or tyres with low pressure. • The TPMS does not monitor the tyre pressure of
the spare tyre.
Accordingly, when the TPMS indicator light illumi-
nates, safely stop the vehicle to check the tyres as
• The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 25 km/h (16 MPH). Also,
soon as possible and inflate the tyres to the proper
this system may not detect a sudden drop in
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tyre pressure (for example a flat tyre while driv-
tyre causes the tyre to overheat and can lead to
ing).
tyre failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tyre tread life which may affect the vehi- • The TPMS indicator light may not automatically
cle’s handling and stopping ability. turn off when the tyre pressure is adjusted. Af-
ter the tyre is inflated to the recommended
NOTE COLD tyre pressure, drive the vehicle at speeds
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tyre main- above 25 km/h (16 MPH) to activate the TPMS.
tenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to main- See “New and repositioned TPMS sensors (in-
tain correct tyre pressure, even if under-inflation cluding fitment of alternative wheels)” later in
has not reached the level to trigger the illumina- this section
tion of the TPMS indicator light j
a.

WARNING • The Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tyre Repair – If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
•
Sealant or equivalent can be used for tempo- DC/AC converter is being used in or near
If the TPMS indicator light illuminates while rarily repairing a tyre. Do not inject any other the vehicle.
driving: tyre liquid or aerosol tyre sealant into the ty- – If devices which transmit electrical noise
– avoid sudden steering manoeuvres res, as this may cause a malfunction of the tyre are connected to the vehicle's 12V power
– avoid abrupt braking pressure sensors. supply.
– reduce vehicle speed • NISSAN recommends using only Genuine
• When inflating the tyres and checking the tyre
NISSAN Emergency Tyre Sealant provided with pressure, never bend the valves.
– pull off the road to a safe location
•
your vehicle. Other tyre sealants may damage
– stop the vehicle as soon as possible the valve stem seal which can cause the tyre Use Genuine NISSAN valve caps that comply
• to lose air pressure. Visit a NISSAN dealer or with the factory-fitted valve cap specifica-
Driving with under-inflated tyres may perma- tions.
qualified workshop as soon as possible after
•
nently damage the tyres and increase the like-
lihood of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage using tyre repair sealant (for models equipped Do not use metal valve caps.
could occur which may lead to an accident and with the emergency tyre puncture repair kit).
• Fit the valve caps properly. Without the valve
could result in serious personal injury. caps the valve and tyre pressure monitor sen-
• Check the tyre pressure for all four tyres. Ad- CAUTION
sors could be damaged.
just the tyre pressure to the recommended
• The TPMS may not function properly when the
• Do not damage the valves and sensors when
COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre placard storing the wheels or fitting different tyres.
wheels are equipped with tyre chains or the
to turn the TPMS indicator light “OFF”. In case
of a flat tyre, replace it with a spare tyre as
wheels are buried in snow. • Replace the TPMS sensor valve stem (includ-
soon as possible. (See “Flat tyre” in the “6. In • Do not place metallised film or any metal parts
ing valve core and cap) and screw (where fit-
ted) when the tyres are replaced due to wear
case of emergency” section for changing a flat (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may
or age. The screw (where fitted) must be fitted
tyre.) cause poor reception of the signals from the
correctly with a torque setting of 1.4 ± 0.1 N.m.
• When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is
tyre pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not
function properly.
The TPMS sensors can be used again.
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the
TPMS indicator light will flash for approxi- Some devices and transmitters may tempo-
• Use caution when using tyre inflation equip-
ment with a rigid air supply tube, as leverage
mately 1 minute. The light will remain on after rarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS
applied by the long nozzle can damage the
1 minute. Be sure to follow all instructions for and cause the TPMS indicator light to illumi-
valve stem.
wheel replacement and mount the TPMS sys- nate. Some examples are:
tem correctly. – Facilities or electric devices using similar
• Replacing tyres with those not originally radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
specified by NISSAN could affect the proper – If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
operation of the TPMS. being used in or near the vehicle.

METER INFORMATION ACTIVATION
When the e-POWER system is started. Once the ve-
TPMS indicator light(s) Possible cause Recommended action hicle starts moving the tyre pressure is monitored.
NEW AND REPOSITIONED TPMS

Inflate tyre(s) to the correct pres- SENSORS (including fitment of
m
Low tyre pressure
sure alternative wheels)
It is recommended that a NISSAN dealer performs
the registration of a new TPMS sensor or sensor
Check if the TPMS sensors are
location.
Genuine NISSAN TPMS sensor is not present.
detected at one or more wheels If no sensor is present add a It is also possible to register the sensor yourself fol-
genuine NISSAN TPMS sensor lowing the procedure below:
TPMS radio communication interfer- Procedure:
m ence between TPMS wheel sensor

and TPMS receiver due to external
sources.
TPMS parts malfunction

Drive away from the area of
interference
If the problem persists contact a

NISSAN dealer or qualified
1. Change tyre position or have a new TPMS sensor
fitted.
2. Confirm pressure of COLD tyre and perform Tem-
perature Calibration. See “TPMS temperature
workshop calibration (where possible)” later in this section.
3. Drive the vehicle for several minutes between 25
km/h (16 MPH) and 100 km/h (64 MPH). The TPMS
sensor ID and position will automatically be de-
tected.
NOTE
The TPMS might not synchronise if one or more
of the following conditions apply:
• Bad road conditions
• The TPMS unit does not receive correct data
from tyre pressure sensors
• Driving below 25 km/h (16 MPH)
• Driving above 100 km/h (64 MPH)
• High acceleration

• High deceleration ADJUSTING TPMS TARGET NOTE
• In stop and go traffic or traffic waves PRESSURE (where possible) Even if the pressure is above the preset target
pressure, the yellow colour in the tyre pressure
If you are using your vehicle in a heavily laden con-
warning means that the tyre pressure is actually
dition, the tyre pressures should be inflated to the
too low. Tyre pressure is increasing during driv-
‘Laden Pressure’ shown on the tyre placard.
ing. Check the tyre pressure when the tyre is cold.
The TPMS system can be adjusted in the vehicle in-
formation display to set the target pressure to the TPMS TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION
‘Laden Pressure’ shown on the tyre placard. See “Ve- (where possible)
hicle information display” in the “2. Instruments and
The tyre pressure is affected by the temperature of
controls” section. To adjust the target pressure use
the tyre; the tyre temperature increases when the
the steering wheel switches to select the [Settings]
car is driven. To be able to accurately monitor the
menu, followed by [Tyre Pressures]. Select [Target
NIC3711 tyre air leakage and to prevent false TPMS warnings
front] and [Target rear] and set the desired tyre
7 inch display due to reductions in temperature, the TPMS system
pressure.
uses temperature sensors in the tyres to perform
The TPMS target pressures will be displayed in the temperature compensation calculations.
centre of the front and rear axle on the TPMS screen
On rare occasions it may be necessary to recalibrate
of the vehicle information display.
the TPMS system reference temperature using the
TYRE PRESSURE UNITS vehicle information display. See “Vehicle informa-
tion display” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
The units displayed by the TPMS system can be se-
section. This operation should only be performed
lected using the vehicle information display. Select
when the actual tyre pressure has been adjusted,
the [Settings] menu, followed by [Tyre Pressures].
whilst the current ambient temperature is signifi-
Select [Tyre pressure unit] and choose the desired
cantly different to the current calibration tempera-
unit.
ture.
NIC4059
Full screen display [CHECK COLD TYRE] MESSAGE To initiate TPMS temperature calibration use the
If the tyre pressure becomes higher than the target steering wheel switches to select the [Settings]
A Tyre pressure
j menu, followed by [Tyre Pressures]. Select
pressure during a low tyre pressure condition, the
B Tyre pressure units
j [Check Cold Tyre] message will be displayed in the [Calibrate]. While the calibration process is active,
vehicle information display. the message: [Calibrate] will be displayed in the ve-
C Front target pressure
j
hicle information display.
D Rear target pressure
j See “Vehicle information display” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section.

THREE-WAY CATALYST GASOLINE PARTICULATE FILTER
(GPF) (where fitted)
• Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in

The three-way catalyst is an emission control de- the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical sys- Your vehicle is fitted with a Gasoline Particulate Fil-
vice installed in the exhaust system or the engine. In tems can cause over-rich fuel flow into the ter (GPF) (or Petrol Particulate Filter) as part of the
the converter, exhaust gases are burned at high converter, causing it to overheat. emission control system.
temperatures to help reduce pollutants. • Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. The GPF filters carbon particles from the exhaust
Running out of fuel could cause the engine to gas, thus reducing the emission of soot to the envi-
CAUTION misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. ronment.
• The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are • Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if Under normal driving conditions, the accumulated
very hot. While the engine is running, keep noticeable loss of performance or other un- carbon particles in the GPF are burned-off regularly,
people or flammable materials away from the usual operating conditions are detected. Have thus emptying the filter from carbon particles. In
exhaust pipe. the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN this way, the GPF is “regenerated” and again fully
• Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable dealer or qualified workshop. operational to filter out the carbon particles from
materials such as dry grass, waste paper or • Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the the exhaust gas as intended.
rags, as they may burn easily. engine.
• When parking, ensure that people or
flammable materials are kept away from the
exhaust pipe.
TO HELP PREVENT DAMAGE

CAUTION
• Use UNLEADED PETROL ONLY, specifically the
recommended type. For details, see “Recom- NSD1135
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in
the “9. Technical information” section.
• Do not use leaded petrol. Leaded petrol will se- CAUTION
riously damage three-way catalyst.
Deposits from leaded petrol will seriously re-
• Under certain driving conditions, the GPF may
become saturated/clogged because these
duce the three-way catalyst's ability to help driving conditions prevent automatic regen-
reduce exhaust pollutants. eration of the filter. In this case, a message is
displayed in the vehicle information display.

TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM CARE WHEN DRIVING
• When the [Exhaust filter maintenance See The turbocharger system uses engine oil for lubri- Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is es-
owner's manual] message is displayed, the cation and cooling of its rotating components. The sential for your safety and comfort. As a driver, you
engine speed increases automatically to burn turbocharger turbine turns at extremely high should be the one who knows best how to drive in
carbon particles. When this message is dis- speeds and it can reach an extremely high tempera- the given circumstances.
played, continue to drive appropriately, pro- ture. It is essential to maintain a flow of clean oil
vided that legal and safety conditions allow, through the turbocharger system. A sudden inter- LOADING LUGGAGE
until the message is no longer displayed. ruption to the oil supply may cause a malfunction in Loads, their distribution and the attachment of
• Should the MIL come on for any reason, or if the turbocharger. equipment (coupling devices, roof luggage carriers,
etc.) will change the driving characteristics of the
the [Exhaust filter maintenance See owner's To ensure prolonged life and performance of the
manual] warning message continues to be turbocharger, it is essential to comply with the fol- vehicle considerably. Driving style and speed must
displayed in the vehicle information display lowing recommendations: be adjusted accordingly.
and will not clear, always visit a NISSAN dealer DRIVING ON WET ROADS
CAUTION
•
or qualified workshop as soon as possible. Ex-
•
tended driving with the MIL illuminated may Avoid starting off, accelerating and stopping
Change the engine oil of the turbo-charged suddenly.
lead to damage to the exhaust filter system.
•
engine as prescribed. See the separately pro-
• When the [Exhaust filter maintenance See vided Warranty Information & Maintenance Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
owner's manual] message is displayed, the Booklet for additional information. • Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle
ProPILOT Assist system (where fitted) will be
• Use only the recommended engine oil. See in front.
deactivated. “Recommended fluids/lubricants and • When water covers the road surface in puddles,
capacities” in the “9. Technical information” small streams, etc. REDUCE SPEED to prevent
section. aquaplaning which will cause skidding and loss
• If the engine has been operating at high rpm of control. Worn tyres increase this risk.
for an extended period of time, let it idle for a DRIVING UNDER WINTER
few minutes prior to shutdown.
CONDITIONS
• Do not accelerate the engine to high rpm im-
• Drive safely.
mediately after starting it.
• Avoid starting off, accelerating or stopping sud-
denly.
• Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
• Avoid sudden steering actions.
• Extra distance should be kept from the vehicle
in front.

PUSH-BUTTON POWER SWITCH
PRECAUTIONS ON PUSH-BUTTON Operating range • If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or
window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key
POWER SWITCH OPERATION
may function.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button power switch
while driving the vehicle except in an emergency.
(The e-POWER system will stop when the power
switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the
power switch is pushed and held for more than 2
seconds.) The steering wheel will lock and could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. This
NIC4101
could result in serious vehicle damage or per-
sonal injury.
The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting the
Before operating the push-button power switch, be e-POWER system when the Intelligent Key is within
sure to push the P position switch to engage the P the specified operating range ➀ as illustrated.
(Park) position. When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM discharged or strong radio waves are present near
the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s
The Intelligent Key system can operate the power operating range becomes narrower and may not
switch without taking the key out from your pocket function properly.
or bag. The operating environment and/or condi-
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it
tions may affect the Intelligent Key system opera-
is possible for anyone, even someone who does not
tion.
carry the Intelligent Key, to push the power switch
to start the e-POWER system.
CAUTION
• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you • The luggage room area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key may
when operating the vehicle.
function.
• Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the ve-
• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument
hicle when you leave the vehicle.
panel, inside the glove box, door pocket or the
• If the Intelligent Key is too far away from the corner of the interior compartment, the Intelli-
driver, the vehicle may not start. gent Key may not function.

POWER SWITCH POSITIONS The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of
the following occur:
WARNING • Power switch is in the “OFF” position.
Never place the power switch in the OFF position • e-POWER system is running.
while driving. The steering wheel may lock and
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle, re-
• Vehicle is driven.
sulting in serious vehicle damage or personal The power switch will automatically be placed in
injury the OFF position when the following conditions
have been met and 10 minutes have passed.
WAF0438XZ
• When the power switch is placed in the ON posi-
CAUTION tion.
• Do not leave the vehicle for extended periods • When the vehicle is parked.
of time when the power switch is in the ON
position and the e-POWER system is not run-
When the power switch is pushed without depress-
ing the brake pedal, the power switch will illumi- • When the hazard indicator and turn signal light
are turned off.
ning. This can discharge the 12-volt battery. nate:
• Use electrical accessories with the e- POWER Push the centre of the power switch: OFF
system running to avoid discharging the 12-
• Once to switch the system ON. The e-POWER system is turned off at this position.
•
volt battery. If you must use accessories while
the e-POWER system is not running, do not use Two times to switch the system OFF. Auto ACC
them for extended periods of time and do not When the READY to drive indicator light illuminates With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelli-
use multiple electrical accessories at the same in the meter, the vehicle can be driven. gent Key with you and the power switch placed from
time. ON to OFF, the outside rearview mirror remote con-
ON (normal operating position) trol, etc. can still be used for a period of time.
The electrical accessory power activates at this po-
sition without the e-POWER system turned on. EMERGENCY SYSTEM SHUT OFF
The ON position has a battery saver feature that will To shut off the system in an emergency situation
place the power switch in the OFF position, if the while driving, perform the following procedure:
vehicle is not running, after some time under the • Rapidly push the push-button power switch 3
following conditions: consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
• Power switch is in the ON position. • Push and hold the push-button power switch
• e-POWER system is stopped. for more than 2 seconds.

STEERING LOCK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY NOTE
The power switch is equipped with an anti-theft DISCHARGE • When the power switch is placed in the ON po-
steering lock device. sition or the e-POWER system is started by the
above procedures, the [Key Battery Low]
To lock steering wheel warning appears on the vehicle information
1. Switch the power OFF where the power switch display even if the Intelligent Key is inside the
position indicator will not illuminate. vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off
the warning, touch the power switch with the
2. Open or close the door.
Intelligent Key again.
3. Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn to the right
or left from the straight up position. • If the Intelligent Key system warning message
[Key Battery Low] appears in the vehicle infor-
To unlock steering wheel mation display, replace the battery as soon as
Push the power switch to ON, and the steering WBF0089XZ possible. (See “Intelligent Key battery
wheel will be automatically unlocked. replacement” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.)
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or
CAUTION environmental conditions interfere with the Intelli-
• If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the gent Key operation, start the e-POWER system ac-
push-button power switch cannot be cording to the following procedure:
switched ON. 1. Firmly apply the footbrake.
• If the system does not turn ON, push the power 2. Push the power switch.
switch again while rotating the steering wheel
3. Touch the power switch with the Intelligent Key
slightly to the right and left.
as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
4. Push the power switch while depressing the
brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime
sounds. The e-POWER system will start.
After step 3 is performed, when the power switch is
pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the
power switch will switch ON.

STARTING THE E-POWER DRIVING THE VEHICLE
SYSTEM
1. Before starting the e-POWER system ensure park- NOTE ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
ing brake is applied and vehicle is secure. For ad-
ditional information, see “Electric Parking Brake”
• After placing the power switch in the ON posi- This vehicle is electronically controlled to produce
tion, the engine may start before the READY to maximum available power and smooth operation.
in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” drive indicator light stops blinking and then
section. The recommended operating procedures for this
illuminates.
shift control system are shown on the following
2. Confirm that the vehicle is in the P (Park) posi-
tion.
• When the remaining Lithium ion (Li-ion) bat- pages. Follow these procedures for maximum ve-
tery level is low, it may take a period of time hicle performance and driving enjoyment.
The e-POWER system is designed not to oper- until the READY to drive indicator light stops
ate unless the vehicle is in the P (Park) position blinking and then illuminates after pushing WARNING
or the shift position is in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
the power switch. In the meantime, the Energy
Flow, etc. will not appear. • Do not depress the accelerator pedal while
shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Re-
The Intelligent Key (where fitted) must be car- • The brake pedal may be firm since the pedal is verse), D (Drive) mode. Always depress the
ried while inside the vehicle when operating operated before the e-POWER system starts. brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure
the power switch. In this case, depress the brake pedal more to do so could cause you to lose control and
3. Firmly depress the brake pedal and push the firmly than usual. have an accident.
power switch to place the vehicle in the READY to • You may hear a sound when the brake pedal is • Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse)
drive position. depressed with the e-POWER system off. This position while the vehicle is moving forward
To place the vehicle in the READY to drive posi- does not indicate a malfunction. and P (Park) or D (Drive) mode position while
tion immediately, push and release the power • If the e-POWER system cannot be started, the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an
switch while depressing the brake pedal with the place the power switch in the OFF position and accident or damage the shift control system.
power switch in any position. The READY to drive
indicator light in the meter illuminates.
wait for 5 seconds or more and then restart
the e-POWER system.
• Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N
(Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with
To stop the e-POWER system, push the P position the shift control system in the N (Neutral) po-
switch, and push the power switch to the OFF posi- sition may cause serious damage to the shift
tion. control system.

Make sure the footbrake pedal is depressed When in the “D” (Drive) position, slide along the gate
CAUTION
•
fully and the vehicle is stopped before shifting to select “B” position
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, the shift control system. To place the vehicle into the “D” (Drive) position from
•
when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade,
do not hold the vehicle by depressing the ac- MAKE SURE OF THE SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM the “B” position, move the shift lever into the “D”
celerator pedal. The footbrake should be used POSITION - Make sure the shift control system (Drive) position again.
for this purpose. position is in the desired position on the ve- After placing the power switch in the READY to drive
•
hicle information display. D (Drive) is used to position, fully depress the brake pedal, and move
Do not hang items on the shift lever. This may move forward and R (Reverse) to reverse.
cause an accident due to a sudden start. the shift lever to any of the preferred shift position-
s.as indicated then release it. To shift to reverse you
Shifting need to first depress button ➀.
Starting the vehicle
Confirm that the shift control system is in the de-
1. After placing the vehicle in the READY to drive sired shift position by checking the shift indicator
position, fully depress the foot brake pedal before located on the shift lever or on the vehicle informa-
moving the shift lever to the D (Drive) position. tion display.
The shift lever of this vehicle is designed so that
the foot brake pedal must be depressed before NOTE
shifting from P (Park) to any driving position
while the e-POWER system is running. The shift
• The vehicle automatically applies the P (Park)
position when the power switch is switched
position cannot be placed out of the P (Park) OFF.
position and into any of the other positions if
the power switch is switched OFF. NSD1149
• When the READY to drive indicator light does
not illuminate, the shift position cannot be
2. Keep the footbrake pedal depressed and move changed to the D (Drive), B or R (Reverse) posi-
the shift lever to select a driving position. tion even if the power switch is switched ON.
A Home position (central position)
j
3. Release the foot brake and gradually apply the
accelerator pedal. If the parking brake is on it will
To shift gear move the lever to the desired position • If the following conditions have been met, the
as indicated then release it. To shift to reverse you shift position may be changed to the P (Park)
automatically release provided the driver has
need to first depress button ➀. position automatically.
their seat belt fastened.
Push the button ➀ to shift. – When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
CAUTION m: – When the driver’s door is opened.
• DEPRESS THE FOOTBRAKE PEDAL - Shifting to Shift without pushing the but-
ton ➀.
D (Drive) or R (Reverse) without depressing the m:
footbrake pedal causes the vehicle to move
slowly while the e-POWER system is running. Push the P position switch ➁ to shift to P (Park).

sumed by the engine started with the power
WARNING CAUTION
• •
generator. In that case, the engine sound may
The shift lever is always in the centre position Do not slide the shift lever while pushing the P be loud, no fuel is used in this situation, this is
when released. When the power switch is position switch. This may damage the electric not a malfunction.
•
placed in the READY to drive position, the motor.
•
driver needs to confirm that the shift control When the P position switch is pushed while
When switching to the desired shift position driving, the operation is canceled. (The buzzer
system is in the P (Park) position. by operating the shift lever, check that the sounds and the shift position before being op-
The indicator light above the P on the shift le- shift lever returns to the central position by erated is maintained.)
•
ver is illuminated and the P is displayed on the releasing your hand from the lever. Holding
vehicle information display. If the vehicle is in the shift lever in a mid-way position may also If the accelerator pedal is depressed when the
the D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position when the damage the shift control system. vehicle is stopped and the shift control sys-
•
power switch is placed in the READY to drive tem is in the N (Neutral) position, the power
Do not operate the shift lever while the accel- limitation indicator light will illuminate. In this
position, this may cause a sudden start which erator pedal is depressed, except when
could result in an accident. case, even if the shift lever is shifted to D
switching to the B position. This may cause a
•
(Drive), the acceleration will be reduced. (See
On a hilly road, do not allow the vehicle to roll sudden start which could result in an accident. “Power limitation indicator light” in the “2. In-
backwards while in the D (Drive) position or B
position, or allow the vehicle to roll forward
• The following operations are not allowed be- struments and controls” section.)
cause excessive force would be applied to the
while in the R (Reverse) position. This may electric motor for driving and this may result
cause an accident. in damage to the vehicle: If these operations
• Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while are attempted, a chime sounds and the vehicle
driving. The regenerative brake is not oper- shifts to the N (Neutral) position.
ated, which could result in an accident. – Shifting to the R (Reverse) position when
• If the regenerative brake does not work suffi- driving forward
ciently, depress the brake pedal to decrease – Shifting to the D (Drive) or B position when
the vehicle speed. reversing
• When stopping or parking on an uphill or
NSD1150
downhill road, depress the brake pedal and
NOTE
stop the vehicle. If the vehicle continues to be
stopped with only the accelerator pedal de- • Do not intentionally reverse with the shift con- P (Park):
pressed and the brake pedal released, the trol system in the D (Drive) or B position on an
Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when
electric motor for driving could cause over- incline or move your vehicle forward with the
placing the vehicle in the READY to drive position.
heating. When stopping the vehicle, release shift control system in the R (Reverse) posi-
Always make sure that the vehicle is completely
the accelerator pedal and depress the brake tion on a downhill slope.
stopped before pushing the P position switch to en-
pedal. • When the Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery is fully gage the P (Park) position. push the P position
charged, regenerated electric power is con-

switch as shown in the illustration once the vehicle N (Neutral): B:
has come to a complete stop. If the P position switch Neither the forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Use the B position when more regenerative brake is
is pushed while the vehicle is in motion, a chime The vehicle can be placed in the READY to drive po- required such as driving downhill. When the B posi-
sounds and the current shift position is maintained. sition in this position. tion is used, more regenerative brake is applied
After switching to the P (Park)position, apply the when the accelerator pedal is released in compari-
Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving.
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the son to the D (Drive) position.
The regenerative brake system does not operate in
parking brake first while keeping the foot brake
the N (Neutral) position. However, the vehicle brakes Regenerative brake:
pedal depressed then push the P position switch
and place the vehicle in the P (Park) position. For the
will still stop the vehicle.
• The effectiveness of the regenerative brake is in-
parking brake operation, see “Electric Parking Brake” To shift to the N (Neutral) position: creased when the vehicle is placed in the “B” po-
in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion).
• When the vehicle is in the P (Park) position, slide
sition. If the vehicle speed is too fast, depress the
brake pedal accordingly.
the shift lever forward or backward by one notch
NOTE
with the brake pedal depressed, and hold the • The effectiveness of the brake of the regenera-
shift lever at the position for longer than 1 sec- tive brake may be decreased on a slippery road,
• While the vehicle is stationary, if the shift posi- ond. when the Li-ion battery is fully charged or the
tion is other than P (Park), when the power
switch is placed in the “OFF” position, the shift • When the vehicle is in the D (Drive) or B position,
Li-ion battery temperature is low.
slide the shift lever forward by one notch with
position will automatically switch to the P
the brake pedal depressed, and hold the shift
(Park) position.
lever at the position for longer than 1 second.
• If the P switch is pushed while sliding the shift
• When the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position,
lever, the shift position will not switch to the P
slide the shift lever backward by one notch with
(Park) position. When pushing the P switch, be
the brake pedal depressed, and hold the shift
sure to first allow the shift lever to return to its
lever at the position for longer than 1 second.
centre position.
D (Drive):
R (Reverse):
Use this position for all normal forward driving. If
Use the R (Reverse) position to reverse. Make sure
the shift control system is placed in the D (Drive)
the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
position while the vehicle is reversing, the chime
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be
will sound and the vehicle will switch into the N
depressed and the shift lever button pushed to
(Neutral) position.
move the shift lever from the home position to
engage R (Reverse). If the vehicle is placed in the
R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving
forward, the chime will sound and the vehicle will
switch into the N (Neutral) position.

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION
(where fitted)
It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness.

It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert and
drive safely at all times.
SYSTEM OPERATION
NIC4018
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides

the driver with information about the most recently
detected speed limit. The system captures the road
sign information with the front camera unit ➀ lo- NSD1109
cated in front of the interior rear-view mirror and 7 inch display
displays the detected signs in the Vehicle Informa-
tion Display. For vehicles equipped with NissanCon-
nect, the speed limit displayed is based on a combi-
nation of navigation system data and live camera
recognition. TSR information is always displayed at
the top of the Vehicle Information Display, and op-
tionally in the main central area of the display
screen. See “Vehicle information display” in the “2. In-
struments and controls” section for details of how
to adapt the display of TSR information.
NSD1110
WARNING Full screen display
The TSR system is only intended to be a support
device to provide the driver with information. It is
not a replacement for the driver's attention to
traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely.
NIC3874
TSR: available road signs

The traffic recognition system displays the follow- • When the headlights are not bright due to • In areas not covered by the navigation sys-
ing types of road sign: dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad- tem.
A Latest detected speed limit.
j justed properly.
• When the data of the navigation system is
B National speed limit.
j • When strong light enters the camera unit. incorrect or out-of-date.
C No speed limit information.

j
(For example, the light directly shines on
the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-
• If there are deviations in relation to the
navigation, for example due to changes in
D No-overtaking zone.
j set.) the road routing.
E End of no-overtaking zone.
j • When a sudden change in brightness oc-
• When overtaking buses or trucks with
curs. (For example, when the vehicle enters speed stickers.
F Conditional speed limit, with the following
j
•
or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
available conditions:
•
The TSR system may display a traffic sign even
When there is poor visibility. (For example, though there is no traffic sign in front of the
g Snow
j
insufficient illumination of the road, bad vehicle. It may display a different speed limit
h Towing
j weather conditions in rain, snow or fog or from that for a passenger vehicle. The maxi-
i Goods vehicles
j heavy spray.) mum speed limit sign may show a higher or
j Generic
j • When the traffic signs are damaged or not lower number than the actual maximum
standard. (For example, incorrect size, speed, for example, when detecting a speed
k Left turn allowed
j height, direction or brightness, or broken limit sign for trucks, different speed limit with
l Right turn allowed
j or bent). the time of day or day of the week, or speed
CAUTION
• When the traffic signs are hard to detect. limit sign using different units (MPH or km/h)
near a border, when detecting an electric traf-
(For example, they are covered by dirt or
• The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system is snow, or insufficient lighting.) fic sign with or without speed limit indication,
•
intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the when detecting an irrelevant speed limit pass-
When the signs are ambiguous. (For ing by a highway exit or junction,etc.
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, example, traffic signs on construction
and observe all road regulations that currently sites, in adjacent lanes or exit lane.)
•
apply, including looking out for road signs.
•
When there is a object similar to traffic
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system may signs. (For example, similar signs, board or
not function properly under the following con- structure.)
•
ditions:
•
When passing traffic signs outside the
When rain, snow, fogging up or dirt adheres camera's field of vision. (For example, after
to the windscreen in front of the TSR cam- a sharp turn or located too far away.)
•
era unit.
When electric traffic signs are hard to de-
tect. (For example, low contrast, located
too far away, 3 digits.)

TURNING THE TSR SYSTEM ON AND
OFF
Turning the TSR system on or off is done using the
[Settings] menu in the Vehicle Information Display.
For details, see “Vehicle information display” in the
“2. Instruments and controls” section.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the
TSR system:
1. Press the or button until [Settings] dis-
plays in the Vehicle Information Display and then
press the scroll dial. Use the scroll dial buttons to
select [Driver Assistance]. Then press the scroll
dial.
2. Use the scroll dial buttons to select [Traffic Sign].
Then press the scroll dial to turn the system ON/
OFF.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high
temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C
(104°F)) and then started, the TSR system may be
deactivated automatically.
NSD1153
Action to take:
➀ Steering wheel-mounted controls (left side) When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR
system will resume operating automatically.
➁ Vehicle information display

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
SYSTEM/INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT
INTERVENTION SYSTEM
(where fitted)
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION • Do not attach a sticker (including transparent
material) or install an accessory near the cam- This section contains the information about the fol-
If the TSR system malfunctions it will be turned off
era unit. lowing systems:
automatically and the [System fault] warning mes-
sage will appear in the Vehicle Information Display. • Do not place reflective materials, such as white
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system
•
paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The
Action to take: Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system
reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the
If the [System fault] message appears, pull off the camera unit's detection capability.
WARNING
road at a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn
the e-POWER system off and restart the e-POWER
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the
camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or
system If the [System fault] message continues to BSW/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system.
remove the screw located on the camera unit. If
appear, have the TSR system checked by a NISSAN Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with
the camera unit is damaged due to an accident,
dealer or qualified workshop. these system limitations could result in serious
contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
injury or death.
MAINTENANCE
• The BSW/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention
system is not a replacement for proper driving
procedure and is not designed to prevent con-
tact with vehicles or objects. When driving, al-
ways use the side and rear mirrors and always
turn your head and look in the direction you
will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes.
Never rely solely on the BSW system.
• There is a limitation to the detection capabil-
ity of the radar. Using the BSW and Intelligent
NIC4018 Blind Spot Intervention systems under some
road, lane marker or weather conditions could
lead to improper system operation. Always
The lane camera unit ➀ for the Traffic Sign Recog- rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.
•
nition (TSR) system is located above the interior rear
The BSW system operates at speeds above
view mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the
approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH).
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system and prevent a
system malfunction, be sure to observe the follow- • The Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system
ing: operates at speeds above approximately 60
• Always keep the windscreen clean.

km/h (37 MPH).

THE BSW AND INTELLIGENT BLIND The BSW system uses radar sensors j A installed The Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system oper-
near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles be- ates above approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH). If the
SPOT INTERVENTION SYSTEMS
side your vehicle in an adjacent lane. In addition to radar detects a vehicle in the detection zone and
the radar sensors, the Intelligent Blind Spot Inter- your vehicle is approaching the lane marker, the
vention system uses a camera ➀ installed behind systems chime a sound (three times), flashes the
the windscreen to monitor the lane markers of your BSW LED indicator light and the BSW indicator, and
travelling lane. slightly applies the brakes on one side for a short
period of time to help return the vehicle back to the
travelling lane.
NAA2080
SSD1030Z
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side

of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as
illustrated. This detection zone starts from the out-
side mirror of your vehicle and extends approxi-
mately 3.0 m (10 ft) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 3.0 m (10 ft) sideways.
NIC4018
The BSW system operates above approximately 32
km/h (20 MPH). If the radar sensors detect vehicles
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Intelligent Blind in the detection zone, the BSW LED indicator light
Spot Intervention systems can help alert the driver illuminates. If the driver then activates the turn sig-
of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing nal, the system chimes a sound (twice) and the BSW
lanes. LED indicator light and the BSW indicator will flash.

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 32
km/h (20 MPH).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection
zone, the BSW LED indicator light illuminates.
If the turn signal is then activated, the system
chimes (twice) and the BSW LED indicator light and
the BSW indicator will flash. The BSW LED indicator
light and the BSW indicator continue to flash until
the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.
The BSW LED indicator light illuminates for a few
seconds when the power switch is switched ON. The
brightness of the side indicator light is adjusted au-
tomatically depending on the brightness of ambi-
ent light.
WAF0413X
➀ BSW LED indicator light

➁ BSW indicator (on the vehicle information
display)
➂ Vehicle information display
➃ Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

Turning the BSW system on or off
BSW system.
1. Push the button until [Settings] ap-
pears in the vehicle information display and then
push the scroll dial. Use the scroll dial to select
[Driver Assistance]. Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select [Blind Spot] and push the scroll dial.
3. Select [Warning] and push the scroll dial.
For details. see “Vehicle information display” in the
NOTE
When enabling/disabling the system, the system
will retain the current settings even if the
e-POWER system isrestarted.
WAF0412X
➀ Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)


BSW temporary disabled status System malfunction
When radar blockage is detected, the BSW system If the BSW system malfunctions, it will be turned off
will be turned off automatically. The [Not available automatically. The [System Fault] warning message
Side radar obstructed] warning message will ap- will appear in the vehicle information display.
pear in the vehicle information display.
NOTE
The system is not available until the conditions no
If the BSW system stops working, the Intelligent
longer exist.
Blind Spot Intervention (where fitted) and the
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems will also
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist, stop working.
or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused
Action to take:
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
radar sensors. Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and re-
start the e-POWER system. If the message contin-
NOTE ues to appear, have the BSW system checked by a
If the BSW system stops working, the Intelligent NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
Blind Spot Intervention (where fitted) and the
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems will also
stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the sys-
tem will resume automatically.

proaching a lane marker, the system chimes a
sound (three times) and the BSW LED indicator light
and the BSW indicator will flash. Then the system
applies the brakes on one side of the vehicle for a
moment to help return the vehicle back to the
centre of the lane. Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
tion operates regardless of turn signal usage.
NOTE
Warning and brake control will only be activated
if the BSW LED indicator light is already illumi-
nated when your vehicle approaches a lane
marker. If another vehicle comes into the detec-
tion zone after your vehicle has crossed a lane
marker, no warning or brake control will be acti-
vated. For additional information, see “BSW/In-
telligent Blind Spot Intervention driving
situations” later in this section. The Intelligent
Blind Spot Intervention system is typically acti-
vated earlier than the Intelligent Lane Interven-
tion (ILI) system when your vehicle is approach-
ing a lane marker.
The Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system turns
on when either the ProPILOT Assist switch (for mod-
NSD1120 els with ProPILOT Assist), the Safety Shield switch
(for models without ProPILOT Assist), or the speed
limiter switch on the steering wheel is pushed when
INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT ➃ Vehicle Information Display the Blind Spot Intervention is enabled in the [Driver
INTERVENTION SYSTEM OPERATION ➄ ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with Assistance] menu in the vehicle information display.
ProPILOT Assist)
➀ BSW LED indicator on the door mirror glass The ProPILOT Assist status indicator light (for mod-
(where fitted) ➅ Safety Shield switch (for models without els with ProPILOT Assist or Safety Shield indicator
(for models without ProPILOT Assist) on the vehicle
➁ ProPILOT Assist status indicator light (where
ProPILOT Assist)
information display illuminates.
fitted) or Safety Shield indicator light (where If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the detection
fitted) in the vehicle information display zone, the BSW LED indicator light located on the
➂ BSW indicator
outside mirrors illuminates. If your vehicle is ap-

To deactivate the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention,
push the same switch again or disable the Blind
Spot Intervention setting in the [Driver Assistance]
menu. The system will be automatically deactivated
when the power switch is switched OFF.
To enable or disable the Blind Spot Intervention set-
ting:
2. Select [Blind Spot] and push the scroll dial.
3. Select [Intervention] and push the scroll dial.
4. Push either the ProPILOT Assist switch (for mod-
els with ProPILOT Assist) or the Safety Shield
switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) to
turn the system on or off.
NOTE
• For models with ProPILOT Assist system: When
the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention is ene-
NSD1121
abled in the settings menu, the Intelligent
Blind Spot Intervention system can be turned
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention ➃ Safety Shield switch (for models without on or off by pushing the speed limiter MAIN
system activation and deactivation ProPILOT Assist) switch (where fitted) on the steering wheel.
➀ Steering wheel mounted control (left side) Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention is activated when
pushing either the ProPILOT Assist switch (for mod-
➁ Vehicle Information Display
els with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel, or
➂ ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with the Safety Shield switch (for models without ProPI-
ProPILOT Assist) LOT Assist) when the Blind Spot Intervention set-
ting is enabled in the [Driver Assistance] menu in
the vehicle information display.

• Before Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention can Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention – A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
be activated, Blind Spot Warning must be acti- malfunction – A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rap-
vated. To enable or disable the Blind Spot idly.
If the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system mal-
Warning setting:
functions, it will be turned off automatically. The – See “BSW/Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
1. Push the button until [Settings] ap- [System Fault] warning message will appear and tion driving situations” later in this section
pears in the vehicle information display and then BSW indicator (yellow) on in the vehicle information for the situations in which the radar sen-
push the scroll dial. Use the scroll dial to select display will illuminate and a chime will sound. sors may not be able to detect vehicle(s).
•
Action to take: The BSW and Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
2. Select [Blind Spot] and push the scroll dial. tion systems may not provide a warning or
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn off and re-
3. Select [Warning] and push the scroll dial. start the e-POWER system. If the message contin- brake control for vehicles that pass the detec-
Turning the Blind Spot Warning system off will de- ues to appear, have the Intelligent Blind Spot Inter- tion zone quickly.
activate the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention at vention system checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali- • The radar sensors detection zone is designed
the same time. fied workshop. based on a standard lane width. When driving
in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not de-
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention BSW/INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT tect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving
temporarily not available INTERVENTION SYSTEM in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect
When any of the following messages appear on the PRECAUTIONS vehicles driving two lanes away.
vehicle information display, a chime will sound and
the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system will WARNING
• The radar sensors are designed to ignore most
stationary objects, however objects such as
be turned off automatically.
• The radar sensors may not be able to detect guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles
• [Unavailable Slippery Road]: When the ESP sys- and activate BSW/Intelligent Blind Spot Inter- may occasionally be detected. This is a nor-
tem (except traction control system function) or vention when certain objects are present such mal operating condition.
ABS operates. as:
• Severe weather or road spray conditions may
• [Currently Not Available]: – Pedestrians, bicycles, animals. reduce the ability of the radar to detect other
– When the ESP system is turned OFF. – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles.
• [Unavailable Camera Temperature High]: When vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles. • The camera may not detect lane markers in
the camera detects that the interior tempera- – Oncoming vehicles. the following situations and the Blind Spot In-
ture is high (over approximately 40°C (104°F)). tervention system may not operate properly.
– Vehicles remaining in the detection zone
• [Not Available Side Radar Obstructed]: When side when you accelerate from a stop. – On roads where there are multiple parallel
lane markers; lane markers that are faded
radar blockage is detected. – A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane
Turn off the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention sys- a speed approximately the same as your markers; non-standard lane markers; lane
tem and turn it on again when the above condi- vehicle. markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
tions no longer exist.

– On roads where discontinued lane mark- – When driving on slippery roads, such as on BSW/INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT
ers are still detectable. ice or snow, etc.
INTERVENTION DRIVING
– On roads where there are sharp curves. – When driving on winding or uneven roads. SITUATIONS
– On roads where there are sharply contrast- – When there is a lane closure due to road
ing objects, such as shadows, snow, water, repairs. Indicator on
wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after
m
– When driving in a makeshift or temporary
road repairs. lane. Indicator off
– On roads where the travelling lane merges – When driving on roads where the lane
m
or separates. width is too narrow. Indicator flashing
– When the vehicle’s travelling direction does – When driving with a tyre that is not within
m
not align with the lane markers. normal tyre conditions (for example, tyre
Another vehicle approaching from
– When travelling close to the vehicle in front wear, low tyre pressure, installation of
of you, which obstructs the lane camera spare tyre, tyre chains, non-standard
behind
unit detection range. wheels).
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the – When the vehicle is equipped with
windscreen in front of a lane camera unit. non-original brake parts or suspension
– When the headlights are not bright due to parts.
dirt on the lens or if aiming is not adjusted – When towing a trailer or other vehicle.
properly.
• Excessive noise (for example, audio system
– When strong light enters a lane camera volume, open vehicle window) will interfere
unit. (For example: light directly shines on with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-
set.) JVS0737XZ
Illustration 1 Approaching from behind
– When a sudden change in brightness oc-
curs. (For example: when the vehicle enters Illustration 1: The BSW LED indicator light illumi-
or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.) nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from
• Do not use the Intelligent Blind Spot Interven- behind in an adjacent lane. However, if the overtak-
ing vehicle is travelling much faster than your ve-
tion system under the following conditions
because the system may not function prop- hicle, the BSW LED indicator light may not illuminate
erly. before the detected vehicle is beside your vehicle.
Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and
– During bad weather (For example: rain, fog, look in the direction your vehicle will move to en-
snow, etc.) sure it is safe to change lanes.

Overtaking another vehicle
JVS0738XZ JVS0760XZ
Illustration 2 Approaching from behind Illustration 3 Approaching from behind JVS0739XZ
Illustration 4 Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal, Illustration 3: If the Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
then the system chimes (twice) and the BSW LED tion system is on and your vehicle is approaching a Illustration 4: BSW LED indicator light illuminates if
indicator light and the BSW indicator will flash. lane marker and a vehicle is in the detection zone, you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the
the system chimes (three times) and the BSW LED detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.
NOTE indicator light and the BSW indicator will flash. Then
The radar sensors may not detect slower moving
If the driver activates the turn signal before a ve- the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system
vehicles if they are passed quickly.
hicle enters the detection zone, the BSW LED indi- slightly applies the brakes on one side to help re-
cator light and the BSW indicator will flash but no turn the vehicle back to the centre of the driving
chime will sound when the other vehicle is de- lane.
tected.
JVS0740XZ
Illustration 5 Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 5: If the driver activates the turn signal

while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then
the system chimes (twice) and the BSW LED indica-
tor light and the BSW indicator will flash.

Entering from the side
JVS0761XZ WAF0555XZ
Illustration 6 Overtaking another vehicle JVS0741XZ Illustration 8 Entering from the side
Illustration 7 Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the Intelligent Blind Spot Interven- Illustration 8: If the driver activates the turn signal
tion system is on and your vehicle approaches a Illustration 7: The BSW LED indicator light illumi- while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then
lane marker while another vehicle is in the detec- nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from the BSW LED indicator light and the BSW indicator
tion zone, the system chimes (three times) and the either side. will flash and a chime will sound twice.
BSW LED indicator light and the BSW indicator will
NOTE NOTE
flash. Then, the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention
system slightly applies the brakes on the appropri- The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which If the driver activates the turn signal before a ve-
ate side to help return the vehicle back to the centre is travelling at about the same speed as your vehicle enters the detection zone, the BSW LED indi-
of the driving lane. hicle when it enters the detection zone. cator light and the BSW indicator will flash but no
chime will sound when the other vehicle is de-
NOTE tected.
• When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the
vehicles after the first vehicle may not be de-
tected if they are travelling close together.
• The radar sensors may not detect slower mov-
ing vehicles if they are passed quickly.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
JVS0761XZ JVS0742XZ
Illustration 9 Entering from the side Illustration 10 Entering from the side NAA2080
Illustration 9: If the Intelligent Blind Spot Interven- Illustration 10: The Intelligent Blind Spot Interven-
tion system is on and your vehicle approaches the tion system will not operate if your vehicle is on a The two radar sensors j A for the BSW/Intelligent
lane marker while another vehicle is in the detec- lane marker when another vehicle enters the de- Blind Spot Intervention system are located near the
tion zone, the BSW LED indicator light and the BSW tection zone. In this case only the BSW system oper- rear bumper.
indicator will flash and a chime will sound three ates.
times. Then, the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention To keep the BSW/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention
NOTE system operating properly, be sure to observe the
system slightly applies the brakes on the appropri-
ate side to help return the vehicle back to the centre Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention braking will not following:
of the driving lane. operate or will stop operating and only a warning • Always keep the area near the radar sensors
chime will sound under the following conditions: clean.
• When the brake pedal is depressed or if the • The radar sensors may be blocked by tempo-
vehicle decelerates strongly. rary ambient conditions such as splashing wa-
• When the vehicle is accelerated during Intelli- ter, mist, or fog.
gent Blind Spot Intervention system opera- • The blocked condition may also be caused by
tion. objects such as ice, frost, or dirt obstructing the
• When steering quickly. radar sensors. Check for and remove objects ob-
•
structing the area around the radar sensors.
When the ICC or Intelligent Emergency Brak-
ing warnings sound. • Do not attach stickers (including transparent
•
material), install accessories, or apply additional
When the hazard warning flashers are oper- paint near the radar sensors
ated
• When driving on a curve at a high speed.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT
(RCTA) SYSTEM (where fitted)
• Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor • Do not strike or damage the areas around the
WARNING
area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or
or malfunction. remove the screw located on the camera unit. If Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for
• the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, proper use of the RCTA system could result in se-
Do not strike or damage the area around the rious injury or death.
contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
•
radar sensors. If the area around the radar sen-
sors is damaged due to an accident, it is recom- The RCTA system is not a replacement for
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali- proper driving procedures and is not designed
fied workshop. to prevent contact with vehicles or objects.
When reversing out of a parking space, always
use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look
in the direction your vehicle will move. Never
rely solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when reversing out

of a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse,
the system is designed to detect other vehicles ap-
proaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
NIC4018
The lane camera unit ➀ for the Intelligent Blind Spot

Intervention system is located above the interior
rear view mirror. To maintain the proper operation
of the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe
the following:
• Do not attach a sticker (including transparent
material) or install an accessory near the cam-
era unit.
• Do not place reflective materials, such as white
camera unit's detection capability.

JVS0173XZ
NAA2080
WAF0416XZ
The RCTA system uses radar sensors j

A installed on
➀ BSW LED indicator light When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the ve-
both sides near the rear bumper to detect an ap-
proaching vehicle.
➁ Vehicle Information Display hicle speed is less than approximately 8 km/h (5
MPH), the RCTA system is operational. The radar sensors j A can detect an approaching
➂ Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from vehicle from up to approximately 20 m (66 ft) away.
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION either side, the system chimes (once) and the BSW
LED indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an ap-
approaching from.
proaching vehicle when the driver is reversing out
of a parking space.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
RCTA system.
1. Press the or button until [Settings] dis-
plays in the Vehicle Information Display and then
press the scroll dial. Use the scroll dial buttons to
select [Driver Assistance]. Then press the scroll
dial.
2. Use the scroll dial buttons to select [Rear Cross
Traffic Alert]. Then press the scroll dial.
3. To set the RCTA system to on or off, use the scroll
dial to navigate the menu and press the scroll
dial to select or change an item.
NOTE
When enabling/disabling the system, the system
setting will be retained even if the e-POWER sys-
tem is restarted.
WAF0412X
➀ Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)


– A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater
than approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH).
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower
than approximately 8 km/h (5 MPH).
• The radar sensors may not detect approach-
ing vehicles in certain situations:
– a : When a vehicle parked next
Illustration j
to you obstructs the beam of the radar sen-
sor.
– Illustration j
b : When the vehicle is parked
in an angled parking space.
– Illustration j
c : When the vehicle is parked
on inclined ground.
– Illustration j
d : When an approaching ve-
hicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot
aisle.
– Illustration j
e : When the angle formed by
your vehicle and the approaching vehicle
is small
• The following conditions may reduce the abil-
ity of the radar to detect other vehicles:
JVS0479XZ – Severe weather
– Road spray
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS • Always check surroundings and turn to check – Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
what is behind you before reversing. The radar
sensors detect approaching (moving) ve-
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent
WARNING material), install accessories or apply addi-
hicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every tional paint near the radar sensors. These con-
object such as: ditions may reduce the ability of the radar to
RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac-
cordance with these system limitations could re- – Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, ani- detect other vehicles.
sult in serious injury or death. mals or child-operated toy vehicles.

• Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, SYSTEM TEMPORARILY message continues to appear, have the RCTA sys-
open vehicle window) will interfere with the tem checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
UNAVAILABLE
chime sound, and it may not be heard. shop.
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be
deactivated automatically. The [Not available Side SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Radar Obstructed] warning message will appear in
the Vehicle Information Display.
The systems are not available until the conditions
no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by ob-
JVS0172XZ jects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar
Illustration 1 sensors. NAA2080
NOTE
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA sys- The two radar sensors j A for the RCTA systems are
tem will also stop working. located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area
near the radar sensors clean.
Action to take:
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary
When the above conditions no longer exist, the
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist
system will resume automatically.
or fog.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION The blocked condition may also be caused by ob-
If the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off au- jects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar
JVS0173XZ tomatically. The [System fault] warning message will sensors.
Illustration 2 appear in the Vehicle Information Display. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area
around the radar sensors.
NOTE NOTE
Do not attach stickers (including transparent mate-
In the case of several vehicles approaching in a If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA sys-
rial), install accessories or apply additional paint
row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Il- tem will also stop working.
near the radar sensors.
lustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the Action to take:
RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area
sensors. Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the e-POWER (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or mal-
system off and restart the e-POWER system. If the function.

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING
(RAB) (where fitted)
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar

WARNING
sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop if the area around the Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for
radar sensors is damaged due to a collision. proper use of the RAB system could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
•
For the radio approval numbers and information,
see “Radio frequency approval” in the “9. Technical The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the
information” section. driver. It is not a replacement for proper driv-
ing procedures. Always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the direction you
will move before and while reversing. Never
rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver’s NAA2082
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be Models with 6 parking (sonar) sensors
in control of the vehicle at all times.
• There are limitations to the RAB system capa-
The RAB system detects obstacles behind the ve-
hicle using the parking sensors j
A located on the
bility. The RAB system is not effective in all
rear bumper.
situations.
NOTE
The RAB system can assist the driver when the ve- You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in
hicle is reversing and approaching objects directly the vehicle, this will also temporarily cancel the
behind the vehicle. RAB system. For additional information, see
“Front and Rear Ultrasonic Parking Sensors
(where fitted)” later in this section.
NAA2081
Models with 4 parking (sonar) sensors

RAB SYSTEM OPERATION
When the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position and
the vehicle speed is between approximately 3 km/h
(2 MPH) and 15 km/h (9 MPH), the RAB system is
active.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected
when your vehicle is reversing, the RAB system
warning indicator will flash in the vehicle informa-
tion display, a red frame will appear in the centre
display (models with the Intelligent Around View
Monitor system), and the system will chime three
times. The system will then automatically apply the
brakes. After the automatic brake application, the
driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain
brake pressure.
NOTE
• The brake lights of the vehicle come on when
braking is performed by the RAB system.
• When the brakes operate, a noise may be
heard. This is not a malfunction.
NIC4239
➀ RAB system warning indicator (on the vehicle

information display)
➁ RAB system OFF warning light (on the meter
panel)
➂ Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
➃ Vehicle information display
➄ Centre display (where fitted)

3. Select [Rear] and use the scroll dial to turn the
system on or off.
When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system
OFF warning light illuminates when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse).
The RAB system OFF warning light will also illumi-
nate when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) and the RAB
system is ON if the parking sensors have been tem-
porarily disabled using the [Parking Aids] setting.
NOTE
The RAB system will be automatically turned on
when the e-POWER system is restarted.
NOTE
WAF0436X
NSD1071
TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system
ON or OFF.
➀ RAB system OFF warning light When the vehicle is in R (Reverse) and the [Park-
1. Push the button until [Settings] ap- ing Aids] screen is displayed in the vehicle infor-
➁ Vehicle information display pears in the vehicle information display and then mation display the RAB system can be disabled
➂ Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side) push the scroll dial. Use the scroll dial to select temporarily by pushing the <OK> switch on the
[Driver Assistance]. Then push the scroll dial. steering wheel.
2. Select [Emergency Brake] and push the scroll dial.

RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – Objects that suddenly appear – The vehicle is driving through a draped flag
– Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc. or a curtain.
WARNING • The RAB system may not operate for pedestri- – The vehicle is driving on a steep slope.
Listed below are the system limitations for the ans or animals. – There is an accumulation of snow or ice be-
RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use of the RAB system
• The RAB system may not operate for the fol- hind the vehicle.
lowing obstacles: – An ultrasonic wave source, such as another
could result in serious injury or death.
vehicle’s sonar, is near the vehicle.
• When the vehicle approaches an obstacle
–
–
Obstacles located high off the ground
Obstacles in a position offset from your ve- • Once the automatic brake control operates, it
while the accelerator or brake pedal is
hicle does not operate again if the vehicle
depressed, the function may not operate or
approaches the same obstacle.
the start of the operation may be delayed. The
•
– Obstacles, such as spongy materials or
RAB system may not operate or may not per- snow, that have soft outer surfaces and The automatic brake control can only operate
form sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, can easily absorb a sound wave for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver
•
driving conditions, the traffic environment, the must depress the brake pedal.
•
The RAB system may not operate in the fol-
weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not In the following situations, the RAB system
lowing conditions:
wait for the system to operate. Operate the may not operate properly or may not function
brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary. – There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., attached sufficiently:
• If it is necessary to override RAB operation,
–
to the parking sensors.
A loud sound is heard in the area around
– The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain,
strongly press the accelerator pedal. fog, snow, etc.).
• Always check your surroundings and turn to
–
the vehicle.
The surface of the obstacle is diagonal to
– The vehicle is driven on a steep slope.
check what is behind you before and while re-
the rear of the vehicle. – The vehicle’s posture is changed (e.g., when
versing. The RAB system detects stationary
driving over a bump).
objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system – The parking sensors or the area around
does not detect the following objects: them are extremely hot or cold. – The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
– Moving objects • The RAB system may unintentionally operate – The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the
steering wheel fully.
– Low objects in the following conditions:
– There is overgrown grass in the area – Snow chains are used.
– Narrow objects
around the vehicle. – Wheels or tyres other than NISSAN recom-
– Wedge-shaped objects
– There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate mended are used.
– Complex-shaped objects
equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot – The brakes are cold at low ambient tem-
– Multiple object in close gate) near the side of the vehicle. peratures or immediately after driving has
– Objects close to the bumper (less than ap- – There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole started.
proximately 30 cm (1 ft)) covers on the road surface.

– The braking force becomes poor due to wet SYSTEM MALFUNCTION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
brakes after driving through a puddle or
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off
washing the vehicle.
automatically, the RAB system OFF warning light will
• Turn the RAB system off in the following con- illuminate, a chime will sound, and the [System fault]
ditions to prevent the occurrence of an unex- warning message will appear in the vehicle infor-
pected accident resulting from sudden sys- mation display.
tem operation:
Action to take
– The vehicle is towed.
If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a
– The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck.
safe location, turn the e-POWER system off, and re-
– The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer. start the e-POWER system. If the warning light con-
– The vehicle drives on an uneven road sur- tinues to illuminate, have the RAB system checked. NAA2081
face. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or Models with 4 parking (sonar) sensors
qualified workshop for this service.
– Suspension parts other than those desig-
nated as genuine parts are used. (If the ve- NOTE
hicle height or the vehicle body inclination If the RAB system cannot be operated tempo-
is changed, the system may not detect an rarily, the RAB system OFF warning light blinks.
obstacle correctly.)
– If the vehicle is using an accessory like a
bike rack, or cargo carrier that blocks the
sensors.
• When towing a trailer or other vehicle, turn the
RAB system off to prevent the occurrence of
NAA2082
an unexpected accident resulting from sud-
Models with 6 parking (sonar) sensors
den system operation.
• Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an The parking sensors j A are located on the rear
bumper. Observe the following items to ensure
open vehicle window) will interfere with the
chime sound, and it may not be heard. proper operation of the system:
• Always keep the sensors clean.
• If the sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft
cloth while being careful to not damage them.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
(LDW) SYSTEM (where fitted)
• The sensors may be blocked by temporary am- NOTE

bient conditions such as splashing water, mist If your vehicle is fitted with ProPILOT Assist, refer
or fog. The blocked condition may also be to the dedicated section later in this manual for
caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- information on the Lane Departure Warning Sys-
structing the sensors. Check for and remove ob- tem.
•
jects obstructing the area around the sensors.
•
ProPILOT Assist: See “ProPILOT Assist (where
Do not subject the area around the sensors to fitted)” later in this section.
strong impact. Also, do not remove or disas-
semble the sensors. If the sensors and periph- The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is
eral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have driven at the following speeds and above, and only
the sensors checked. It is recommended that when the lane markings are clearly visible on the NIC4018
you visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop road:
for this service. • For Europe:
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) WARNING
material), install accessories or apply additional
paint on the sensors and their surrounding ar-
• Except for Europe: Listed below are the system limitations for the
approximately 70 km/h (45 MPH) Lane Departure Warning system. Failure to oper-
eas. This may cause a malfunction or improper
ate the vehicle in accordance with these system
operation. The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the
limitations could result in serious injury or death.
travelling lane using the camera unit ➀ located
• When washing the vehicle using a high-pressure
above the inside mirror. • The LDW system is only a warning device to
washer, do not apply direct washer pressure on
help inform the driver of a potential
the sensors. This may cause a malfunction of The LDW system warns the driver with a LDW indi-
unintended lane departure. It will not steer the
the sensors. cator on the Vehicle Information Display and steer-
vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driv-
ing wheel vibration that the vehicle is beginning to
er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,
leave the driving lane.
keep the vehicle in the travelling lane, and be
in control of the vehicle at all times.

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system provides a lane departure warning
function when the vehicle is driven at the following
speeds and above, and only when the lane mark-
ings are clearly visible on the road:
• For Europe:
approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH)
• Except for Europe:
When the vehicle approaches either the left or the
right side of the travelling lane, the steering wheel
will vibrate, and the LDW indicator on the vehicle
information display will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle re-
turns inside of the lane markers.
WAF0411X
➀ LDW indicator (on the vehicle information

display)
➂ Steering wheel-mounted controls (left side)

Turning the LDW system on or off
You can turn the LDW system on and off using the
[Settings] menu in the vehicle information display.
2. Select [Lane] and push the scroll dial.
3. Select [Warning] and push the scroll dial.
NOTE
If you turn the LDW system off using the [Settings]
menu, the system will remain turned off the next
time you start the e-POWER system.
NOTE
You can adjust the intensity of the steering wheel
vibration using the [Vibration Level] setting
(where fitted) in the [Lane] menu of the vehicle
information display. It can be set to [High], [Me-
dium] or [Low]. See “[Lane]” in the “2. Instruments
WAF0412X and controls” section.
➀ Steering wheel-mounted controls (left side)


WARNING • The system may not function properly under – When a sudden change in brightness oc-
the following conditions: curs. (For example, when the vehicle enters
Listed below are the system limitations for the or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
Lane Departure Warning system. Failure to oper- – On roads where there are multiple parallel
ate the vehicle in accordance with these system lane markers; lane markers that are faded
limitations could result in serious injury or death. or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane LDW TEMPORARY DISABLED
•
markers; non-standard lane markers; or
The system will not operate at speeds below STATUS
lane markers covered with water, dirt,
approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe) snow, etc. If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high
or 70 km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe), or if temperature conditions (over approximately 40 °C
it cannot detect lane markers – On roads where discontinued lane mark-
(104 °F)) and then started, the LDW system may be
•
ers are still detectable.
Do not use the LDW system under the follow- deactivated automatically and the [Unavailable
ing conditions as it may not function properly: – On roads where there are sharp curves. Camera Temperature High] message will appear in
– On roads where there are sharply contrast- the Vehicle Information Display.
– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
ing objects, such as shadows, snow, water, When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW
– When driving on slippery roads, such as on wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after system will resume operating automatically.
ice or snow. road repairs. (The LDW system could detect
The LDW system is not designed to warn under the
– When driving on winding or uneven roads. these items as lane markers.)
– When there is a lane closure due to road
repairs.
– On roads where the travelling lane merges
or separates.
• When you operate the lane change signal and
change travelling lanes in the direction of the
– When driving in a makeshift or temporary – When the vehicle's travelling direction signal. (The LDW system will become operational
lane. does not align with the lane marker. again approximately two seconds after the lane
– When driving on roads where the lane – When travelling close to the vehicle in front change signal is turned off.)
width is too narrow. of you, which obstructs the lane camera • When the vehicle speed lowers to less than ap-
– When driving without normal tyre condi- unit detection range. proximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe) or 70
tions (for example, tyre wear, low tyre pres- – When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe).
sure, installation of spare tyre, tyre chains, the windscreen in front of the lane camera • When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to the
non-standard wheels). unit. windscreen in front of the lane camera unit.
– When the vehicle is equipped with – When the headlights are not bright due to After the above conditions have finished and the
non-original brake parts or suspension dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad- necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the
parts. justed properly. LDW system will resume.
– When you are towing a trailer or other ve- – When strong light enters the lane camera
hicle. unit. (For example, the light directly shines
on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-
set.)

LDW MALFUNCTION • Do not place reflective materials, such as white
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel auto-
matically and the [System Fault] message will ap-
camera unit's detection capability.
pear in the Vehicle Information Display. If the [Sys-
tem Fault] message appears in the Vehicle Informa- • Do not strike or damage the areas around the
tion Display pull off the road in a safe location, turn camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or
off and restart the e-POWER system. If the [System remove the screw located on the camera unit. If
Fault] message continues to appear in the Vehicle the camera unit is damaged due to an accident,
Information Display, have the LDW system checked contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
MULTI-SENSING CAMERA UNIT

MAINTENANCE
NIC4018
The lane camera unit ➀ for the LDW system is lo-

cated above the interior rear view mirror. To main-
tain the proper operation of the LDW system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe
the following:
era unit.

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (ILI) SYSTEM (where fitted)
• The Intelligent Lane Intervention system is pri-

marily intended for use on well-developed
motorways or highways. It may not detect the
lane markers in certain road, weather, or driv-
ing conditions.
The Intelligent Lane Intervention system must be

turned on with the ILI switch (where fitted) or the
Safety Shield switch (where fitted) every time the
power switch is switched ON.
NIC4018
The Intelligent Lane Intervention system will oper-
ate when the vehicle is driven at the following
NOTE speeds and above, and only when the lane mark-
If your vehicle is fitted with ProPILOT Assist, refer
to the dedicated section later in this manual for • For Europe:
information on the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH)
System. See “ProPILOT Assist (where fitted)” later
in this section
WARNING The Intelligent Lane Intervention system warns the
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for driver when the vehicle has left the centre of the
proper use of the Intelligent Lane Intervention travelling lane with an Intelligent Lane Intervention
system could result in serious injury or death. indicator on the vehicle information display and
• The Intelligent Lane Intervention system will

steering wheel vibration. The system helps assist
the driver to return the vehicle to the centre of the
not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.
travelling lane by applying the brakes to the left or
It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert,
right wheels individually (for a short period of time).
drive safely, keep the vehicle in the travelling
lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all The Intelligent Lane Intervention system monitors
times. the lane markers on the travelling lane using the
camera unit ➀ located above the inside mirror.

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION
SYSTEM OPERATION
The Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) system oper-
ates at speeds above:
• For Europe:
will vibrate and the ILI indicator (yellow) on the ve-
hicle information display will blink to alert the driver.
Then, the Intelligent Lane Intervention system will
automatically apply the brakes for a short period of
time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to
the centre of the travelling lane.
NSD1190
➀ Safety Shield switch (where fitted)

➁ ILI switch (where fitted)
➂ ILI indicator (on the vehicle information
display)
➃ Safety Shield indicator (on the vehicle informa-
tion display)
➄ Vehicle information display

For models fitted with a Safety Shield switch: To turn
on the Intelligent Lane Intervention system when
the ILI setting is enabled in the [Driver Assistance]
menu in the vehicle information display, push the
Safety Shield switch on the instrument panel after
starting the e-POWER system.
NOTE
For models fitted with a Safety Shield switch: The
ILI setting must be enabled in the [Driver Assis-
tance] menu in the vehicle information display
before the Intelligent Lane Intervention system
can be switched on.
For models fitted with a ILI switch, the ILI indicator
on the vehicle information display will appear. Push
the ILI switch again to turn off the Intelligent Lane
Intervention system. The ILI indicator on the vehicle
information display will turn off.
For models fitted with a Safety Shield switch, when
the ILI setting is enabled in the [Driver Assistance]
menu in the vehicle information display the Safety
Shield indicator on the vehicle information display
will appear. Push the Safety Shield switch again to
turn off the Intelligent Lane Intervention system or
NSD1191 disable the ILI setting in the [Driver Assistance]
menu. The Safety Shield indicator on the vehicle in-
INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION ➃ Safety Shield indicator (on the vehicle informa-
formation display will turn off.
tion display) For models fitted with a Safety Shield switch, to en-
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
➀ Safety Shield switch (where fitted) ➄ Vehicle information display
able or disable the ILI system:
1. Push the button on the steering wheel
➁ ILI switch (where fitted) ➅ Steering wheel mounted controls (left side)
until [Settings] appears in the vehicle information
➂ ILI indicator (on the vehicle information For models fitted with a ILI switch: To turn on the
Intelligent Lane Intervention system, push the ILI
display and then push the scroll dial. Use the scroll
display) dial to select [Driver Assistance]. Then push the
switch ( on the instrument panel after starting the scroll dial.
e-POWER system.

2. Select [Lane] and push the scroll dial. • Do not use the Intelligent Lane Intervention road repairs. (The Intelligent Lane Interven-
3. Select [Intervention] and push the scroll dial. system under the following conditions as it tion system could detect these items as
may not function properly: lane markers.)
4. Push the Safety Shield switch to turn the system
on or off. – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). – On roads where the travelling lane merges
– When driving on slippery roads, such as on or separates.
INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION ice or snow. – When the vehicle's travelling direction
LIMITATIONS – When driving on winding or uneven roads. does not align with the lane marker.
– When there is a lane closure due to road – When travelling close to the vehicle in front
WARNING of you, which obstructs the lane camera
repairs.
Listed below are the system limitations for the unit detection range.
Intelligent Lane Intervention system. Failure to – When driving in a makeshift or temporary
lane. – When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to
operate the vehicle in accordance with these sys-
the windscreen in front of the lane camera
tem limitations could result in serious injury or – When driving on roads where the lane unit.
death. width is too narrow.
• The Intelligent Lane Intervention system may – When driving without normal tyre condi-
– When the headlights are not bright due to
dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad-
activate if you change lanes without first acti- tions (for example, tyre wear, low tyre pres- justed properly.
vating your turn signal or, for example, if a sure, installation of spare tyre, tyre chains,
construction zone directs traffic to cross an non-standard wheels). – When strong light enters the lane camera
existing lane marker. If this occurs you may unit. (For example, the light directly shines
– When the vehicle is equipped with on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-
need to apply corrective steering to complete
non-original brake parts or suspension set.)
your lane change.
parts.
• Because the Intelligent Lane Intervention may
– On roads where there are multiple parallel
curs. (For example, when the vehicle enters
not activate under the road, weather and lane
lane markers; lane markers that are faded or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
marker conditions described in this section, it
or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane
may not activate every time your vehicle be- – When towing a trailer or another vehicle.
gins to leave the travelling lane and you will
lane markers covered with water, dirt,
need to apply corrective steering.
snow, etc. NOTE
• The ILI system will not operate if it cannot de-
– On roads where discontinued lane mark- While the Intelligent Lane Intervention system is
tect lane markers, or at speeds below approxi-
ers are still detectable. operating, you may hear a sound of brake opera-
mately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe) or 70
km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe). – On roads where there are sharp curves. tion. This is normal and indicates that the Intelli-
gent Lane Intervention system is operating prop-
– On roads where there are sharply contrast-
erly.
ing objects, such as shadows, snow, water,

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION After the above conditions have finished and the SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the In-
TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE If the ILI system malfunctions, it will cancel auto-
telligent Lane Intervention system application of
Condition A: matically. The ILI indicator (orange) will illuminate, a
the brakes will resume.
chime will sound and the [System Fault] message
The warning and assist functions of the Intelligent Condition C: will appear in the Vehicle Information Display. If the
Lane Intervention system are not designed to work
If the following messages appear in the vehicle in- [System Fault] message appears in the Vehicle In-
under the following conditions:
formation display, a chime will sound and the Intel- formation Display pull off the road in a safe location,
• When you operate the lane change signal and ligent Lane Intervention system will be turned off turn off and restart the e-POWER system. If the [Sys-
change the travelling lanes in the direction of automatically. tem Fault] message continues to appear in the Ve-
the signal. (The Intelligent Lane Intervention sys-
tem will be deactivated for approximately 2 sec- • [Unavailable Slippery Road]:
hicle Information Display, have the ILI system
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
onds after the lane change signal is turned off.) When the ESP system (except Traction Control
MULTI-SENSING CAMERA UNIT
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less than ap-
System (TCS) function) or ABS operates.
proximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe) or 70 • [Currently not available]: MAINTENANCE
km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe). – When the ESP system is turned OFF.
After the above conditions have finished and the When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off
necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the the Intelligent Lane Intervention system. Push the
warning and assist functions will resume. ILI switch again to turn the Intelligent Lane Inter-
Condition B: vention system back on.
The assist function of the Intelligent Lane Interven- Temporary disabled status at high temperature:
tion system is not designed to work under the fol- If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high
lowing conditions (warning is still functional): temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C
• When the brake pedal is depressed or if the ve- (104°F)) and then the Intelligent Lane Intervention
NIC4018
hicle decelerates strongly. system is turned on, the Intelligent Lane Interven-
• When the steering wheel is turned as far as nec-

tion system may be deactivated automatically and
the following message will appear on the vehicle The lane camera unit ➀ for the Intelligent Lane In-
essary for the vehicle to change lanes.
information display: [Unavailable Camera Tempera-
• When the vehicle is accelerated during the Intel- ture High] and a chime will sound.
tervention system is located above the interior rear
view mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the
ligent Lane Intervention system operation.
Intelligent Lane Intervention system and prevent a
• When the hazard warning flashers are operated. system malfunction, be sure to observe the follow-
• When driving on a curve at high speed. ing:

EMERGENCY LANE ASSIST (ELA)
• Do not attach a sticker (including transparent • The ELA system is intended to work on all
material) or install an accessory near the cam- roads with well defined markings or road
era unit. edges, but it may not detect the road edge or
• Do not place reflective materials, such as white lane markers in certain road, weather or driv-
ing conditions.
reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the • There is a limitation to the detection capabil-
camera unit's detection capability of detecting ity of the radars and camera. Not every mov-
lane markers. ing object or vehicle will be detected. Always
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.
NIC4036
remove the screw located on the camera unit. If The ELA system will be automatically turned on
the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, each time the e-POWER system is restarted.
contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. The sensitivity of the ELA system, can be adjusted
and this setting is kept until changed again by the
driver
The ELA uses a multisensing camera j B located
above the inside mirror to monitors the lane mark-
ers on the travelling lane and to detect other
vehicles. The ELA system also uses radar sensors
A located at the front of the vehicle and j
j C located
near the rear bumpers to detect other vehicles.
NAA2085
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for
proper use of the ELA system could result in seri-
• The ELA system will not steer the vehicle or
prevent loss of control. It is the driver's respon-
sibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve-
hicle in the travelling lane, and be in control of
the vehicle at all times.

ELA SYSTEM OPERATION
The ELA system will operate when the vehicle is
driven at the following speeds and above, and only
when the lane markings or road edge are clearly
visible on the road:
• For Europe:
The ELA system warns the driver when the vehicle
approaches the road edge or solid white line with
an indicator on the vehicle information display and
steering wheel vibration. The system helps assist
the driver to return the vehicle to the carriageway
by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels
individually (for a short period of time) in the follow-
ing circumstances:
• The vehicle is approaching the edge of the road,
towards grass or gravel or a kerb, for example.
• The vehicle is approaching a solid line on a single
lane marking.
NSD1033 • Oncoming vehicles in adjacent lanes.

• Overtaking vehicles in adjacent lanes. The side
indicator light will also flash.
➀ Side indicator light
➁ ELA indicator (on the vehicle information • Intelligent Lane intervention can be turned on
to provide assistance in lanes on motorway/
display)
dual carriageways.
➂ Vehicle information display

3. Select [Emergency Lane] and push the scroll dial
to turn the system on or off.
When the ELA system is turned off, the ELA system
OFF warning light illuminates.
“2. Instruments and controls” section and “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in the
NOTE
• The ELA system will be automatically turned
on each time the e-POWER system is
restarted.
• Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) is an addi-
tional aid that can be turned on in addition to
ELA if required. For details. see “Vehicle infor-
mation display” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section.
Setting lane sensitivity

You can set lane sensitivity using the [Settings]
menu in the vehicle information display.
NSD1041
ELA ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION 2. Push the scroll dial to turn ELA on or off.
push the scroll dial.
➀ ELA system OFF warning light (on the instru- Or
In the [Settings] menu, select the [Driver Assis-
ment panel) 1. Push the button until [Settings] ap- tance] key using the scroll dial then push the scroll
➁ Steering wheel mounted controls (left side) pears in the vehicle information display and then dial.
➂ Vehicle information display [Driver Assistance]. Then push the scroll dial.
2. Select the [Lane] submenu by pressing the scroll
dial.
➃ Shortcut button 2. Select [Lane] and push the scroll dial.
1. Press short cut button ➃ on steering switch.

3. Select [Lane Sensitivity] • The ELA system will not operate at speeds be- – When driving in a makeshift or temporary
– Strong low the following speeds, or if it cannot detect lane.
– Normal lane markers. – When driving on roads where the lane
– Mild
• Below approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for width is too narrow.
NOTE Europe) or 70 km/h (45 MPH) (except for Eu- – On roads where there are multiple parallel
•
rope). lane markers; lane markers that are faded
The sensitivity setting will be retained even if
the e-POWER system is restarted. This setting • When the ELA system detects oncoming ve- or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane
is also applied to ILI and LDW (where ELA is fit- hicles in adjacent lanes, the ELA system will
not operate at speeds above approximately lane markers covered with water, dirt,
ted).
snow, etc.
•
120 km/h (74 MPH).
Even if the ELA system is disabled in the [Set-
tings] menu, ELA will automatically be turned • DO NOT use the ELA system under the follow- – On roads where the edge of the road is not
clearly visible.
on when ILI or the Steering Assist system ing conditions, there could be serious affect
(where fitted) is active. on vehicle safety with risk of an accident and – On roads where discontinued lane mark-
injury or death. ers are still detectable.
ELA LIMITATIONS – When driving without normal tyre condi- – On roads where there are sharp curves.
tions (for example, tyre wear, low tyre pres- – On roads where there are sharply contrast-
WARNING sure, installation of spare tyre, tyre chains, ing objects, such as shadows, snow, water,
Listed below are the system limitations for the non-standard wheels). See “Wheels and wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after
ELA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac- tyres” in the “8. Maintenance and road repairs. (The ELA system could detect
cordance with these system limitations could re- do-it-yourself” section. these items as lane markers.)
sult in serious injury or death.
– When the vehicle is equipped with – On roads where the travelling lane merges
• The ELA system may activate if you cross a non-original brake parts or suspension or separates.
solid lane marker without first activating your parts. – When the vehicle's travelling direction
turn signal or, for example, if a construction
– When towing a trailer or another vehicle. does not align with the lane marker.
zone directs traffic to cross an existing lane
marker. If this occurs you may need to apply • The ELA system may not function properly in – When travelling close to the vehicle in front
corrective steering to complete your lane the following conditions: of you, which obstructs the lane camera
change. – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). unit detection range.
• Because the ELA may not activate under the – When driving on slippery roads, such as on – When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to
road, weather and lane marker conditions de- ice or snow.
scribed in this section, it may not activate ev- unit.
– When driving on winding or uneven roads.
ery time your vehicle begins to leave the trav- – When the headlights are not bright due to
elling lane and you will need to apply correc- – When there is a lane closure due to road dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad-
tive steering. repairs. justed properly.

– When strong light enters the lane camera • The radar sensor’s detection zone is designed – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height
unit. (For example, the light directly shines based on a standard lane width. When driving vehicles, or vehicles with high ground
on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun- in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not de- clearance.
set.) tect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving – Parked Vehicles or Low speed Vehicles.
– When a sudden change in brightness oc- in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect
vehicles driving two lanes away. – Oncoming Vehicles on same lane.
•
curs. (For example, when the vehicle enters
or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.) • The radar sensors are designed to ignore most The ELA system may not function properly or
detect an oncoming vehicle in the following
Listed below are the system limitations for the stationary objects, however objects such as
guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles conditions:
overtaking detection feature of the ELA system.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with may occasionally be detected. This is a nor- – In poor visibility conditions (such as rain,
these system limitations could result in serious mal operation condition. snow, fog, dust storms, sand storms,
injury or death. • The following conditions may reduce the abil- smoke and road spray from other vehicles).
• The ELA system cannot detect all overtaking ity of the radar to detect other vehicles: – If dirt, ice, snow, fog or other material is
covering the radar sensor area or camera
vehicles under all conditions. – Severe weather
•
area of the windscreen.
The radar sensors may not be able to detect – Road spray
and activate ELA when certain objects are – If strong light (for example, sunlight or high
– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle beams) enters the front camera or a sud-
•
present such as:
Do not attach stickers (including transparent den change in brightness occurs (for ex-
– Pedestrians, bicycles, animals. material), install accessories or apply addi- ample, entering a tunnel or driving in light-
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height tional paint near the radar sensors. These con- ning).
vehicles, or vehicles with high ground ditions may reduce the ability of the radar to – In dark or dimly lit conditions, such as at
clearance. detect other vehicles. night or in tunnels, including cases where
– Vehicles remaining in the detection zone Listed below are the system limitations for the your vehicle’s headlights are off or dim, or
when you accelerate from a stop. Oncoming detection feature of the ELA system. the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are off.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with – When the direction of the camera is mis-
a speed approximately the same as your these system limitations could result in serious aligned.
vehicle. injury or death.
•
– When driving on a steep downhill slope, on
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind. The ELA system cannot detect all oncoming roads with sharp curves, and/or bumpy or
vehicles under all conditions. dirt roads.
•
– A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rap-
idly. The following are not detected as oncoming – If there is interference from other radar
vehicles: sources.
– A vehicle that passes through the detec-
tion zone quickly. – Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.

– When your vehicle’s position or movement • When an oncoming vehicle is detected and the Condition D:
is changed quickly or significantly (for ex- vehicle speed is over approximately 120 km/h If one of the following messages appears in the ve-
ample, lane change, turning vehicle, abrupt (74 MPH) hicle information display and the ELA system warn-
steering, sudden acceleration or decelera- After the above conditions have finished and the ing light blinks in the vehicle information display,
tion). necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the the ELA system will be turned off automatically:
– If the vehicle ahead has a unique or unusual
shape, extremely low or high clearance
warning and assist functions will resume.
• [Not available Side radar obstructed]: When the
Condition B: rear radar is blocked. Always keep the area near
heights, or unusual cargo loading or is nar- the radar sensors clean.
The assist function of the ELA system is not de-
•
row (for example, a motorcycle).
signed to work under the following conditions [Temporarily Disabled Front Radar Blocked]:
(warning is still functional): When the front radar is blocked. Always keep the
NOTE
• When the brake pedal is depressed. area near the radar sensors clean.
While the ELA system is operating, you may hear
a sound of brake operation. This is normal and • When the steering wheel is turned as far as nec- • [Not Available Front Camera Obstructed]: When
essary for the vehicle to change lanes. the front camera is blocked. Always keep the
indicates that the ELA system is operating prop-
•
area near the front camera clean.
•
erly. When the vehicle is accelerated during the ELA
system operation. If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
•
high temperature conditions (over approxi-
When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) mately 40°C (104°F)) and then the ELA system is
UNAVAILABLE approach warning occurs (where fitted) turned on, the ELA system may be deactivated
Condition A:
• When the hazard warning flashers are operated. automatically and the ELA system warning light
The warning and assist functions of the ELA system
are not designed to work under the following con-
• When driving on a curve at high speed. blinks.
ditions: After the above conditions have finished and the SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the
• When you operate the lane change signal and ELA system application of the brakes will resume.
If the ELA system malfunctions, it will cancel auto-
matically. The ELA indicator (orange) will illuminate,
change the travelling lanes in the direction of
the signal. (The ELA system will be deactivated Condition C: the [System Fault] message will appear in the Ve-
If the ESP system is turned OFF, the ELA system OFF hicle Information Display and a chime will sound. If
for approximately 2 seconds after the lane
warning light illuminates and the ELA system will be the [System Fault] message appears in the Vehicle
change signal is turned off). This does not apply
turned off automatically. Information Display pull off the road in a safe loca-
if an overtaking vehicle is detected.
tion, turn off and restart the e-POWER system. If the
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less than ap- When the ESP system turns ON again and the nec- [System Fault] message continues to appear in the
proximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe) or 70 essary operating conditions are satisfied, the ELA Vehicle Information Display, have the ELA system
km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe). system application of the brakes will resume. checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

CRUISE CONTROL (where fitted)
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE • Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects NOTE

on the front of the vehicle near the sensor area. If your vehicle is fitted with ProPILOT Assist, refer
This could cause failure or malfunction. to the dedicated section later in this manual for
• Do not attach metallic objects near the radar information on Cruise Control.
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause
failure or malfunction.
• ProPILOT Assist: See “ProPILOT Assist (where
fitted)” later in this section.
• Do not place reflective materials, such as white The cruise control system allows driving at constant
paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The speeds without keeping your foot on the accelera-
reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the tor pedal.
camera unit’s detection capability.
NIC4036
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front of the WARNING
vehicle near the sensor area. Before customis-
ing or restoring the sensor area, it is recom-
• The cruise control system ONLY maintains a
constant vehicle speed, it does not replace the
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali- driver.
•
fied workshop.
Always observe the posted speed limits and
The two rear radar sensors j C for the ELA system do not set the speed above them.
•
are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the
area near the radar sensors clean. Do not use the cruise control system when
driving under the following conditions. Doing
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary so could cause a loss of vehicle control and
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist result in an accident.
– When it is not possible to keep the vehicle
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the
at a constant speed
radar sensors.
NAA2085
– When driving in heavy traffic
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area
around the radar sensors. – When driving in traffic that varies speed
The front radar sensor j A is located on the front of
Do not attach stickers (including transparent mate- – When driving in windy areas
the vehicle. The camera j B is located on the upper
rial), install accessories or apply additional paint – When driving on winding or hilly roads
side of the windscreen. To keep the ELA system op-
near the radar sensors.
erating properly, be sure to observe the following: – When driving on slippery (rain, snow, ice,
• Always keep the sensor area on the front of the
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar
sensors.
etc.) roads
vehicle and windscreen clean.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop if the area around the radar sensors
When the cruise control system is on the speed lim-
iter cannot be operated.
sensors (bumper, windscreen).
is damaged due to a collision.

The cruise control system operation switches are ➁ Speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch Turning the cruise control system on
located on the steering wheel (right side). (For details, see “Speed limiter (where fitted)”
Push the cruise control main switch ➂. The cruise
later in this section) (where fitted)
The cruise control system operating condition is control symbol ➃ appears together with a blank
shown in the vehicle information display. ➂ Cruise control main “ON/OFF” switch set speed value [— — —] ➄ at the top of the vehicle
information display.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL Setting a cruising speed
• The cruise control system will be automatically 1. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed.
cancelled when there is a malfunction. Have the B down and release it.
2. Push the <SET–> switch j
system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
3. The cruise control symbol ➃ changes to green
workshop.
with the set speed value (desired cruising speed)
• To properly set the cruise control system, per-
➄ in the top of the vehicle information display.
form the steps as described in “Setting a cruis-
ing speed” later in this section. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
NSD1076 The vehicle will maintain the set speed.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Before setting speed If the vehicle speed is less than the minimum set
OPERATIONS speed, it will not be possible to set the cruise con-
trol system.
Changing a cruising speed
Use any one of the following methods to change
the cruising speed.
• Slow the vehicle as normal using the footbrake
pedal.
When the vehicle reaches the desired cruising
speed, push down and release the <SET–>
NSD1077
switch jB.
NAA2066
After setting speed The new set speed value will be displayed in the
top of the vehicle information display.
➃
➀ <CANCEL> switch
Cruise control symbol
• Press the accelerator pedal.
A <RES+> (Resume) switch
j
➄ Set speed value When the vehicle reaches the desired cruising
speed, push up and release the <SET–> switch
B <SET–> switch
j B.
j

SPEED LIMITER (where fitted)
The new set speed value will be displayed in the Resuming a previous cruising speed NOTE
top of the vehicle information display. If your vehicle is fitted with ProPILOT Assist, refer
If the cruising speed has been cancelled, the last set
• Push up and release the <RES+> (resume) j A speed value will be stored in the cruise control sys- to the dedicated ProPILOT Assist Speed Limiter
switch to increase or push down and release the tem memory and displayed in grey at the top of the section later in this manual.
<SET–> switch j B to decrease the set speed in vehicle information display. This cruising speed can The speed limiter allows you to set the desired ve-
steps of 1 km/h (1 MPH). be reactivated by pressing the <RES+> (Resume) hicle speed limit. While the speed limiter is activated,
The new set speed value will be displayed in the switch j A. you can perform normal braking and acceleration,
top of the vehicle information display. If the vehicle speed is less than a minimum set but the vehicle will not exceed the set speed.
• Push up and hold the <RES+> (resume) j A switch
speed, it will not be possible to resume to the
cruising speed.
When the vehicle reaches the set speed limit or if
or push down and hold or the <SET–> switch the set speed limit is lower than the actual vehicle
jB . The vehicle speed will increase or decrease Turn the cruise control system off speed, the accelerator pedal will not work (unless
to the new set speed. fully depressed) until the vehicle speed drops below
The cruise control system will be turned off when
The new set speed value will be displayed in the the set speed limit.
one of the following operations is performed:
top of the vehicle information display.
• Push the cruise control main “ON/OFF” switch
When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
Passing another vehicle ➂. The cruise control symbol ➃ and the set after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate. After speed value ➄ will turn off in the combination
tion is not detected.
releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will re- meter display.
turn to the previously set speed.
The set speed value ➄ will flash until the vehicle
• Push the speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch ➁.
When the speed limiter is on the cruise control sys-
tem cannot be operated.
The cruise control system information in the
returns to the previously set speed. combination meter will be replaced with the
speed limiter information. For details see “Speed
WARNING
Cancelling the cruise control system
limiter (where fitted)” later in this section. • The speed limiter will not automatically brake
To cancel a set speed limit, push the <CANCEL>
•
the vehicle to the set speed limit.
switch ➀.
•
When the vehicle is stopped and the power
Always observe posted speed limits. Do not
The cruise control symbol ➃ and the set speed switch is switched OFF.
set the speed above them.
value ➄at the top of the vehicle information display
•
Turning off the cruise control system will erase
turn grey. the cruise control system memory. Always confirm the setting status of the speed
The cruise control system will also be cancelled au- limiter in the Vehicle Information Display.
tomatically by any of the following: • When the speed limiter is set, avoid hard ac-
• Pressing the footbrake pedal.
celeration to reach the set limit to ensure that
the system can limit the speed of the vehicle
• Shifting to the N (Neutral) position. correctly.
• If the vehicle slows down more than approxi-
mately 12 km/h (8 MPH) below the set speed.

• When additional floor mats are used, be sure Setting speed limit
that they are correctly secured and that they
Push the <SET–> switch j
B down.
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal.
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent The speed limit will be set at the current speed.
proper operation of the speed limiter. When driving less than 30 km/h (20 MPH), the speed
limiter will be set to the minimum possible set speed
The speed limiter operation switches are located of 30 km/h (20 MPH).
on the steering wheel (right hand side). When the speed limit is set, the speed limiter sym-
The speed limiter operating condition is shown on bol ➃ and the set speed value ➄ will turn green.
the top of Vehicle Information Display. For details,
see “Vehicle information display” in the “2. Instru- NSD1100 Changing a speed limit
ments and controls” section. Before setting speed Use either of the following operations to change an
active speed limit:
SPEED LIMITER OPERATIONS
• Push up and release the <RES+> (Resume)
switch j A or push down and release <SET–>
switch j B . Each time you do this, the set speed
will increase or decrease by 1 km/h (1 MPH).
• Push up and hold the <RES+> (Resume) switch
A or push down and hold <SET–> switch j
j B . The
set speed will increase or decrease to the next
multiple of 5 km/h (5 MPH) and then in steps of
5 km/h (5 MPH).
The new set speed limit value ➄ will be displayed in
NSD1101
After setting speed
NAA2066 the Vehicle Information Display.
➃ Speed limiter symbol When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
➀ <CANCEL> switch ➄ Set speed value speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
j Turning the speed limiter on tion is not detected.
B <SET–> (Set) switch
j The speed limiter can be switched on after the e-
Cancelling a speed limit
➁ Speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch POWER system is started or when driving.
➂ Push the speed limiter main ON/OFF switch ➁. To cancel a set speed limit, push the <CANCEL>
Cruise control main “ON/OFF” switch. (For switch ➀. The speed limiter symbol ➃ and the set
details, see “Cruise control (where fitted)” The speed limiter symbol ➃ and the set speed value speed value ➄ in the Vehicle Information Display
earlier in this section) ➄ will illuminate in the Vehicle Information Display. will turn grey.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL
(ICC) (where fitted)
It is also possible to override the speed limiter by When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set NOTE
fully depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time If your vehicle is fitted with ProPILOT Assist, refer
resistance point. after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven- to the dedicated section later in this manual for
tion is not detected. information on the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
WARNING Turning the speed limiter off System.
• The vehicle may accelerate when the speed
The speed limiter system will be turned off when • ProPILOT Assist: See “ProPILOT Assist (where
limiter cancels. fitted)” later in this section.
one of the following operations is performed:
• When additional floor mats are used, be sure
• Push the speed limiter main ON/OFF switch ➁.
that they are correctly secured and that they
The speed limiter symbol ➃ and the set speed
WARNING
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal.
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent value ➄ in the Vehicle Information Display will Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for
be turned off. proper use of the ICC system could result in seri-
proper operation of the speed limiter.
•
Push the cruise control main ON/OFF switch ➂.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal beyond the re- The speed limiter information in the Vehicle In- • ICC is not a collision avoidance or warning de-
formation Display will be replaced with the cruise vice. It is intended for motorway use only and
sistance point. The speed limiter will be suspended
it is not intended for congested areas or city
to allow driving above the set speed. The set speed control information. For details see “Cruise con-
driving. Failure to apply the brakes could re-
value ➄ will flash and an audible warning will sound. trol (where fitted)” earlier in this section, or “Pro-
sult in an accident.
The speed limiter will automatically resume when PILOT Assist (where fitted)” later in this section.
the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit. • When the vehicle is stopped and the power • The ICC system is only an aid to assist the
driver and is not a collision warning or avoid-
Resuming a previous set speed switch is switched OFF.
ance device. It is the driver's responsibility to
If a set speed limit has been cancelled, the set speed Turning off the speed limiter will erase the set stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the
will be stored in the speed limiter memory and dis- speed limit memory. vehicle at all times.
played in grey at the top of the vehicle information
display.
Speed limiter malfunction • Always observe the posted speed limits and
If the speed limiter malfunctions, the speed limiter do not set the speed over them.
This speed limit can be reactivated by pressing the
<RES+> (Resume) switch j A.
symbol ➃ in the Vehicle Information Display will • Always drive carefully and attentively when
flash. using either cruise control mode. Read and
If the current vehicle speed is higher than the previ- understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly
Turn the speed limiter off by pushing the speed lim-
before using the cruise control. To avoid seri-
ous set speed, the accelerator pedal will not work iter main “ON/OFF” switch ➁ and have the system
and the set speed value ➄ will flash until the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
ous injury or death, do not rely on the system
speed drops below the set speed limit. to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's
speed in emergency situations. Do not use
cruise control except in appropriate road and
traffic conditions.

• In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
trol mode, a warning chime will not sound to
Push the ICC ON/OFF switch ➄ shortly to choose
warn you if you are too close to the vehicle
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control cruise con-
ahead. Pay special attention to the distance
trol mode.
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of
you or a collision could occur. Push and hold the ICC ON/OFF switch ➄ to choose
the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
The ICC system will maintain a constant set speed Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be
or keep a set distance from the vehicle in front of changed to the other cruise control mode. To
you up to the preset speed. change the mode, push the ICC ON/OFF switch ➄
The vehicle travels at the set speed when the road NSD1095 once to turn the system OFF. Then push the ICC
ahead is clear. ON/OFF switch ➄ again to turn the system back on
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise con- ➀ Distance switch: and select the desired cruise control mode.
trol modes. Always confirm the setting of the ICC system in the
Changes the vehicle's following distance:
• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
Long ̔ Middle ̔ Short ̔ Long
vehicle information display.
For maintaining a selected distance between HOW TO SELECT CRUISE CONTROL

your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to ➁ <RES+> switch:
MODES
the preset speed. Resumes set speed or increases speed
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle
• Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: incrementally.
distance control mode
For cruising at a preset speed. ➂ <CANCEL> switch:
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
The ICC system cannot be operated when the speed Deactivates the system without erasing the mode, quickly push and release the ICC ON/ OFF
limiter is on, see “Speed limiter (where fitted)” earlier set speed. switch.
in this section for additional information.
➃ <SET–> switch: Selecting the conventional (fixed
Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed speed) cruise control mode
incrementally. To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
➄ ICC ON/OFF switch control mode, push and hold the ICC ON/ OFF
switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds.
Master switch to activate the system.
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode, see “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode” later in this section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE sound a warning chime and blink the system dis-
play to notify the driver to take necessary action.
CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the NOTE
ICC system automatically maintains a selected dis- The system will cancel and a warning chime will
tance from the vehicle travelling in front of you ac- sound if the speed falls below approximately 30
cording to that vehicle's speed (up to the set speed), km/h (20 MPH) and no vehicle is detected ahead.
or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-
The system is intended to enhance the operation of vehicle distance control mode:
the vehicle when following a vehicle travelling in the
same lane and direction. • The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
NSD806
maintains the speed set by the driver. The set
If the radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle speed range is between approximately 30 and
ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so 170 km/h (20 and 105 MPH). Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain
that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the
selected distance. • When there is a vehicle travelling ahead, the ve- control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set
speed.
hicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts
The system automatically controls the throttle and the speed to maintain the distance, selected by The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or
applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of ve- driver, from the vehicle ahead. The adjusting warn you when you approach stationary and slow
hicle braking power) if necessary. speed range is up to the set speed. If the vehicle moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle
ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
to a standstill within the limitations of the sys- ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic con-
mode operation tem. The system will cancel once it judges a gestion.
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is de- standstill, with a warning chime. Apply the foot-
signed to maintain a selected distance and reduce The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on
brake to hold the vehicle stationary if required.
winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to
the speed to match the slower vehicle ahead; the
system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary. • When the vehicle travelling ahead has moved manually control the vehicle speed.
out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle
However, the ICC system can only apply up to ap- Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle
distance control mode accelerates and main-
proximately 40% of the vehicle's total braking ahead, this system automatically accelerates or de-
tains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
power. This system should only be used when traf- celerates your vehicle according to the speed of the
fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly
constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is
If a vehicle moves into the travelling lane ahead or if required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal
a vehicle travelling ahead rapidly decelerates, the when deceleration is required to maintain a safe
distance between vehicles may become closer be- distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden
cause the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when
quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will using the ICC system.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control – No vehicle icon shown: No vehicle
mode switches mode display and indicators detected ahead (Your vehicle maintains
the driver-selected set speed.)
The system is operated by a ICC ON/OFF switch and
four control switches, all mounted on the steering • ICC system ON indicator (yellow):
wheel. Indicates that there is a malfunction in the
ICC system.
4) Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
• Green: ICC active
• Grey: ICC standby
NSD1096 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode operation
The display is located in the vehicle information dis-
NSD1095 play.
➀ Distance switch: 1) Set distance indicator:

Changes the vehicle's following distance: Displays the selected distance between vehicles
set with the DISTANCE switch.
Long ̔ Middle ̔ Short ̔ Long
2) Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
➁ <RES+> switch:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of
Resumes set speed or increases speed
you (only when ICC is active).
incrementally.
3) This indicator indicates the ICC system status
➂ <CANCEL> switch: using colour.
NSD1097
Deactivates the system without erasing the

set speed.
• ICC system ON indicator (grey):
To turn the cruise control on, quickly push and re-
ICC standby. A . The ICC system ON indica-
lease the ICC switch j
➃
•
<SET–> switch:
ICC system ON indicator (green): tor (grey), and set vehicle speed indicator --- jB
Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed come on.
incrementally. Indicates that the ICC system is ON and ac-
tive. Indicates that the cruising speed is set. To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the
➄ ICC ON/OFF switch: desired speed, push the <SET–> switch and release
– Green vehicle icon displayed: Vehicle de-
Master switch to activate the system. it. (The ICC system indicator and set vehicle speed
tected ahead.
indicator change to green.) Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of
speed or the desired distance to the vehicle in front. the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected
When the <SET–> switch is pushed under the fol- distance.
lowing conditions, the system cannot be set and NOTE
•
the set vehicle speed indicator will blink for approxi-
mately 2 seconds: The brake lights of the vehicle come on when
braking is performed by the ICC system.
• When travelling below 30 km/h (20 MPH).
• When the brake operates, a noise may be
• When the vehicle is shifted to the N (Neutral) po- heard. This is not a malfunction.
sition.
When the ICC system detects a vehicle ahead, the
• When the brakes are operated by the driver. NSD1102
vehicle ahead detection indicator is displayed and
• When the parking brake is applied.
System set display with vehicle ahead
the speed control status indicator (vehicle icon) illu-
minates in green.
When the <SET–> switch is pushed under the fol-
lowing conditions, the system cannot be set. No vehicle detected ahead:
A message will pop up: When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC
• When the ESP system is off (To use the ICC sys-
system gradually accelerates your vehicle to
resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC
tem, turn the ESP system on. Push the ICC ON/
system then maintains the set speed.
OFF switch to turn off the ICC system and reset
the ICC system by pushing the ICC ON/OFF When a vehicle is no longer detected the vehicle
switch again.) For additional information about ahead detection indicator turns off.
the ESP system, see “Electronic Stability If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to
Programme (ESP) system” later in this section. NSD1103 the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is
• When ESP (including the traction control system) System set display without vehicle ahead in operation, the system controls the distance to
is operating. that vehicle.
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on
• When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the If a vehicle is detected ahead, the system will con-
make sure the wheels are no longer slipping.) set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, tinue to work until vehicle has stopped.
• When the front radar is impaired due to dirt or as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. When the vehicle speed is under approximately 30
another obstruction blocking the radar sensor. The ICC system displays the set speed. km/h (20 MPH), the system will be cancelled.
Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the
ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling
the throttle and applying the brakes to match the
speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then

When overtaking another vehicle: To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the How to change the set distance to the
following methods: vehicle ahead
• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle
attains the desired speed, push and release the
<SET–> switch.
• Push and hold the <RES+> switch. The set ve-
hicle speed will increase by 10 km/h (5 MPH) in-
crements.
• Push, then quickly release the <RES+> switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed will increase
NSD1192 by 1 km/h (1 MPH).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the NSD1098
The driver can override ICC by pressing the accel- following methods:
erator. The set speed indicator will flash when the • Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle at- The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected
vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle tains the desired speed, push the <SET–> switch when the ICC is in standby mode or the ICC is active,
detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of and release it. depending on the traffic conditions.
the vehicle is clear. When the pedal is released, the
vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
• Push and hold the <SET–> switch. The set ve- Each time the DISTANCE switch ( ) is pushed, the
hicle speed will decrease by 10 km/h (5 MPH) in- set distance will change to long, middle, short and
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC crements. back to long again in that sequence.
system, you can depress the accelerator pedal
when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rap-
• Push, then quickly release the <SET–> switch.
Distance Display Approximate distance
Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease at 100 km/h (60 MPH)
idly. by 1 km/h (1 MPH). (m (ft))
How to switch the ICC system off To resume the preset speed after ICC cancel, push Long 60 (200)
Switch off ICC completely by turning the ICC ON/ and release the <RES+> switch. The vehicle will re- m
OFF switch off. The ICC indicators will go out. sume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle Middle 45 (150)
speed is over 30 km/h (20 MPH). m
How to change the set vehicle speed
Short 30 (100)
To cancel the preset speed, use any of these meth- m
ods:
• Push the <CANCEL> switch. The cruise indicator • The distance to the vehicle ahead will change
and set vehicle speed indicators will turn grey. according to the vehicle speed. The higher the
• Tap the brake pedal. The cruise indicator and set

vehicle speed, the longer the distance.
vehicle speed indicators will turn grey.

• The distance setting will remain at the current radar sensor may detect these objects when the to overtake, the acceleration will stop after a short
setting even if the e-POWER system is restarted. vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, time and regain the set following distance.
hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. In Acceleration can be stopped at any point by de-
Approach warning these cases you will have to manually control the pressing the brake pedal or the <CANCEL> switch
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead proper distance ahead of your vehicle. on the steering wheel.
due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if an-
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by ve- Overtaking on the right-hand side (for countries
other vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver
hicle operation (steering manoeuvre or driving po- where traffic travels on the left hand side of the
with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate
sition in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for road):
by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe
example, if a vehicle is being driven with some dam-
vehicle distance if: When the ICC system is engaged above 70 km/h
age).
• The chime sounds.
Acceleration when overtaking
(44 MPH) and following a slower vehicle (below ICC
• The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

(where fitted)
set speed), and the turn signal is activated to the
right, the ICC system will automatically start to ac-
The warning chime may not sound in some cases celerate the vehicle to help initiate overtaking on
when there is a short distance between vehicles. NOTE the right and will begin to reduce the distance to
Some examples are: The acceleration when overtaking feature is only vehicle directly ahead. Only the right side turn sig-
• When the vehicles are travelling at the same available for certain countries and for certain ve-
hicle grades.
nal operates this feature. As the driver steers the
vehicle and moves into the overtaking lane, if no
speed and the distance between vehicles is not
changing. Overtaking on the left-hand side (for countries vehicle is detected ahead the ICC system will con-
• When the vehicle ahead is travelling faster and where traffic travels on the right hand side of the
road):
tinue to accelerate to the ICC system set speed.
If another vehicle is detected ahead, then the ve-
the distance between vehicles is increasing.
• When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. When the ICC system is engaged above 70 km/h
hicle will accelerate up to the following speed of that
vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the right
The warning chime will not sound when: set speed), and the turn signal is activated to the lane to overtake, the acceleration will stop after a
• Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are left, the ICC system will automatically start to accel- short time and regain the set following distance.
parked or moving slowly. erate the vehicle to help initiate overtaking on the Acceleration can be stopped at any point by de-
• The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding left and will begin to reduce the distance to vehicle
directly ahead. Only the left side turn signal oper-
pressing the brake pedal or the <CANCEL> switch
on the steering wheel
the system.
ates this feature. As the driver steers the vehicle
NOTE and moves into the overtaking lane, if no vehicle is
The approach warning chime may sound and the detected ahead the ICC system will continue to ac-
system display may blink when the radar sensor celerate to the ICC system set speed.
detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on If another vehicle is detected ahead, then the ve-
the side of the road. This may cause the ICC sys- hicle will accelerate up to the following speed of that
tem to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the left lane

WARNING • When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted. may not be able to maintain the selected dis-
In order to reduce the risk of a collision that may • When the shift control system is not in the D tance between vehicles (following distance) or
selected vehicle speed under some circum-
(Drive) position.
result in serious injury or death, please be aware stances.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
•
of the following:
•
The system may not detect the vehicle in front
This function is only activated with the left or mode limitations of you in certain road or weather conditions.
right turn signal and will briefly accelerate the To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system
vehicle even if a lane change is not initiated. WARNING under the following conditions:
This can include non-overtaking situations Listed below are the system limitations for the
such as left or right side exits. – On roads where the traffic is heavy or there
ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac-
•
are sharp curves
Ensure that when overtaking another vehicle, cordance with these system limitations could re-
the adjacent lane is clear before initiating the sult in serious injury or death. – On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or
overtaking manoeuvre. Sudden changes in • The system is primarily intended for use on snow, etc.
traffic may occur while overtaking. Always straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
manually steer or brake as needed never not advisable to use the system in city traffic – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the sys-
solely rely on the system. or congested areas. tem sensor
• This system will not adapt automatically to
– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may
Automatic cancellation road conditions. This system should be used
go beyond the set vehicle speed and fre-
in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the sys-
A chime sounds under the following conditions and quent braking may result in overheating
tem on roads with sharp curves, or on icy
the control is automatically cancelled. the brakes)
roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
• The vehicle ahead is not detected and your ve-
• As there is a performance limit to the distance – On repeated uphill and downhill roads
hicle is travelling below the speed of 25 km/h (15 control function, never rely solely on the ICC – When traffic conditions make it difficult to
MPH). system. This system does not correct careless, keep a proper distance between vehicles
• When the system judges the vehicle is at stand- inattentive or absent minded driving, or over- because of frequent acceleration or decel-
still. come poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad eration

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by de- – Interference by other radar sources
•
pressing the brake pedal, depending on the
• When the ESP system is turned off. distance to the vehicle ahead and the In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or
• When ESP (including the traction control system) surrounding circumstances in order to main- object can unexpectedly come into the sensor
detection zone and cause automatic braking.
operates. tain a safe distance between vehicles.
• When distance measurement becomes im- • Always pay attention to the operation of the
You may need to control the distance from
other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Al-
paired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to vehicle and be ready to manually control the
ways stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-
the sensor. proper following distance. The vehicle-to-ve-
tem when it is not recommended in this sec-
• When a wheel slips.
hicle distance control mode of the ICC system
tion.

• Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a
trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle
ahead.
The radar sensor will not detect the following ob-

jects:
• Stationary and slow moving vehicles
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
• Motorcycles and other vehicles travelling offset NSD775
in the travel lane
The sensor generally detects the signals returned
from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor can- The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A
not detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the
ICC system may not maintain the selected distance. vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to
maintain the selected distance from the vehicle
The following are some conditions in which the sen- ahead.
sor cannot detect the signals:
• When snow or road spray from travelling ve-
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection
zone due to its position within the same lane of
hicles reduces the sensor's visibility
•
travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same
When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the lane ahead.
rear seat or the luggage compartment of your
vehicle
• When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check
the sensor's operation within the limitation of the
system. When the sensor is covered with dirt or is
obstructed, the system will automatically be can-
celled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transpar-
ent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may
not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and
may not be able to maintain the selected following
distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check
and clean the sensor regularly.

Condition B:
The chime will sound and the [Temporarily Disabled
Front Radar Blocked] warning message will appear
in the vehicle information display.
• When the radar sensor area is covered with dirt
or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect
a vehicle ahead, the ICC system is automatically
cancelled.
Action to take:
NSD679 If the warning message appears, park the vehicle in
a safe place and turn the e-POWER system off. When
•
the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the
When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, When the ESP (including the traction control sys- sensor area and restart the e-POWER system. The
curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under tem) operates system will need some time to detect that the sen-
construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles
in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a
• When the vehicle speed falls below approxi- sor area is now clean. If the warning message con-
mately 30 km/h (20 MPH) tinues to be displayed, have the ICC system checked
•
vehicle travelling ahead. This may cause the ICC sys- by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
tem to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. When the parking brake is applied
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by • When a tyre slips • When driving on roads with limited road struc-
•
tures or buildings (for example, long bridges,
vehicle operation (steering manoeuvre or travelling When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),
position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.
• When the shift control system is not in the D the system may display the [Temporarily Dis-
System temporarily unavailable (Drive) position. abled Front Radar Blocked] message.
The following are conditions in which the ICC sys- • When any door is open. Action to take:
tem may be temporarily unavailable. In these in- • When the front radar is impaired due to dirt or When the conditions listed above are no longer
stances, the ICC system may not cancel and may another obstruction blocking the radar sensor. present, turn the ICC system back on to use the sys-
not be able to maintain the selected following dis- tem.
Action to take:
tance from the vehicle ahead.
When the conditions listed above are no longer
Condition A: present, press the <RES+> switch to resume using
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is the ICC system.
automatically cancelled. A chime will sound and the
system will not be able to be set:
• When the ESP is turned off

ICC system malfunction • Do not strike or damage the areas around the – When driving on a road under construction
sensor. or in a construction zone.
If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be turned off
automatically, a chime will sound, a warning will be • Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects – When End of speed limit sign is indicated.
displayed in the vehicle information display, and the
speed control status warning (yellow) will illuminate.
near the sensor area. This could cause failure or
malfunction.
• When speed unit selected in [Display Settings]
is different to the unit of the speed limit sign.
Action to take: • Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor
area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure When ICC is active and it detects a change of the
If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle in a
or malfunction. speed limit, the new speed limit is indicated and it
safe place. Turn the e-POWER system off, restart the
e-POWER system and set the ICC system again. If it Speed Limit Link - ICC (where fitted) can be applied to the vehicle set speed manually.
is not possible to set the ICC system or the indica- The Speed Limit Link operates:
tor stays on, it may be a malfunction. Although the
normal driving can be continued, the ICC system
WARNING • When the detected speed limit is 30 km/h (20
Listed below are the system limitations for the MPH) and above.
should be checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop.
Speed Limit Link. Failure to operate the vehicle in
accordance with these system limitations could
• The [Speed Limit Link] is enabled in the settings
menu of the vehicle information display.
result in serious injury or death:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to select the
NOTE
proper speed, follow all traffic regulations and • In the following situations, the Speed Limit
observe other road users. Link will not operate:
• The Speed Limit Link may not operate prop- – When an increase in the posted speed limit
erly and the actual speed limit may not be ap- is detected, but the vehicle set speed is al-
plied to the vehicle set speed in all conditions. ready faster than the new speed limit.
The driver must manually control the vehicle – When a decrease in the posted speed limit
speed. is detected, but the vehicle set speed is al-
NIC4037 Below are some examples: ready lower than the new speed limit.
– When the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
System maintenance system is not functioning properly or
turned off. (See “Traffic sign recognition
The sensor for the ICC system is located on the front
(where fitted)” earlier in this section.)
of the vehicle j
A.
– When driving in an area with nearby paral-
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure
lel roads (for example, motorway with a
to observe the following:
parallel service drive).
• Always keep the sensor area clean.
– When driving in an area where each lane
has a different speed limit sign.

System display and indicators: Operating the system: NOTE
When the system detects a different speed limit, the The system will retain current settings in the ve-
new speed value is indicated. The vehicle set speed hicle information display even if the e-POWER
can be changed to the indicated speed limit manu- system is restarted.
ally.
How to set tolerance for [Speed Link Offset]:
• To accept the newly indicated speed limit, oper-
ate the <RES+> switch (in case of speed limit up)
or <SET-> switch (in case of speed limit down).
display, and push the scroll dial.
• The Speed Limit Link indicator ( or )
2. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Assistance].
will turn off after approximately 15 seconds if the
Then push the scroll dial.
NSD1105 <RES+> or <SET-> switch is not operated. (The
Speed Limit Link indicator can be turned off im- 3. Select [Speed Link Offset], and push the scroll dial
Example
mediately by operating the opposite switch from to select tolerance value.
1. Detected speed limit indicator the direction indicated by the Speed Limit Link
NOTE
Displays the currently detected speed limit. For indicator.)
The system will retain current settings in the ve-
additional information, see “Traffic sign recogni- The system will not activate if a speed limit change
hicle information display even if the e-POWER
tion (where fitted)” earlier in this section. is not detected.
system is restarted.
2. Applied speed limit indicator (green frame) [Speed Link Offset]:
Indicates the detected speed limit can be applied It is possible to set whether the speed limit should
to the vehicle set speed. be accepted exactly, or with a tolerance of -10 km/h
3. Speed Limit Link indicator (–5 MPH) to +10 km/h (+5 MPH).
Indicates the system activation mode or system How to activate or deactivate the system:
operation. 1. Push the button on the steering wheel
Manual mode is activated and a new speed until [Settings] appears in the vehicle information
limit (faster speed value) is indicated. display, and push the scroll dial.
Manual mode is activated and a new speed 2. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Assistance].
limit (lower speed value) is indicated. Then push the scroll dial.
4. Guidance message, instruction on how to set 3. Select [Speed Limit Link], and push the scroll dial
new speed. to turn the system on or off.
To deactivate the system, select [OFF].

Speed Limit Link - ICC with Navigation – When driving on a road under construction System display and indicators:
system (where fitted) or in a construction zone.
– When the data from the navigation system
WARNING is not up-to-date or is unavailable.
Speed Limit Link. Failure to operate the vehicle in When the ICC Speed Limit Link is active and it de-
accordance with these system limitations could tects a change of the speed limit, the new speed
result in serious injury or death: limit is indicated and it can be applied to the vehicle
• It is the driver’s responsibility to select the set speed manually.
proper speed, follow all traffic regulations and The Speed Limit Link operates:
observe other road users.
• When the detected speed limit is 30 km/h (20 NSD1105
• The Speed Limit Link may not operate prop- MPH) and above. Example
erly and the actual speed limit may not be ap-
plied to the vehicle set speed in all conditions.
• The [Speed Limit Link] is enabled in the settings 1. Detected speed limit indicator
menu of the vehicle information display.
The driver must manually control the vehicle Displays the currently detected speed limit. For
speed. NOTE additional information, see “Traffic sign recogni-
Below are some examples: • In the following situations, the Speed Limit
tion (where fitted)” earlier in this section.
2. Applied speed limit indicator (green frame)
Link will not operate:
system is not functioning properly or – When an increase in the posted speed limit Indicates the detected speed limit can be applied
turned off. (See “Traffic sign recognition is detected, but the vehicle set speed is al- to the vehicle set speed.
(where fitted)” earlier in this section.) ready faster than the new speed limit. 3. Speed Limit Link indicator
– When driving in countries or areas not cov- – When a decrease in the posted speed limit Indicates the system activation mode or system
ered by the navigation system. is detected, but the vehicle set speed is al- operation.
ready lower than the new speed limit.
– When crossing national boundaries. Manual mode is activated and a new speed
– When driving on the exit of the limited ac- For Germany: No Limit speed setting: limit (faster speed value) is indicated.
cess motorway as identified in the naviga- When you switch on the e-POWER system and sub- Manual mode is activated and a new speed
tion map data. sequently enter a motorway with no speed limit, limit (lower speed value) is indicated.
the system initially regulates the speed to 130 km/
– When driving in an area with nearby paral- 4. Guidance message, instruction on how to set
h. After this, the last speed stored by the driver on a
lel roads (for example, motorway with a new speed.
motorway with no speed limit is applied.
– When driving in an area where each lane NOTE
has a different speed limit sign. This feature only works in Germany.

Operating the system: How to activate or deactivate the system: CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)
When the system detects a different speed limit, the 1. Push the button on the steering wheel CRUISE CONTROL MODE
new speed value is indicated. The vehicle set speed until [Settings] appears in the vehicle information
can be changed to the indicated speed limit manu- display, and push the scroll dial. This mode allows driving at speeds between ap-
ally. proximately 30 and 170 km/h (20 and 105 MPH)
2. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Assistance]. without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
• To accept the newly indicated speed limit, oper- Then push the scroll dial.
ate the <RES+> switch (in case of speed limit up) 3. Select [Speed Limit Link], and push the scroll dial WARNING
•
or <SET-> switch (in case of speed limit down). to turn the system on or off. In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
• The Speed Limit Link indicator ( or ) To deactivate the system, select [OFF]. trol mode, a warning chime does not sound to
will turn off after approximately 15 seconds if the warn you if you are too close to the vehicle
<RES+> or <SET-> switch is not operated. (The NOTE ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle
Speed Limit Link indicator can be turned off im- The system will retain current settings in the ve- ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
mediately by operating the opposite switch from hicle information display even if the e-POWER detected.
•
the direction indicated by the Speed Limit Link system is restarted.
indicator.) Pay special attention to the distance between
How to set tolerance for [Speed Link Offset]: your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a
The system will not activate if a speed limit change collision could occur.
•
is not detected.
until [Settings] appears in the vehicle information Always confirm the setting in the Vehicle In-
[Speed Link Offset]: display, and push the scroll dial. formation Display.
It is possible to set whether the speed limit should
be accepted exactly, or with a tolerance of -10 km/h
2. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Assistance]. • Do not use the conventional (fixed speed)
Then push the scroll dial. cruise control mode when driving under the
(–5 MPH) to +10 km/h (+5 MPH) following conditions:
3. Select [Speed Link Offset], and push the scroll dial
to select tolerance value. – when it is not possible to keep the vehicle
at a set speed
NOTE
– in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
The system will retain current settings in the ve-
speed
hicle information display even if the e-POWER
system is restarted. – on winding or hilly roads
– on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
– in very windy areas
• Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control
and result in an accident.

CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE Conventional (fixed speed) cruise Operating conventional (fixed speed)
CONTROL SWITCHES control mode display and indicators cruise control mode
To turn the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode on, push and hold the ICC ON/OFF switch
for longer than about 1.5 seconds.
NSD1099 NSD1075
➀ ICC ON/OFF switch: The display is located in the vehicle information dis-
play. NSD828
Main switch to activate/deactivate the
system. 1. Cruise indicator:
When pushing the ICC ON/OFF switch on, the con-
➁ <RES+> switch: This indicator indicates the condition of the Con-
ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display
ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode of the
Resumes set speed or increases speed ICC system depending on a colour. and indicators are displayed in the vehicle informa-
•
incrementally. tion display. After you hold the ICC ON/OFF switch
Cruise control ON indicator (grey): Indicates
➂ <CANCEL> switch: that the ICC ON/OFF switch is on.
for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system
display goes out. The cruise indicator appears. You
Deactivates the system without erasing the • Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing
set speed. that the cruising speed is set. the ICC ON/OFF switch again will turn the system
➃ <SET–> switch: • Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that completely off.
there is a malfunction in the Conventional When the power switch is placed in the OFF posi-
Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed
(fixed speed) cruise control mode of the ICC tion, the system is also automatically turned off.
incrementally.
system. To use the ICC system again, quickly push and re-
2. Set vehicle speed indicator: lease the ICC ON/OFF switch (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. tance control mode) or push and hold it (conven-
•
tional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
Grey: cruise control standby
• Green: cruise control active

CAUTION To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the System temporarily unavailable
following three methods:
A chime sounds and the control is automatically
•
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control,
make sure to turn the ICC ON/OFF switch off when Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle cancelled under the following conditions:
not using the ICC system. attains the desired speed, push and release the
<SET–> switch.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to • Push and hold the <RES+> switch. When the ve-
• When the ESP (including the traction control sys-
tem) operates.
hicle displays the desired set speed, release the
the desired speed, push the <SET–> switch and re-
lease it. (The colour of the cruise indicator changes switch. • When a wheel slips.
to green and the set vehicle speed indicator comes • Push, then quickly release the <RES+> switch. • When the ESP system is off.
on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your Each time you do this, the set speed will increase When the system is not operating properly, the
vehicle will maintain the set speed. by about 1 km/h (1 MPH). chime sounds and the colour of the cruise indicator
• To overtake another vehicle, depress the accel- To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the will change to yellow.
erator pedal. When you release the pedal, the ve- following three methods: Action to take:
hicle will return to the previously set speed.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle at- If the colour of the cruise indicator changes to yel-
• The vehicle may not maintain the set speed tains the desired speed, push the <SET–> switch low, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the e-
when going up or down steep hills. If this hap- and release it. POWER system off, restart the e-POWER system, re-
pens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
• Push and hold the <SET–> switch. Release the sume driving and then perform the setting again.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the follow- switch when the vehicle slows down to the de- If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on,
ing methods: sired speed. it may indicate that the system is malfunction-
• Push the <CANCEL> switch. The vehicle speed • Push, then quickly release the <SET–> switch. ing. Although the vehicle is still driveable under
indicator and the cruise indicator will turn grey. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease normal conditions, have the vehicle checked by a
• Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator by about 1 km/h (1 MPH). NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
and the cruise indicator will turn grey. To resume the preset speed, push and release the
<RES+> switch. The vehicle will resume the last set
cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 30
km/h (20 MPH).

PROPILOT ASSIST (where fitted)
WARNING • Always observe the posted speed limits and The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multi-sensing
do not set the speed over them. front camera j B installed behind the windscreen
•
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for and a radar sensor located on the front of the ve-
proper use of the ProPILOT Assist system could Never take your hands off the steering wheel
when driving. Always keep your hands on the hicle jA to measure the distance to the vehicle
result in serious injury or death.
ahead in the same lane and to monitor the lane
•
steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely.
•
ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driving system. markers. If the vehicle detects a slower moving ve-
Within the limits of its capabilities, as The ProPILOT Assist system does not react to
hicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle
described in this manual, it helps the driver stationary or slow moving vehicles.
speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in
with certain driving activities. • Always drive carefully and attentively when front at the selected distance. The system will also
• The ProPILOT Assist system is not a replace- using the ProPILOT Assist system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly
help keep the vehicle centred in the travelling lane
ment for proper driving procedure and is not when clear lane markings are detected.
designed to correct careless, inattentive or ab- before using the ProPILOT Assist system. To
sent-minded-driving. ProPILOT Assist will not avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on
always steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. the system to prevent accidents or to control
The ProPILOT Assist system is not designed to the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations.
prevent loss of control. It is the driver’s respon- Do not use the ProPILOT Assist system except
sibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve- in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
• There are limitations to the ProPILOT Assist
system capability. The ProPILOT Assist system
does not function in all driving, traffic, weather,
and road conditions. It is the driver’s responsi-
bility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve-
• The ProPILOT Assist system is only an aid to
NIC4036
assist the driver and is not a collision warning
or avoidance device.
• The ProPILOT Assist system is for use on mo- A Radar sensor
j
torways with opposing traffic separated by a B Multi-sensing front camera
j
barrier only, and is not intended for city driv-
ing. The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to enhance
the operation of the vehicle when following a ve-
hicle travelling in the same lane and direction.

PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM NOTE Steering Assist (vehicles with ProPILOT
OPERATION When your vehicle is stopped for less than ap- Assist)
proximately 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead be- The Steering Assist function controls the steering
The ProPILOT Assist system has the following func-
gins to move, your vehicle will start moving again system to help keep your vehicle within the travel-
tions:
automatically. If your vehicle is stationary for
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) more than approximately 3 minutes, the ICC sys-
ling lane.
• Steering Assist tem will be switched off and the electronic park-
Steering Assist is not available at speeds under 60
km/h (37 MPH) unless a vehicle is detected ahead.
ing brake will be applied.
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (vehicles
– When the vehicle ahead begins to move forward,
with ProPILOT Assist)
push the <RES+> button on the steering wheel
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise con- or lightly depress the accelerator pedal to re-
trol modes: lease the brake. The ICC system will restart to
• Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in
mode: front of you.
Used for cruising at a preset speed. – When stationary and no vehicle is detected
ahead the ICC will not function. The accelerator
NOTE should be used to control the vehicle speed.
Steering assist is not available in the conventional
NOTE
(fixed speed) cruise control mode.
• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
Even if the Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB)
setting is turned off by the driver using the [Set-
The ICC system maintains a selected distance from tings] menu in the Vehicle Information Display, IEB
the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of will be turned on automatically when the ProPI-
0 km/h (0 MPH) up to the set speed. The set speed LOT Assist is used.
can be selected by the driver above approximately
30 km/h (20 MPH). When the vehicle ahead slows to
a stop, your vehicle gradually decelerates to a stand-
still. When the vehicle is stopped, the ICC system
maintains braking force to keep your vehicle sta-
tionary.

NSD1036
PROPILOT ASSIST SWITCHES

1) <RES+> switch
Resumes set speed or increases speed incre-
mentally.
2) <SET–> switch
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed in-
crementally
3) <CANCEL> switch
Deactivates the ICC system without erasing the
set speed
4) ProPILOT Assist switch:
Turns ProPILOT Assist on or off
5) Distance switch
– Long
– Middle
– Short
6) Steering Assist Switch
Turns the Steering Assist function on or off.

– Green: Steering Assist active.
4) Set distance indicator
Displays the selected distance.
5) Lane marker indicator
Indicates whether the system detects lane
markers
– No lane markers displayed: Steering Assist is
turned off
– Lane marker indicator (grey): No lane mark-
ers detected
– Lane marker indicator (green): Lane markers
detected
– Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane depar-
ture is detected
6) ProPILOT Assist indicator
Displays the status of Intelligent Blind Spot In-
tervention, Intelligent Lane Intervention, Steer-
ing Assist and ICC systems.
– White: systems are on (only if they are turned
on in the [Settings] menu), ICC is in standby
mode.
NSD1107
– Blue: ICC is active
Example
7) Steering Assist status indicator/warning
PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM DISPLAY 2) Vehicle ahead detection indicator
Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the
AND INDICATORS When the ICC is ON and active this indicates colour of the indicator/warning
whether the system detects a vehicle in front of
1) ProPILOT Assist [CRUISE] indicator – No Steering Assist status indicator displayed:
you.
Displays when ProPILOT Assist is activated. Steering Assist is turned off.
3) Steering Assist status indicator
– Grey: Steering Assist standby.
colour of the indicator – Green: Steering Assist active.
– Grey: Steering Assist standby. – Yellow: Steering Assist malfunction.

– Red: Hands off detected. 11) Detected road sign (speed limit) indicator (where TURNING THE PROPILOT ASSIST
fitted)
8) Lane marker indicator/speed control status CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED)
indicator/set distance indicator 12) Speed limit link indicator (where fitted) CRUISE CONTROL MODE ON
Displays the status of speed control by the co-
NOTE
lour and shape of the indicator/warning
• Speed control status indicator (white): ICC ProPILOT Assist provides no approach warnings,
automatic braking, or steering assist in the con-
standby
ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
• Speed control status indicator (green): ICC
To select the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
(distance control mode) is active
trol mode, push and hold the ProPILOT Assist switch
– Green vehicle icon displayed: Vehicle defor longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For addi-
tected ahead tional information, refer to “ProPILOT Assist Conven-
– No vehicle icon shown: No vehicle tional (fixed speed) Cruise Control Mode ” later in
NSD1092
detected ahead (Your vehicle maintains this section.
the driver-selected set speed.)
• Speed control status indicator (orange): Indi- 13) Green line: Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (where
fitted): gap between current speed and ICC tar-
cates an ICC malfunction
• Lane marker indicator: Indicates whether the
get speed.
14) Target speed:
system detects lane markers
– No lane markers displayed: Steering As- – White triangle: Cruise Control or Speed Lim-
sist is turned off iter target speed (where fitted).
– Lane marker indicator (grey): No lane – Green triangle: Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
markers detected target speed (where fitted).
– Lane marker indicator (green): Lane 15) Red line: Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) speed
markers detected limit marker (where fitted)
9) Set vehicle speed indicator NOTE
Indicates the set vehicle speed. Some of the items listed above are only available
– Grey: ICC standby. in Classic View. See “Changing the meter screen
view (models with full-screen display)” in the
– Green numbers: ICC active.
“2. Instruments and controls” section for addi-
10) Road information indicator (where fitted) tional information.

OPERATING THE PROPILOT ASSIST 1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch ➄. This turns on • When the shift control system is not in the D
the ProPILOT Assist system and displays the sta- (Drive) position
SYSTEM
tus of the ProPILOT Assist system on the Vehicle
• When the parking brake is applied
•
Information Display.
When the brakes are operated by the driver
2. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle to the de-
sired speed. • When the ESP system is off. For additional infor-
mation about the ESP system, see “Electronic
3. Push the <SET-> switch. The ProPILOT Assist sys- Stability Programme (ESP) system” later in this
tem begins to automatically maintain the set section.
speed. The ProPILOT Assist activation indicator
and ProPILOT Assist status indicators illuminate • When ESP (including the traction control system)
is operating.
(blue), speed control status indicator and set
speed illuminate green. • When a wheel is slipping
NSD1072
4. When a vehicle ahead is travelling at a speed of • When any door is open
30 km/h (20 MPH) or below and the <SET-> • When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
1) Distance switch: switch is pushed, the set speed of your vehicle is
30 km/h (20 MPH). • When Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) (where fit-
Changes the vehicle's following distance: ted) is activated.
NOTE
Long ̔ Middle ̔ Short ̔ Long How to change the set vehicle speed
Turning the ProPILOT Assist system on will turn
2) <RES+> switch: on the Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) system The set vehicle speed can be adjusted.
Resumes set speed or increases speed and Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention system at To change to a faster cruising speed:
incrementally. the same time, providing those systems are en-
abled in the [Driver Assistance] menu in the ve-
• Push and hold the <RES+> switch. The set ve-
3) <CANCEL> switch: hicle speed increases by 10 km/h (5 MPH) incre-
hicle information display. For additional informa- ments.
•
Deactivates the system without erasing the tion, refer to “ProPILOT Assist Intelligent Lane In-
set speed. tervention system” later in this section and “Blind Push, then quickly release, the <RES+> switch.
Spot Warning (BSW) system/Intelligent Blind Each time you do this, the set speed increases
4) <SET–> switch: by 1 km/h (1 MPH).
Spot Intervention system (where fitted)” earlier in
Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed this section. To change to a slower cruising speed:
5)
incrementally.
ProPILOT Assist switch:
When the <SET-> switch is pushed under the fol- • Push and hold the <SET-> switch. The set ve-
lowing conditions, the ProPILOT Assist system can- hicle speed decreases by 10 km/h (5 MPH) incre-
Master switch to activate the system. not be set and the set vehicle speed indicators ments.
blinks for approximately 2 seconds:
• Push, then quickly release, the <SET-> switch.
• When travelling below 30 km/h (20 MPH) and Each time you do this, the set speed decreases
the vehicle ahead is not detected by 1 km/h (1 MPH).

How to momentarily accelerate or Distance Display Approximate distance
NOTE
decelerate at 100 km/h (60 MPH) • When the Steering Assist switch is used to turn
• Depress the accelerator pedal when accelera- (m (ft)) the system ON or OFF, the system remembers
the setting between power cycles. The switch
tion is required. Release the accelerator pedal to Long 60 (200)
resume the previously set vehicle speed. m must be pushed again to change the setting
• Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is Middle 45 (150) to ON or OFF.

required. Control by the ProPILOT Assist system m • The Steering Assist switch changes the status
is cancelled. Push the <RES+> switch to resume Short 30 (100) of the [Steering Assist] selection made in the
the previously set vehicle speed. m [Settings] screen in the Vehicle Information
Display.
The distance to the vehicle ahead changes auto-
WARNING Setting in the Vehicle Information Display:
matically according to the vehicle speed. As the ve-
When the accelerator pedal is depressed and you hicle speed increases so does the distance. 1. Press the or buttons on the steering
are approaching the vehicle ahead, the ICC sys- wheel until the [Settings] menu is displayed in the
tem will neither control the brake nor warn the The distance setting will remain at the current set-
Vehicle Information Display and press the scroll
driver with the chime and display. The driver must ting even if the e-POWER system is restarted.
dial.
manually control the vehicle speed to maintain a 2. Use the scroll dial to highlight [Driver Assistance]
safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do and then push the scroll dial.
so could result in severe personal injury or death.
3. Select [Steering Assist] and push the scroll dial to
turn Steering Assist system on or off.
NOTE
If the indicator is displayed, the system is ON.
When you accelerate by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal or decelerate by pushing the <SET-> NOTE
switch and the vehicle travels faster than the
speed set by the driver, the set speed vehicle indi-
• When the ProPILOT Assist screen is displayed
on the Vehicle Information Display, press the
cator will blink. NSD1078 <OK> button on the steering wheel to show
How to change the set distance to the the [Driver Assistance] setting menu.
vehicle ahead Steering Assist Activation/Deactivation • When enabling/disabling the system through
Use the following methods to enable or disable the the Vehicle Information Display or when
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected
Steering Assist. pressing the Steering Assist switch, the sys-
when the ICC is in standby mode or the ICC is active,
tem retains the current settings even if the
depending on the traffic conditions. Steering Assist switch:
Each time the DISTANCE switch ( ) is pushed, the To turn the Steering Assist ON or OFF, push the
set distance will change from long to middle, short Steering Assist switch ➀ on the instrument panel.
and back to long again in that sequence.

Cancelling the ProPILOT Assist system ing. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system
To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use one of
all times. can only apply up to approximately 40% of the vehi-
the following methods:
• Press the <CANCEL> switch on the steering • There are limitations to the ICC system capa- cle's total braking power. This system should only
be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle
bility. The ICC system does not function in all
wheel. speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle
driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It
• Tap or depress the brake pedal (except when the is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the
vehicle is stationary). safely, keep the vehicle in the travelling lane, travelling lane ahead or if a vehicle travelling ahead
• To turn the ProPILOT Assist system off and be in control of the vehicle at all times. rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles
•
may become closer because the ICC system cannot
completely, press the ProPILOT Assist switch on Always observe posted speed limits and do decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs,
the steering wheel, the ProPILOT Assist indicator not set the speed over them. the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink
will turn OFF.
When the ProPILOT Assist system is switched off
• The ICC system does not react to stationary or the system display to notify the driver to take nec-
slow moving vehicles. essary action.
while the vehicle is stopped, the electronic parking
brake is automatically activated. • Always drive carefully and attentively when The ICC system cancels and a warning chime
using the ICC system. Read and understand sounds if the speed is below approximately 30 km/h
the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using (20 MPH) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The
WARNING the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or ICC system cancels and a warning chime sounds if
When you leave the vehicle, make sure to push death, do not rely on the system to prevent your vehicle is at a standstill for more than approxi-
the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system OFF, accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in mately 3 seconds and a vehicle is not detected
Press the P position switch to shift to the P (Park) emergency situations. Do not use the ICC sys- ahead.
position, and turn the e-POWER system OFF. tem except in appropriate road and traffic The ICC system operates as follows:
•
conditions.
•
When there are no vehicles travelling ahead, the
PROPILOT ASSIST INTELLIGENT In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con- ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver.
CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) SYSTEM trol mode, a warning chime will not sound to The set speed range is above approximately 30
warn you if you are too close to the vehicle km/h (20 MPH).
•
WARNING ahead. Pay special attention to the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of When there is a vehicle travelling ahead, the ICC
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for system adjusts the speed to maintain the dis-
you or a collision could occur.
proper use of the ICC system could result in seri- tance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle
ous injury or death. ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the
• The ICC system is only an aid to assist the
ProPILOT Assist ICC system operation vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your ve-
hicle stops, the ICC system keeps the vehicle
driver and is not a collision warning or avoid- The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is de-
ance device. It is for highway use only and it is signed to maintain a selected distance and reduce stopped.
not intended for congested areas or city driv- the speed to match the slower vehicle ahead; the
system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and

• When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than moving vehicles. You must pay attention to ve-
3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to ac- hicle operation to maintain proper distance from
celerate, push the <RES+> switch or lightly de- vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or
press the accelerator pedal. The ICC system traffic congestion.
starts to follow the vehicle ahead. If your vehicle When driving on the motorway at a set speed and
is stationary for more than approximately 3 min- approaching a slower travelling vehicle ahead, the
utes, the ICC system will be switched off and the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the dis-
electronic parking brake will be applied. tance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead.
• When the vehicle travelling ahead moves to a If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the mo-
different travelling lane, while the vehicle speed torway, the ICC system accelerates and maintains
is above 30 km/h (20 MPH), the ICC system ac- the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the NSD1048
celerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle System set display with vehicle ahead
set speed. as it accelerates to the set speed.
• When the vehicle travelling ahead moves to a The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on
different travelling lane, while the vehicle speed winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to
is below 30 km/h (20 MPH), the ICC system can- manually control the vehicle speed.
cels and a warning chime sounds. Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle
ahead, the system automatically accelerates or de-
celerates your vehicle according to the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your
vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane
NSD1047
change. Depress the brake pedal when decelera-
tion is required to maintain a safe distance to the System set display without vehicle ahead
vehicle ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle No vehicle detected ahead
cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC sys-
tem. The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on
NSD806 the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the
set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control,
as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead.
NOTE
The ICC system displays the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or
warn you when you approach stationary and slow

Vehicle detected ahead Vehicle ahead accelerates When overtaking another vehicle
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the When your vehicle is stopped and the vehicle ahead
ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling begins to accelerate, push the <RES+> switch or
the throttle and applying the brakes to match the lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC sys-
speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system tem starts to follow the vehicle ahead.
then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed
of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected
Vehicle ahead not detected
distance. When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC
system gradually accelerates your vehicle to
NOTE resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC
• The brake lights of the vehicle come on when system then maintains the set speed.
braking is performed by the ICC system. When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle NSD1192
• When the brake is applied by the system, a ahead detection indicator turns off and speed con-
noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. trol status indicator (maintain speed control mode) The driver can override ICC by pressing the accel-
turn off. erator. The set speed indicator will flash when the
When the ICC system detects a vehicle ahead, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator is displayed and The ICC system gradually accelerates to the set vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle
the speed control status indicator (vehicle icon) illu- speed, but you can depress the accelerator pedal to detection indicator will turn off when the area
minates in green. quickly accelerate. When a vehicle is no longer de- ahead of the vehicle is clear. When the pedal is re-
tected and your vehicle is travelling under approxi- leased, the vehicle will return to the previously set
Vehicle ahead stops mately 30 km/h (20 MPH), the ICC system automati- speed.
When the vehicle ahead decelerates to stop, your cally cancels. Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC
vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your vehicle The ICC system cancels and a warning chime system, you can depress the accelerator pedal
stops, the ICC system automatically applies the sounds if your vehicle is at a standstill for more than when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rap-
brakes to keep the vehicle stopped. When your ve- approximately 3 seconds and a vehicle is not de- idly.
hicle is at a standstill, the [Press to Restart] mes- tected ahead.
sage is displayed on the Vehicle Information Dis- Approach warning
play. If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead
due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle, the system
NOTE
warns the driver with the chime and ICC system
When your vehicle stops for less than 3 seconds, display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to
your vehicle will automatically follow the vehicle maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
ahead as it accelerates from a stop. If your vehicle
is stationary for more than approximately 3 min- • The chime sounds.
utes, the ICC system will be switched off and the • The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.
electronic parking brake will be applied.

• You judge it necessary to maintain a safe dis- Acceleration when overtaking set speed), and the turn signal is activated to the
tance. (where fitted) right, the ICC system will automatically start to ac-
The warning chime may not sound in some cases celerate the vehicle to help initiate overtaking on
NOTE the right and will begin to reduce the distance to
when there is a short distance between vehicles.
Some examples are: The acceleration when overtaking feature is only vehicle directly ahead. Only the right side turn sig-
• available for certain countries and for certain ve- nal operates this feature. As the driver steers the
When the vehicles are travelling at the same vehicle and moves into the overtaking lane, if no
hicle grades.
speed and the distance between vehicles is not vehicle is detected ahead the ICC system will con-
changing. Overtaking on the left-hand side (for countries
tinue to accelerate to the ICC system set speed.
• When the vehicle ahead is travelling faster and
where traffic travels on the right hand side of the
road): If another vehicle is detected ahead, then the ve-
the distance between vehicles is increasing. hicle will accelerate up to the following speed of that
• When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
When the ICC system is engaged above 70 km/h
vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the right
The warning chime will not sound when: lane to overtake, the acceleration will stop after a
set speed), and the turn signal is activated to the
•
short time and regain the set following distance.
Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are left, the ICC system will automatically start to accel-
parked or moving slowly. erate the vehicle to help initiate overtaking on the Acceleration can be stopped at any point by de-
• left and will begin to reduce the distance to vehicle pressing the brake pedal or the <CANCEL> switch
The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding on the steering wheel
directly ahead. Only the left side turn signal oper-
the system.
ates this feature. As the driver steers the vehicle
NOTE and moves into the overtaking lane, if no vehicle is WARNING
detected ahead the ICC system will continue to ac- In order to reduce the risk of a collision that may
The approach warning chime may sound and the
celerate to the ICC system set speed. result in serious injury or death, please be aware
system display may flash when the radar sensor
detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on If another vehicle is detected ahead, then the ve- of the following:
the side of the road. This may cause the ICC sys- hicle will accelerate up to the following speed of that
vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the left lane
• This function is only activated with the left or
tem to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The right turn signal and will briefly accelerate the
radar sensor may detect these objects when the to overtake, the acceleration will stop after a short vehicle even if a lane change is not initiated.
vehicle is driven on winding, narrow, or hilly roads time and regain the set following distance. This can include non-overtaking situations
or when the vehicle is entering or exiting a curve. Acceleration can be stopped at any point by de- such as left or right side exits.
In these cases, you will have to manually control
the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
pressing the brake pedal or the <CANCEL> switch
on the steering wheel.
• Ensure that when overtaking another vehicle,
the adjacent lane is clear before initiating the
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by ve- Overtaking on the right-hand side (for countries overtaking manoeuvre. Sudden changes in
hicle operation (steering manoeuvre or driving po- where traffic travels on the left hand side of the traffic may occur while overtaking. Always
sition in the lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions (for road): manually steer or brake as needed never
example, if a vehicle is being driven with some dam- solely rely on the system.
When the ICC system is engaged above 70 km/h
age).

Speed Limit Link - ProPILOT Assist When ProPILOT Assist is active and it detects a System display and indicators:
(where fitted) change of the speed limit, the new speed limit is
indicated and it can be applied to the vehicle set
WARNING speed manually.
Listed below are the system limitations for the The Speed Limit Link operates:
Speed Limit Link. Failure to operate the vehicle in • When the detected speed limit is 30 km/h (20
accordance with these system limitations could MPH) and above.
• The [Speed Limit Link] is enabled in the settings
• It is the driver’s responsibility to select the menu of the vehicle information display.
proper speed, follow all traffic regulations and
observe other road users. NOTE
NIC4145
• The Speed Limit Linkmay not operate properly • In the following situations, the [Speed Limit Example
and the actual speed limit may not be applied Link] will not operate:
1. Detected speed limit indicator
to the vehicle set speed in all conditions. The – When an increase in the posted speed limit
driver must manually control the vehicle is detected, but the vehicle set speed is al- Displays the currently detected speed limit. For
speed. ready faster than the new speed limit. additional information, see “Traffic sign recogni-
tion (where fitted)” earlier in this section.
Below are some examples: – When a decrease in the posted speed limit
is detected, but the vehicle set speed is al- 2. Applied speed limit indicator (green frame)
system is not functioning properly or ready lower than the new speed limit. Indicates the detected speed limit can be applied
turned off. (See “Traffic sign recognition to the vehicle set speed.
(where fitted)” earlier in this section.) 3. Speed Limit Link indicator
– When driving in an area with nearby paral- Indicates the system activation mode or system
lel roads (for example, motorway with a operation.
Manual mode is activated and a new speed
– When driving in an area where each lane limit (faster speed value) is indicated.
has a different speed limit sign.
– When driving on a road under construction limit (lower speed value) is indicated.
or in a construction zone.
4. Guidance message, instruction on how to set
– When End of speed limit sign is indicated. new speed.
• When speed unit selected in [Display Settings]
is different to the unit of the speed limit sign.

Operating the system: NOTE • The Speed Limit Link may not operate prop-
When the system detects a different speed limit, the The system will retain current settings in the ve- erly and the actual speed limit may not be ap-
new speed value is indicated. The vehicle set speed hicle information display even if the e-POWER plied to the vehicle set speed in all conditions.
can be changed to the indicated speed limit manu- system is restarted. The driver must manually control the vehicle
ally. speed.
How to set tolerance for [Speed Link Offset]:
Below are some examples:
ate the <RES+> switch (in case of speed limit up) – When the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
or <SET-> switch (in case of speed limit down). system is not functioning properly or
turned off. (See “Traffic sign recognition
(where fitted)” earlier in this section.)
will turn off after approximately 15 seconds if the
<RES+> or <SET-> switch is not operated. (The – When driving in countries or areas not cov-
Speed Limit Link indicator can be turned off im- 3. Select [Speed Link Offset], and push the scroll dial ered by the navigation system.
mediately by operating the opposite switch from to select tolerance value.
– When crossing national boundaries.
the direction indicated by the Speed Limit Link
NOTE
indicator.) – When driving on the exit of the limited ac-
The system will retain current settings in the ve- cess motorway as identified in the naviga-
The system will not activate if a speed limit change
hicle information display even if the e-POWER tion map data.
is not detected.
– When driving in an area with nearby paral-
[Speed Link Offset]:
Speed Limit Link - ProPILOT Assist with lel roads (for example, motorway with a
It is possible to set whether the speed limit should parallel service drive).
Navi Link (where fitted)
be accepted exactly, or with a tolerance of -10 km/h
– When driving in an area where each lane
(–5 MPH) to +10 km/h (+5 MPH).
WARNING has a different speed limit sign.
How to activate or deactivate the system: Listed below are the system limitations for the – When driving on a road under construction
1. Push the button on the steering wheel Speed Limit Link. Failure to operate the vehicle in or in a construction zone.
until [Settings] appears in the vehicle information accordance with these system limitations could
display, and push the scroll dial. – When the data from the navigation system
is not up-to-date or is unavailable.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to select the
proper speed, follow all traffic regulations and
3. Select [Speed Limit Link], and push the scroll dial observe other road users.

When the ProPILOT Assist with Navi Link is active System display and indicators: Manual mode is activated and a new speed
and it detects a change of the speed limit, the new limit (lower speed value) is indicated.
speed limit is indicated and it can be applied to the “A”: Auto mode is activated.
vehicle set speed automatically or manually.
Operating the system:
The Speed Limit Link operates:
When the system detects a different speed limit, the
• When the detected speed limit is 30 km/h (20 new speed value is indicated. The vehicle set speed
MPH ) and above. can be changed to the indicated speed limit auto-
• The [Speed Limit Link] is enabled in the settings matically or manually.
menu of the vehicle information display. When Manual mode is selected on settings menu
NOTE (factory default setting):
• While the accelerator pedal is operated with Example

NIC4100
AUTO mode selected, the Speed Limit Link will ate the <RES+> switch (in case of speed limit up)
function (automatically adjust the vehicle set 1. Guidance message, instruction on how to set new or <SET-> switch (in case of speed limit down).
speed) only when the detected speed limit is speed.
faster than the vehicle set speed. 2. Detected speed limit indicator (left side) will turn off after approximately 15 seconds if the
• In the following situations, the Speed Limit Displays detected impending or anticipated <RES+> or <SET-> switch is not operated. (The
Speed Limit Link indicator can be turned off im-
Link will not operate: speed limit. The impending or anticipated speed
limit will only be indicated when a new speed limit mediately by operating the opposite switch from
– When an increase in the posted speed limit the direction indicated by the Speed Limit Link
is detected, but the vehicle set speed is al- (lower speed value) is detected in manual mode.
indicator.)
ready faster than the new speed limit. Detected speed limit indicator (right side)
The system will not activate if a speed limit change
– When a decrease in the posted speed limit Displays the currently detected speed limit. For is not detected.
is detected, but the vehicle set speed is al- additional information, see “Traffic sign recogni-
ready lower than the new speed limit. tion (where fitted)” earlier in this section. When Auto mode is selected on the settings
menu:
•
For Germany: No Limit speed setting: 3. Applied speed limit indicator (green frame)
The indicated speed limit is applied to the ve-
When you switch on the e-POWER system and sub- Indicates the detected speed limit can be applied hicle set speed automatically when on a limited
sequently enter a motorway with no speed limit, to the vehicle set speed. access motorway as identified in the navigation
the system initially regulates the speed to 130 km/
4. Speed Limit Link indicator map data. Also, if the ProPILOT Assist with Navi
h. After this, the last speed stored by the driver on a
Indicates the system activation mode or system Link system is ON, but not set (active), and a new
motorway with no speed limit is applied.
operation. speed limit is detected, the vehicle set speed is
NOTE automatically updated.
This feature only works in Germany. limit (faster speed value) is indicated.

• The Auto mode may not be available in some NOTE • The Cruise Navi Link may not operate properly
regions or on roads other than limited access The system will retain current settings in the ve- in some road and traffic conditions, the sys-
motorways. In this case, the system operates as hicle information display even if the e-POWER tem may unexpectedly change the speed. The
the Manual mode. system is restarted. driver must manually control the vehicle
speed.
[Speed Link Offset]:
Cruise Navi Link - ProPILOT Assist with Below are some examples:
It is possible to set whether the speed limit should
Navi Link (where fitted)
be accepted exactly, or with a tolerance of -10 km/h – When driving in countries or areas not cov-
(–5 MPH) to +10 km/h (+5 MPH). ered by the navigation system.
WARNING
How to activate or deactivate the system: Listed below are the system limitations for the – When the data from the navigation system
1. Push the button on the steering wheel Cruise Navi Link. Failure to operate the vehicle in is not up-to-date or is unavailable.
until [Settings] appears in the vehicle information accordance with these system limitations could – When not driving along the route
display, and push the scroll dial. result in serious injury or death: suggested by the navigation system.
2. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Assistance]. • There are limitations to the Cruise Navi Link- – When the navigation system is recalculat-
Then push the scroll dial. system capability. The system does not func- ing the route.
3. Select [Speed Limit Link], and push the scroll dial tion in all driving, traffic, weather and road – When driving in countries or areas not cov-
to select [Auto] or [Prompt] to enable (not acti- conditions. It is the driver’s responsibility to ered by the navigation system.
vate) the system. stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the
vehicle at all times. – When driving on a road under construction
•
NOTE or newly constructed road.
The Cruise Navi Link system does not brake
The system will retain current settings in the ve- the vehicle to a stop. Whenever necessary, the – When driving near a road split or junction.
hicle information display even if the e-POWER driver must apply appropriate braking. – When driving in bad weather or poor road
• It is the driver’s responsibility to select the conditions.
How to set tolerance for [Speed Link Offset]: proper speed, follow all traffic regulations and
1. Push the button on the steering wheel observe other road users. When the ProPILOT Assist with Navi Link is active on
• The availability of the Cruise Navi Link func-
a limited access motorway (as identified in the navi-
gation map data), the Cruise Navi Link uses road
tion is country-dependent. In some countries,
information provided by the navigation system and
2. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Assistance]. for example, Iceland, Malta, Cyprus, this func-
can adjust the vehicle speed depending on curves,
Then push the scroll dial. tion is not available. The map data quality does
junctions and exits.
not satisfy the system requirements. If the
3. Select [Speed Link Offset], and push the scroll dial
system detects that the vehicle is located in The Cruise Navi Link uses road information provided
to select tolerance value.
these countries on the basis of GPS informa- by the navigation system and can adjust the vehicle
tion, the system prohibits activation of the speed depending on roundabouts (as identified in
Cruise Navi Link function. the navigation map data).

The system may not always reduce speed for all Automatic cancellation
curves, junctions, roundabouts or exits and the Curves and junctions
driver may need to apply additional braking at any m A chime sounds under the following conditions and
the control is automatically cancelled.
time.
When the vehicle is through the curve, roundabout m Right exit
• Any door is open
or junction, the vehicle will accelerate again to the • The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
•
Left exit
set speed. When exiting the limited access motor- m The vehicle ahead is not detected and your ve-
way, the driver will need to apply braking at the end hicle is travelling below the speed of 25 km/h (15
of the exit. Roundabout MPH). The ICC system cancels and a warning
m chime sounds if your vehicle is at a standstill for
NOTE
more than approximately 3 seconds and a ve-
•
How to activate or deactivate the system:
The system does not operate when the accel- hicle is not detected ahead.
erator pedal is depressed.
until [Settings] appears in the vehicle information • Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC sys-
• The system may not operate depending on display, and push the scroll dial. tem for approximately 3 minutes or longer.
the set distance to the vehicle ahead and ve-
hicles detected ahead.
2. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Assistance]. • When the shift control system is not in the D
Then push the scroll dial. (Drive) mode.
System display and indicators:
3. Select [CRUISE Navi Link] and push the scroll dial • The electric parking brake is applied.
• When the ESP system is turned off.
NOTE • The IEB applies harder braking
The system will retain current settings in the ve- • When ESP (including the traction control system)
hicle information display even if the e-POWER operates.
• A wheel slips.
• When distance measurement becomes im-
paired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to
the sensor.
NIC4085
• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.
•
Example
When Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) (where fit-
1. Road information indicator ted) is activated.
Appears when the system adjusts the speed de-
pending on turns or exits.

ICC system limitations proper following distance. The ICC system may tem where not recommended in this warning
not be able to maintain the selected distance section.
WARNING between vehicles (following distance) or se-
lected vehicle speed under some circum- The ICC system will not detect the following objects:
ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac-
stances.
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles
cordance with these system limitations could re- • The system may not detect the vehicle in front
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
sult in serious injury or death: of you in certain road or weather conditions.
• The ICC system is primarily intended for use

To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system • Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It
under the following conditions: • Motorcycles travelling offset in the travel lane
is not advisable to use the ICC system in city – On roads with heavy, high-speed traffic or The following are some conditions in which the ra-
traffic or congested areas. sharp curves dar sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead
• The ICC system will not adapt automatically to – On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or and the system may not operate properly:
road conditions. This system should be used snow, etc. • When the sensor detection is reduced (condi-
in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the sys- – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) tions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand-
tem on roads with sharp curves or on icy roads, storms, and road spray from other vehicles).
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the front
in heavy rain or in fog.
of the vehicle around the distance sensor • Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with
• As there is a performance limit to the distance
– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may
sharp curves.
control function, never rely solely on the ICC
system. This system does not correct careless,
go beyond the set vehicle speed and fre- • Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an un-
quent braking may result in overheating even dirt road.
inattentive or absent minded driving or over-
come poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad
the brakes) • If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the
weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by de- – On repeated uphill and downhill roads radar sensor area.
pressing the brake pedal, depending on the – When traffic conditions make it difficult to • A complicated-shaped vehicle such as a car car-
distance to the vehicle ahead and the keep a proper distance between vehicles rier trailer or flatbed truck/trailer is near the ve-
surrounding circumstances in order to main- because of frequent acceleration or decel- hicle ahead.
tain a safe distance between vehicles. eration • Interference by other radar sources.
• When the ICC system automatically brings the – Interference by other radar sources. • When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
car to a stop, your vehicle can automatically
accelerate if the vehicle is stopped for less • Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a • When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the
trailer or another vehicle. rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.
than approximately 3 seconds and a vehicle
ahead is detected moving away. Be prepared • In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or The ICC system is designed to automatically check
to stop your vehicle if necessary. object can unexpectedly come into the sensor the radar sensor’s operation within the limitations
• Always pay attention to the operation of the
detection zone and cause automatic braking.
Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-
of the system.
vehicle and be ready to manually control the

NSD775
The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A

vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the
ICC system to maintain the selected distance from
the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move out-
side of the detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be de-
tected in the same lane ahead.

• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
• The vehicle ahead is not detected and your ve-
hicle is travelling below the speed of 25 km/h (15
MPH). The ICC system cancels and a warning
chime sounds if your vehicle is at a standstill for
more than approximately 3 seconds and a ve-
hicle is not detected ahead.
• Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC sys-
tem for approximately 3 minutes or longer.
NSD679 • When the shift control system is not in the D

(Drive) mode.
When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, • Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams • The electronic parking brake is applied.
curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under from oncoming vehicles) enters the front cam- • When the ESP system is turned off.
construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles era. • The IEB applies harder braking
in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a
vehicle travelling ahead. This may cause the radar
• Strong light causes the area around the pedes- • When ESP (including the traction control system)
trian to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to operates.
system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. see.
• A wheel slips.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by
vehicle operation (steering manoeuvre or travelling
• A sudden change in brightness occurs (for ex-
ample, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel
position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. paired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to
or shaded area or lightning flashes).
the sensor.
The ICC system (with ProPILOT Assist) uses a multi-
sensing front camera. The following are some con-
System temporarily unavailable • When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.
ditions in which the camera may not properly de-
tect a vehicle and detection of a vehicle ahead may
The following are conditions in which the ICC sys-
tem may be temporarily unavailable. In these in-
• When Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) (where fit-
ted) is activated.
be delayed: stances, the ICC system may not cancel and may
Action to take:
• Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog,
not be able to maintain the selected following dis-
tance from the vehicle ahead. When the conditions listed above are no longer
dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from
present, turn the system off using the ProPILOT As-
other vehicles). Condition A:
sist switch. Turn the ProPILOT Assist system back
• The camera area of the windscreen is fogged up Under the following conditions, the ICC system is
automatically cancelled. A chime will sound and the
on to use the system.
or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.
system will not be able to be set:
• Any door is open

NOTE warning message continues to be displayed, have
When the ICC system is cancelled under the fol- the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
lowing conditions at a standstill, the electronic workshop.
parking brake is automatically activated: Condition C:
• Any door is opened. When driving on roads with limited road structures
• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts,
snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system
• Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC sys- may display the [Temporarily Disabled Front Radar
tem for approximately 3 minutes or longer. Blocked] message.
• When the shift control system is not in the D Action to take: NIC4037
(Drive) mode.
When the above driving conditions no longer exist,
• When the ESP system is turned off. turn the system back on.
ICC system malfunction
ICC sensor maintenance
paired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to The radar sensor is located on the front of the ve-
the sensor. If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be turned off A.
hicle j
• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.

automatically, a warning will be displayed in the ve-
hicle information display, a chime will sound, and
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure
to observe the following:
Condition B: the speed control status warning (yellow) will illumi-
The Radar sensor is positioned at the front of the nate. • Always keep the sensor area clean.
vehicle. When this area is covered with dirt or is ob- Action to take: • Do not strike or damage the areas around the
structed, the ICC system will automatically be can- sensor.
If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle in a
celled.
safe place. Turn the e-POWER system off, restart the • Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects
The chime will sound and the [Temporarily Disabled e-POWER system and set the ICC system again. If it near the sensor area. This could cause failure or
Front Radar Blocked] warning message will appear is not possible to set the ICC system or the indica- malfunction.
in the Vehicle Information Display. tor stays on, it may be a malfunction. Although the • Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor
Action to take: normal driving can be continued, the ICC system area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause failure
should be checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified or malfunction.
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in
workshop.
a safe place, press the P position switch to shift to For the radio approval numbers and information,
the P (Park) position, and turn the e-POWER system see “Radio frequency approval” in the “9. Technical
off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, information” section.
clean the sensor area and restart the e-POWER sys- The camera sensor is located above the inside mir-
tem. Note that the system will require some time to ror.
detect that the area is now clean and to reset itself.
If the [Temporarily Disabled Front Radar Blocked]

To keep the proper operation of the systems and • As there is a performance limit to the Steering ProPILOT Assist Steering Assist
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe Assist’s capability, never rely solely on the sys- operation
the following: tem. The Steering Assist does not function in
The Steering Assist controls the steering system to
• Always keep the windscreen clean. all driving, traffic, weather, and road condi-
help keep your vehicle near the centre of the lane
•
tions. Always drive safely, pay attention to the
Do not attach a sticker (including transparent when driving. The Steering Assist is combined with
operation of the vehicle, and manually control
material) or install an accessory near the cam- the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system. For addi-
your vehicle appropriately.
tional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Con-
•
era unit.
•
The Steering Assist is intended for use on well- trol (ICC) (vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)” earlier in
Do not place reflective materials, such as white developed motorways or highways with this section.
paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The gentle (moderate) curves, where traffic travel-
reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the The Steering Assist can be activated when the fol-
ling in opposing directions is separated with a
camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane lowing conditions are met:
barrier. To avoid risk of an accident, do not use
markers. this system on local or non-highway roads. • The ICC system is activated and the speed set.
• The Steering Assist only steers the vehicle to • Lane markers on both sides are clearly detected.
remove the screw located on the camera unit.
maintain its position in the centre of a lane.
The vehicle will not steer to avoid objects in
• Your vehicle is travelling at a speed over 60 km/h
(37 MPH), OR a vehicle is detected in front of you
If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, the road in front of the vehicle or to avoid a when travelling under 60 km/h (37MPH).
have it checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified vehicle moving into your lane.
• The driver grips the steering wheel.
workshop.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
• The vehicle is driven at the centre of the lane.
PROPILOT ASSIST STEERING ASSIST drive safely, keep the vehicle in the travelling
lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all • The turn signals are not operated.
WARNING times. Never take your hands off the steering

wheel when driving. Always keep your hands
• The windscreen wiper is not operated in the high
(HI) speed operation (the steering assist func-
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle tion is disabled after the wiper operates for ap-
proper use of the Steering Assist could result in safely. proximately 10 seconds).
•
serious injury or death.
•
Always drive carefully and attentively when
The Steering Assist is not a replacement for using the Steering Assist. Read and under-
proper driving procedures and is not designed stand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before
to correct careless, inattentive or absent- using the Steering Assist. To avoid serious in-
minded driving. The Steering Assist will not al- jury or death, do not rely on the system to pre-
ways steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. It vent accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed
is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is in emergency situations. Do not use the Steer-
the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive ing Assist except in appropriate road and traf-
safely, keep the vehicle in the travelling lane, fic conditions.
and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

ProPILOT Assist Steering Assist display
and indicators
NSD1123
1. Steering Assist status indicator/warning

colour of the indicator/warning
• No indicator: Steering Assist off
• Grey: Steering Assist standby
• Green: Steering Assist active
• Yellow: Steering Assist malfunction
NSD1035
• Red: Hands off detected.
2. Lane marker indicator
Indicates whether the system detects the lane
ProPILOT Assist Steering Assist When the Steering Assist switch is used to turn the
system ON or OFF, the system remembers the set- marker
switches
➀ Steering wheel mounted controls (left)
ting when the e-POWER system is restarted. The • Grey: Lane markers not detected

switch must be pushed again to change the setting
• Green: Lane markers detected
•
to ON or OFF.
Yellow: Lane departure is detected
➂ Steering Assist switch The Steering Assist switch changes the status of
To turn the Steering Assist ON or OFF, push the the [Steering Assist] selection made in the [Settings]
Steering Assist switch on the instrument panel. screen in the Vehicle Information Display.

3. Steering Assist status indicator ProPILOT Assist Intelligent Lane If the driver does not operate the steering wheel
Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the Intervention (ILI) after the warning has been displayed, an audible
colour of the indicator/warning alert sounds and the warning flashes in the Vehicle
When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds the ca-
•
Information Display. If the driver still does not oper-
Grey: Steering Assist standby pabilities of the Steering Assist and your vehicle ap-
ate the steering wheel, the system applies Emer-
•
proaches either the left or the right side of the trav-
Green: Steering Assist active gency Assist, followed by a momentary brake appli-
elling lane, the steering wheel vibrates, a warning
4. Lane marker indicator/speed control status in- cation to request the driver to take control of the
chime sounds and the ILI indicator light (yellow) on
dicator/set distance indicator vehicle again.
the instrument panel flashes to alert the driver.
Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the Then, the ILI system automatically applies the If the driver still does not respond, the ProPILOT As-
colour of the lane marker indicator. brakes for a short period of time to help assist the sist turns on the hazard flasher and slows the ve-
•
driver to avoid departing the lane and to return the hicle to a complete stop.
Lane marker indicator (no lane): Steering As-
vehicle to the centre of the travelling lane. This ac- The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time
sist turned off
tion is in addition to any Steering Assist actions. For
•
by steering, braking, accelerating, or operating the
Lane marker indicator (green): Steering Assist additional information, refer to “ProPILOT Assist In- ProPILOT Assist switch.
active telligent Lane Intervention system” later in this sec-
• Lane marker indicator (grey): Steering Assist tion. WARNING
standby Hands on detection Steering Assist is not a system for hands-free
When the Steering Assist is in operation, the Steer- driving. Always keep your hands on the steering
ing Assist status indicators ➀ and ➂, and the lane wheel and drive your vehicle safely. Failure to do
marker indicators ➁ and ➃ on the Vehicle Informa- so could cause a collision resulting in serious per-
tion Display turn green. A chime sounds when the sonal injury or death.
Steering Assist initially activates.
When the Steering Assist enters standby mode, the NOTE
Steering Assist status indicators ➀ and ➂, and the
The sensors may not detect the driver's hand(s)
lane marker indicators ➁ and ➃ on the Vehicle In- on the steering wheel in the following situations
formation Display turn grey. If Steering Assist has and a sequence of warnings may occur:
•
been deactivated automatically as the conditions
for activation are no longer met, a double chime will NSD1052 Driving with gloves.
sound.
When the Steering Assist is activated, it monitors
• Protective covers on the steering wheel.
the driver’s steering wheel operation. • Gripping the part of the steering wheel with-
out sensors, including leather joints and
If the driver takes his/her hands off the steering
spokes.
wheel for a period of time, the warning ➀ appears
in the Vehicle Information Display and the warning
light ➁ illuminates.

Steering Assist Activation/Deactivation Setting in the Vehicle Information Display: – When driving on roads with a widening or
1. Push the button on the steering wheel narrowing lane width
Use the following methods to enable or disable the
Steering Assist. ➀ until [Settings] appears in the vehicle informa- – When driving on roads where there are
tion display ➁ and then push the scroll dial. multiple lanes or unclear lane markers due
ProPILOT Assist switch on steering wheel:
2. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Assistance]. to road construction
Press the ProPILOT Assist switch. This will turn ICC
Then push the scroll dial. – When driving on roads where there are
on. Note that Steering Assist may already be
3. Select [Steering Assist] and push the scroll dial to sharply contrasting objects, such as shad-
switched on, depending on the settings in the [Set-
turn the Steering Assist on or off. ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams, or
tings] menu. These settings are retained if the e-
lines remaining after road repairs (the
POWER system is restarted.
NOTE Steering Assist could detect these items as
Then press <SET–> on the right-hand steering
wheel switch to set cruise control speed. When the
• When the Steering Assist screen is displayed lane markers)
on the Vehicle Information Display, press the – When driving on roads where the travelling
system detects clear lane markings the Steering As-
<OK> button on the steering wheel to show lane merges or separates
sist icons will turn green and the Steering Assist sys-
the [Driver Assistance] setting menu.
tem will become active. For Turkey, a chime will – Where the lanes are too narrow or too wide
sound when Steering Assist restarts. • When enabling/disabling the system through
• Do not use the Steering Assist under the fol-
the Vehicle Information Display or when
The Steering Assist icon will remain grey if the ve- lowing conditions because the system may
pressing the Steering Assist switch, the sys-
hicle is driven at speeds under 60 km/h (37 MPH) not properly detect lane markers. Doing so
tem retains the current settings even if the e-
and no vehicle ahead is detected could cause a loss of vehicle control and result
POWER system is restarted.
in an accident.
Steering Assist switch:
Steering Assist limitations – During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, dust,
To turn the Steering Assist ON or OFF, push the
Steering Assist switch on the instrument panel. etc.)
WARNING
– When rain, snow, sand, etc., is thrown up by
NOTE • In the following situations, the camera may the wheels of other vehicles
• When the Steering Assist switch is used to turn not detect lane markers correctly or may de-
tect lane markers incorrectly and the Steering – When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or another
the system ON or OFF, the system remembers
Assist may not operate properly: object adheres to the camera unit
the setting when the e-POWER system is re-
started. The switch must be pushed again to – When driving on roads where there are – When the glass in front of the camera is
change the setting to ON or OFF. multiple parallel lane markers, lane mark- foggy
• The Steering Assist switch changes the status ers that are faded or not painted clearly,
nonstandard lane markers, or lane mark-
– When strong light (for example, sunlight or
high beams from oncoming vehicles)
of the [Steering Assist] selection made in the
[Settings] screen in the Vehicle Information ers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc. shines on the camera
Display. – When driving on roads with discontinued
lane markers

– When the headlights are not bright due to – When excessively heavy baggage is loaded Automatic standby:
dirt on the lens or the headlights are off in in the rear seat or luggage area of your ve- In the following cases, a double chime sounds, and
tunnels or darkness hicle the Steering Assist is placed in a temporary standby
– When a sudden change in brightness oc- – When the vehicle load capacity is exceeded mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically
curs (for example, when the vehicle enters when the operating conditions are met again. For
– When towing a trailer or other vehicle
Turkey, a chime will sound when Steering Assist re-
•
or exits a tunnel or is under a bridge)
Excessive noise will interfere with the warning starts.)
– When driving on roads where the travelling chime sound, and the beep may not be heard.
• When the current travelling lane is too narrow to
•
lane merges or separates or where there
are temporary lane markers because of For the ProPILOT Assist system to operate operate.
road construction properly, the windscreen in front of the cam-
era must be clean. Replace worn wiper blades. • When a corner is too tight and the vehicle can-
– When there is a lane closure due to road not stay in the travelling lane.
The correct size wiper blades must be used to
repairs help make sure the windscreen is kept clean. • When lane markers on both sides are no longer
– When driving on a bumpy road surface, Only use Genuine NISSAN wiper blades, or detected.
such as an uneven dirt road equivalent wiper blades, that are specifically
designed for use on your vehicle model and
• When a vehicle ahead is no longer detected un-
– When driving on sharp curves or winding der approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH).
roads model year. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for the • When strong light enters the camera unit. (For
– When driving on repeated uphill and down- example, the light directly shines on the front of
correct parts for your vehicle.
hill roads the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
• Do not use the Steering Assist under the fol-

Steering Assist temporary standby • When the temperature of the camera is too high.
lowing conditions because the system will not
NOTE
operate properly: Automatic standby due to driving operation:
When the driver activates the turn signal, the Steer- For vehicles fitted with ProPILOT Assist with Navi
– When driving with a tyre that is not within
ing Assist is temporarily placed in a standby mode. Link on a limited access motorway as identified in
normal tyre conditions (for example, tyre
(The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the navigation map data, the Steering Assist may
wear, abnormal tyre pressure, installation
the operating conditions are met again. For Turkey, continue to operate with visible lane markers on
of a spare tyre, tyre chains, nonstandard
a chime will sound when Steering Assist restarts.) both sides even when the vehicle speed is below
wheels)
approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) and a vehicle is
– When the vehicle is equipped with not detected ahead.
non-original brake or suspension parts
– When an object such as a sticker or cargo
obstructs the camera

Steering Assist cancel Steering Assist malfunction • Do not strike or damage the areas around the
Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist When the system malfunctions, it turns off auto-
remove the screw located on the camera unit.
cancels a warning message is displayed, a double- matically. The Steering Assist status warning illumi-
chime sounds, and the Steering Assist indicators nates (yellow) and a warning message is displayed If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it
turn off: in the vehicle information display. A chime may is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or
• When unusual lane markers appear in the trav- sound depending on the situation. qualified workshop.
elling lane or when the lane marker cannot be Action to take: PROPILOT ASSIST CONVENTIONAL
correctly detected for some time due to certain Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL
conditions (for example, a snow rut, the reflec- in the P (Park) position, turn the e-POWER system
tion of light on a rainy day, the presence of sev- MODE
off, restart the e-POWER system, resume driving, en-
eral unclear lane markers). sure that the Steering Assist is switched on using NOTE
• When the windscreen wiper operates in the high the Steering Assist button on the instrument panel ProPILOT Assist provides no approach warnings,
(HI) speed operation (the Steering Assist is dis- or the [Settings] menu and set the Intelligent Cruise automatic braking, or steering assist in the con-
abled when the wiper operates for more than Control system again. If the warning (yellow) conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
approximately 10 seconds). tinues to illuminate, the Steering Assist may be mal-
functioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable un- This mode allows driving at a speed above approxi-
Action to take: mately 30 km/h (20 MPH) without keeping your foot
der normal conditions, have the system checked by
When the conditions listed above are no longer a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. on the accelerator pedal.
present, turn the Steering Assist system on again
using the Steering Assist button on the instrument Steering Assist maintenance WARNING
panel. The camera sensor is located above the inside mir- • In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
ror. trol mode, a warning chime does not sound to
To keep the proper operation of the system and pre- warn you if you are too close to the vehicle
vent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle
following: ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
•
detected.
Always keep the windscreen clean.
• Pay special attention to the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a
material) or install an accessory near the cam- collision could occur.
era unit.
• Always confirm the setting in the ICC system
NIC4356
display.
camera unit’s capability of detecting the lane
markers.

• Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) ➂ ProPILOT Assist switch. 2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
cruise control mode when driving under the This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed.
ProPILOT Assist Conventional (fixed
•
speed) cruise control mode display and Grey: cruise control standby
•
– When it is not possible to keep the vehicle
indicators Green: cruise control active
at a set speed
– In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in Operating ProPILOT Assist
speed conventional (fixed speed) cruise
– On winding or hilly roads control mode
– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.) To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, push and hold the blue ProPILOT As-
– In very windy areas
sist switch for longer than about 1.5 seconds.
• Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control
When pushing the blue ProPILOT Assist switch on,
and result in an accident.
the ICC system display and indicators are displayed
in the Vehicle Information Display. After you hold
NSD1075
ProPILOT Assist Conventional (fixed ProPILOT Assist switch on for longer than about 1.5
speed) cruise control switches seconds, the ProPILOT Assist system display turns
The display is located in the vehicle information dis- off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set
play. your desired cruising speed. Pushing the ProPILOT
Assist switch again will turn the system completely
1. Cruise indicator:
off. When the power switch is switched OFF, the sys-
This indicator indicates the condition of the Con- tem is also automatically turned off.
ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode of the
To use the ICC system again, quickly push and re-
ICC system depending on a colour.
lease the ProPILOT Assist switch (vehicle-to-vehicle
• Cruise control ON indicator (grey): Indicates distance control mode) or push and hold it (conven-
that the ICC switch is on. tional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
• Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates
NSD1074 that the cruising speed is set. CAUTION
• Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control,
➀ <CANCEL> switch there is a malfunction in the Conventional make sure to turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off
(fixed speed) cruise control mode of the ICC when not using the cruise control system.
j
system.
j
➁ Speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch (where
fitted)

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the • Push, then quickly release the <RES+> switch. Action to take:
desired speed, push the <SET-> switch and release Each time you do this, the set speed will increase If the colour of the cruise indicator changes to yel-
it. (The colour of the cruise indicator changes to by about 1 km/h (1 MPH). low, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the e-
green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the POWER system off, restart the e-POWER system, re-
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your ve- following three methods: sume driving and then perform the setting again.
•
hicle will maintain the set speed.
•
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle at- If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on,
To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator tains the desired speed, push the <SET-> switch it may indicate that the system is malfunction-
pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle and release it. ing. Although the vehicle is still driveable under
•
will return to the previously set speed. normal conditions, have the vehicle checked by a
•
Push and hold the <SET-> switch. Release the
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed switch when the vehicle slows down to the de- NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
when going up or down steep hills. If this hap- sired speed. PROPILOT ASSIST SPEED LIMITER
•
pens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following
Push, then quickly release the <SET-> switch. (where fitted)
Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease
methods: The speed limiter allows you to set the desired ve-
by about 1 km/h (1 MPH).
• Push the <CANCEL> switch. The vehicle set To resume the preset speed after ICC cancel, push
hicle speed limit. While the speed limiter is activated,
you can perform normal braking and acceleration,
speed indicator and the cruise indicator will turn and release the <RES+> switch. The vehicle will re- but the vehicle will not exceed the set speed.
grey. sume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle
• Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle set speed indi- speed is over 30 km/h (20 MPH).
When the vehicle reaches the set speed limit or if
the set speed limit is lower than the actual vehicle
cator and the cruise indicator will turn grey.
System temporarily unavailable speed, the accelerator pedal will not work until the
• You can also Turn ProPILOT Assist off completely.
A chime sounds and the control is automatically vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit.
Turn the blue ProPILOT Assist switch off. Both
cancelled under the following conditions: When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
the cruise indicator and vehicle set speed indi-
cator will turn off. • When the parking brake is applied. speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
•
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the When ESP (including the traction control system) tion is not detected.
following three methods: operates.
•
When the speed limiter is on the cruise control sys-
• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle When a wheel slips. tem cannot be operated.
attains the desired speed, push and release the
<SET-> switch.
• When the ESP system is off.
When the system is not operating properly, the
• Push and hold the <RES+> switch. When the ve- chime sounds and the colour of the cruise indicator
hicle attains the desired speed, release the will change to yellow.
switch.

WARNING ProPILOT Assist Speed limiter
• The speed limiter will not automatically brake
operations
the vehicle to the set speed limit.
• Always observe posted speed limits. Do not
set the speed above them.
• Always confirm the setting status of the speed
limiter in the Vehicle Information Display.
• When the speed limiter is set, avoid hard ac-
celeration to reach the set limit to ensure that
NSD1101
the system can limit the speed of the vehicle
After setting speed
correctly.
• When additional floor mats are used, be sure
NAA2071
➃ Speed limiter symbol
that they are correctly secured and that they ➄ Set speed value
cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal. ➀ <CANCEL> switch
Turning the speed limiter on:
Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent A <RES+> (Resume) switch
j
proper operation of the speed limiter. The speed limiter can be switched on after the e-
j POWER system is started or when driving.
The speed limiter operation switches are located ➁ Speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch (where Push the speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch ➁.
on the steering wheel (right hand side). fitted) The speed limiter symbol ➃ and the set speed value
The speed limiter operating condition is shown on ➂ ProPILOT Assist switch. ➄ will illuminate in the Vehicle Information Display.
the top of Vehicle Information Display. For details,
NOTE
see “Vehicle information display” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section. Turning the Speed limiter system on will turn on
the Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) and Intelli-
gent Blind Spot Intervention systems at the same
time, providing those systems are enabled in the
[Driver Assistance] menu in the vehicle informa-
tion display. For additional information, see “Pro-
PILOT Assist Intelligent Lane Intervention system”
later in this section and “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
NSD1100 system/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention sys-
Before setting speed tem (where fitted)” earlier in this section.

Setting speed limit: Cancelling a speed limit: When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set
Push the <SET–> switch. To cancel a set speed limit, push the <CANCEL> speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time
The speed limit will be set at the current speed. switch. The speed limiter symbol ➃ and the set after the set speed is exceeded and driver interven-
speed value ➄ in the Vehicle Information Display tion is not detected.
When driving less than 30 km/h (20 MPH), the speed will turn grey. Turning the speed limiter off:
limiter will be set to the minimum possible set speed
of 30 km/h (20 MPH). It is also possible to override the speed limiter by The speed limiter system will be turned off when
fully depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the one of the following operations is performed:
When the speed limit is set, the speed limiter sym-
bol ➃ and the set speed value ➄ will turn green.
resistance point.
• Push the speed limiter main “ON/OFF” switch.
The speed limiter symbol ➃ and the set speed
Changing a speed limit: WARNING value ➄ in the Vehicle Information Display will
Use either of the following operations to change an • The vehicle may accelerate when the speed be turned off.
active speed limit: limiter cancels.
• Push the blue ProPILOT Assist “ON/OFF” switch.
• Push and release the <RES+> (Resume) switch • When additional floor mats are used, be sure The speed limiter information in the vehicle in-
or <SET–> switch. Each time you do this, the set that they are correctly secured and that they formation will be replaced with the ProPILOT As-
speed will increase or decrease by 1 km/h (1 MPH). cannot interfere with the accelerator pedal. sist display. For details see “ProPILOT Assist
• Push and hold the <RES+> (Resume) switch or Mats not adapted to the vehicle may prevent (where fitted)” earlier in this section
<SET–> switch. The set speed will increase or de-
crease to the next multiple of 5 km/h (5 MPH)
proper operation of the speed limiter.
• When the vehicle is stopped and the power
and then in steps of 5 km/h (5 MPH). Fully depress the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
Turning off the speed limiter will erase the set
The new set speed limit value ➄ will be displayed in sistance point. The speed limiter will be suspended
speed limit memory.
the Vehicle Information Display. to allow driving above the set speed. The set speed
value ➄ will flash and an audible warning will sound. Speed limiter malfunction:
When the actual vehicle speed exceeds the set The speed limiter will automatically resume when If the speed limiter malfunctions, the speed limiter
speed, an audible warning will be heard a short time the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit. symbol ➃ in the Vehicle Information Display will
Resuming a previous set speed: flash.
tion is not detected.
If a set speed limit has been cancelled, the set speed Turn the speed limiter off by pushing the speed lim-
will be stored in the speed limiter memory. iter main “ON/OFF” switch ➂ and have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
This speed limit can be reactivated by pressing the
<RES+> (Resume) switch j A.
If the current vehicle speed is higher than the previ-
ous set speed, the accelerator pedal will not work
and the set speed value ➄ will flash until the vehicle
speed drops below the set speed limit.

PROPILOT ASSIST LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM The LDW system is only a warning device to help
inform the driver of a potential unintended lane
departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent
loss of control. It is the driver’s responsibility to
stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the trav-
elling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all
times. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance
with these limitations could result in serious in-
jury or death.
NIC4018
The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is

driven at the following speeds and above, and only
when the lane markings are clearly visible on the
road:
• For Europe:
The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the
travelling lane using the camera unit ➀ located
above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver with a LDW indi-
cator on the Vehicle Information Display, steering
wheel vibration and a chime that the vehicle is be-
ginning to leave the driving lane.

ProPILOT Assist LDW system operation
The LDW system provides a lane departure warning
function when the vehicle is driven at the following
speeds and above, and only when the lane mark-
• For Europe:
will vibrate, a chime will sound (only when Steering
Assist is active) and the LDW indicator on the ve-
hicle information display will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle re-
turns inside of the lane markers.
WAF0411X
➀ LDW indicator (on the vehicle information

display)

NOTE
• If you turn the LDW system off using the [Set-
tings] menu, the system will remain turned off
the next time you start the e-POWER system.
WARNING
Lane Departure Warning system. Failure to oper-
ate the vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• The system will not operate at speeds below
approximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe)
or 70 km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe), or if
it cannot detect lane markers
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warning
chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.
• Do not use the LDW system under the follow-
ing conditions as it may not function properly:
– When driving on slippery roads, such as on
ice or snow.
WAF0412X
– When there is a lane closure due to road
repairs.
➀ Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) For details. see “Vehicle information display” in the – When driving in a makeshift or temporary
“2. Instruments and controls” section. lane.
1. Push the button until [Settings] ap- – When driving on roads where the lane
Turning the LDW system on or off:
pears in the vehicle information display and then width is too narrow.
To turn the LDW system on and off use the [Set- push the scroll dial. Use the scroll dial to select
tings] menu in the vehicle information display. [Driver Assistance]. Then push the scroll dial. – When driving without normal tyre condi-
tions (for example, tyre wear, low tyre pres-
2. Select [Lane] and push the scroll dial. sure, installation of spare tyre, tyre chains,
3. Select [Warning] and push the scroll dial. non-standard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with – When the headlights are not bright due to LDW malfunction
non-original brake parts or suspension dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad-
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel auto-
parts. justed properly.
matically and the [System Fault] message will ap-
– When you are towing a trailer or other ve- – When strong light enters the lane camera pear in the Vehicle Information Display. If the [Sys-
hicle. unit. (For example, the light directly shines tem Fault] message appears in the Vehicle Informa-
• The system may not function properly under on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-
set.)
tion Display pull off the road in a safe location, turn
off and restart the e-POWER system. If the [System
– When a sudden change in brightness oc- Fault] message continues to appear in the Vehicle
curs. (For example, when the vehicle enters Information Display, have the LDW system checked
lane markers; lane markers that are faded
or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.) by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
markers; non-standard lane markers; or Multi-sensing camera unit
lane markers covered with water, dirt, LDW temporary disabled status maintenance
snow, etc.
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high The lane camera unit ➀ for the LDW system is lo-
– On roads where discontinued lane mark- temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C cated above the interior rear view mirror. To main-
ers are still detectable. (104°F)) and then started, the LDW system may be tain the proper operation of the LDW system and
– On roads where there are sharp curves. deactivated automatically and the [Unavailable prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe
Camera Temperature High] message will appear in the following:
– On roads where there are sharply contrast-
ing objects, such as shadows, snow, water,
road repairs. (The LDW system could detect
The LDW system is not designed to warn under the
following conditions: • Do not attach a sticker (including transparent
these items as lane markers.) • When you operate the lane change signal and era unit.
– On roads where the travelling lane merges
or separates.
change travelling lanes in the direction of the
signal. (The LDW system will become operational • Do not place reflective materials, such as white
again approximately two seconds after the lane
– When the vehicle's travelling direction reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the
change signal is turned off.)
does not align with the lane marker. camera unit's detection capability.
– When travelling close to the vehicle in front
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less than ap-
proximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe) or 70
of you, which obstructs the lane camera camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or
km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe).
unit detection range. remove the screw located on the camera unit. If
– When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to
• When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to the the camera unit is damaged due to an accident,
windscreen in front of the lane camera unit. contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
unit. After the above conditions have finished and the
necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the
LDW system will resume.

PROPILOT ASSIST INTELLIGENT The ILI system will operate when the vehicle is driven
at the following speeds and above, and only when
LANE INTERVENTION SYSTEM
the lane markings are clearly visible on the road:
• For Europe:
The ILI system warns the driver when the vehicle
has left the centre of the travelling lane with a ILI
indicator on the Vehicle Information Display, a chime
(only when Steering Assist is active) and steering
NIC4018 wheel vibration. The system helps assist the driver
to avoid departing the lane and to return the ve-
hicle to the centre of the travelling lane by applying
WARNING the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for a short period of time).
proper use of the Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) The ILI system monitors the lane markers on the
system could result in serious injury or death. travelling lane using the camera unit ➀ located
• The ILI system will not steer the vehicle or pre- above the inside mirror
vent loss of control. It is the driver's responsi-
bility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve-
• The ILI system is primarily intended for use on
well-developed motorways or highways. It
may not detect the lane markers in certain
road, weather, or driving conditions.
The ILI system must be turned on with the ProPILOT

Assist switch every time the power switch is
switched ON.

ProPILOT Assist Intelligent Lane
Intervention System Operation
The Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) system oper-
ates at speeds above:
• For Europe:
will vibrate, a chime will sound (only when Steering
Assist is active) and the ILI indicator (yellow) on the
Vehicle Information Display will blink to alert the
driver. Then, the ILI system will automatically apply
the brakes for a short period of time to help assist
the driver to return the vehicle to the centre of the
travelling lane.
The ILI system turns on when the ProPILOT Assist or
Speed limiter (where fitted) switch on the steering
wheel is pushed when the ILI setting is enabled in
the [Driver Assistance] menu in the vehicle informa-
tion display. The ProPILOT Assist indicator illumi-
WAF0518X nates on the vehicle information display.
➀ ProPILOT Assist indicator

➁ ILI indicator (on the Vehicle Information
Display). Appears only when system activates
(blinks yellow).
➂ Vehicle Information Display
➃ ProPILOT Assist switch

ProPILOT Assist Intelligent Lane
Intervention Activation/Deactivation
The ILI system is activated when pushing the ProPI-
LOT Assist or the Speed Limiter (where fitted) switch
on the steering wheel when the ILI setting is en-
abled in the [Driver Assistance] menu in the vehicle
information display. To deactivate the ILI system,
push the same switch again or disable the ILI set-
ting in the [Driver Assistance] menu. The ILI system
will be automatically deactivated when the power
To enable or disable the ILI system:
2. Select [Lane] and push the scroll dial.
3. Select [Intervention] and push the scroll dial.
4. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the sys-
tem on or off.
NOTE
• Turning on ProPILOT Assist will turn on the ILI
system at the same time. If the ILI system is
WAF0519X
disabled in the [Settings] menu, the ILI will au-
tomatically be turned on when ProPILOT As-
➀ Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side) sist is active.
➁ Vehicle information display • When the ILI system is enabled in the [Set-
tings] menu, the ILI system can be turned on
➂ ProPILOT Assist switch
or off by pushing the speed limiter MAIN
switch (where fitted).
• When the engine is restarted, the system will
retain current settings in the vehicle informa-
tion display.

Limitations – When there is a lane closure due to road – When travelling close to the vehicle in front
repairs. of you, which obstructs the lane camera
WARNING – When driving in a makeshift or temporary unit detection range.
Listed below are the system limitations for the lane. – When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to
Intelligent Lane Intervention system. Failure to – When driving on roads where the lane the windscreen in front of the lane camera
operate the vehicle in accordance with these sys- width is too narrow. unit.
tem limitations could result in serious injury or – When the headlights are not bright due to
– When driving without normal tyre condi-
death. dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not ad-
tions (for example, tyre wear, low tyre pres-
• The ILI system may activate if you change sure, installation of spare tyre, tyre chains, justed properly.
lanes without first activating your turn signal non-standard wheels). – When strong light enters the lane camera
or, for example, if a construction zone directs unit. (For example, the light directly shines
– When the vehicle is equipped with
traffic to cross an existing lane marker. If this on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sun-
non-original brake parts or suspension
occurs you may need to apply corrective steer- set.)
parts.
ing to complete your lane change.
• Because the ILI may not activate under the
lane markers; lane markers that are faded curs. (For example, when the vehicle enters
road, weather and lane marker conditions de- or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
scribed in this section, it may not activate ev-
markers; non-standard lane markers; or – Excessive noise will interfere with the
ery time your vehicle begins to leave the trav-
lane markers covered with water, dirt, warning chime sound, and the chime may
elling lane and you will need to apply correc-
snow, etc. not be heard.
tive steering.
• When the ILI system is operating, avoid exces-
– On roads where discontinued lane mark-
ers are still detectable.
– When the
exceeded.
vehicle load capacity is
sive or sudden steering manoeuvres, other-
wise you could lose control of the vehicle. – On roads where there are sharp curves. – When towing a trailer or another vehicle.
• The ILI system will not operate if it cannot de- – On roads where there are sharply contrast-
tect lane markers, or at speeds below approxi- ing objects, such as shadows, snow, water, NOTE
mately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe) or 70 wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after
While the ILI system is operating, you may hear a
km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe). road repairs. (The ILI system could detect
sound of brake operation. This is normal and in-
• Do not use the ILI system under the following
these items as lane markers.)
dicates that the ILI system is operating properly.
conditions as it may not function properly: – On roads where the travelling lane merges
or separates.
– When the vehicle's travelling direction
– When driving on slippery roads, such as on
does not align with the lane marker.
ice or snow.

ILI temporarily unavailable Condition C: Multi-sensing camera unit
Condition A: If the following messages appear in the Vehicle In- maintenance
The warning and assist functions of the ILI system formation Display, a chime will sound and the ILI
are not designed to work under the following con- system will be turned off automatically.
ditions: • [Unavailable Slippery Road]:
• When you operate the lane change signal and When the ESP system (except Traction Control
change the travelling lanes in the direction of System (TCS) function) or ABS operates.
the signal. (The ILI system will be deactivated for
approximately 2 seconds after the lane change • [Currently not available]:
signal is turned off.) – When the ESP system is turned OFF.
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less than ap- When the above conditions no longer exist, turn on
proximately 60 km/h (37 MPH) (for Europe) or 70 the ILI system. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch
NIC4018
km/h (45 MPH) (except for Europe). again to turn the ILI system back on.
After the above conditions have finished and the Temporary disabled status at high temperature:
necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the The lane camera unit ➀ for the ILI system is located
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high above the interior rear view mirror. To maintain the
warning and assist functions will resume. temperature conditions (over approximately 40°C
proper operation of the ILI system and prevent a
Condition B: (104°F)) and then the ILI system is turned on, the ILI
system malfunction, be sure to observe the follow-
The assist function of the ILI system is not designed system may be deactivated automatically and the
ing:
following message will appear on the Vehicle Infor-
•
to work under the following conditions (warning is
still functional): mation Display: [Unavailable Camera Temperature Always keep the windscreen clean.
• When the brake pedal is depressed or the ve- High] and a chime will sound. • Do not attach a sticker (including transparent
hicle decelerates strongly. material) or install an accessory near the cam-
System malfunction
• When the steering wheel is turned as far as nec-
era unit.
•
When the ILI system malfunctions, it will cancel au-
essary for the vehicle to change lanes. Do not place reflective materials, such as white
tomatically. The ILI indicator (orange) will illuminate,
• When the vehicle is accelerated during the ILI a chime will sound and the [System Fault] message
system operation. will appear in the Vehicle Information Display. If the
•
camera unit's detection capability of detecting
When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) [System Fault] message appears in the Vehicle In-
lane markers.
formation Display pull off the road in a safe location,
•
approach warning occurs.
• When the hazard warning flashers are operated.
turn off and restart the e-POWER system. If the [Sys- Do not strike or damage the areas around the
•
tem Fault] message continues to appear in the Ve-
When driving on a curve at high speed. hicle Information Display, have the ILI system remove the screw located on the camera unit. If
After the above conditions have finished and the checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. the camera unit is damaged due to an accident,
necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the ILI contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
system application of the brakes will resume.

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW) SYSTEM
(where fitted)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for
proper use of the I-FCW system could result in se-
rious injury or death.
• The I-FCW system helps warn the driver be-
fore a collision but will not avoid a collision. It
is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when

there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle trav-
elling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
NIC4037 WAF0432X
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor j A located on ➀ Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the
the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to a vehicle information display)
second vehicle ahead in the same lane.
➁ Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) system
OFF warning light (on the meter panel)

JVS0294XZ
I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-FCW system operates at speeds above ap-
proximately 5 km/h (3 MPH).
If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the
I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the
vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an
audible alert.

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW sys-
tem on or off.
2. In the [Driver Assistance] menu, highlight the
[Emergency Brake] item and push the scroll dial.
This will turn the IEB system and I-FCW system
on or off, if Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) is NOT
fitted
3. (Only if Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) is fitted):
Select [Front] and us the scroll dial to turn the
system on or off.
When the I-FCW system is turned off, the IEB system
OFF warning light (orange) illuminates.
NOTE
• The I-FCW system will be automatically turned
on when the e-POWER system is restarted.
• The I-FCW system is integrated into the IEB
system. There is not a separate selection for
the I-FCW system. When the IEB system is
turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.
WAF0430X
➀ IEB system OFF warning light (on the meter

panel)

I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS • The radar sensor does not detect the follow-
ing objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the
roadway
– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles
• (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does not
function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow ve-
hicle, such as a motorcycle.
JVS0295XZ Illustration C
NSD1087
• (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is be-
ing towed.
Illustration A
• The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
ahead in the following conditions:
– Snow or heavy rain
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering
the radar sensor
– Interference by other radar sources
– Snow or road spray from travelling
vehicles.
NSD1088
– Driving in a tunnel
NSD1086 Illustration D – Towing a trailer

Illustration B
WARNING
• (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle
ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sen-
Listed below are the system limitations for the sor is obstructed.
I-FCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac-
cordance with these system limitations could re-
• (Illustration D) When driving on a steep down-
hill slope or roads with sharp curves.
• The I-FCW system cannot detect all vehicles
under all conditions.

• The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s functionality, within certain
limitations. The system may not detect some
forms of obstruction of the sensor area such
as ice, snow, stickers, for example. In these
cases, the system may not be able to warn the
driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean
and clear the sensor area regularly.
chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.
NSD679
When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under
UNAVAILABLE
construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles
in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a Condition A
vehicle travelling ahead. This may cause the I-FCW When the radar sensor picks up interference from
system to work inappropriately. another radar source, making it impossible to de-
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by tect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automati-
vehicle operation (steering manoeuvre or travelling cally turned off. The IEB system OFF warning light
position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this (orange) will flash.
occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the Action to take:
vehicle ahead detection indicator and sounding
the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manu- When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-
ally control the proper distance away from the ve- FCW system will resume automatically.
hicle travelling ahead. Condition B
Under the following conditions, making it impos-
sible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is
automatically turned off.

INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY
BRAKING (IEB) SYSTEM
(where fitted)
The IEB system OFF warning light (orange) will flash light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system
WARNING
and the [Temporarily Disabled Front Radar Blocked] checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN
warning message will appear in the vehicle infor- dealer or qualified workshop for this service. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for
mation display. proper use of the IEB system could result in seri-
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
•
•
When the sensor area of the front of the vehicle
is covered with dirt or is obstructed The IEB system is a supplemental aid to the
driver. It is not a replacement for the driver’s
Action to take: attention to traffic conditions or responsibil-
If the warning light (orange) flashes, stop the ve- ity to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents
hicle in a safe place, push the P position switch to due to carelessness or dangerous driving
engage the P (Park) position and turn the e-POWER techniques.
system off. Clean the radar cover on the front of the
vehicle with a soft cloth, and restart the e-POWER
• The IEB system does not function in all driv-
ing, traffic, weather and road conditions.
system. If the warning light continues to illuminate,
have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended
There are three types of IEB available, the type fitted
you visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for NIC4037
to your vehicle depends on the vehicle specifica-
this service.
tion:
• When driving on roads with limited road struc- The sensor j
A is located at the front of the vehicle.
• Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB).
deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls)
To keep the system operating properly, be sure to
observe the following:
• Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) with Pedes-
trian Detection.
Action to take:
• Always keep the sensor area clean.
• Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) with Pedes-
When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-
FCW system will resume automatically. • Do not strike or damage the areas around the trian and Cyclist Detection and Junction Sup-
sensor. port.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION • Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects Depending on the specification of the IEB system
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned near the sensor area. This could cause failure or fitted to your vehicle, IEB can assist the driver when
off automatically, a chime will sound, the IEB system malfunction. there is a risk of a forward collision with:
OFF warning light (orange) will illuminate and the • Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor • A vehicle ahead in the travelling lane.
[System Fault] warning message will appear in the
area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause failure
or malfunction.
• A pedestrian ahead in the travelling lane (where
Pedestrian Detection is fitted).
Action to take: • Do not alter, remove or paint the front of the
• A cyclist ahead in the travelling lane (where Cy-
If the warning light (orange) illuminates, stop the vehicle near the sensor area. Before customis-
clist Detection is fitted).
vehicle in a safe location. Turn the e-POWER system ing or restoring the sensor area, it is recom-
off and restart the e-POWER system. If the warning mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.

Junction assist (where fitted) can assist the driver
when there is a risk of a forward collision
• When you turn right or left and cross the path of
an oncoming vehicle.
• When you turn right or left, a pedestrian is de-
tected in the forward direction and is expected
to enter your vehicle's path.
NIC4036
The IEB system uses a radar sensor j A located on

the front of the vehicle and camera j
B installed be-
hind the windscreen in to measure the distance to
the vehicle, pedestrians and cyclists ahead in the
same lane (where pedestrian or pedestrian and cy- WAF0429X
clist detection is fitted).

➀ IEB emergency warning indicator
➁ Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the
vehicle information display)
➂ IEB system OFF warning light (on the meter
panel)
➃ Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

tion (where fitted), the IEB system operates at NOTE
Warning Visual Audible
speeds between 10 and 80 km/h (6 and 50 MPH).
• The vehicle’s brake lights come on when brak-
Junction assist (where fitted) operates at your ve- ing is performed by the IEB system.
•
m
First Chime hicle speeds between 10 - 25 km/h (6 - 16 MPH). When the IEB system detects an obstacle in
When turning left or right, the turn signal must be the path of the vehicle and displays the IEB
activated to ensure that oncoming vehicles can be warning, a noise may be heard from the en-
detected by Junction assist. gine bay as the vehicle primes the brakes to
High pitched
m improve response time.

Second
chime
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the ve-
hicle or pedestrian or cyclist ahead, as well as driv-
Overview of warnings ing and roadway conditions, the system may help
the driver avoid a forward collision or may help miti-
IEB SYSTEM OPERATION gate the consequences of a collision, should one be
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the IEB unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering
system will first provide a warning to the driver by wheel, accelerating or braking, the IEB system will
flashing the warning (yellow) in the vehicle informa- function later or will not function.
tion display and providing an audible alert, and If the IEB system has stopped the vehicle, the ve-
causing the brake system to pulse (quickly partially NSD1024
hicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2
apply). In addition, the IEB system applies partial Junction assist (where fitted) for oncoming vehicle
seconds before the brakes are released.
braking. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and
forcefully, but the IEB system detects that there is If the brake pedal is depressed while the brakes are
still the possibility of a forward collision, the system being applied by the system, you may feel the pedal
will automatically increase the braking force. effort has changed and may hear a sound and feel
vibration. This is normal and does not indicate a
If the driver does not take action, the IEB system malfunction. In addition, the braking force can be
issues the second visual warning (flashing red and increased by increasing the pedal effort.
white) and audible warning, then the system ap-
plies partial braking when the condition to do so is The automatic braking will cease under the follow-
satisfied. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, ing conditions:
the IEB system applies harder braking automati- • When the steering wheel is turned as far as nec-
cally. NSD1037
essary to avoid a collision.
The IEB system will function when your vehicle is Junction assist (where fitted) for pedestrian • When there is no longer a vehicle or pedestrian
driven at speeds above approximately 5 km/h (3 or cyclist detected ahead.
MPH). For the pedestrian and cyclist detection func-
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Turning the Intelligent Emergency
Braking (IEB) system ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the IEB system
ON or OFF.
1. Push the button on the left side of the
steering wheel until the [Settings] menu appears
in the Vehicle Information Display, then push the
scroll dial.
For details, see “Vehicle information display” in the
2. Use scroll dial to select the [Driver Assistance]
menu then push the scroll dial.
3. In the [Driver Assistance] menu, highlight the
[Emergency Brake] item and push the scroll dial.
This will turn the IEB system on or off, if Rear Au-
tomatic Braking (RAB) is NOT fitted
4. (Only if Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) is fitted):
Select [Front] and us the scroll dial to turn the
system on or off.
When the IEB system is turned off, the IEB system
OFF warning light will illuminate.
WAF0430X
NOTE
• Disabling the ESP system causes the Intelli-
gent Emergency Braking system to become
➀ IEB system OFF warning light (on the meter
unavailable regardless of settings selected in
panel)
• The IEB system will be automatically turned
➂ Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) ON when the e-POWER system is restarted.

• The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I- • Junction Assist (where fitted) does not detect • For pedestrians, the IEB with pedestrian de-
FCW) system is integrated into the IEB system. the following: tection system (where fitted) will not issue the
There is not a separate selection for the I-FCW – Oncoming vehicle in front of your vehicle. first warning.
system. When the IEB system is disabled, the
I-FCW system is also turned off.
• The IEB system may not function properly or
detect a vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist ahead in
– In dark or dimly lit conditions, such as at
IEB system limitations night or in tunnels, including cases where
your vehicle’s headlights are off or dim, or
WARNING the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are off.
Listed below are the system limitations for the – When the direction of the camera is mis-
IEB system. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac- aligned.
cordance with these system limitations could re-
NSD1038 – Poor visibility (conditions such as rain,
snow, fog, dust storms, sand storms, and
• The IEB system cannot detect all vehicles, pe-
• The IEB system has some performance limita- road spray from other vehicles).
destrians or cyclists under all conditions.
tions. – Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads
• The IEB system does not detect the following
– If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's with sharp curves.
objects:
path, the IEB system will not function when – Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as
– Small pedestrians (including small chil- the vehicle is driven at speeds over an uneven dirt road.
dren) and animals. approximately 100 km/h (62 MPH). – If dirt, ice, snow or other material is cover-
– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile
transport such as scooters, child-operated
• The IEB system with pedestrian and cyclist de- ing the radar sensor area.
tection (where fitted) may not function for pe- – Interference by other radar sources.
toys, or skateboards. destrians and cyclists in darkness or in tun-
nels, even if there is street lighting in the area. – The camera area of the windscreen is
– Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise
•
fogged up, covered with dirt, water drops,
not in a full upright standing or walking po- The IEB system may not function if the vehicle ice, snow, etc.
sition. ahead is narrow (e.g. a motorcycle).
•
– Strong light (e.g. sunlight or high beams
– Crossing vehicles. The IEB system may not function if the speed from oncoming vehicles) enters the front
– Obstacles on the roadside. difference between the two vehicles is too camera. Strong light causes the area
small. around the pedestrian or cyclist to be cast
– Parked vehicles
• The IEB system may not apply braking when in shadow, making it difficult to see.
the vehicle speed is high in the operation
range.

– A sudden change in brightness occurs. For low or high clearance heights, or unusual
example, when the vehicle enters or exits a cargo loading or is narrow (for example, a
tunnel or a shaded area or lightning motorcycle).
flashes. – When the vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist is
– The poor contrast of a person to the back- located near a traffic sign, a reflective area
ground, such as having clothing coloured (for example, water on road), or is in a
or patterned similar to the background. shadow.
– The pedestrian's profile is partially ob- – When multiple pedestrians or cyclists are
scured or unidentifiable due to the pedes- grouped together.
trian transporting luggage, wearing bulky – When the view of the pedestrian or cyclist NSD1028
or very loose-fitting clothing or accesso- is obscured by a vehicle or other object.
ries.
– While towing a trailer or other vehicle.
– When turning sharply or on a very wide
•
– When your vehicle’s position or movement
is changed quickly or significantly (for ex- Junction Assist (where fitted) may not operate curve.
ample, lane change, turning vehicle, abrupt properly or detect a oncoming vehicle or pe-
– When the centre line is not recognised by
steering, sudden acceleration or decelera- destrian in the following conditions:
the system.
tion). – When driving in a traffic lane separated by
– When there are a number of oncoming ve-
– When your vehicle or the vehicle, pedes- more than 2 lanes from oncoming vehicles
hicles following each other in a row.
trian or cyclist ahead moves quickly or sig- while making a right/left turn
nificantly such that the system cannot de- – When not heading directly towards an on-
tect and react in time (for example, pedes- coming vehicle during a right/left turn.
trian moving quickly toward the vehicle at – When crossing an oncoming vehicle lane
close range, vehicle cutting in, changing and an oncoming vehicle approaches.
lanes, making a turn, steering abruptly,
sudden acceleration or deceleration).
– When the vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist is
offset from the vehicle’s forward path.
– If the speed difference between the two ve-
NSD1029
hicles is small.
– For approximately 15 seconds after start-
ing the e-POWER system. – When the lane is wider or narrower than
normal.
– If the vehicle ahead or oncoming vehicle
has a unique or unusual shape, extremely

– When the centre line is located close to a • The Intelligent Emergency Braking system • The Intelligent Emergency Braking with pe-
road marker. may operate when the following are similar to destrian detection system (where fitted) may
• The system performance may degrade in the the outlines of pedestrians or cyclists, or if
they are the same size and position as a vehi-
react to:
cle's and motorcycle's tail lights.
– The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
– Paint, a shadow or a pattern on the road,
– The vehicle is driven on a slope.
roadside or wall (including faded and un-
– Excessively heavy luggage is loaded in the usual road markings).
rear seat or the luggage area of your ve-
– A shape formed by road structures ahead
hicle.
(such as tunnels, viaducts, traffic sign, re-
– When the coast stop system is active. flectors installed on the side of vehicles, re-
• The system is designed to automatically flection sheets, and guardrails), road side
objects (trees, buildings) and light sources.
check the sensor (radar and camera) function- NSD1030
ality, within certain limitations. The system – A shape formed by road side objects, such
may not detect some forms of obstruction of as trees, lighting, shadows, or buildings. – Objects on the roadside (traffic sign, guard
the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc.
In these cases, the system may not be able to
• The IEB system may keep operating when the rail, pedestrian, cyclist, motorcycle, vehicle,
vehicle ahead is turning right or left. etc.).
warn the driver properly. Be sure that you
check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly. • The IEB system may operate when your ve- – Objects above the road (low bridge, traffic
• In some road or traffic conditions, the IEB sys-

hicle is approaching and passing a vehicle
ahead. –
sign, etc.).
Objects on the road surface (railroad track,
tem may unexpectedly apply partial braking.
When acceleration is necessary, continue to • Depending on the road shape (curved road, grate, steel plate, etc.).
depress the accelerator pedal to override the entrance and exit of the curve, winding road, – Objects in a parking garage (beam, pillar,
system. lane regulation, under construction, etc.), the etc.).
function may operate temporarily for the on-
coming vehicle in front of your vehicle. – Pedestrians or cyclists or motorcycles ap-
chime sound, and the chime may not be heard. proaching the travelling lane.
• Braking distances increase on slippery – Pedestrians and cyclists when driving
surfaces. down narrow alleys, for example.
– Pedestrians and cyclists who temporarily
move into or approach the driving lane to
avoid obstacles at the side of the road.
– Objects on the road such as trees.

– Vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists, motorcycles
or objects in adjacent lane or close to the
vehicle.
– Oncoming pedestrians, cyclists.
• Junction Assist (where fitted) may react to the
following while making a right/left turn:
– When an oncoming vehicle or a crossing
pedestrian has already exited the path of
your vehicle.
– If you are closely in front of an oncoming NSD679
vehicle or a crossing pedestrian.
When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, Action to take:
– When an oncoming vehicle or a crossing
curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under Check that the windscreen is clean and free from
pedestrian stops before entering the path
construction or on a slope, the sensor may detect ice/mist in front of the camera. If necessary, operate
of your vehicle.
vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not the Max Demist function or heated front screen to
– When an oncoming vehicle turns right or detect a vehicle travelling ahead. This may cause clear. This may take several minutes.
left in front of your vehicle. the system to work inappropriately.
•
When the above condition no longer exists, the IEB
Junction Assist (where fitted) may also react The detection of vehicles may also be affected by system will resume automatically.
to the following: vehicle operation (steering manoeuvre or travelling
Condition B:
– When oncoming vehicle movement cannot position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this
occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the In the following conditions, the Intelligent
be predicted due to sudden left/right turns
system indicator and sounding the chime unex- Emergency Braking warning light will blink, with no
or deceleration of the oncoming vehicles.
accompanying message in the vehicle information
• Braking distances increase on slippery
pectedly. You will have to manually control the
proper distance to the vehicle travelling ahead. display.
surfaces.
• Strong light is shining onto the front of the ve-
• Excessive noise will interfere with the warning System temporarily unavailable hicle.
chime and the chime may not be heard. Condition A:
• The cabin temperature is over approximately
In the following conditions, the IEB system warning 40 °C (104 °F) in direct sunlight.
light blinks and the system will be turned off auto-
matically.
• The radar sensor can receive interference from
other radar sources, and excessive reflection
• The camera area of the windscreen is misted or from other vehicles (for example, when travel-
frozen. ling past vehicles in a traffic jam).
• The camera area of the windscreen is continu- • The camera unit detects that it is not correctly
ously covered with dirt, etc. aligned.

Action to take: [Temporarily Disabled Front Radar Blocked] warn- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
None. When the above condition no longer exists, ing message will appear in the Vehicle Information
the IEB system will resume automatically. Display.
NOTE
• When driving on roads with limited road struc-
If the inside of the windscreen in front of the cam- deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls).
era is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time Action to take:
to for it to clear after the air conditioner turns on.
If dirt appears in this area, it is recommended you When the above conditions no longer exist, the In-
visit a NISSAN dealer. telligent Emergency Braking system will resume au-
tomatically.
Condition C:
Condition E: NIC4036
In the following condition, the Intelligent Emergency
Braking warning light (yellow) will blink and the When the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system
[Temporarily Disabled Front Radar Blocked] warn- is turned OFF, the IEB system braking will not oper- The sensor j
ing message will appear in the Vehicle Information ate. In this case only the visible and audible warning
operates. The IEB system warning light (yellow) will The camera jB is located on the upper side of the
Display.
windscreen.
•
illuminate.
The sensor area on the front of the vehicle is
Action to take: The sensor for the Intelligent Emergency Braking
covered with dirt or is obstructed.
system j
Action to take: When the ESP system is ON, the Intelligent Emer-
gency Braking system will resume automatically. To keep the Intelligent Emergency Braking system
If the warning light (yellow) blinks, stop the vehicle operating properly, be sure to observe the follow-
in a safe place and turn the e-POWER system off. System malfunction ing:
Check if the sensor area around the NISSAN em-
blem at the centre of the front grille is clean, and if
If the IEB system malfunctions, it will be turned off • Always keep the sensor area clean.
necessary, clean this area on the front of the vehicle
automatically, a chime will sound, the IEB system
warning light (yellow) will illuminate and the warn- • Do not strike or damage the areas around the
with a soft cloth. Restart the e-POWER system. If the sensor.
ing message [System Fault] will appear in the Ve-
warning light continues to blink after driving for a
few minutes, have the Intelligent Emergency Brak-
hicle Information Display. • Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects
near the sensor area. This could cause failure or
ing system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified Action to take:
malfunction.
workshop.
Condition D:
If the warning light (yellow) comes on, park the ve-
hicle in a safe location, turn the e-POWER system off • Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor
area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause failure
and restart the e-POWER system. If the warning light
In the following condition, the Intelligent Emergency or malfunction.
continues to illuminate, have the IEB system
Braking warning light (yellow) will blink and the checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER
ALERTNESS (where fitted)

WARNING SYSTEM OPERATION
reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for
camera unit’s detection capability. proper use of the Intelligent Driver Alertness sys-
•
tem could result in serious injury or death.
•
Do not alter, remove or paint the front of the
vehicle near the sensor area. Before customis- The Intelligent Driver Alertness system is only
ing or restoring the sensor area, it is recom- a warning to inform the driver of a potential
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali- lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will
fied workshop. not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.
For the radio approval numbers and information, • The Intelligent Driver Alertness system does
see “Radio frequency approval” in the “9. Technical not detect and provide an alert of the driver's
information” section. lack of attention or fatigue in every situation. WAF0641XZ
• It is the driver's responsibility to:

– stay alert, If the system detects that driver fatigue increases
– drive safely, or that driver attention is decreasing, the message
[Take a break?] appears in the Vehicle Information
– keep the vehicle in the travelling lane, Display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is
– be in control of the vehicle at all times, driven at speeds above 60 km/h (37 MPH).
– avoid driving when tired, The system continuously monitors driver attention
– avoid distractions (texting, etc.). and can provide multiple warnings per trip.
The Intelligent Driver Alertness system helps alert The system resets and starts reassessing driving
the driver if the system detects a lack of attention style and steering behaviour when the power
or driving fatigue. switch is cycled from the ON to OFF and back to ON.
The system will not operate when Steering Assist
The system monitors driving style and steering be- system is activated.
haviour over a period of time, and it detects changes
from the normal pattern. If the system detects that
driver attention is decreasing over a period of time,
the system uses an audible and visual warning to
suggest that the driver take a break.

will be deactivated. Turning off Steering Assist
reactivates the Intelligent Driver Alertness
system.
Intelligent Driver Alertness Limitations
WARNING
Intelligent Driver Alertness system. Failure to op-
erate the vehicle in accordance with these sys-
tem limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
• The Intelligent Driver Alertness system may
not operate properly and may not provide an
alert in the following conditions:
– Poor road conditions such as an uneven
road surface or pot holes.
– Strong side wind.
– If you have adopted a sporty driving style
with higher cornering speeds or higher
rates of acceleration.
– Frequent lane changes or changes to ve-
hicle speed.
WAF0412X
• The Intelligent Driver Alertness system may
not provide an alert in the following condi-
System Activation/Deactivation 3. Use the scroll dial to select [Driver Attention tions:
Alert]. Then push the scroll dial. – Vehicle speeds lower than 60 km/h (37
Intelligent Driver Alertness system. NOTE MPH).
1. Use the or button on the steering
wheel until [Settings] is shown on the Vehicle In-
• The Intelligent Driver Alertness system will au- – Short lapses of attention.
tomatically be turned on when the e-POWER – Instantaneous distractions such as drop-
formation Display and push the scroll dial. system is restarted. ping an object.
• As long as Steering Assist (where fitted) is ac- – Instantaneous distractions such as drop-
tivated the Intelligent Driver Alertness system ping an object.

PARKING
– While Steering Assist is activated.

WARNING
System Malfunction
• Do not park the vehicle over flammable mate-
rials, such as dry grass, waste paper, or rags.
If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunc- They may ignite and cause a fire.
tions, the [Driver Attention Alert] [System Fault]
warning message will appear in the Vehicle Infor-
• Safe parking procedures require that:
– The parking brake is applied.
mation Display and the function will be stopped au-
tomatically. – The shift control system is placed in the P
(Park) position.
Action to take:
Failure to follow the above recommendations
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, and then turn off
could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
and restart the e-POWER system. If the warning
or roll away and result in an accident.
message continues to appear, have the Intelligent
Driver Alertness system checked by a NISSAN dealer • Never leave the e-POWER system running
or qualified workshop. while the vehicle is unattended.
• Do not leave children unattended inside the
vehicle. They could unknowingly activate
switches or controls, or move the vehicle. Un-
attended children could become involved in
serious accidents.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through
quire the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-
perature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day
pets.
Fully depress the brake pedal and press the P posi-

tion switch to shift to the P (Park) position.
NSD338
LHD models

INTELLIGENT PARKING ASSIST
(IPA) (where fitted)
When parked on a sloping driveway, turn the wheels

WARNING
•
so the vehicle will not roll into the street in case it
moves. The Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) system is a
guidance system to support the driver when
FACING DOWNHILL: ➀ parking the vehicle. However, it does not auto-
Turn the wheels into the kerb, allow the vehicle to matically adjust speed or avoid obstacles. Just
move forward until the kerb side wheel gently as for normal parking, always check the sur-
touches the kerb. Then set the parking brake. roundings of the vehicle and the condition of
FACING UPHILL: ➁ the road surface in the mirror or directly. Move
the vehicle slowly while the system is operat-
Turn the wheels away from the kerb and allow the ing and brake if necessary (for example, when
vehicle to move back until the kerb side wheel gen- the vehicle is likely to come in contact with
tly touches the kerb. Then set the parking brake. other vehicles, obstacles, people, etc.).
NO KERB — FACING DOWNHILL OR UPHILL: ➂
• During IPA system operation, do not touch the
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the spoke part of the steering wheel. Your hands
vehicle will move away from the centre of the road and fingers might get injured. In addition, be
if it moves. Then set the parking brake. careful with ties, scarves, etc. that can also get
caught, which may lead to injuries.
Switch the power switch OFF.
• Never look only at the screen while driving. The
vehicle may come into contact with obstacles
or cause unexpected accidents.
• When the guidance of the IPA system is no
longer required, select [Cancel] on the screen
to end the function. If the IPA system remains
in operation, the steering wheel might oper-
ate automatically, which could lead to unex-
pected accidents.
• Before using the IPA system, make sure that
there is enough space around the vehicle to
manoeuvre.
NSD339
RHD models

The IPA system controls steering, guiding the ve- • Dirt on the vehicle. DEACTIVATION OF THE IPA SYSTEM
hicle when parking: Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma- The IPA will deactivate under the following condi-
– In a bay terial), install accessories or apply additional tions:
– Parallel to the road paint near the sonar sensors. These conditions
may reduce the ability of the system to detect • When the steering wheel is operated manually.
NOTE other vehicles. • When 5 seconds have passed since the shift con-
trol system was placed and kept in the N (Neu-
The IPA system instructs you to stop, drive for- The sonar sensors detect stationary objects be-
tral) position.
wards or drive backwards. Follow the instructions hind the vehicle. The sonar sensors may not de-
given by the system. tect: • When reversing operations are conducted more
The IPA system is not able to support parking when • Small or moving objects.
than 15 times for steering corrections.
the vehicle speed during the parking manoeuvre is
• Wedge-shaped objects. • When the system judges that conditions (such
more than 7 km/h (4 MPH). as worn out or low pressure tyres, road condi-
• Objects close to the bumper. tions for example) are not suitable for correct
CAUTION • Thin objects such as rope, wire, or chain. course predictions.
Do not use the IPA system under the following • When the vehicle reverses to a position behind
conditions: NOTE the position where the IPA operation started.
• On unpaved roads. Under the following conditions, the IPA may not • When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately
• On snow-covered or frozen roads. be able to predict precise courses and function 7 km/h (4 MPH).
• On uneven roads with slants, bumps,

properly. There may be instances where • When the driver does not follow the IPA guid-
surrounding objects and vehicles are displayed ance.
kerbstones, wheel tracks, etc.
inside the clearance guidelines (red), or where the
• At mechanical parking facilities. vehicle cannot be parked in the correct spot fol-
• When tyre chains or a spare tyre are installed. lowing the IPA operation.
• When the vehicle is being towed. • When the shift lever is operated while driving.
• When the doors (including the tailgate) are not • When sudden start, sudden stop or sudden
closed. operation of the shift lever occurs.
The following conditions may reduce the ability • When tyre pressure is too low or a tyre is worn
of the system to detect other vehicles: out.
• Severe weather. • When tyres are installed that are of a different
• Road spray.
size from the tyres that were equipped at the
time of factory shipment. Camera interruption screen
NSD1112
• Ice build up on the vehicle.

• When the vehicle is heavily laden.
• Frost on the vehicle.

Automatic cancellation PARKING PROCEDURE USING THE Parallel parking
When the shift control system is not in the R (Re- IPA SYSTEM The system detects parking slots and shows the
verse) position and the vehicle speed increases status by displayed text messages.
above approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH), the camera
view from the Intelligent Parking Assist system will
be suspended to prohibit the display of video im-
ages to the driver during driving. This is not a mal-
function.
When the vehicle speed increases above approxi-
mately 30 km/h (18 MPH), the camera view from the
Intelligent Parking Assist system will be cancelled
and the system returns to the previously selected
source. NSD1111
IPA switch (where fitted) NAA1482
NOTE Parallel parking procedure
When the wipers are operating or when water or
1. Press the <CAMERA> button to display the Intel-
other substances on the camera lens is detected,
ligent Around View Monitor (IAVM) on the centre
the sign is displayed. When the sign is
display.
displayed, the detectable parking positions are
restricted. Press the IPA button on the screen or the
IPA switch (where fitted) on the lower instrument
panel.
NSD1113
Using text guidance, the system provides step-by-

step instructions for parking.
The IPA buttons are located in the lower centre of
the screen.

WARNING
If there is any doubt that the surroundings in
the path of the parking area and/or the park-
ing area itself are not free from obstacles im-
mediately stop the vehicle and check.
NOTE
Make sure the vehicle is stopped completely
before shifting to the R (Reverse) position.
NSD1113 NSD1115
2. Press Parking Mode button , and check the NOTE

parallel parking mode is displayed. Use the turn signal switch to select the side of
the vehicle the IPA system should use to find a
parking space. The scanning area will change
sides, depending upon the position of the turn
signal switch.
Drive the vehicle forward at a steady pace along
side the row of parked vehicles. The system will NSD1116
search for a parking space. The IPA system will
inform you when it finds a suitable parking
4. Follow the instructions given by the system. Shift
space. When parking slots cannot be detected, a
to the R (Reverse) position.
target parking rectangle is displayed at a default
NSD1114
position by pressing the button. Then you Gently place your hands on the steering wheel
can press [Start]. and slowly reverse towards the parking space.
3. Slowly move the vehicle forward to the correct The steering will be operated automatically.
position until the IPA system instructs you to stop Carefully and slowly accelerate while checking
and select reverse gear. the surroundings.
Do not turn the steering wheel.
The system indicates when the parking proce-
dure has ended.
NOTE
• Only the steering operates automatically.

• Follow the instructions given by the sys- Parking in a bay
tem.
The system detects lines on the ground for parking
• Carefully and slowly accelerate while slots by processing images from the camera, and
checking the surroundings. displays a rectangle in the centre of the parking lines
• Use of the steering wheel will cancel the to set a target for parking.
IPA operation. When there are no parking lines for parking spots
5. When the vehicle is in the target parking position, and parking slots cannot be detected, a target park-
check, then depress the brake pedal to stop the ing rectangle is displayed at a default position by
vehicle. pressing the button.
When the vehicle reaches the approximate area NSD1117

of the target parking space, a chime will sound,
[Park assist finished] will appear on the centre
NOTE
display and the IPA operation will automatically
terminate. If the bird's-eye view is not displayed on the
front passenger side of the screen, press the
Make any final adjustments that may be neces-
<CAMERA> button until the bird's-eye view is
sary manually, after confirming the vehicle's sur-
displayed.
roundings.
NOTE
NOTE
NAA1481 Use the turn signal switch to select the side of
The system can be cancelled at any time: the vehicle where the parking bay is situated.
Bay parking procedure
• By engaging the P (Park) position.
1. Stop the vehicle near to the space where you wish
3. The bay parking mode is displayed. Use the turn
• By shifting to the N (Neutral) position. to park.
signal switch to select the side of the vehicle
• By overriding the steering manoeuvre. 2. Press the <CAMERA> button, followed by the IPA
where the parking bay is situated.
• By pressing the [Cancel] button on the centre button on the screen or the IPA switch
Stop vehicle alongside, and approximately 1 m (3
ft) from the parking place. The system will search
display. (where fitted) on the lower instrument panel.
for a parking space. The IPA system will inform
Press Parking Mode button , and check the you when it finds a suitable parking space. When
bay parking mode is displayed. there are no parking lines for parking spots and
parking slots cannot be detected, a target park-
ing rectangle is displayed at a default position by
pressing the button. Then you can press
[Start].

NOTE 6. Shift to the R (Reverse) position.
If the vehicle deviates from the parking rect- Gently place hands on the steering wheel and
angle while following the parking procedure, slowly reverse to the parking space.
stop and adjust the position. Steering will be operated automatically.
NOTE
WARNING
If there is any doubt that the surroundings in the • Only the steering operates automatically.
path of the parking area and/or the parking area • Follow the instructions given by the sys-
itself are not free from obstacles immediately tem.
NSD1118
stop the vehicle and check.
• Carefully and slowly accelerate while
checking the surroundings.
Adjust the target parking rectangle using the ar-

5. Gently place hands on the steering wheel and
slowly move the vehicle forward to the correct
• Use of the steering wheel will cancel the
IPA operation.
row keys on the screen so that the clearance position indicated in green in preparation for re-
guidelines do not overlap any obstacles around versing. 7. When the vehicle is in the target parking position,
the vehicle. check, then depress the brake pedal to stop the
Bring the vehicle to a standstill.
vehicle.
CAUTION The steering wheel will turn itself towards the
When the vehicle reaches the approximate area
reverse starting position rectangle (green).
After pressing [Start] the vehicle will park within of the target parking space, a chime will sound,
the blue area. Make sure this area is free of Depress the brake and stop the vehicle when it [Park assist finished] will appear on the centre dis-
obstacles. approaches another vehicle or object, or when play and the IPA operation will automatically ter-
the vehicle reaches the reverse starting position. minate.
4. Press [Start]. Make any final adjustments that may be neces-
The vehicle starts the parking procedure. The IPA sary manually, after confirming the vehicle's sur-
operation can be started when the following roundings.
conditions are met: NOTE
• The vehicle is completely stopped by The system can be cancelled at any time:
•
depressing the brake pedal.
•
By engaging the P (Park) position.
•
The steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position. By shifting to the N (Neutral) position.
• The shift control system is in the D (Drive) po- • By overriding the steering manoeuvre.
sition. NSD1132
• By pressing the [Cancel] button on the
centre display.

PROPILOT PARK (where fitted)
OPERATING TIPS • Do not damage the camera because the moni- ProPILOT Park is a function that supports parallel
• The screen displayed on the IAVM will automati-

tor screen may be adversely affected. parking, reverse bay parking, and forward bay park-
cally return to the previous screen three min- • Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any ing.
utes after the <CAMERA> button has been wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened It uses the camera system and parking sensor (so-
pressed while the shift control system is in a po- with a mild detergent diluted with water. nar) to detect the parking position, and controls the
sition other than the R (Reverse) position. • A click sound is made when the vehicle comes accelerator, brake, steering wheel, and shifting op-
• When the view is switched, the display of images to the target position in each step. Stop the ve-
hicle when the click sounds and follow the next
erations in order to support the series of parking
operations.
on the screen may be displayed with some de-
lay. guidance.
WARNING
• When the temperature is extremely high or low, • Depending on the situation, multiple parking
• There is a limit to ProPILOT Park performance.
the screen may not display objects clearly. This manoeuvres may be required.
is not a malfunction. The responsibility for safe driving is borne by
IPA malfunction
• When strong light directly shines on the camera, A warning message will be displayed and the sys-
the driver. Therefore, in the same way as with
ordinary driving, check the surrounding con-
objects may not be displayed clearly. This is not tem will terminate operation if a malfunction is de- ditions directly by visual confirmation or us-
a malfunction. tected in the IPA. ing the mirrors. Apply the brakes to stop the
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. If the warning message is displayed during the IPA vehicle if it appears that the vehicle will hit a
This is not a malfunction. operation, park the vehicle in a safe place and re- surrounding vehicle, person, or object.
• The colour of objects on the IAVM may differ start the e-POWER system. • There are limitations to the parking sensor
somewhat from the actual colour of objects. This If the warning message is shown on the display re- (sonar) and cameras. The parking positions or
is not a malfunction. peatedly or if the IPA cannot be operated after re- steering cut backs may not be adjusted cor-
• Objects on the monitor may not be clear and starting the e-POWER system, this may indicate a rectly because the system cannot detect the
obstacles.
the colour of the object may differ in a dark envi- system malfunction. It should not hinder normal
ronment. This is not a malfunction. driving, but the vehicle should be inspected by a • Do not touch the spokes of the steering wheel
• There may be differences in sharpness between NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. during steering control.
each camera view of the bird's-eye view. There is the possibility that hands or fingers
• If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, may become caught, causing injury. Also, ex-
ercise sufficient caution so that neckties,
the IAVM may not display objects clearly. Clean
the camera. scarves, and other item do not become
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean

caught. There is the possibility of an
unexpected accident.
the camera. This will cause discoloration. To
clean the camera, wipe with a cloth that has
been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.

PROPILOT PARK SWITCH
NSD1154
Push this switch to activate ProPILOT Park.

ProPILOT Park is displayed on the navigation sys-
tem screen.
NSD1155
PROPILOT PARK SCREEN 3. [Finish]/[Cancel]:
1. Parking method selection icon: Touch this key to deactivate ProPILOT Park.
Indicates the parking method that is currently se- 4. Parking space detection icon:
lected. Touch to change the parking method. Indicates which side of parking space is detected
2. [Start]/[Resume]: during parking space search.
Touch this key to start the ProPILOT Park control. : A parking space is detected on the right
side.

: A parking space is detected on the left 12. Parking space search area guidelines (Light speed drops to approximately 10 km/h or less, the
side. green): screen returns to the regular ProPILOT Park screen.
5. Clearance Guidelines (Red): Indicates that the system is currently searching SELECTING THE PARKING METHOD
Indicates the approximate area that the vehicle for a parking space. Lines are also used as a
guide for vehicle positioning during space The parking method can be changed by touching
will pass through when parking control is active. the parking method selection icon before touching
searching.
6. Parking guide box adjustment icon ( ): [Start].
13. Direction change position rectangle (Green):
Touch this key to adjust the location of the park- The parking method changes each time the park-
ing guide box. Indicates the position at which to make the next ing method selection icon is touched. The vehicle
shift change. will only scan for the type of parking method that
7. Parking guide box (Green):
NOTE has been selected
This indicates the approximate position where
the vehicle will be parked. The box turns light blue When the wipers are operating or when water or Available methods
when parking control is active. other substances on the camera lens is detected, Parallel parking Supports reversing
the sign is displayed. When the sign is into a parking space
P sign (Blue):
8. j
displayed, the detectable parking positions are m where vehicles are
Indicates the position where the vehicle will be restricted. parked in line with one
parked. another.
When vehicle speed becomes 10 km/h
9. jsign (Colourless): Bay reverse parking Supports reversing
or higher
Indicates a selectable parking position besides into a Bay parking
the selected parking position. When touched, the m space defined by lines.
icon will change to blue. Bay forward parking Supports parking
forward into a bay
10. Settings icon ( ):
m parking space defined
Touch this icon to change the ProPILOT Park by lines.
settings.
11. ProPILOT Park control icon ( ):
The ProPILOT Park control status is indicated by
colors.
Green: The parking control is active. NSD1156
Gray: The parking control is not active.

When the vehicle speed becomes approximately 10
km/h or higher while parking position detection is
in progress, the screen changes. When the vehicle

PROPILOT PARK OPERATION 6. When the vehicle enters the next direction Bay parking
change position rectangle (green), the shift le-
Parallel parking ver automatically changes.
1. Drive forward at reduced speed. If it is not possible to proceed until the vehicle
2. Push the ProPILOT Park switch. reaches the direction change position rectangle
(green) because of an obstacle, depress the brake
ProPILOT Park activates.
pedal and stop the vehicle near the obstacle.
3. Drive slowly forward and the system will Change the shift lever position to change the di-
search for a parking space. rection.
The system will provide a chime and indicates 7. When the vehicle is in the parking guide box
jP when a parking spot is detected and when (light blue), the vehicle stops and parking con-
the vehicle has reached the correct position trol ends. WBF0020XZ
ready to start the parking process. Depress the

A sound and the display notify the driver when
brake pedal to stop the vehicle. 1. Stop the vehicle near the place you wish to
parking control ends.
4. Keep the brake pedal depressed and touch park.
At this time, the shift position changes to P (Park)
[Start] on the screen. 2. Push the ProPILOT Park switch.
and the electric parking brake is activated.
The ProPILOT Park control icon turns green and ProPILOT Park activates.
Parking control may end automatically before the
the brakes are applied automatically to keep the
vehicle is in the parking guide box (light blue).
vehicle stopped. Parking control cannot be
started if the system determines that movement If it is not possible to reach the parking guide box
to the parking position is not possible due to an due to an obstacle or some other reason, depress
obstacle detected by the parking sensors (so- the brake pedal to stop the vehicle, then touch
nar) and cameras. [Cancel] on the screen to deactivate ProPILOT
Park. Park the vehicle manually or move the ve-
In that case, park the vehicle manually.
hicle to a more suitable position.
5. Release the brake pedal and the vehicle moves
toward the direction change position rect-
angle (in the direction of the arrow on the ve-
hicle icon). WBF0022XZ
Depress the brake pedal and adjust the vehicle

speed depending on the surrounding conditions. A Approximately 1m (3 ft)
j
B Parking space search area guidelines (Light
j
blue)

3. Drive slowly forward and stop next to the de- 6. Release the brake pedal and the vehicle moves
sired parking space (at a distance of approxi- toward the direction change position rect-
mately 1m (3 ft)). angle (in the direction of the arrow on the ve-
Stop the vehicle so that the parking space detec- hicle icon).
tion icon is pointing near the center of the Depress the brake pedal and adjust the vehicle
desired parking space. speed depending on the surrounding conditions.
Position the vehicle so that the end line of the
parking space is in between the parking space
search area guidelines (Light blue) for easier de-
tection.
NSD1160
5. Keep the brake pedal depressed and touch

[Start] on the screen.
The ProPILOT Park control icon turns green
and the brakes are applied automatically to keep
NSD1161
the vehicle stopped. Parking control cannot be
started if the system determines that movement
to the parking position is not possible due to an 7. When the vehicle enters the direction change
obstacle detected by the parking sensors (sonar) position rectangle (green), the shift position
NSD1159 and cameras. automatically changes and the vehicle moves
In that case, park the vehicle manually. backwards.
P is
4. While the vehicle is stopped, check that j If it is not possible to proceed until the vehicle
displayed in the desired parking space. reaches the direction change position rectangle
(green) because of an obstacle, depress the brake
Check that it is possible to park in the space indi-
pedal, and stop the vehicle near the obstacle.
cated by jP . Check that there are no obstacles in
Change the shift lever position to change the di-
the parking space and the surrounding area, and
rection.
check that the space is large enough to park in.
NSD1160

NOTE • Touching <CAMERA> deactivates ProPILOT
• ProPILOT Park can also be activated by Park.
touching <CAMERA> on the navigation sys- • Parking control cannot be started in the
tem and then touching on the Intelli- following cases. After the conditions are
gent Around View Monitor screen. corrected, parking control can be started.
• While ProPILOT Park is activated, the vol- – The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
ume of the audio system and other sounds – The shift position is in P (Park).
are reduced.
•
– The shift position is in R (Reverse).
If the parking guide box does not display a
position where parking is actually possible – The electric parking brake is activated.
NSD1162
(due to the presence of an obstacle or a – The ESP system is turned off.
8. When the vehicle is in the parking guide box

street gutter), manually set a suitable park-
ing position.
• Parking control cannot be started when
the vehicle is on a steep slope. Park the ve-
(light blue), the vehicle stops and parking con-
trol ends. • If the [Detect parallel spaces on either side] hicle manually.
A sound and the display notify the driver when

setting is activated and parking spaces are
detected on both sides. The turn signal
• When the ProPILOT Park system changes
the driving direction of the vehicle there is
parking control ends. switch can be used to select the desired a slight pause.
•
At this time, the shift position changes to P (Park) side if parking spaces on both sides are de-
tected. Parking control may automatically end
and the electric parking brake is activated.
•
when the system determines that move-
Parking control may end automatically before Even if the system detects the parking ment to the parking position is not possible
the vehicle is in the parking guide box (light blue). space once, the detected parking space due to an obstacle detected by the parking
may disappear or parking may not be sensors (sonar) or cameras. Move the ve-
If it is not possible to reach the parking guide box
started depending on the circumstances of hicle to a more suitable position.
due to an obstacle or some other reason, de-
•
obstacles such as the width of the aisle.
press the brake pedal to stop the vehicle, then
•
If the Clearance Guidelines contact a
touch [Cancel] on the screen to deactivate Pro- When parking control is started, the park- parked vehicle or another obstacle, the
PILOT Park. Park the vehicle manually or move ing sensor (sonar) function automatically parking sensor (sonar) may detect an ob-
the vehicle to a more suitable position. turns on. When ProPILOT Park deactivates, stacle and stops the vehicle, hindering the
the parking sensor (sonar) returns to the system from completing the parking pro-
condition that it was set to on the vehicle cedure.
•
information display.
•
The turn signal is activated automatically,
While parking control is active, the screen in the direction of the parking space when
will not change even if <MAP>, <MENU>, or touching [Start] on the screen.
<AUDIO> is touched.

• The route to the parking position and the parking position is not possible due to an ob- • The screen was switched by touching the <MAP>
number of steering cut backs vary depend- stacle detected by the parking sensors (sonar) or <CAMERA> key.
ing on the set parking position and the po- and cameras.
• A system malfunction was detected.
sition of the obstacles detected by the
parking sensors (sonar) and cameras.
• Parking control cannot be resumed if the driv-
Automatic deactivation while parking
er’s seat belt is not fastened.
• The [Unavailable. Mirrors in folded posi-
PROPILOT PARK DEACTIVATION
control in progress (while vehicle is in
motion)
tion] message may be displayed even
though the mirror is open. In that case, Touch [Finish] or [Cancel] on the screen to deacti- In the following cases, ProPILOT Park deactivates
close and open the mirror again. vate ProPILOT Park. automatically.
PROPILOT PARK PAUSE If ProPILOT Park is deactivated while parking con- If ProPILOT Park is deactivated automatically while
trol is in progress, the brakes are applied automati- parking control is in progress, the brakes are ap-
Automatic stop of parking control cally, the vehicle stops, and the electric parking plied automatically, the vehicle stops, and the elec-
In the following cases, the brakes are applied auto- brake is activated. At this time, the shift position tric parking brake is activated. At this time, the shift
matically and the vehicle stops. changes to P (Park). position changes to P (Park).
• An obstacle in the direction of travel was de- Automatic deactivation during parking • The driver operates the steering wheel.
tected. position detection • The driver operates the accelerator pedal.
• The driver's seat belt was unfastened. • The driver's door, front passenger's door, either
Parking control can be resumed by touching [Re-
WARNING of the rear doors or the tailgate was opened.
sume] on the screen while depressing the brake Depress the brake pedal if ProPILOT Park auto-
matically deactivates during parking position de-
• The electric parking brake was activated.
pedal after confirming that the conditions have
been corrected. tection. The brakes are not automatically applied • The shift position was changed to P (Park), N
and it may cause an unexpected accident. (Neutral), D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
NOTE
• The <CAMERA> key was touched.
• When parking control is resumed, the shift po- In the following cases, ProPILOT Park automatically • The outside mirrors were folded.
•
sition automatically changes to D (Drive) or R deactivates.
The ProPILOT Park switch was pushed.
(Reverse).
• The door of the driver seat, passenger seat, ei-
•
• When parking control is resumed after the ve- ther rear seat or the tailgate was opened.
The system determined that movement to the
parking position is not possible due to an ob-
hicle was stopped due to detection of an ob-
stacle, the direction of travel changes and
• The vehicle drove 500 m or more after ProPILOT stacle or some other reason.
steering cut backs are used to continue park-
Park was activated.
• The system decided that there was a large de-
ing control. • Vehicle speed exceeded approximately 30 km/ viation in the parking position used for parking
•
h. control.
Parking control cannot be resumed when the
system determines that movement to the • The outside mirrors were folded. • The ESP system was turned off.

• The ESP/TCS/ABS was activated. • The ProPILOT Park switch was pushed.
• The vehicle speed exceeded approximately 8 ABOUT THE PROPILOT PARK
km/h.
PARKING METHODS
Parallel parking (Sonar detection)
• Any of the following conditions are met in a lo-
Pass the parking position at a distance of less than
cation close to the parking position.
A next to the desired park-
approximately 1m (3 ft) j
– An obstacle in the parking path was
ing place.
detected.
If the distance from the parking position is too large,
– The driver's seat belt was unfastened.
it may not be possible to detect obstacles. WBF0043XZ
Automatic deactivation while parking Parking position accuracy depends on object posi- Example with parking space between obstacles
control in progress (while vehicle is not tion and angle. A Sensor detection range
j
in motion)
In the following cases, the user is notified by sound
and the display and ProPILOT Park automatically
deactivates.
At this time, the electric parking brake is activated
and the shift position changes to P (Park).
• The driver's door, front passenger's door, either
of the rear doors or the tailgate was opened.
• The driver operates the accelerator pedal.
• The electric parking brake was activated. WBF0042XZ
WBF0027XZ
•
Example with parking space before obstacle
The shift position was changed to N (Neutral) or
P (Park). A Sensor detection range
j Parking is performed using a route such as that
• 1 minute or more passed after ProPILOT Park is shown in the illustration.
in pausing status. The parking route and number of switch-backs vary
• The <CAMERA> key was touched. depending on the parking position and the posi-
• The outside mirrors were folded.

tions of the surrounding obstacles.
• The ESP system was turned off.

• The ESP/TCS/ABS was activated.

Parallel parking (Line detection) Stop the vehicle so that the front doors are posi- Bay parking
tioned at the forward edge of the desired parking
space.
WBF0025XZ WBF0029XZ
WBF0027XZ
Approach the parking position at a distance of ap- Example: route starting backwards
Approach the parking position at a distance of ap-
A next to the desired parking
proximately 1 m (3 ft) j A next to the desired parking
proximately 1 m (3 ft) j
place. Parking is performed using a route as shown in the place.
illustration. Depending on the obstacles and dis-
If the distance from the parking position is too large, If the distance from the parking position is too large,
tance to the parking position, parking operation
it may not be possible to detect obstacles or the it may not be possible to detect obstacles, or it may
may start by reversing.
parking space lines. not be possible to detect the parking space lines.
The parking route and number of switch-backs vary
Drive slowly and stop the vehicle so that the vehicle
depending on the parking position and the posi-
is perpendicular to the parking space. Stop the ve-
tions of the surrounding obstacles.
hicle to position the front doors are at the center of
the desired parking space.
WBF0026XZ
Drive slowly forward and depress the brake pedal to

stop the vehicle when parallel to the parking posi-
tion.

If the distance from the parking position is too large, ADJUSTING THE PARKING POSITION
it may not be possible to detect obstacles or the
The parking position can be adjusted manually
parking space lines.
when parallel parking or bay parking is selected as
Drive slowly and stop the vehicle so that the vehicle a parking method.
is perpendicular to the parking space. Stop the ve-
hicle to position the front doors are at the center of
the desired parking space.
WBF0030XZ
Parking control is performed using a route as shown

in the illustration.
NSD1157
depending on the parking position and the posi-
tions of the surrounding obstacles. 1. Depress the brake pedal and stop the vehicle,
WBF0033XZ
Forward parking then touch the parking guide box adjustment
icon on the screen.
Parking control is performed using a route as shown
When jP is displayed, the parking guide box is dis-
in the illustration.
played in the j
P position.
depending on the parking position and the posi- If no parking position is detected or parking posi-
tions of surrounding obstacles. tion is off the screen, the parking guide box is dis-
played in the default position.
2. Touch the arrow on the screen for fine adjust-
ments.
NOTE
WBF0029XZ
• The displayed Clearance Guidelines indicate
the guides of the area where a part of the ve-
Approach the parking position at a distance of ap- hicle may enter when moving to the parking
proximately 1 m (3 ft) j
A next to the desired parking position. Smooth parking is possible when ve-
place. hicles, poles, and other obstacles are on the
outside of the Clearance Guidelines.

• Touch the left side of the screen to move the When bay parking or forward parking is
parking guide box. selected
• The parking guide box direction can be
changed by operating the turn signal switch.
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF

PARKING CONTROL TRAVEL
If there is an obstacle (such as a pole) or a location
lower than ground level (such as a ditch or cliff) in
the vehicle’s direction of travel, depress the brake
WBF0037XZ
pedal to stop the vehicle.
Use the shift lever to change the direction of travel
WBF0038XZ
to resume parking control. 2. Use the shift lever and change the direction of
travel.
NOTE
When [Resume] is touched, parking control is re- ➀ Approximately 2.3 m (8 ft).
Parking control cannot be resumed if the system
determines that movement to the parking space
sumed. ➁ Approximately 2 m (6 ft).
is not possible due to an obstacle detected by the PARKING POSITION DETECTION ➂ Approximately 1 m (3 ft).
parking sensors (sonar) or cameras. FUNCTION A parking position is detected under the following
(Example) When there is a parked vehicle The cameras and parking sensors (sonar) are used conditions:
to detect the parking position. Multiple parking po- • Parking spaces of approximately 2.3 to 2.5m (6.5
sitions can be detected. to 8 ft) width ➀ are recognised.
The parking space lines are recognised using the • Parking space lines composed of single lines or
cameras, and the parking positions are displayed. U-shaped space lines are recognised.
A parking position is not displayed if the parking • Parking space lines with a width of approxi-
sensors (sonar) detect an obstacle inside the de- mately 15 cm (6 inches) are recognised.
tected parking space.
• Recognition occurs when there are parking
NOTE space lines located within the range from the
front edge of the vehicle to approximately 2 m (6
If the lens of the front view, side view, or rear view
WBF0036XZ ft) from the rear edge of the vehicle ➁.
camera is dirty or there are water drops or some
other substance adhering to it, the detectable • Recognition occurs when a parking space is lo-
1. Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. parking positions may be restricted. cated approximately 1 m (3 ft) from the vehicle
➂.

• If [Detect parallel spaces on either side] is turned When parallel parking is selected • If [Detect parallel spaces on either side] is turned
on, parking positions on both sides of the ve- on, parking positions on both sides of the ve-
hicle are detected. hicle are detected.
WBF0040XZ
WBF0039XZ WBF0041XZ
➀ Approximately 5 m (15 ft).
A Sensor detection range

j ➁ Approximately 3 m (10 ft).
j
A parking position is not displayed when the detec-
➂ Approximately 1 m (3 ft).
A parking position is not displayed when the detec-
tion range of the front sensors (sonar) passes A parking position is detected under the following tion range of the front sensors (sonar) passes
through the parking space detected by cameras conditions. through the parking space detected by cameras
and an obstacle is detected. • Parking spaces of approximately 5 to 6 m (15 to and an obstacle is detected.
Obstacles in parking spaces located beyond the 18 ft) length ➀ are recognised. Obstacles in parking spaces located beyond the
sensor detection range cannot be detected. • Parking space lines composed of single lines are sensor detection range cannot be detected.
recognised. If the parking space lines are not recognised, the
• Parking space lines with a width of approxi- parking sensors (sonar) are used to detect the park-
ing space based on the surrounding obstacles.
mately 15 cm (6 inches) are recognised.
• Recognition occurs when there are parking Depending on the positions and angles of the sur-
rounding obstacles, the parking guidance box may
space lines located within the range from the
driver’s door to approximately 3 m (10 ft) from deviate.
the rear edge of the vehicle ➁.
• Recognition occurs when a parking space is lo-
cated approximately 1 m (3 ft) from the vehicle
➂.

PROPILOT PARK PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
• Never attempt to drive while looking only at
the screen. There is the risk of hitting an ob-
stacle or causing an unexpected accident.
• Pay attention to the movement of vehicles
and persons in the surrounding area. Parking
support is provided by making effective use of
WBF0042XZ WBF0043XZ
the detected path. Pay attention to the move-
Example with parking space before obstacle
ments of oncoming vehicles, following
vehicles, and pedestrians when operating
j CAMERAS AND PARKING SENSORS parking control.
(SONAR) USED FOR PROPILOT PARK • When parking support by ProPILOT Park is no
longer necessary, deactivate ProPILOT Park. If
Cameras ProPILOT Park remains activated, there is the
The Intelligent Around View Monitor cameras are risk of an unexpected accident.
used.
• Before exiting the vehicle, check that the elec-
For maintenance, see “Intelligent Around View Moni- tric parking brake is activated and that the
tor (IAVM)” in the “4. Display screen, heater and air shift position is in P (Park).
conditioner, and audio system” section.
• Before using ProPILOT Park, check directly to
Parking sensors (sonar) confirm that there is sufficient space around
WBF0043XZ the vehicle for the steering cut backs and
12 parking sensors (sonar) located on the front, rear,
Example with parking space between obstacles other parking operations to be performed.
left, and right are used.
j For maintenance, see “Front and Rear Ultrasonic • Depending on the circumstances, noise from
inside or outside the vehicle may prevent the
Parking Sensors (where fitted)” in the “5. Starting
driver from hearing the warning sound.
and driving” section.
• Operate the turn signal switch during parking
control to inform the surroundings of the ve-
hicle moving direction.

• Do not use ProPILOT Park in the following cir- – When an object is attached that interferes PROPILOT PARK MALFUNCTION
cumstances: with the camera’s field of view
If there is an abnormality in the system, a warning
– In a location where the traffic is heavy with – When the camera images are difficult to message is displayed on the screen, the color of the
persons and vehicles see due to dirt, sunlight, shadows, or other ProPILOT Park control icon changes to or-
– In a location where stopping or parking is reasons ange, and ProPILOT Park is automatically deacti-
prohibited – When the outside mirror is not all the way vated. If a warning is displayed while the system is
open in use, stop the vehicle in a safe location and place
– In a location that is too narrow for the ve-
the power switch in the OFF position and then place
hicle to fit – When the cameras are not properly
it back in the ON position.
– In a location where parking is not possible installed
If it is not possible to activate ProPILOT Park after
due to a hole, ditch, etc. – When an item is installed on the bumper
performing the above, there may be a malfunction
– In a location where the street width is nar- that interferes with the parking sensors’
in the system. This does not interfere with ordinary
row (sonar) performance
driving. However, the system should be inspected
– On a steep slope – When there is a dent or other irregularity in by a knowledgeable repairer such as a NISSAN cer-
the bumper tified electric vehicle dealer.
– On a gravel, dirt, or unpaved road
– When there is rain, snow, mud, or some
– On a slippery surface, such as snow or ice other substance adhering to the parking
PROPILOT PARK SETTINGS
– On a road that is not flat due to inclination, sensors (sonar) 1. Touch [Settings] on the launch bar.
steps, kerbs, wheel ruts, or other reasons – When the loaded vehicle is tilted due to car- 2. Touch [Parking].
– On a road where the asphalt has melted rying an extremely heavy load or carrying 3. Select the setting item.
due to exposure to excessive heat a load only on one side
Available items:
– In a location where a road heater (heater
for preventing the road surface from freez- • [Use the last selected parking mode]
ing) is installed in the parking area CAUTION When this item is turned on, the parking
Car stops cannot be detected and there is some method that was most recently used will be
– In a mechanical parking area or location
possibility that kerbs cannot be detected. selected.
where there are obstacles in the parking
Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle if the When the item is turned off, parallel parking
spaces
wheels appear to hit a kerb or the vehicle appears will be selected.
– When the vehicle is overloaded to pass over a car stop. There is the risk of dam-
– When worn tyres, an emergency tyre or tyre age to the vehicle.
chains are being used
– When the tyre air pressure is not correct
– When a towing hook or similar item is in-
stalled

• [Detect parallel spaces on either side] PARKING SENSOR (SONAR) – When there are clumps of snow around the
vehicle
When this item is turned on, parking positions DETECTION CONDITIONS AND
on the both sides of the vehicle will be de- LIMITATIONS INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
tected.
MONITOR DETECTION CONDITIONS
When the item is turned off, only parking po- WARNING AND LIMITATIONS
sitions on the side last time ProPILOT Park The parking sensor (sonar) system has some limi-
used will be detected. tations. For details, see “Front and Rear Ultrasonic WARNING
If the turn signal switch is operated in this Parking Sensors (where fitted)” later in this
The Intelligent Around View Monitor has some
state, parking spaces on that side of the ve- section.
limitations. For details, see “Intelligent Around
hicle will be detected.
View Monitor (IAVM)” in the “4. Display screen,
• [Parking mode] • Under conditions such as the following, the heater and air conditioner, and audio system”
brakes may be applied or correct parking con- section.
The parking methods which can be selected
trol may not be possible.
on the ProPILOT Park screen can be set.
The parking methods that are turned on can
– When there is rain, snow, ice, dirt, or some • Under conditions such as the following, the In-
other substance adhering to the parking telligent Around View Monitor cameras may be
be selected each time the parking method
sensors (sonar) unable to detect an obstacle and/or the parking
selection icon is touched.
– When there is a loud noise in the surrounding position correctly.
The parking methods that are turned off can-
area – When the vehicle gets wet with rain or water
not be selected by touching the parking
method selection icon. – When there is a device generating ultrasound – When the surroundings are dark, such as at
(including vehicles equipped with sensors night, when in underground locations or in
(sonar)) in the surrounding area an above-ground parking garage
– When there is thick grass in the surrounding – When parking space lines are not clearly vis-
area ible due to bad weather (rain, snow, fog, dust,
– When passing near a structure with bumps sand or snowstorms)
or depressions – When the camera lens is clouded due to con-
– When there is a structure (such as a wall, toll tact with water
collection equipment, or parking area gate) – When strong light from the sun or streetlights
located nearby to the side of the vehicle shines on the road
– When there is a step, projecting object, or – When the road surface is wet and shining,
drain cover on the road such as during or after rain, or when there
– When passing under a hanging flag, plastic are puddles on the road
curtain, or similar object

– When sunlight shines into the camera, such PROPILOT PARK DETECTION • Under conditions such as the following, correct
as in the morning or in the evening parking control to the set position may not be
CONDITIONS AND LIMITATIONS
possible. As necessary, move the vehicle to a
– When the camera lens is dirty or there are
water drops adhering to it
• Under conditions such as the following, the more suitable position.
brakes may be applied or correct parking con-
– When an object is attached that interferes – When the road surface is not flat
trol may not be possible.
with the camera field of view – When the vehicle is tilted due to carrying an
– When there is rain, snow, ice, dirt, or some
– When strong light (for example, sunlight or extremely heavy load or carrying a load only
other substance adhering to the parking
high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters on one side
sensors (sonar)
the front camera
– When there is a loud noise in the surrounding • Under conditions such as the following, it may
– When vehicle's driving posture changed sig- be impossible or difficult to detect a parking po-
area
nificantly due to sudden braking or loads sition.
– When there is a device generating ultrasound
– A sudden change in brightness occurs (for – When the vehicle is too close to the parking
(including vehicles equipped with sensors
example, when the vehicle enters or exits a space
(sonar)) in the surrounding area
tunnel or shaded area or lightning flashes) – In a parking area without parking space lines
– When there is thick grass in the surrounding
– When driving on a steep downhill or slope or where the spaces are created with rope,
area
roads with sharp curves blocks, or other means
– When passing near a structure with bumps
– People with postures other than upright – When the parking space lines are not clearly
or depressions
standing or walking, such as leaning forward, visible due to fading or dirt
– When there is a structure (such as a wall, toll
etc. – When the contrast between the road and
collection equipment, or parking area gate)
– People in a vehicle parking space lines is low
located nearby to the side of the vehicle
– People pushing shopping carts, strollers, etc. – When the parking space lines on the road are
– When there is a step, projecting object, or
yellow or some other color besides white
– People in clothes such as raincoats or drain cover on the road
dresses whose outlines are obscured – When the parking space is extremely narrow
– When passing under a hanging flag, plastic
or wide
– People who have an umbrella or a large bag curtain, or similar object
and have a part of their body hidden – When the parking space lines are extremely
– When there are clumps of snow around the
short
– A pedestrian' profile is not recognised be- vehicle
cause he or she has a large luggage or wear- • The system may not work properly under the
– When the parking space lines are extremely
narrow or wide
ing a cloth of the same color as the back- following condition.
ground. – When the parking space lines are not parallel
– When the vehicle is equipped with non-origi-
in the camera image due to inclination of the
nal tyres
parking area or some other reason

– When the parking space lines are connected – When there is accumulated snow or snow- • Under conditions such as the following, the park-
to diagonal lines or other markings melting agents ing position may not be detected in the correct
– When the shadow of the vehicle, shade from – When the parking area is paved with stones location.
trees, or other shadows are on the parking or greenery – When there is light that looks like parking
space lines – When there is a noise pattern image in the space lines, the reflection of a building or
– When there is a neighbouring vehicle or some parking space on the screen other object, a step, gutter, road painting, re-
other obstacle on the parking space lines painted line, or similar items
– When letters or other characters are painted
– When there is an obstacle in the parking in the parking space – When there are marks from road repairs, let-
space ters printed on the road, poles, or other ob-
– When the road color and brightness are not stacles
– When the surroundings are dark, such as at even
night, when in underground locations or in – When the road surface is wet and shining,
– When the vehicle is stopped inclined relative such as during or after rain, or when there
an above-ground parking garage to the parking space are puddles on the road
– When parking space lines are not clearly vis- – When the street width is narrow
ible due to bad weather (rain, snow, fog, dust, – When the road color and brightness are not
sand or snowstorms) – When there is an obstacle in front of the ve- even
hicle – When the parking area is on a slope
– When the camera lens is clouded due to con-
tact with water – When there is rain, snow, ice, dirt, or some – When a side step of the vehicle or a shadow
other substance adhering to the parking is on the parking space line
– When the sun or streetlights are reflecting sensors (sonar)
on the road – When the parking space lines are not clearly
– When there is a loud noise in the surrounding visible due to fading or dirt
– When strong light from the sun or streetlights area
shines on the road – When the system is affected by the shadows
– When there is a device generating ultrasound of the vehicle or shades of the trees
– When the road surface is wet and shining,
•
(including vehicles equipped with sensor (so-
such as during or after rain, or when there nar)) in the surrounding area When the vehicle is equipped with non-original
are puddles on the road tyres, correct parking control to the set position
– When there is thick grass in the surrounding may not be possible. It is recommended that you
– When sunlight shines into the camera, such area
as in the morning or in the evening visit a NISSAN certified electric vehicle dealer
– When there is a step, projecting object, or when changing to winter tyres.
– When the camera lens is dirty or there are drain cover on the road
water drops adhering to it
– When there are clumps of snow around the
– When an object is attached that interferes vehicle
with the camera field of view
– When there is a step, gutter, road painting,
repainted line, or similar item

FRONT AND REAR ULTRASONIC PARKING SENSORS (where fitted)
cator and the distance guide lines in the front

CAUTION
•
(where fitted)/rear view indicate different dis-
tances to the object. Inclement weather or ul- If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper
trasonic sources such as an automatic car fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens-
wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes, horn ing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
sound, or a pneumatic drill may affect the measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
function of the system; this may include re- • Excessive noise (such as audio system volume
duced performance or a false activation. or an open vehicle window) will interfere with
• Some types of kerb may also be detected. the tone and it may not be heard.
• This function is designed as an aid to the driver • In some conditions (i.e. after car wash, or rain)
NSD1133
in detecting large stationary objects to help water can accumulate around the parking
Where fitted
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system is not sensor (sonar) sensors reducing performance
designed to prevent contact with small or or cause false activation of the system. This
The parking sensor (sonar) system sounds a tone
moving objects. Always move slowly. water will drain away automatically while driv-
to inform the driver of obstacles around the vehicle
•
ing, bringing system performance back to
using the Parking (sonar) sensors located in the The system will not detect small objects be- normal.
front and rear bumpers.
•
low the bumper, and may not detect objects
close to the bumper or on the ground. Keep the surface of the parking sensor (sonar)
When the parking sensor (sonar) system is turned
•
sensors (located on the front and rear bumper
on, the parking sensor view will automatically ap- The system is deactivated at speeds above 12 fascia) free from accumulations of snow, ice
pear in the vehicle information display. km/h (7.5 MPH). It is reactivated below 10 km/h and dirt. Do not scratch the surface of the sen-
(6 MPH). sors when cleaning. If the sensors are covered,
WARNING
• This system is intended as an aid to parking, the accuracy of the parking sensor (sonar)
• If there is any doubt the surroundings in the to be used in conjunction with your rear view function will be diminished.
path of the parking area and/or the parking mirrors.
area itself are not free from obstacles imme-
diately stop the vehicle and check. • The system may not detect the following ob-
jects.
• The parking sensor system is a convenience
– Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton,
but it is not a substitute for proper parking.
glass-wool, etc.
The driver is always responsible for safety dur-
ing parking and other manoeuvres. Always – Thin objects such as rope, wire and chain,
look around and check that it is safe to do so etc.
before parking. – Wedge-shaped objects.
• Read and understand the limitations of the
parking sensor system as contained in this
section. The colours of the corner sensor indi-

SYSTEM OPERATION How the system alerts for obstacles:
The system is deactivated at speeds above 12 km/h
(7.5 MPH). It is reactivated below 10 km/h (6 MPH).
The intermittent tone will stop after several seconds
when the obstacle is identified only with the corner
sensor. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets
away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator (green)
appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermit-
tently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, NSD1152
the colour of the indicator turns yellow and the rate Example
WAF0538XZ
of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very
close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and The parking sensor (sonar) indicator also appears
➀ Centre parking sensors turns red, and the tone sounds continuously. on the camera view of the centre display.
➁ Corner parking sensors

➂ Side parking sensors (where fitted)
The system informs with a visual and audible alert
of:
• Front obstacles when the shift control system is
in the D (Drive) position
• Front and rear obstacles when the shift control
system is in the R (Reverse) position
NSD1151
Example
When the vehicle moves closer to an obstacle, the

parking sensor (sonar) indicator (detected area) ap-
pears in the vehicle information display.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE PARKING SENSOR (SONAR) SYSTEM/BA The system is automatically activated when the
power switch is switched ON and the shift control
system is in the D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position.
NSD1071
NOTE
When the shift control system is in R (Reverse)
and the [Parking Aids] screen is displayed in the
vehicle information display the parking sensor
(sonar) system can be disabled temporarily by
pushing the <OK> switch on the steering wheel.
The system will remain disabled until the shift
control system is shifted to N (Neutral) or P (Park)
or vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (7.5 MPH).
Perform the following steps to set up the parking
WAF0412X
sensor (sonar) system function.
➀ Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side) pears in the vehicle information display and then
➁ Vehicle information display push the scroll dial. Use the scroll dial to select
2. Select [Parking Aids] and push the scroll dial.

3. Use the scroll dial to navigate in the menu and PARKING SENSOR (SONAR) SYSTEM • The parking sensor (sonar) system may not
select or change an item: detect objects at speed above 5 Km/h (3 MPH)
LIMITATIONS
• [Moving Object] and may not detect certain angular or moving
objects.
WARNING
•
— Turns ON/OFF the Moving Object Detection
(MOD) (See “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” The parking sensor (sonar) system may not
in the “4. Display screen, heater and air condi- detect the following objects:
parking sensor (sonar) system. Failure to operate
tioner, and audio system” section.) the vehicle in accordance with these system limi- – Pedestrians who approach the vehicle
• [Display] tations could result in serious injury or death. from the side
— Shows the parking sensor (sonar) display in • Read and understand the limitations of the – Objects placed next to the vehicle
the vehicle information display when the sys- parking sensor (sonar) system as contained in
this section. Inclement weather may affect the
• The parking sensor (sonar) system may not
tem activates operate in the following conditions:
• [Front] (where fitted)
function of the system; this may include re-
duced performance or a false activation.
– When rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc. adheres to
the parking sensor.
— Turns ON/OFF the front parking sensors
• The parking sensor (sonar) system is deacti-
• [Rear] vated at speeds above 12 km/h (7.5 MPH). It is
– When a loud sound is heard in the area
around the vehicle.
— Turns ON/OFF the rear parking sensors reactivated below 10 km/h (6 MPH).
• [Side] (where fitted) • Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such

– When the surface of the obstacle is diago-
nal to the front or rear of the vehicle.
as an automatic car wash, a truck’s
— Turns ON/OFF the side parking sensors – When a parking sensor or the area around
compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill
• [Distance] may affect the function of the parking sensor the sensor is extremely hot or cold.
— Changes the parking sensor’s detection (sonar) system; this may include reduced per-
formance or a false activation.
• The parking sensor (sonar) system may unin-
distance to [Far], [Medium] or [Near] tentionally operate in the following condi-
• [Volume] • The parking sensor (sonar) system is not de- tions:
signed to prevent contact with small or mov- – When there is overgrown grass in the area
— Changes the volume of the tone sound to
ing objects. Always move slowly. The system around the vehicle.
[High], [Medium] or [Low]
will not detect small objects below the bumper
– When there is a structure (for example, a
or on the ground.
wall, a toll gate equipment, a narrow tun-
• The parking sensor (sonar) system may not nel or a parking lot gate) near the side of
detect the following objects: fluffy objects the vehicle.
such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.;
– When there are bumps, protrusions or
thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.;
manhole covers on the road surface.
or wedge-shaped objects; complex-shaped
objects or multiple objects in close. – When the vehicle drives through a draped
flag or a curtain.

– When there is an accumulation of snow or SYSTEM MAINTENANCE • The parking sensors may be blocked by tempo-
ice behind the vehicle. rary ambient conditions such as splashing wa-
– When driving on a steep hill. ter, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also
be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt
obstructing the sonar sensors. Check for and re-
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY move objects obstructing the area around the
UNAVAILABLE sensors.
When parking sensor blockage is detected, the sys- • Do not subject the area around the parking sen-
tem will be deactivated automatically. sors to strong impact. Also, do not remove or
disassemble the sensors. If the parking sensors
The system is not available until the conditions no
and peripheral areas are deformed in an acci-
longer exist.
NSD1012 dent, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recom-
The parking sensors may be blocked by temporary Where fitted mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or quali-
ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist fied workshop for this service.
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the • Do not attach stickers (including transparent
material), install accessories or apply additional
sensors.
paint on the parking sensors and their surround-
Action to take: ing areas. This may cause a malfunction or im-
When the above conditions no longer exist, the sys- proper operation.
tem will resume automatically. • When washing the vehicle using a high-pressure
washer, do not apply direct washer pressure on
the parking sensors. This may cause a malfunc-
tion of the sensors.
NAA2081
Where fitted
The parking sensors j

A and j
B are located on the
front and rear bumpers.
• Always keep the area near the sonar sensors
clean.
• If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off
with a soft cloth while being careful to not dam-
age them.

REAR ULTRASONIC PARKING
SENSORS (where fitted)
• Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such • If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper
as an automatic car wash, a truck’s fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens-
compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill ing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
may affect the function of the system; this measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
may include reduced performance or a false
activation.
SYSTEM OPERATION
• The parking sensor (sonar) system is designed
The system informs with a visual and audible alert
as an aid to the driver in detecting large sta-
of rear obstacles when the shift control system is in
tionary objects to help avoid damaging the
the R (Reverse) position.
vehicle.
NSD1134
• The parking sensor (sonar) system is not de-
The parking sensor (sonar) system is deactivated at
speeds above 12 km/h (7.5 MPH). It is reactivated be-
signed to prevent contact with small or mov-
low 10 km/h (6 MPH).
The parking sensor (sonar) system sounds a tone ing objects. Always move slowly. The system
to inform the driver of obstacles near the rear will not detect small objects below the The intermittent tone will stop after several seconds
bumper. bumper, and may not detect objects close to when an obstacle is identified only with the corner
the bumper or on the ground. sensor. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets
When the parking sensor (sonar) system is turned
on, the sonar view will automatically appear in the • The parking sensor (sonar) system may not
away from the vehicle.
vehicle information display. detect the following objects: fluffy objects When the object is detected, the indicator (green)
such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermit-
WARNING thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; tently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object,
• The parking sensor (sonar) system is a conve-

or wedge-shaped objects. the colour of the indicator turns yellow and the rate
of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very
nience but it is not a substitute for proper
close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and
parking.
CAUTION turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
• The driver is always responsible for safety dur-
• Excessive noise (such as audio system volume
ing parking and other manoeuvres. Always
or an open vehicle window) will interfere with
look around and check that it is safe to do so
the tone and it may not be heard.
before parking.
• Read and understand the limitations of the
• Keep the parking sensor (sonar) sensors (lo-
cated on the rear bumper fascia) free from
parking sensor (sonar) system as contained in
snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do
this section. The colours of the sonar indicator
not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the
indicates different distances to the object.
sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar
function will be diminished.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE PARKING SENSOR (SONAR) SYSTEM
WAF0431XZ
Example
When the rear of the vehicle moves closer to an ob-

stacle, the parking sensor (sonar) indicator appears
in the vehicle information display.
WAF0434XZ
WAF0412X
Example
The parking sensor (sonar) indicator also appears

on the camera view of the centre display.
➀ Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side)

The system is automatically activated when the 3. Use the scroll dial to navigate in the menu and • The parking sensor (sonar) system is deacti-
power switch is switched ON and the shift control select or change an item: vated at speeds above 12 km/h (7.5 MPH). It is
system is in the R (Reverse) position.
• [Moving Object] (where fitted) reactivated below 10 km/h (6 MPH).
— Turns ON/OFF the Moving Object Detection • Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such
(MOD) (See “Moving Object Detection (MOD)” as an automatic car wash, a truck’s
in the “4. Display screen, heater and air condi- compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill
tioner, and audio system” section.) may affect the function of the parking sensor
•
(sonar) system; this may include reduced per-
[Rear] formance or a false activation.
— Turns ON/OFF the parking sensor (sonar)
system
• The parking sensor (sonar) system is not de-
signed to prevent contact with small or mov-
• [Distance] ing objects. Always move slowly. The system
— Changes the parking sensor (sonar) sys- will not detect small objects below the bumper
NSD1089
tem sensor’s detection distance to [Far], [Me- or on the ground.
dium] or [Near] • The parking sensor (sonar) system may not
NOTE
When the shift control system is in R (Reverse)
• [Volume] detect the following objects: fluffy objects
such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.;
— Changes the volume of the tone sound to thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.;
and the [Parking Aids] screen is displayed in the
[High], [Medium] or [Low] or wedge-shaped objects; complex-shaped
vehicle information display the parking sensor
(sonar) system can be disabled temporarily by PARKING SENSOR (SONAR) SYSTEM objects or multiple objects in close.
pushing the <OK> switch on the steering wheel.
LIMITATIONS • The parking sensor (sonar) system may not
The system will remain disabled until the shift detect objects at speed above 5 km/h (3 MPH)
control system is shifted to N (Neutral) or P (Park) WARNING and may not detect certain angular or moving
or vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (7.5 MPH). objects.
Perform the following steps to set up the parking parking sensor (sonar) system. Failure to operate • The parking sensor (sonar) system may not
sensor (sonar) system function: the vehicle in accordance with these system limi- operate in the following conditions:
1. Push the button until [Settings] tations could result in serious injury or death. – When rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc. adheres to
appears in the vehicle information display and • Read and understand the limitations of the the sonar sensor.
then push the scroll dial. Use the scroll dial to se- parking sensor (sonar) system as contained in – When a loud sound is heard in the area
lect [Driver Assistance]. Then push the scroll dial. this section. Inclement weather may affect the around the vehicle.
2. Select [Parking Aids] and push the scroll dial. function of the parking sensor (sonar) system;
– When the surface of the obstacle is diago-
this may include reduced performance or a
nal to the rear of the vehicle.
false activation.

– When a sonar sensor or the area around SYSTEM MAINTENANCE • Do not attach stickers (including transparent
the sensor is extremely hot or cold. material), install accessories or apply additional
• The parking sensor (sonar) system may unin- paint on the sensors and their surrounding ar-
eas. This may cause a malfunction or improper
tentionally operate in the following condi-
tions: operation.
– When there is overgrown grass in the area • When washing the vehicle using a high-pressure
around the vehicle. washer, do not apply direct washer pressure on
the sensors. This may cause a malfunction of
– When there are bumps, protrusions or the sensors.
manhole covers on the road surface.
– When the vehicle drives through a draped
flag or a curtain. NAA2081
– When there is an accumulation of snow or Where fitted

ice behind the vehicle. The parking sensor (sonar) sensors j
A are located
– When driving on a steep hill. on the rear bumper.
• Always keep the area near the sonar sensors
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY clean.
UNAVAILABLE • If the sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft
When sensor blockage is detected, the system will cloth while being careful to not damage them.
be deactivated automatically. • The sensors may be blocked by temporary am-
The system is not available until the conditions no bient conditions such as splashing water, mist
longer exist. or fog. The blocked condition may also be
caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
The parking sensor (sonar) sensors may be blocked structing the sonar sensors. Check for and re-
by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- move objects obstructing the area around the
ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may sensors.
•
also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt
obstructing the sensors. Do not subject the area around the sensors to
strong impact. Also, do not remove or disas-
Action to take: semble the sensors. If the sensors and periph-
When the above conditions no longer exist, the sys- eral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have
tem will resume automatically. the sensors checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
for this service.

TRAILER TOWING
Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily • Do not exceed the maximum permitted vertical • When towing a trailer, observe the following re-
to carry passengers and luggage. load on the trailer hitch. stricted towing speed:
Remember that towing a trailer will place additional • Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle Speed: below 100 km/h (62 MPH)
loads on your vehicle's engine, drive-train, steering, weight. This is the combined weight of the ve-
braking and other systems. Towing a trailer will also hicle, driver, passengers, cargo, and load on the CAUTION
exaggerate other conditions, such as sway caused towing coupling device (where fitted). You can While towing a trailer, check the engine coolant
by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing find the maximum gross vehicle weight on the temperature gauge regularly to prevent engine
trucks. Driving style and speed must be adjusted vehicle identification label (see “Vehicle identifi- overheating.
according to the circumstances. Before towing a cation label” in the “9. Technical information” sec-
trailer, see a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop tion).
TYRE PRESSURE
for an explanation of towing equipment and its
proper use.
• Before driving, make sure that the lighting sys-
When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tyres to the
tem of the trailer works properly.
maximum recommended COLD tyre pressure, as in-
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS • Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration and stops. dicated on the tyre placard (for full loading). Make
• Choose proper coupling devices (trailer hitch, • Avoid sharp turns and lane changes. sure the trailer tyre pressures are correct.
safety chain, roof carrier, etc.) for your vehicle
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
CAUTION
•
and trailer. These devices are available from a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop where you Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
Do not tow a trailer when the vehicle is installed
can also obtain more detailed information about trailer when parking. Apply the handbrake
with a temporary-use spare tyre.
trailer towing. (where fitted) on the trailer. Parking on a steep
•
slope is not recommended.
It is advisable to contact a NISSAN dealer or
If parking on a steep slope is unavoidable it is SAFETY CHAINS
qualified workshop for towing details, before
towing a trailer up steep slopes for long dis- also advisable to select P (Park), and turn the Always use a suitable chain between the vehicle and
tances. front wheels into the kerb (in addition to the trailer. The chain should be attached to the hitch
•
other precautions described). Before parking on and not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to
Never allow the total trailer load (trailer weight a steep slope consider the incline (the towing leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning
plus its cargo weight) to exceed the maximum weights quoted are for a 12% slope). corners. The chain should not drag on the ground:
•
set for the coupling device.
Follow the trailer manufacturer's instructions. passing the chain across the trailer hitch may be
•
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop the best practice depending on your trailer.
for more information on this matter. Have your vehicle serviced more often than at
TRAILER BRAKES
•
the intervals specified in the separately provided
The trailer must be loaded so that heavy goods Warranty Information and Maintenance booklet.
Ensure that trailer brakes are installed as required
•
are distributed over the axle and as low in the
trailer as possible. Poor load distribution can se- Trailer towing requires more fuel than under nor- by local regulations. Also check that all other trailer
riously affect the stability of the trailer and tow mal circumstances because of a considerable equipment conforms to local regulations.
vehicle. increase in traction power required and resis-
tance.

INSTALLATION OF COUPLING
DEVICE
NISSAN recommends that the coupling device for
trailer towing be installed under the following con-
ditions:
• Maximum permissible vertical load on the cou-
pling device: 981 N (100 kg, 220 lb)
• The coupling device, mounting points and instal-
lation parts on your vehicle: as shown as an ex-
ample in the illustration.
Follow all of the coupling device manufacturer's in-
structions for installation and use.
NSD1014
Rear overhang of coupling device:

A
j 744 mm (29.3 in)
I
j Fixed towbar
II
j Detachable towbar

VEHICLE SECURITY POWER STEERING
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied: If the electric power steering warning light il-
WARNING
• Always remove the Intelligent Key (where fitted)
• If the e-POWER system is not running or is
luminates while the e-POWER system is running, it
may indicate the electric power steering system is
and take it with you – even in your own garage. turned off while driving, the power assistance
•
not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Close all windows completely and lock all doors. for the steering will not work. The steering will Have the electric power steering system checked
• Always park your vehicle where it can be seen. be harder to operate. by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. (See “
At night, park in a well lit area. • When the electric power steering warning Electric Power Steering warning light” in the “2. In-
• If the vehicle is equipped with an alarm or im- light illuminates with the e-POWER system
running, the power assistance for the steering
struments and controls” section.)
mobilisation device, use it – even for short peri- When the electric power steering warning light illu-
ods. will cease operation. You will still have control minates with the e-POWER system running, the
•
of the vehicle but the steering will be harder to power assistance for the steering will cease opera-
Do not leave children and pets in the vehicle un- operate.
attended. tion. You will still have control of the vehicle. How-
•
ever, greater steering effort is needed, especially in
Do not leave valuables on view to tempt a thief. The electric power steering system is designed to sharp turns and at low speeds.
Always take your valuables with you. If you must provide power assistance while driving to allow you
leave something in your vehicle, lock it in the lug- to operate the steering wheel with light force.
gage compartment or hide it out of sight.
• Do not leave the vehicle documents in your ve-
NOTE
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
hicle. In the unfortunate event of your vehicle
being stolen, the documents will only help a thief or continuously while parking or driving at a very
to sell the vehicle. low speed, the power assistance for the steering
• Do not leave articles on a roof rack as they are

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheat-
ing of the electric power steering system and pro-
particularly vulnerable. If possible, remove them
tect it from becoming damaged. While the power
from the rack and lock them inside the vehicle.
assistance is reduced, steering wheel operation
• Do not leave the Intelligent Key or spare key in will become heavy. When the temperature of the
the vehicle – keep it in a safe place at home. electric power steering system decreases, the
• Do not leave a note of your vehicle's key number power assistance level will return to normal. Avoid
repeating such steering wheel operations that
in the vehicle. A thief may break into the vehicle,
note the key number and return with a new key could cause the electric power steering system
and drive the vehicle. to overheat.
You may hear a noise when the steering wheel is
operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-
tion.

BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS prevent the Li-ion battery from becoming grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking per-
overcharged. Regenerative brake is also automati- formance and could result in loss of vehicle control.
This vehicle is equipped with two braking systems:
cally reduced when the battery temperature is high/
1) Hydraulic brake system low to prevent Li-ion battery damage. WARNING
2) Regenerative brake system The brake pedal should be used to slow or stop the • While driving on a slippery surface, be careful
vehicle depending on traffic or road conditions. The when braking or accelerating. Abrupt braking
Hydraulic brake system
vehicle brakes are not affected by regenerative or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid,
The hydraulic brake system is similar to the brakes brake system operation. which could result in an accident.
used on conventional vehicles.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic cir-
NOTE • If the brake pedal is depressed with the e-
•
POWER system OFF, you may feel an increased
cuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have When applying the regenerative brakes, you brake pedal effort and a decreased pedal
braking at two wheels. may hear a sound coming from the regenera- stroke. If the brake warning light (red) does not
tive brake system. This is a normal operating illuminate and the brake pedal feels like it has
Regenerative brake system characteristic of an e-POWER vehicle. returned to its normal state after the e-POWER
The primary purpose of regenerative brake system
is to provide some power to help recharge the Li-
• If the power switch position is in a position system is started, this indicates that there is
other than ON or READY to drive, you can stop no malfunction and the vehicle can be oper-
ion battery and extend driving range. A secondary the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. ated normally.
benefit is “engine braking” that operates based on However, greater foot pressure on the brake
battery conditions. pedal will be required to stop the vehicle, and
the stopping distance will be longer.
Wet brakes
In the D (Drive) position, when the accelerator is re-
leased, the regenerative brake system provides
some deceleration and generates power for the Li-
• When depressing the brake pedal, the braking
When the vehicle is washed or driven through wa-
ter, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking
pedal feel may change when the cooperative
ion battery. Power is also generated when the brake distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to
regenerative brake system activates. How-
pedal is applied. one side during braking.
ever, the electronically controlled brake sys-
When you put the shift lever in the B position and tem is operating normally and this does not To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while
take your foot off the accelerator pedal, more re- indicate a malfunction. lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the
generative brake is applied than in the D (Drive) po- brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal.
sition. However, during high-speed driving you may
Using the brakes Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the
feel that regenerative brake provides less decelera- Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while brakes function correctly.
tion than the engine braking in an ordinary vehicle. driving. This will cause overheating of the brakes,
This is normal. wearing out the brake pads faster and will reduce
driving range.
Less deceleration is provided by the regenerative
brake system when the Li-ion battery is fully To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
charged. Regenerative brake is automatically brakes from overheating, reduce speed and select
reduced when the Li-ion battery is fully charged to the B position before going down a slope or long

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each NORMAL OPERATION
•
wheel from locking, the system helps the driver
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a so- The ABS operates at speeds above 5 to 10 km/h (3
maintain steering control and helps to minimise
phisticated device, but it cannot prevent acci- to 6 MPH). The speed varies according to road con-
swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
dents resulting from careless or dangerous ditions.
driving techniques. It can help maintain ve- USING SYSTEM When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are
hicle control during braking on slippery sur- Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and
faces. Remember that stopping distances on the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to
slippery surfaces will be longer than on nor- not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to pre- pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pul-
mal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping vent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle sation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from un-
distances may also be longer on rough, gravel to avoid obstacles. der the bonnet or feel a vibration from the actuator
or snow covered roads, or if you are using when it is operating. This is normal and indicates
snow chains. Always maintain a safe distance that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pul-
WARNING
from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the sation may indicate that road conditions are haz-
driver is responsible for safety. Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may re-
ardous and extra care is required while driving.
•
sult in increased stopping distances.
Tyre type and condition may also affect brak-
ing effectiveness.
– When replacing tyres, install the specified
SELF-TEST FEATURE
size of tyres on all four wheels. The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer
– When installing a spare tyre, make sure
has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the sys-
that it is the proper size and type as speci-
tem each time you start the e-POWER system and
fied on the tyre placard. (See “Vehicle
move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or re-
identification” in the “9. Technical
verse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a
information” section.)
“clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
– For detailed information, see “Wheels and pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a mal-
tyres” in the “8. Maintenance and function. If the computer senses a malfunction, it
do-it-yourself” section. switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warn-
ing light on the instrument panel. The brake system
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the then operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard brak- tance.
ing or when braking on slippery surfaces. The sys- If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-
tem detects the rotation speed at each wheel and test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a
varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY
PROGRAMME (ESP) SYSTEM
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system uses • Adjust your speed and driving to the road condi- especially careful when driving and cornering
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle tions. on slippery surfaces and always drive care-
motion. Under certain driving conditions, the ESP If a malfunction occurs in the system, the slip indi- fully.
system helps to perform the following functions.
cator light illuminates in the instrument panel. • Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If sus-
• Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on The ESP system automatically turns off. pension parts such as shock absorbers, struts,
one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels
to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle. The vehicle information display is used to turn off are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle
• Controls brake pressure and EV system output
the ESP system. The ESP off indicator
nates to indicate the ESP system is off. When the
illumi- or are extremely deteriorated, the ESP system
may not operate properly. This could
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function). ESP system is turned off, the ESP system still oper- adversely affect vehicle handling perfor-
ates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
• Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel.
mance, and the slip indicator light
illuminate.
may
EV system output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following conditions:
The slip indicator light flashes if this occurs. All
other ESP functions are off, and the slip indicator
• If brake related parts such as brake pads, ro-
tors and calipers are not NISSAN recom-
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the
light will not flash. The ESP system is automati- mended or are extremely deteriorated, the
steered path despite increased steering in-
cally reset to on when the power switch is placed in ESP system may not operate properly and the
put).
the off position then back to the on position. slip indicator light may illuminate.
•
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to cer-
See “Warning lights, indicator lights and audible If e-POWER system control related parts are
tain road or driving conditions).
reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec- not NISSAN recommended or are extremely
The ESP system can help the driver to maintain con- tion. deteriorated, the slip indicator light may
trol of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of ve-
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that illuminate.
hicle control in all driving situations.
When the ESP system operates, the slip indicator
tests the system each time you start the EV system
and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow
• When driving on extremely inclined surfaces
such as higher banked corners, the ESP sys-
light in the instrument panel flashes so note speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a tem may not operate properly and the slip in-
the following: “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake dicator light may illuminate. Do not drive
• The road may be slippery or the system may de- pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a
malfunction.
on these types of roads.
termine some action is required to help keep the
vehicle on the steered path. • When driving on an unstable surface such as a
WARNING turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the slip indi-
• You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and
• The ESP system is designed to help improve cator light may illuminate. This is not a
hear a noise or vibration from under the bonnet.
driving stability but does not prevent malfunction. Restart the EV system after driv-
This is normal and indicates that the ESP system
accidents due to abrupt steering operation at ing onto a stable surface.
is working properly.
high speeds or by careless or dangerous driv-
ing techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be

CHASSIS CONTROL
• If wheels or tyres other than the NISSAN rec- The chassis control is an electric control module
ommended ones are used, the ESP system that includes the following functions:
may not operate properly and the slip indica-
tor light may illuminate.
• Intelligent Trace Control
INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL

• The ESP system is not a substitute for winter
tyres or tyre chains on a snow covered road.
WARNING
The Intelligent Trace Control may not be effective
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION depending on the driving condition. Always drive
During braking while driving through turns, the sys- carefully and attentively.
tem optimizes the distribution of force to each of WAF0521XZ
the four wheels depending on the radius of the turn. Example This system senses driving based on the driver’s
To turn off the ESP system, perform the following steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and
HOW TO TURN OFF THE ESP controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid
steps in the vehicle information display., see “Ve-
SYSTEM hicle information display” in the “2. Instruments and tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle
The vehicle should be driven with the Electronic Sta- controls” section for operational details. response.
bility Programme (ESP) system ON for most driving The Intelligent Trace Control can be set to ON (en-
1. Uuse the steering wheel switches to select the
conditions. abled) or OFF (disabled) using the [Driver Assistance]
[Settings] menu.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the ESP sys- settings in the vehicle information display. (See
2. Use the scroll dial to select [ESP Setting] and then
tem reduces the e-POWER system output to de- “[Settings]” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
push the scroll dial.
crease wheel spin. The e-POWER system speed will tion.)
be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to 3. Select [System] and push the scroll dial. The ESP
When the ESP system is turned off, the Intelligent
the floor. If maximum e-POWER system power is OFF indicator light ( ) will illuminate. Trace Control is also turned off.
needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the ESP system Turn [ESP Setting] back on in the vehicle informa-
off. When the Intelligent Trace Control is not function-
tion display or restart the e-POWER system to turn ing properly, the master warning light illuminates,
on the ESP system. and warning message [Chassis Control System
Fault See Owner's Manual] will also appear in the
If the chassis control warning message appears in
the vehicle information display, it may indicate that
the Intelligent Trace Control is not functioning prop-
erly. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

HILL START ASSIST (HSA)
(where fitted)
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or The Hill Start Assist system will operate automati-
WARNING
•
qualified workshop for this service. (See “Vehicle in- cally under the following conditions:
•
formation display” in the “2. Instruments and Never rely solely on the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system to prevent the vehicle from moving The shift control system shifted into D (Drive)
controls” section.) (vehicle facing uphill) or R (Reverse) (vehicle fac-
backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and
When the Intelligent Trace Control is operating, you attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the ing downhill).
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise. This is normal and indicates that the Intelli-
vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially • The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by
careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or applying the footbrake.
gent Trace Control is operating properly. You may muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle
also feel deceleration when the Intelligent Trace The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2
from rolling backwards may result in a loss of seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the
Control is operating. However, this is not a malfunc- control of the vehicle and possible serious in-
tion. Hill Start Assist system will stop operating com-
jury or death. pletely.
• The Hill Start Assist system is not designed to The Hill Start Assist system will not operate when
hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. De- the shift control system is shifted to the N (Neutral)
press the brake pedal when the vehicle is or P (Park) position or on a flat and level road.
stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may When the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) OFF
result in a collision or serious personal injury. indicator light illuminates in the meter, the Hill Start
•
Assist system will not operate. (See “Electronic Sta-
The Hill Start Assist system may not prevent bility Programme (ESP) OFF indicator light (where
the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill un- fitted)” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)
der all load or road conditions. Always be pre-
pared to depress the brake pedal to prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to
do so may result in a collision or serious per-
sonal injury.
The Hill Start Assist system automatically keeps the

brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing backwards in the time it takes the driver to re-
lease the brake pedal and apply the accelerator
when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
WARNING BATTERY 3) Snow chains may be used, if desired. But the use
•
of snow chains may be prohibited in some ar-
Whatever the conditions, drive with caution. If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
eas. Therefore, check the local laws before in-
Accelerate and decelerate with great care. If cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
stalling snow chains. When installing snow
accelerating or decelerating too fast, the drive freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
chains, make sure they are of proper size for the
wheels will lose even more traction. mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
tyres on your vehicle and are installed according
• Allow more stopping distance in cold weather
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “8. Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.
to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
driving. Braking should be started sooner than Use chain tensioners when recommended by
on dry surfaces. ENGINE COOLANT the snow chain manufacturer to ensure a tight
• Keep at a greater distance from the vehicle in If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze,
fit. Loose end links of the snow chain must be
secured or removed to prevent the possibility of
front of you on slippery roads. drain the cooling system. Refill before operating the
•
whipping action damage to the wings or under-
Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain), very cold vehicle. For details, see “Engine cooling system” in
carriage. In addition, drive at a reduced speed,
snow and ice can be slick and very difficult to the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/
drive on. The vehicle will have a lot less trac-
tion or grip under these conditions. Try to
TYRE EQUIPMENT or vehicle handling and performance may be ad-
versely affected.
avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted 1) The SUMMER tyres are of a tread design to pro-
or sanded. vide superior performance on dry surfaces. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
• Watch for slippery spots (black ice). These may
However, the performance of these tyres will be
substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-
It is recommended to carry the following items in
appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded the vehicle during winter:
tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy
areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake
before driving on it. Try not to brake while ac-
roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & • A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice
SNOW or ALL SEASON tyres on all four wheels. and snow from the windows.
•
tually on the ice and avoid any sudden steer-
Please consult a NISSAN dealer or qualified work- A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack
ing manoeuvres.
shop for tyre type, size, speed rating and avail-
•
to give it firm support.
•
Do not use cruise control (where fitted) on slip- ability information.
pery roads. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
• Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gas under

2) For additional traction on icy roads, studded ty-
res may be used. However, some countries, prov-
• Extra windscreen washer fluid to refill the reser-
your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust voir tank.
inces and states prohibit their use. Check appli-
pipe and from around your vehicle. cable laws before installing studded tyres.
CAUTION
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow
tyres on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tyres.

CORROSION PROTECTION
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are ex-
tremely corrosive and will accelerate corrosion and
the deterioration of underbody components such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan, and wings.
In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned pe-
riodically. For additional information, see “Corro-
sion protection” in the “7. Appearance and care”
section.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, consult
a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................... 414 Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Emergency services call eCall/SOS system (where (where fitted)........................................................................................... 421
fitted)..................................................................................................................... 414 Repairing flat tyre (Models with emergency
Automatic eCall..................................................................................... 414 tyre puncture repair kit).................................................................. 423
Manual eCall (SOS button)............................................................ 415 Jump starting ................................................................................................. 426
System status indicator.................................................................. 416 Push starting................................................................................................... 427
Modalities for exercising data subject's rights.............. 416 If your vehicle overheats ........................................................................ 428
Spare tyre........................................................................................................... 417 Towing your vehicle ................................................................................... 429
Temporary-use spare tyre (where fitted)........................... 417 Towing precautions ........................................................................... 429
Conventional spare tyre (where fitted) ............................... 417 Recommendations for towing e-POWER
Flat tyre................................................................................................................ 418 models ......................................................................................................... 429
Stopping the vehicle.......................................................................... 418 Towing eye................................................................................................ 430
Changing flat tyre (Models with spare wheel, Freeing the vehicle from sand, snow or mud................. 430
where fitted) ............................................................................................ 418
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER EMERGENCY SERVICES CALL eCall/SOS SYSTEM (where fitted)
SWITCH
Your vehicle is equipped with the 112-based in-ve- Any processing of personal data through the 112-
hicle emergency services call system (eCall). In the based eCall in-vehicle system shall comply with the
event of a serious road accident emergency an au- personal data protection rules provided for in Direc-
tomatic call can be made to the emergency ser- tives 95/46/EC and 2002/58/EC of the European
vices operator. The system can also be used manu- Parliament and of the Council, and in particular, shall
ally to call the emergency services operator. be based on the necessity to protect the vital inter-
The 112-based eCall service is a public service of ests of the individuals in accordance with Article 7(d)
general interest and is accessible free of charge. of Directive 95/46/EC.
NISSAN is responsible only for the emergency com- Processing of such data is strictly limited to the pur-
munication system technical performance in the pose of handling the emergency eCall to the single
SIC2574Z
event of an accident within the warranty period. European emergency number 112.
Recipients of data processed by the 112-based eCall
The hazard warning flasher switch operates regard-
AUTOMATIC eCall in-vehicle system are the relevant public safety an-
less of the e-POWER power switch position except If the air bag control unit detects a frontal collision, swering points designated by the respective public
when the battery is discharged. side collision or rear collision (where fitted) the sys- authorities of the country on which territory they
tem automatically places an emergency call to the are located, to first receive and handle eCalls to the
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other
emergency call centre. At the same time, the vehicle single European emergency number 112.
drivers when you have to stop or park under emer-
information is also transferred. Once an emergency The following information will be sent to the emer-
gency conditions.
call is received by the emergency call centre, the gency call centre by the vehicle emergency call sys-
When the hazard warning flasher switch is pushed, operator tries to talk to the vehicle's occupant. tem if a collision occurs:
all turn signal lights will flash. To turn off the hazard
warning flasher, push the hazard warning flasher NOTE • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
switch again. • During the emergency call, the volume of the • Vehicle type
When an impact that could activate the supplemen- voice of the operator cannot be adjusted.
• Fuel type
tal air bags is detected, the hazard warning flasher
lights blink automatically. If the hazard warning
• During the emergency call, the volume of the
• Activation type (Automatic/Manual)
vehicle audio will be muted.
flasher switch is pushed, the hazard warning flash-
The eCall system is always enabled by default. It is
• Call type (Test/Emergency)
ers will turn off.
activated automatically by means of in-vehicle sen- • Position (Trusted/Low confidence)
WARNING
sors in the event of a severe accident. • Time stamp (when the collision or event
The eCall system is not traceable and is not subject occurred)
Do not turn the hazard warning flasher switch off
until you can make sure that it is safe to do so.
to any constant tracking in its normal operational • Last three vehicle locations, and vehicle direc-
status. Data in the internal memory of the system is tion
Also, the hazard warning flasher may not blink
automatically depending on the force of impact.
not available outside the in-vehicle system to any
entities before the eCall is triggered.
• Vehicle speed
• (where fitted) Number of passengers

The 112-based eCall in-vehicle system is designed in action does not prevent the occupant(s) of the • Use this service only in case of an emergency.
such a way as to ensure that data in the system vehicle from making a further manual emer- There may be a penalty for inappropriate use
internal memory is automatically and continuously gency call. of the service.
removed. The emergency call function cannot be used in
The vehicle location data is constantly overwritten the following conditions:
in the internal memory of the system so as always
to keep maximum of the last three up-to-date loca-
• The vehicle is outside the area where mobile
network service is receivable.
•
tions of the vehicle necessary for the normal func-
tioning of the system. The vehicle is in a location with poor signal re-
ception such as tunnels, underground parking
The log of activity data in the 112-based eCall in-ve- garages, between buildings or in mountain-
hicle system is kept for no longer than necessary ous areas.
•
for attaining the purpose of handling the emer-
gency eCall and in any case not beyond 13 hours The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) or other sys-
from the moment an emergency eCall was initiated. tems of your vehicle are not working properly. NCE517
• The available mobile network provider at the
CAUTION location of the vehicle is not specified for
1. Switch the power switch ON.
• The automatic emergency call will only be trig- emergency call usage.
2. Push ➀ to open the <SOS> cover ➁.
gered if the vehicle air bag system is activated • The communication line of the emergency call
during the collision. centre is busy. 3. Push the <SOS> button ➂. An emergency call is
• If the automatic emergency call has been trig- sent to the emergency call centre. At the same
time, the vehicle information is also transferred.
gered, please bring your vehicle to a NISSAN MANUAL eCall (SOS BUTTON)
dealer or qualified workshop. This is necessary 4. When the call is connected, you can speak to the
The manual eCall can be performed with the power
because the automatic emergency call sys- emergency support staff.
switched ON, by pushing the <SOS> call button ➂
tem needs to be reset to avoid any unintended If you want to cancel the emergency call, push and
located on the overhead control panel.
eCall being made. hold the <SOS> button for a few seconds. The call
• The mobile network provider that manages After the power switch is switched OFF, if an emer-
gency call was not made, the eCall system is turned
cannot be cancelled after connection.
the connection from the vehicle to the emer-
gency call centre is specified and controlled off.
outside of the vehicle emergency call system.
CAUTION
• Within the first minute of any emergency call
• Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply
the operator will determine if the call is genu-
ine. Should the operator determine it is a non- the parking brake before operating the <SOS>
genuine call they will stop the call, making no button.
further attempts to call the vehicle back. This

NOTE SYSTEM STATUS INDICATOR NOTE
• During the emergency call, the volume of the If the indicator light is illuminated red or no indi-
voice of the operator cannot be adjusted. cator light is illuminated, emergency services
• During the emergency call, the volume of the (such as the police or other agencies) should be
contacted using other normal communication
vehicle audio will be muted.
•
devices (for example a phone) in the event of an
After the <SOS> button is pushed, it may take accident.
some time until the system initiates connec-
tion, depending on the technical environment MODALITIES FOR EXERCISING DATA
and whether the TCU is being used by other SUBJECT'S RIGHTS
services.
The data subject (the vehicle's owner) has a right of
• To avoid disconnecting the call, do not turn the NIC3867 access to data and as appropriate to request the
e-POWER sysstem power switch off. rectification, erasure or blocking of data, concern-
• During the emergency call Bluetooth® Hands- The indicator lights ➃ and ➄ above the <SOS> but-
ing him or her, the processing of which does not
Free Phone connection will be disabled and comply with the provisions of Directive 95/46/EC.
ton indicate the status of the vehicle emergency
phone operation will only be available by mo- Any third parties to whom the data have been dis-
call system. If the indicator light is illuminated red or
bile phone. closed have to be notified of such rectification, era-
no indicator light is illuminated the emergency call
• If the emergency call is disconnected for some may not connect to the emergency call centre when
sure or blocking carried out in compliance with this
Directive, unless it proves impossible or involves a
reason the emergency call centre may call the <SOS> button is pressed. Also an automatic
disproportionate effort.
back. This action does not prevent the occu- emergency call may not be sent when a collision
pant(s) of the vehicle from making another occurs. The data subject has a right to complain to the
manual emergency call. competent data protection authority if he or she
– During vehicle start up the system operates self considers that his or her rights have been infringed
diagnostics and the red indicator light is illumi- as a result of the processing of his or her personal
nated for up to 15 seconds. data.
– At any other time if the red indicator light is illu-
minated contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop for assistance. In the event of a criti-
cal system failure that would disable the 112-
based eCall in-vehicle system, the red indicator
light is illuminated as a warning.

SPARE TYRE
TEMPORARY-USE SPARE TYRE CAUTION CONVENTIONAL SPARE TYRE

(where fitted) • The temporary-use spare tyre should be used (where fitted)
only in emergencies. It should be replaced by A standard wheel and tyre is supplied with your ve-
the standard tyre at the first opportunity. hicle.
• Drive carefully and do not drive your vehicle
faster than 80 km/h (50 MPH).
• Avoid driving over obstacles. Also, do not take
the vehicle through an automatic car wash.
• Avoid driving sharp turns and abrupt braking.
• Do not exceed the vehicle's maximum load
rating or the load-carrying capacity molded
NIC3779
on the sidewall of the temporary-use spare
Temporary use spare tyre label tyre.
The temporary-use spare tyre is designed for emer- • Do not use a snow chain on this tyre because
gency use only. This spare tyre should be used ONLY it will not fit properly. This could cause dam-
for very short periods and NEVER be used for long age to the vehicle and result in loss of the
drives or extended periods. chain.
Observe the following precautions if the temporary- • Do not use the temporary-use spare tyre on
use spare tyre must be used, otherwise your vehicle any other vehicle because this tyre has been
could be damaged or involved in an accident. designed specifically for your vehicle.
WARNING
• The vehicle must not be driven with more than
one temporary-use spare tyre at the same
Any continuous road use of this tyre could result time.
in tyre failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible
personal injury.
• Do not tow a trailer.
• As with all tyres, the temporary-use spare tyre
must be checked regularly to ensure pressure
is maintained.
For pressure details, see the tyre placard lo-
cated on the driver's side centre pillar.

FLAT TYRE
In case of a flat tyre, follow the instructions as de- 8. Have all passengers exit the vehicle and stand in Getting the tools and spare wheel
scribed below: a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the
The spare wheel, jack and tools are located inside
vehicle.
STOPPING THE VEHICLE the luggage compartment.
CHANGING FLAT TYRE (Models with
WARNING spare wheel, where fitted)
• Make sure that the parking brake is securely
applied.
• Make sure that the shift control system is in
the P (Park) position.
• Never change tyres when the vehicle is on a
slope, ice or a slippery area. This is hazardous.
• Never change tyres if oncoming traffic is close
NCE507
to your vehicle. Wait for professional road
assistance.
MCE0001DZ
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road, away from
traffic.
Blocking the wheels
2. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface. WARNING
4. Apply the parking brake. Make sure to block the appropriate wheel to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving, which may cause
5. Press the P position switch to shift to the P (Park)
personal injury.
position.
6. Turn off the e-POWER system.
Place suitable blocks ➀ in front of and behind the NCE524
7. Open the bonnet (for details, see “Bonnet” in the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre jA to pre-
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section) vent the vehicle from moving when it is on the jack.
in order to: 1. Open the tailgate.
• Warn other traffic. 2. Remove the luggage boards and luggage com-
• Signal to professional road assistance that

partment floor cover.
3. Remove the retainer by turning it anticlockwise.
you require assistance.

4. If you have a subwoofer speaker fitted, lift it out Removing the wheel
carefully and place it in a safe position away from
the spare wheel. Do not strain the cable WARNING
attached to the subwoofer.
• Make sure to read the caution label attached
5. Remove the jack, tools and spare wheel. to the jack body before use.
• DO NOT GET UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS SUP-
PORTED BY A JACK.
• Never use a jack which was not provided with
your vehicle.
• The jack, which is provided with your vehicle is
Jacking points
NDI1788
designed only to lift your vehicle during a tyre

change. 1. Place the jack directly under the jacking point as
• Use the correct jacking points. Never use any illustrated so that the top of the jack contacts the
other part of the vehicle for jack support. vehicle at the jacking point.
SCE0173AZ
• Never lift the vehicle more than necessary.
CAUTION
Removing wheel cover (where fitted)
• Never use blocks on or under the jack.
•
The jack should be placed on firm level ground.
Do not start or run the e-POWER system while
the vehicle is on the jack. The vehicle may
WARNING move suddenly, and this may cause an acci-
2. Align the centre of both the jack head and the
Take care when removing the wheel cover as the notches at the jacking point as shown.
dent.
cover may detach suddenly.
• Never allow passengers to stay in the vehicle
3. Fit the groove of the jack head between the two
notches as shown.
while the tyre is off the ground.
•
Remove the wheel cover as illustrated with a suit-
able tool or carefully remove the wheel cover with Remove all loads before lifting the vehicle with
both hands. the jack.

6. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tyre clears the
ground.
7. Remove the wheel bolts, then remove the wheel
with the flat tyre.
CAUTION
The wheel is heavy. Be sure that your feet are clear
of the wheel and use gloves as necessary to avoid
injury.
NCE526 NCE435
Installing the wheel
4. Alloy wheels (where fitted): Alloy wheel bolts A Tighten
j
WARNING
•
have a plastic cap that can be removed using B Loosen
j
tweezers (where fitted) from the tool kit. The temporary use spare tyre (where fitted) is
designed for emergency use. See “Spare tyre” 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between
Loosen each wheel bolt by one or two turns an- earlier in this section. the wheel and the hub.
•
ticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
Never use wheel bolts other than those pro- 2. Carefully fit the wheel and tighten the wheel bolts
Do not remove the wheel bolts until the tyre is vided with your vehicle. Incorrect wheel bolts with your fingers. Check that all the wheel bolts
off the ground. or improperly tightened wheel bolts may contact the wheel surface horizontally and on
cause the wheel to become loose or come off. the bevelled side.
This could cause an accident.
3. With the wheel wrench, tighten the wheel bolts
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts. This alternately and evenly in the sequence as illus-
may cause the wheel bolts to become loose. trated (➀ - ➄) until they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tyre touches
the ground.
5. Tighten the wheel bolts securely using the wheel
wrench in the sequence as illustrated.
6. Lower the vehicle completely.
NCE309
5. To lift the vehicle, securely hold and turn the

handle clockwise as shown.

7. Install the wheel cover (where fitted). Stowing the wheel and tools TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
NOTE Securely store the wheel with the flat tyre, the jack SYSTEM (TPMS) (where fitted)
Before installation, align NISSAN logo (centre and the tools in the specified storage areas.
cap) with the wheel bolts/or perpendicular to
valve hole (where fitted), to correctly align to
the centre.
Wheel bolt tightening torque:
113 N•m (12 kg-m, 83 ft-lb)
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel bolts to
the specified torque with a torque wrench.
WARNING
NDI1751
Retighten the wheel bolts after the vehicle has NCE525
been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles) (also in cases Subwoofer speaker
of a flat tyre, etc.). A Tyre valve with sensor
j
The wheel bolts must be kept tightened to specifi- CAUTION WARNING

cation at all times. It is recommended that the wheel Take care when refitting the subwoofer in the • If the TPMS indicator light illuminates while
bolts be tightened to specification at each mainte- spare wheel. It is important to align the speaker driving:
nance interval. as shown to ensure that the cable is not stretched. – avoid sudden steering manoeuvres
Adjust the tyre pressure to the COLD pressure. Check that the cable attached to the speaker is
not under strain. – avoid abrupt braking
COLD pressure is the tyre pressure as measured af- – reduce vehicle speed
ter the vehicle has been parked for three hours or
more or driven for less than 1.6 km (1 mile). – pull off the road to a safe location
COLD tyre pressures are shown on the tyre placard – stop the vehicle as soon as possible
affixed to the driver's side centre pillar. • Driving with under-inflated tyres may perma-
nently damage the tyres and increase the like-
lihood of tyre failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur which may lead to an accident and
could result in serious personal injury.

• Check the tyre pressure for all four tyres. Ad-
CAUTION • Do not damage the valves and sensors when
•
just the tyre pressure to the recommended storing the wheels or fitting different tyres.
•
COLD tyre pressure shown on the tyre placard The TPMS may not function properly when the
wheels are equipped with tyre chains or the Replace the TPMS sensor valve stem (includ-
to turn the TPMS indicator light “OFF”. In case ing valve core and cap) and screw (where fit-
of a flat tyre, replace it with a spare tyre as wheels are buried in snow.
•
ted) when the tyres are replaced due to wear
soon as possible. Do not place metalised film or any metal parts or age. The screw (where fitted) must be fitted
• When a spare tyre is mounted or a wheel is (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may
cause poor reception of the signals from the
correctly with a torque setting of 1.4 ± 0.1 N.m.
replaced, the TPMS will not function and the The TPMS sensors can be used again.
TPMS indicator light will flash for approxi- tyre pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not
mately 1 minute. The light will remain on after function properly.
The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) moni-
1 minute. Be sure to follow all instructions for Some devices and transmitters may tempo- tors the tyre pressure of the four wheels except the
wheel replacement and make sure the TPMS rarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS spare wheel. When the TPMS indicator light comes
system is mounted correctly. and cause the TPMS indicator light to illumi- on together with the TPMS tyre location indicator
• Replacing tyres with those not originally nate. Some examples are: light (in the meter panel), one or more of the tyres is
specified by NISSAN could affect the proper – Facilities or electric devices using similar significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being
operation of the TPMS. radio frequencies are near the vehicle. driven with low tyre pressure, the TPMS will activate
• The Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tyre Repair – If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
and TPMS indicator light together with the TPMS
tyre location indicator light remains on. This system
Sealant can be used for temporarily repairing being used in or near the vehicle.
will deactivate only when tyre pressure is corrected
a tyre. Do not inject any other tyre liquid or – If a computer (or similar equipment) or a and the vehicle is driven at speeds above 25 km/h
aerosol tyre sealant into the tyres, as this may DC/AC converter is being used in or near (16 MPH).
cause a malfunction of the tyre pressure sen- the vehicle.
For more details about the TPMS, see “Tyre Pressure
•
sors.
•
When inflating the tyres and checking the tyre Monitoring System (TPMS) (where fitted)” in the
NISSAN recommends using only Genuine pressure, never bend the valves. “5. Starting and driving” section.
•
NISSAN Emergency Tyre Sealant provided with
your vehicle. Other tyre sealants may damage Use Genuine NISSAN valve caps that comply
the valve stem seal which can cause the tyre with the factory-fitted valve cap specifica-
to lose air pressure. Visit a NISSAN dealer or tions.
qualified workshop as soon as possible after • Do not use metal valve caps.
using tyre repair sealant (for models equipped
with the emergency tyre puncture repair kit).
• Fit the valve caps properly. Without the valve
caps the valve and tyre pressure monitor sen-
sors could be damaged.

REPAIRING FLAT TYRE (Models with Before using emergency tyre puncture
emergency tyre puncture repair kit) repair kit
The emergency tyre puncture repair kit is supplied • If any foreign object (for example, a screw or nail)
with the vehicle instead of a spare tyre. This repair is embedded in the tyre, do not remove it.
kit must be used for temporarily fixing a minor tyre • Check the expiration date of the sealant (shown
puncture. After using the repair kit, see a NISSAN on the label attached to the bottle). Never use a
dealer or qualified workshop as soon as possible for sealant which has passed its expiration date.
tyre inspection and repair/replacement.
CAUTION NCE371
Do not use the emergency tyre puncture repair
kit under the following conditions. Contact a
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop or profes- Getting emergency tyre puncture
sional road assistance. repair kit
• when the sealant has passed its expiration Take the emergency tyre puncture repair kit out of
date (shown on the label attached to the the boot. The repair kit consists of the following
bottle) items:
• when the cut or the puncture is approximately ➀ Tyre sealant bottle

4 mm (0.16 in) or longer ➁ Air compressor
• when the side of the tyre is damaged ➂ Speed restriction sticker
• when the vehicle has been driven with a con-
NOTE
siderable loss of air from the tyre
• when the tyre is completely displaced inside
For models with the emergency tyre puncture re-
pair kit, a spare tyre, jack and rod are not equipped
or outside the rim
as standard. These parts are dealer options. Con-
• when the tyre rim is damaged tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop about
• when two or more tyres are flat obtaining these parts. See “Removing the wheel”
earlier in this section for usage of jacking tools
and tyre replacement.

6. Insert its power plug into the power outlet in the
vehicle. Make sure no other accessories are fitted
to the power outlet. For details, see “Power
outlets” in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-
tion.
7. Switch the e-POWER system power switch ON.
8. Switch on the compressor, and inflate the tyre to
the pressure that is specified on the tyre placard
affixed to the driver’s side centre pillar.
NCE315
CAUTION
Do not operate the compressor for more than 10
4. Remove the speed restriction sticker from the minutes.
compressor, then place it in a location where the
driver can see it while driving.
If the tyre pressure does not increase to the speci-
fied pressure within 10 minutes, the tyre may be
seriously damaged and the tyre cannot be
repaired with this tyre repair kit. Contact a NISSAN
9. Remove the air compressor from the tyre valve.
Immediately drive the vehicle at a speed of 80
km/h (50 MPH) or less.
10. After 10 minute or 10 km (6 miles) drive, check
NCE343
the tyre pressure. The temporary repair is com-
NCE344 pleted if the tyre pressure does not drop.
Repairing tyre If the tyre pressure is lower than specified, re-
1. Shake the sealant bottle well ➀. 5. Screw the air tube jA of the compressor securely peat the steps from step 5.
2. Remove the bottle cap ➂ and the orange plug ➁ onto the tyre valve. Make sure that the air com- If the pressure drops again or under 130 kPa (1,3
from the top of the compressor. pressor switch is in the “OFF” (0) position and the bar, 19 psi), the tyre cannot be repaired with
pressure release valve j B is securely closed. this tyre repair kit. Contact a NISSAN dealer or
3. Screw the bottle ➃ into the opening of the com- qualified workshop.
pressor (where the orange plug was).

After repairing tyre
See a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for tyre
repair/replacement, inspection/replacement of the
TPMS sensor and for a new tyre sealant bottle and
hose, as soon as possible.

JUMP STARTING
• Never lean over the battery while jump-start-

ing.
• Never allow battery fluid to come into contact
with eyes, skin, clothes or the vehicle's painted
surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric
acid which can cause severe burns. If the fluid
comes into contact with anything, immedi-
ately flush the contacted area with plenty of
water.
• Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
• The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts.
Use of an incorrectly rated battery will dam-
age your vehicle.
• Never attempt to jump-start a frozen battery.
It could explode and cause serious injury.
1. Check if the parking brake is applied.

If not, after connecting the vehicle with the
booster battery (after step 8), apply the parking
brake.
The vehicle has an electric parking brake, for more
information see, “Electric Parking Brake” in the
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section
NCE527
2. Prepare vehicle (A) with the booster battery for
the vehicle (B) being jump-started.
• Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in
WARNING the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and CAUTION
• Incorrect jump-starting can lead to a battery flames away from the battery. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
explosion. The battery explosion may result in • Always wear suitable eye protection glasses
severe injury or death. It may also result in and remove rings, bracelets, and any other 3. Press the P position switch to shift to the P (Park)
damage to the vehicle. Be sure to follow the jewellery whenever working on or near a bat- position).
instructions in this section. tery.
4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems
(headlights, hazard lights, etc.).

PUSH STARTING
5. Ensure that the power switch of the vehicle be- Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing the
CAUTION
ing jump-started is OFF. vehicle.
Never keep the starter motor engaged for
6. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet” in the more than 10 seconds. If the e-POWER system
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section. CAUTION
•
does not start immediately, switch the power
7. Using a trim tool other appropriate tool if neces- switch OFF and wait 10 seconds before trying Starting the engine by pushing the vehicle
sary, release the three locking tabs and remove again. may damage the three-way catalyst.
the engine compartment fuse box cover on the • The e-POWER vehicles cannot be push-started
vehicle jB being jump-started to allow access to 12. After starting the e-POWER system of your ve- or tow-started. Attempting to do so may
the positive j+ terminal inside the fuse box. hicle, carefully disconnect the negative lead and cause electric motor damage
+ terminal cover.
8. Open the red positive j then the positive lead ( ➃ ̔ ➂ ̔ ➁ ̔ ➀). • Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when
9. Connect the jump leads in the sequence (➀ ̔ ➁ + terminal cover insider
13. Close the red positive j the engine starts, the forward surge could
cause the vehicle to collide with the tow
̔ ➂ ̔ ➃) as illustrated. the fuse box and replace the fuse box cover
vehicle.
14. Close the bonnet.
CAUTION
• Always connect positive j + ➀ to positive
NOTE
+ ➁ and negative j
j - ➂ to body earth ➃ • Do not use this vehicle as a booster vehicle.
NOT to the 12-volt battery’s negative j
- ter- • If the e-POWER system cannot be started,
minal, engine or motor. place the power switch in the OFF position
• An incorrect connection could damage the with the driver’s door open. Get out of the ve-
hicle, close the driver’s door and wait for more
charging system.
•
than 3 minutes. Then restart the e-POWER sys-
Be sure that the jumper cables do not touch tem.
•
moving parts in the engine compartment.
•
If the 12-volt battery is discharged, the power
Be careful not to allow contact between the switch cannot be placed in the ON or OFF posi-
positive jump lead connector and the ve- tion. Charge the 12-volt battery immediately.
hicle or the negative lead during connec-
tion and disconnection.
10. Start the engine of the other vehicle j

A and let it
run for a few minutes. Keep the engine speed at
about 2,000 rpm.
11. Start the e-POWER system of your vehicle j
B in
the normal way.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
5. Open all windows.

WARNING WARNING
• Never continue driving if the engine of your 6. Switch off the air conditioner system (where fit-
ted).
Before removing the engine coolant reservoir
vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause a ve- cap and to avoid the danger of being scalded,
hicle fire. 7. Set the heater or air conditioner temperature cover the reservoir cap with a rag and loosen
• Never open the bonnet if steam is coming out. control to maximum “HOT” and fan speed control the reservoir cap to the first notch to allow the
•
to maximum speed. steam to escape.
Never remove the engine coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is hot. If the engine cool- 8. Exit the vehicle.
14. Close the bonnet.
ant reservoir cap is removed when the engine 9. Visually inspect and listen for steam or coolant
is hot, pressurized hot water will spurt out and escaping from the radiator before opening the Have your vehicle inspected or repaired by a NISSAN
possibly cause burning, scalding or serious in- bonnet. Wait until no steam or coolant can be dealer or qualified workshop.
jury. seen before proceeding.
• If steam or coolant is coming out of the en- 10. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet” in the
gine, stand clear of the vehicle to prevent get- “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
ting injured. 11. Visually check if the cooling fan is running.
• The engine cooling fan or engine will start 12. Visually check the radiator and radiator hoses
whenever the coolant temperature exceeds for leakage.
preset degrees.
• Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewel- WARNING
lery or clothing to come into contact with, or If coolant is leaking, or the cooling fan is not
get caught in, the cooling fan or drive belts. running, stop the engine.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by the high After the engine cools down, check the coolant
temperature indicator), or if you feel a lack of trac- level in the reservoir with the engine running. Do
tion motor power, detect an unusual noise, etc., take not open the engine coolant reservoir cap.
the following steps:
13. If the level is low, remove the engine coolant res-
1. Move and park the vehicle safely off the road and ervoir cap and add coolant slowly into the res-
away from traffic. ervoir. After refilling the reservoir to the MAX
2. Turn on the hazard warning flasher lights. level, install the reservoir cap.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Push the P position switch to engage the P (Park)
position.
DO NOT STOP THE e-POWER system.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
When towing your vehicle, local regulations for tow- RECOMMENDATIONS FOR TOWING
ing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment
E-POWER MODELS
could damage your vehicle. To assure proper tow-
ing and to prevent accidental damage to your ve-
hicle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service
CAUTION
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the NEVER tow e-POWER models with the front
service operator carefully read the following pre- wheels on the ground or with all four wheels on
cautions. the ground (forwards or backwards), this may
cause serious and expensive damage to the ve-
If you have subscribed to NissanConnect Services
hicle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle, always
you will receive a notification on your connected
use a dolly under the front wheels or use a flatbed
device via the NissanConnect Services App notify-
tow truck as illustrated.
ing you on the tow.
Towing with rear wheels on the ground:

WARNING
• Do not allow any occupants in the vehicle that 1. Place the power switch in the OFF position.
is being towed. 2. Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
• Never get under your vehicle after it has been position with rope or a similar device.
lifted by a tow truck. 3. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
4. Release the parking brake.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS 5. Attach safety chains for all towing.
• When towing: Make sure that the axles, steering
system and power train are in working condi-
tion before towing. If any units are damaged, the
vehicle must be towed using a dolly or be placed
on a flat bed lorry.
• NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground.
• Always attach safety chains before towing.
NCE514

TOWING EYE FREEING THE VEHICLE FROM SAND,
SNOW OR MUD
WARNING
• Never allow anyone to stand near the towing
line during the pulling operation.
• Never spin the tyres at high speed. This could
cause serious damage to the tyres and result
in serious injury. Parts of the vehicle could also
overheat and be damaged.
SCE0833Z
Towing eye usage
The towing eye is stored with the vehicle tools and The towing eye should be used in the event that
located in the spare wheel recess (luggage com- your vehicle becomes trapped in sand, snow or
partment area). mud, and is unable to drive away without being
pulled, use the towing eye.
1) Remove the cover from the bumper.
2) Securely install the towing eye, as illustrated. • Use the towing eye only, not other parts of the
vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be dam-
Make sure that the towing eye is properly stored in aged.
its designated location after use.
• Only use the towing eye to free a vehicle stuck in
NOTE sand, snow, mud, etc.
• Ensure that the towing eye is securely fitted to • Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using
the vehicle. only the towing eye.
• Your vehicle may be supplied with two towing • The towing eye is under tremendous force when
eyes. In this case, use the longer eye on the used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the cable
front of the vehicle, and the shorter eye on the straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never
rear of the vehicle. pull on the towing eye at a sideways angle.
CAUTION
In order not to break the towing line, tension it
slowly.

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior.......................................................................................... 432 Air fresheners.......................................................................................... 434

Washing....................................................................................................... 432 Floor mats ................................................................................................. 434
Removing spots.................................................................................... 432 Cleaning Glass........................................................................................ 435
Waxing.......................................................................................................... 432 Plastic parts ............................................................................................. 435
Cleaning glass ........................................................................................ 433 Seat belts ................................................................................................... 435
Cleaning rear-view camera (where fitted) ........................ 433 Corrosion protection................................................................................. 435
Underbody ................................................................................................ 433 Most common factors contributing to vehicle
Care of wheels........................................................................................ 433 corrosion .................................................................................................... 435
Cleaning aluminium alloy wheels............................................ 433 Environmental factors influence the rate of
Chrome parts.......................................................................................... 433 corrosion .................................................................................................... 435
Cleaning interior........................................................................................... 434 To protect your vehicle from corrosion .............................. 436
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, • Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or REMOVING SPOTS
it is important to take proper care of it. while the vehicle body is hot, as the paint sur-
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
Whenever possible, park your vehicle inside a ga- face may become water-spotted.
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint
rage or in a covered area to minimise the chances • Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special
of damaging the paint surface of your vehicle. such as washing mitts. Care must be taken cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign or any automotive accessory store.
area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be substances so the paint surface is not
careful not to scratch the paint surface when put- scratched or damaged. WAXING
ting on or removing the body cover. Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps
3. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean to retain a new vehicle appearance.
WASHING water. After waxing, polishing is recommended to remove
In the following instances, wash your vehicle as 4. Use a damp chamois to dry the paint surface to built-up residue.
soon as possible to protect the paint surface: avoid leaving water spots. A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop can assist
• After a rainfall, to prevent possible damage from When washing the vehicle, take care of the follow- you in choosing the appropriate waxing products.
acid rain. ing:
• After driving on coastal roads. • Inside flanges, joints and folds on the doors, tail- CAUTION
• When contaminants such as soot, bird gate and bonnet are particularly vulnerable to • Wash your vehicle thoroughly and completely
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or insects the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas before applying wax to the paint surface.
get on the paint surface. must be cleaned regularly.
• Always follow the manufacturer's instructions
• When dust or mud builds up on the paint sur- • Be sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of supplied with the wax.
face. the doors are not clogged.
• Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
1. Wash the vehicle surface with a wet sponge and • Spray water on the underbody and in the wheel cutting compounds or cleaners that may
plenty of water. wells to loosen the dirt and/or wash away road damage the vehicle finish.
2. Clean the vehicle surface gently and thoroughly
salt.
• If the vehicle surface cannot polish easily, ap-
using a mild soap or a special vehicle wash sham- • If using a high pressure washer always follow ply a road tar remover prior to waxing the ve-
poo mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) wa- the recommendations on the equipment (pres- hicle.
ter. sure and spraying distance).
• Machine compounding or aggressive polish-
• If there are damaged areas on the vehicle (e.g. ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may
CAUTION painted bumpers or headlight assembly), it is not dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
• Do not wash the vehicle with strong house- recommended to direct the high pressure jet
hold soap, strong chemical detergents, petrol onto them. Carefully wash these areas by hand.
or solvents. • Avoid the entry of water into the locks.

CLEANING GLASS UNDERBODY CLEANING ALUMINIUM ALLOY
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film In areas where road salt is used in the winter, the WHEELS
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to be- vehicle's underbody must be cleaned regularly. This Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened
come coated with a film after the vehicle is parked will prevent dirt and salt from building up and caus- in a mild soap solution, especially during winter in
in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will ing underbody and suspension corrosion. areas where road salt is used. The salt residue from
easily remove this film. Before the winter period and again in the spring, road salt could discolour the wheels if it is not
the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, washed off regularly.
CLEANING REAR-VIEW CAMERA
re-treated.
(where fitted) CAUTION
Clean the transparent camera cover regularly. If dirt, CARE OF WHEELS
Follow the directions as described below in order
rain or snow attaches to the cover, the monitor may • Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to to avoid staining or discolouring of the wheels.
•
not display objects clearly. maintain their appearance.
Do not use a cleaner that contains strong con-
CAUTION
• Clean the inner side of the wheels when the tents of acid or alkali to clean the wheels.
• Do not use alcohol, benzene or thinner to clean

wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle
is washed. • Do not apply wheel cleaner when the wheels
are hot. The wheel temperature should be the
the transparent camera cover. This will cause
discolouration. To clean the cover, first use a
• Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the same as ambient temperature.
cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning
wheels.
• Rinse the wheel to completely remove the
agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. • Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corro- cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner has
• Do not use body wax on the transparent cam-
sion. This may cause loss of pressure or damage
the tyre bead.
been applied.
era cover.
• When washing the vehicle with a high pres-
• NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be
CHROME PARTS
waxed to protect against road salt in areas
sure water spray, make sure not to spray it Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive
where it is used during winter.
around the transparent camera cover. Other- chrome polish to maintain the finish.
wise, water may enter the camera unit caus-
ing water condensation on the lens and it may
result in a malfunction or an electric shock.

CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior AIR FRESHENERS

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather sur-
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap
the following precautions:
solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to • Hanging-type air fresheners can cause perma-
nent discolouration when they contact vehicle
maintain the appearance of the leather.
interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a lo-
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu- cation that allows it to hang free and not con-
facturer's recommendations. Some fabric protec- tact an interior surface.
tors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the
seat material. • Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the SAI0037Z
vents. These products can cause immediate
Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to clean damage and discolouration when spilled on in-
the meter and gauge lens covers. terior surfaces. Floor mat positioning aid
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s Note that the above illustration is for LHD models.
CAUTION instructions before using air fresheners. A to
This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets j
• Never use benzene, thinner or any similar ma-
FLOOR MATS
act as a floor mat positioning aid. Genuine NISSAN
terial. floor mats have been specially designed for your
• Small dirt particles can be abrasive and dam- NISSAN recommends the use of Genuine NISSAN vehicle.
aging to leather surfaces and should be re- floor mats.
Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket
moved promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats (where fitted) hook through the floor mat grommet hole while
waxes, polishes, oils cleaning fluids, solvents, can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make centring the mat in the foot area.
detergents or ammonia based cleaners as it easier to clean the interior. Regardless of what
they may damage the leather's natural finish. Periodically check that the mats are properly posi-
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your ve-
•
tioned.
Never use fabric protectors unless recom- hicle and are properly positioned in the foot well to
mended by the manufacturer. prevent interference with pedal operation at all
• Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or

times. Mats should be maintained with regular
cleaning and replaced if they become excessively
gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens
worn.
covers.

CORROSION PROTECTION
CLEANING GLASS CAUTION MOST COMMON FACTORS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film Do not use glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce the CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to be- sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper CORROSION
come coated with a film after the vehicle is parked
in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will
operation.
• The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and
debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other
easily remove this film.
PLASTIC PARTS areas.
CAUTION Plastic parts can be cleaned with a mild soap solu- • Damage to the paint surface and other protec-
tion. If the dirt cannot be easily removed, use a plas- tive coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not
tic cleaner. Do not use any solvents. or minor traffic accidents.
use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlo-
rine based disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- SEAT BELTS ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
age electrical conductors such as the rear win- INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
dow defogger.
WARNING CORROSION
Do not stick labels on the inside surface of the
glass. Removing stickers and its residue could
• Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
Moisture
retractor.
•
damage electrical conductors such as the rear Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle
window defogger. Never use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to
body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor
clean the seat belts, since these materials may
Take care that any objects stored in the luggage coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle,
severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
room, do not come in contact with the inside sur- and should be removed for drying to avoid floor
face of the rear window. This is to avoid damage panels corrosion.
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with
to electrical conductors such as the rear window Relative humidity
a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
defogger.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade be- Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high rela-
fore using them. tive humidity, especially those areas where the tem-
Automatic anti-dazzling inside peratures stay above freezing, where atmospheric
rear-view mirror (where fitted) pollution exists and road salt is used.
Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to clean Temperature
the automatic anti-dazzling inside rear view mirror
(where fitted). A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well venti-
lated.
Corrosion will also accelerate in areas where the
temperatures stay above freezing.

Air pollution In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned pe-
riodically.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in
coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate For additional protection against rust and corro-
the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate sion, which may be required in some areas, consult
the disintegration of paint surfaces. a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION
• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
• Always check for minor damage to the paint sur-
face and if any exists, repair it as soon as pos-
sible.
• Keep the drain holes at the bottom of the doors
and back door opened to avoid water accumu-
lation.
• Check the vehicle underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
• Never remove dirt, sand or other debris from
the passenger compartment by washing it out
with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum
cleaner or broom.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in
contact with electronic components inside the
vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are ex-

tremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and
deterioration of underbody components such as
the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders.

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements.................................................................. 438 Spark plugs....................................................................................................... 452

Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 438 Replacing Spark plugs ..................................................................... 452
General maintenance....................................................................... 438 Air cleaner.......................................................................................................... 453
Where to go for service ................................................................... 438 Dry paper filter element.................................................................. 453
General maintenance ............................................................................... 438 Wiper blades .................................................................................................... 454
Explanation of general maintenance items .................... 438 Cleaning...................................................................................................... 454
Maintenance precautions ..................................................................... 440 Front window wiper replacement........................................... 454
Engine compartment ............................................................................... 441 Rear window wiper replacement ............................................ 454
Engine cooling system............................................................................. 442 Windscreen washer nozzle........................................................... 454
Checking engine coolant level................................................... 442 Fuses ..................................................................................................................... 455
Changing engine coolant.............................................................. 442 Passenger compartment .............................................................. 455
Inverter cooling system .......................................................................... 443 Engine compartment ....................................................................... 458
Checking inverter coolant level ................................................ 444 Lights..................................................................................................................... 459
Changing inverter coolant ........................................................... 444 Headlights ................................................................................................. 459
Engine oil............................................................................................................ 445 Exterior lights.......................................................................................... 459
Checking engine oil level ............................................................... 445 Interior lights........................................................................................... 459
Changing engine oil and oil filter............................................. 445 Light locations ....................................................................................... 460
Protect the environment ............................................................... 447 Wheels and tyres .......................................................................................... 462
Gear fluid ............................................................................................................ 447 Tyre inflation pressure ..................................................................... 462
Brakes ................................................................................................................... 447 Types of tyres.......................................................................................... 463
Checking parking brake ................................................................. 447 Snow chains ............................................................................................ 463
Checking brake pedal....................................................................... 447 Tyre rotation............................................................................................ 464
Brake fluid.......................................................................................................... 448 Tyre wear and damage ................................................................... 464
Window washer fluid................................................................................. 448 Tyre age....................................................................................................... 464
Battery ................................................................................................................. 449 Changing tyres and wheels ......................................................... 464
Vehicle 12V battery ............................................................................. 450 Wheel balance ........................................................................................ 465
Intelligent Key battery replacement...................................... 450 Spare tyre................................................................................................... 465
Drive belt............................................................................................................. 452 Care of wheels........................................................................................ 465
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is es- WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE During the normal day-to-day operation of the ve-
sential to maintain your vehicle's good mechanical hicle, general maintenance should be performed
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
condition, as well as its emission and engine perfor- regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect
appears to malfunction, have the systems checked
mance. any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to
and tuned by an authorised NISSAN dealer or quali-
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer or
fied workshop.
specified maintenance, as well as general mainte- qualified workshop do it promptly. In addition, you
nance, is performed. should notify a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop
if repairs are required.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can
ensure that your vehicle receives the proper main- When performing any checks or maintenance work,
tenance care. closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” later
in this section.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
For your convenience, the required scheduled main-
tenance items are described and listed in the sepa-
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
rate Warranty Information and Maintenance book- Additional information on the following items
let. You must refer to that booklet to ensure that with an asterisk (*) is found later in this section.
necessary maintenance is performed on your ve- The maintenance items listed here should be per-
hicle at regular intervals. formed from time to time, unless otherwise speci-
fied.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which Outside the vehicle
should be checked during normal day-to-day op- Tailgate, doors and bonnet:
eration of the vehicle. They are essential if your ve-
Check that the tailgate, all doors and the bonnet
hicle is to continue to operate properly. It is your
operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock
responsibility to perform these procedures regu-
securely. Lubricate hinges and latches if necessary.
larly as prescribed.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the bon-
Performing general maintenance checks requires net from opening when the primary latch is re-
minimal mechanical skill and a few general auto- leased.
motive tools.
When driving in areas using road salt or other cor-
These checks or inspections can be done by your- rosive materials, check for lubrication frequently.
self, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, your
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.

Lights*: Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Under the bonnet and vehicle
Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure transmitter components (where fitted):
The maintenance items listed here should be
that the headlights, brake lights, tail lights, turn sig- Replace the TPMS sensor valve stem (including valve
checked periodically, e.g. each time you check the
nal lights, and other lights are all operating properly core and cap) and screw (where fitted) when the
engine oil or refuel.
and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. tyres are replaced due to wear or age. The screw
(where fitted) must be fitted correctly with a torque 12V Battery (except for maintenance free
Tyres*: setting of 1.4 ± 0.1 N.m. The TPMS sensors can be batteries)*:
Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when used again. The 12V battery is located at the bottom of the lug-
at a service station (including the spare) and adjust gage compartment
to the specified pressure if necessary. Check care- Wheel alignment and balance:
If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be be-
fully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or tween the <UPPER> and <LOWER> lines. Vehicles
Tyre rotation*: abnormal tyre wear, alignment should be checked operated in high temperatures or under severe con-
In the case of Two-Wheel Drive (2WD), and front and and tyre replacement may be necessary. If the steer- ditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid
rear tyres are the same size; tyres should be rotated ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway level.
every 10,000 km (6,000 miles). Tyres marked with speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. Brake fluid level*:
directional indicators can only be rotated between
Wheel bolts: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the
front and rear. Make sure that the directional indica-
When checking the tyres, make sure no wheel bolts <MAX> and <MIN> lines on the reservoir.
tors point in the direction of wheel rotation after
the tyre rotation is completed. are missing, and check for any loose wheel bolts. See “Brake fluid” later in this section.
Tighten if necessary.
In the case of Four-Wheel Drive (4WD), and front and Engine coolant level*:
rear tyres are the same size; tyres should be rotated Windscreen: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
every 5,000 km (3,000 miles). Tyres marked with di- Clean the windscreen on a regular basis. Check the Make sure that the coolant level is between the
rectional indicators can only be rotated between windscreen at least every six months for cracks or <MAX> and <MIN> lines on the reservoir.
front and rear. Make sure that the directional indica- other damage. Have a damaged windscreen See “Engine cooling system” later in this section.
tors point in the direction of wheel rotation after repaired by a qualified repair facility.
the tyre rotation is completed. Inverter coolant level*:
Wiper blades*:
In the case that front tyres are different size from Check the coolant level when the engine and in-
Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe prop- verter are cold. Make sure that the coolant level is
rear tyres; tyres cannot be rotated. erly. between the <MAX> and <MIN> lines on the reser-
The timing for tyre rotation may vary according to voir.
your driving habits and the road surface conditions.
See “Inverter cooling system” later in this section.
Engine drive belt*:
Make sure that the drive belt is not frayed, worn,
cracked or oily.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Engine oil level*: Parking brake*: When performing any inspection or maintenance
Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level Confirm your vehicle can be held securely on a fairly work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
surface and turning off the engine. steep hill with only the parking brake applied. serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precautions
See “Engine oil” later in this section. Seats: which should be closely observed.
Fluid leaks: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters,
Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate WARNING
fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a
while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after
smoothly and all latches lock securely in every posi-
tion. Check that the head restraints move up and • Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace
the high voltage parts, harnesses and their
use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if down smoothly and the locks hold securely in all
connectors. High voltage harnesses are
petrol fumes are evident, check for the cause and latched positions.
orange. Touching, disassembling, removing or
have it corrected immediately. Seat belts: replacing those parts and harnesses can
Window washer fluid*: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. cause severe burns or electric shock that may
Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate result in serious injury or death.
See “Window washer fluid” later in this section.

properly and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or
• Never try to remove the service plug located
under the console box. The service plug is used
Inside the vehicle damage. See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, only when the vehicle is serviced by trained
Seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System” sec- technicians wearing personal protection
The maintenance items listed here should be
tion for further details. equipment and is part of the high voltage sys-
checked on a regular basis, such as when perform-
ing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Steering wheel: tem. Touching the service plug can cause se-
Check for any change in the steering conditions, vere burns or electric shock that may result in
Accelerator pedal: serious injury or death.
such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make
sure that the pedal does not catch or require un-
noises. • The e-POWER system uses high voltage up to
approximately 420 volts. The system can be
even effort. Keep the floor mats away from the Warning lights and audible reminders:
hot while and after starting. Be careful of both
pedal. Make sure that all warning/indicator lights and au-
the high voltage and the high temperature.
dible reminders are operating properly.
Brake pedal*: Obey the caution labels attached to the ve-
Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake Windscreen defogger: hicle.
pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the
pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take
Check that the air comes out of the defogger out- • The engine can start at any time without
lets properly when operating the heater or air con- warning when the e-POWER system is in the
longer to stop, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified ditioner. READY to drive mode. If you must work with
workshop immediately. Keep the floor mat away the e-POWER system in the READY to drive
Windscreen wiper and washer*:
from the pedal. mode, keep your hands, clothing, hair and
Check that the wipers and washer operate properly
tools away from moving fans, belts and any
and that the wipers do not streak.
other moving parts.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
• Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the • Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic For an overview of the engine compartment, see.
parking brake securely and block the wheels engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time “Engine compartment” in the “0. Illustrated table
to prevent the vehicle from moving. Push the without warning, even if the power switch is in of contents” section
P position switch to engage the P (Park) posi- switched OFF and the e-POWER system is not
tion. running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the
• Be sure the power switch is switched OFF negative battery cable before working near
the fan.
when performing any parts replacement or
repairs. • Always wear eye protection whenever you
• Do not work under the bonnet while the en- work on your vehicle.
gine is hot. Always turn off the e- POWER sys- • Never leave the e-POWER system or associ-
tem and wait until it cools down. ated harness connectors disconnected while
• If you must work with the engine running, the power switch is switched ON.
keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away
from moving fans, belts and any other moving
•
parts. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and
•
coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, en-
It is advisable to secure or remove any loose gine coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can
clothing and any jewelry, such as rings, hurt the environment. Always conform to lo-
watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. cal regulations for disposal of vehicle fluids.
• If you must run the engine in an enclosed
space such as a garage, be sure there is proper This section gives instructions regarding only those
ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. items which are relatively easy for an owner to per-
• Never get under the vehicle while it is sup- form.
ported by a jack. You should be aware that incomplete or improper
• Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks servicing may result in operating difficulties or ex-
away from fuel and the battery. cessive emissions, and could affect your warranty
• Never connect or disconnect either the bat-

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it
done by your NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
tery or any transistorized component connec-
shop.
tor while the power switch is switched ON.
• The fuel filter and fuel lines should be serviced
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop be-
cause the fuel lines are under high pressure
even when the engine is turned off.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING Outside
• Never remove the engine coolant reservoir temperature
down to
Composition
cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure fluid escap- Engine cool- Demineralised
ing from the engine coolant reservoir. Wait un- °C °F ant or distilled
til the engine and radiator have cooled down. (concentrated) water
•
−15 5 30% 70%
Engine coolant is poisonous and should be
−35 −30 50% 50%
stored carefully in marked containers out of
the reach of children.
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
WAI0190XZ
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a high-quality, year-round and extended life
engine coolant. The high quality engine coolant Check the coolant level in the reservoirs j A
contains the specific solutions effective for the anti- and j B when the engine is cold. If the coolant level
corrosion and the anti-freeze function. Therefore, is below MIN level ➁, add coolant up to the MAX
additional cooling system additives are not neces- level ➀.
sary.
CAUTION
CAUTION If the cooling system frequently requires coolant,
• Never use any cooling system additives such NDI1807 have it checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cool- workshop.
ing system and cause damage to the engine
and/or cooling system. A Engine coolant reservoir
j
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
• When adding or replacing engine coolant, be B Inverter coolant reservoir
j
Major cooling system repairs should be performed
sure to use Genuine NISSAN engine coolant or
equivalent in its quality with the proper mix- by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. The ser-
ture ratio. The use of other types of coolant vice procedures can be found in the appropriate
solutions may damage the engine cooling NISSAN Service Manual.
system. When checking or replacement is required, NISSAN
recommends contacting a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop for servicing.
Improper servicing or engine coolant change can
result in reduced heater performance and engine
overheating.

INVERTER COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING WARNING Outside

• Never remove the engine coolant reservoir • Never remove the inverter coolant reservoir temperature
down to
Composition
cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns cap when the engine and/or inverter is hot.
could be caused by high pressure fluid escap- Serious burns could be caused by high pres- Engine cool- Demineralised
ing from the engine coolant reservoir. Wait un- sure fluid escaping from the inverter coolant °C °F ant or distilled
til the engine and radiator have cooled down. reservoir. Wait until the engine and inverter (concentrated) water
• have cooled down. −15 5 30% 70%

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never
change the coolant when the engine is hot. • Coolant is poisonous and should be stored
−35 −30 50% 50%
• Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If carefully in marked containers out of the reach
of children.
skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with
soap or hand cleaner and plenty of water as
soon as possible. The inverter cooling system is filled at the factory
• Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets.

with a high-quality, year-round and extended life
engine coolant. The high quality coolant contains
NISSAN Blue Citizenship the specific solutions effective for the anti-corro-
sion and the anti-freeze function. Therefore, addi-
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. tional cooling system additives are not necessary.
Check your local regulations.
CAUTION
• Never use any cooling system additives such
as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cool-
ing system and cause damage to the engine,
inverter and/or cooling system.
• When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to
use Genuine NISSAN engine coolant or equiva-
lent in its quality with the proper mixture ratio.
The use of other types of coolant solutions
may damage the inverter cooling system.

CHECKING INVERTER COOLANT CAUTION • Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets.
LEVEL If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, NISSAN Blue Citizenship
have it checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified
workshop. Coolant must be disposed of properly. Check
your local regulations.
CHANGING INVERTER COOLANT
Major cooling system repairs should be performed
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. The ser-
vice procedures can be found in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual.
When checking or replacement is required, NISSAN
NDI1807 recommends contacting a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop for servicing.
A Engine coolant reservoir
j Improper servicing or coolant change can result in
B Inverter coolant reservoir
j reduced heater performance and engine or inverter
overheating.
WARNING
• Never remove the inverter coolant reservoir
cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure fluid escap-
ing from the inverter coolant reservoir. Wait
until the engine and inverter have cooled
down.
• To avoid the danger of being scalded, never
NDI1806 change the coolant when the engine is hot.
• Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If
Check the coolant level in the reservoirs j A skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with
andjB when the engine and inverter are cold. If the soap or hand cleaner and plenty of water as
coolant level is below MIN level ➁, add coolant up to soon as possible.
the MAX level ➀.

ENGINE OIL
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL C Normal range

j CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the FILTER
CAUTION parking brake.
The oil level should be checked regularly. Operat- 2. Start the engine. If the engine is cold, start and WARNING
ing with an insufficient amount of oil can damage let the engine idle until it reaches the operational
the engine, and such damage is not covered by temperature (approximately 5 minutes). NISSAN Blue Citizenship
warranty. Used oil must not be poured into the ground,
3. Turn the engine off.
canals, rivers, etc. It should be disposed of at a
4. Wait at least 15 minutes for the engine oil to drain rubbish tip having proper facilities.
back into the oil pan.
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
• NISSAN recommends contacting a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop for engine oil ser-
6. Re-insert it all the way. vicing.
7. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. • Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine
C.
It should be in the normal range j oil is hot.
A , re-
8. If the oil level is below the minimum mark j • Prolonged and repeated contact with used en-
move the engine oil filler cap and pour the rec- gine oil may cause skin cancer.
NDI1808
ommended oil through the opening. Do not
overfill jB.
• Avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin
KR15DDT engine contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap
9. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick. or hand cleaner and plenty of water as soon
as possible.
It is normal to add some oil between oil mainte-
nance intervals, depending on the severity of op- • Store used engine oil in marked containers out
erating conditions. of the reach of children.
CAUTION
Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
SDI1993Z
A MIN level
j
B MAX level
j

Engine oil replacement 4. Wait at least 15 minutes to let the engine oil drain Changing engine oil filter
back into the oil pan.
5. Remove the underbody cover (where fitted).
6. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
7. Remove the drain plug with a wrench.
8. Remove the oil filler cap and completely drain
the oil.
If the engine oil filter needs to be changed, re-
move and replace it at this time. See “Changing
engine oil filter” later in this section.
NDI1809 NDI1811
9. Clean and re-install the drain plug along with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the
Drain plug tightening torque: parking brake.
30.0 to 37.0 N•m (3.1 to 3.8 kg-m, 22 to 2. Turn the engine off.
27 ft-lb)
3. Drain the engine oil according to the proper pro-
10. Refill the engine with recommended engine oil cedure. (See “Engine oil replacement” earlier in
and quantity. (See “Recommended fluids/lubri- this section.)
cants and capacities” in the “9. Technical
4. Loosen the engine oil filter with an oil filter
information” section.)
wrench.
When filling the engine oil, do not remove the
Depending on the engine model, a special cap
dipstick.
NDI1810 type wrench may be required. See a NISSAN
11. Install the engine oil filler cap securely. dealer or qualified workshop for more informa-
12. Start the engine. tion.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. 13. Check for any leakage around the drain plug. 5. Remove the engine oil filter by turning it by hand.
2. Start the engine. If the engine is cold, start and Correct as required. 6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a
let the engine idle until the engine temperature 14. Check the oil level with the dipstick. For details, clean cloth.
reaches the operational temperature (approxi- see “Checking engine oil level” earlier in this sec- Be sure to remove any old gasket remaining on
mately 5 minutes). tion. the mounting surface.
3. Turn the engine off. 7. Apply the new engine oil to the gasket of the new
oil filter.

GEAR FLUID BRAKES
8. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is When checking or replacement is required, NISSAN CHECKING PARKING BRAKE
felt, and then tighten an additional 2/3 of turn to recommends contacting a NISSAN dealer or quali-
Periodically check the holding ability of the parking
secure the oil filter. fied workshop for servicing.
brake by parking on a steep hill and restraining the
Oil filter tightening torque:
vehicle by using only the parking brake. If it does
15.0 to 21.0 N•m (1.5 to 2.1 kg-m, 11 to 15 CAUTION not hold satisfactorily, see a NISSAN dealer or quali-
ft-lb)
• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*. Do not mix with fied workshop.
9. Refill the engine oil. (See “Engine oil replacement” other fluids.
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
earlier in this section.)
• Using gear fluid other than Genuine NISSAN
10. Start the engine and check for leakage around Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in drivabil- If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than
the oil filter. Correct as required. ity and gearbox durability, and may damage normal, the pedal feels “spongy” or the vehicle
the gearbox; such damage is not covered by seems to take longer to stop, see a NISSAN dealer or
11. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes.
the warranty. qualified workshop.
12. Check the engine oil level according to the
proper procedure. (See “Checking engine oil *: For details, contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified Self-adjusting brakes
level” earlier in this section.) workshop.
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the
PROTECT THE ENVIRONMENT brake pedal is applied.
NISSAN Blue Citizenship
It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil.
Use authorised waste collection facilities, including
civic amenity sites and garages providing facilities
for the disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If in
doubt, contact your local authority for advice on
disposal.
The regulations concerning the pollution of the
environment will vary from country to country.

BRAKE FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID
See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “9. Technical information” section
for the recommended brake fluid type.
If fluid must be added frequently, the system should
be thoroughly checked by a NISSAN dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
CAUTION
• NISSAN recommends that refilling and check-
ing the brake systems should be left to a
WAI0358XZ NDI1812
NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop who will
have the necessary fluids and technical know-
ledge.
WARNING
WARNING • Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This
•
Anti-freeze window washer fluid is poisonous
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contami- will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash
and should be stored carefully in marked contain-
nated fluid may damage the brake system. with water.
ers out of the reach of children.
The use of improper fluids can damage the
brake system and affect the vehicle's stop-
ping ability. • Check the fluid level in the window washer res-
ervoir. If the fluid level is low or when the low
• Clean the filler cap before removing. washer fluid warning light (where fitted) comes
• Brake fluids are poisonous and should be on, add window washer fluid up to the MAX level.
stored carefully in marked containers out of
the reach of children.
• Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of win-
dow washer fluid.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level
is between the MIN ➁ and MAX ➀ lines or the brake
• Add a washer solvent to the water for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a window
warning light comes on, add fluid up to the MAX washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturer's
line. instructions for the mixture ratio.

BATTERY
CAUTION
•
Caution symbols for battery
Do not substitute anti-freeze engine coolant m WARNING
for window washer solution. This may result in No smoking
damage to the paint. No exposed Never smoke around the battery. Never expose the battery to open flames
➀
• Always use window washer fluid recom-
mended by NISSAN.
m flames
No sparks
or electrical sparks.
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to

➁
m
Shield eyes
protect against explosion or battery acid.
Keep away from Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of reach of
➂
m children children.
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted
surfaces. After handling the battery or battery cap, immediately wash your
hands thoroughly. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes, or onto your skin
➃ Battery acid
m or clothing, flush with water immediately for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the battery fluid gets into your eyes
or onto your skin, it could cause eyesight loss or burns.
Note operating Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct
➄
m instructions and safe handling.
➅ Explosive gas Hydrogen gas, generated by battery fluid, is explosive.

m

VEHICLE 12V BATTERY Reinitialisation procedure after battery Jump-starting
reconnection If jump-starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” in
WARNING If the battery has been reconnected, check the fol- the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the engine
Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the bat- lowing items: does not start by jump starting, the battery may
tery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher
• Clock setting (where fitted).
have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer or
qualified workshop.
•
load on the battery which can generate heat, re-
duce battery life, and in some cases lead to an Reset the desired radio stations to the preset
explosion. station buttons. INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
For details, see “Vehicle information display” in the REPLACEMENT
“2. Instruments and controls” section, or the sepa-
rately provided NissanConnect Owner's Manual, or CAUTION
the audio device descriptions in “FM/AM radio (with • The symbol noted on the Intelligent key is
DAB) (where fitted)” in the “4. Display screen, heater intended to alert the user to the presence of
and air conditioner, and audio system” section. important operating and maintenance (ser-
vicing) instructions in the literature accompa-
Avoid battery discharge
nying the appliance.
The vehicle battery will slowly discharge during pro-
longed periods of inactivity. There are a number of • Be careful not to allow children to swallow the
battery and removed parts.
ways to prevent the battery becoming discharged
NDI1815 to such a low level that the vehicle cannot be • There is danger of explosion if the lithium bat-
Example of 12V battery location started: tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with
The 12-volt battery ➀ is located in the luggage area. • Top up the battery charge using a trickle/smart
the same or equivalent type.
The exact location depends on whether or not a charger. Do not use rapid charge as this can • Do not expose the battery to excessive heat
spare wheel/tyre is fitted. To access the 12-volt bat- cause damage to the battery. Follow the instruc- such as concentrated sunshine, fire or the like.
tery, raise the luggage floor board and remove the tions provided with the battery charger. • Do not crush or cut the battery.
tool holder (s), or if an access panel is fitted, raise the
access panel as illustrated.
• It is recommended that the vehicle is driven for • Do not subject the battery to extremely low
at least 15 minutes every 2 weeks. air pressure at high altitude.
For a maintenance free battery it is not required to
check the fluid level. However, NISSAN recommends
• If driving the vehicle is not possible, start the en- • When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil
gine and run the engine at idle speed for 25–30 get on the components.
to have the battery checked periodically at a NISSAN minutes every 4 weeks.

• Be careful not to touch a circuit board or a bat-
tery terminal.
An improperly disposed battery can harm the

environment. Always conform to local regula-
tions for battery disposal.
• The Intelligent Key is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately wipe it un-
til it gets completely dry. To replace the bat-
tery, open the Intelligent Key carefully in the SPA0784Z
sequence shown in the illustration.
• When changing the battery, do not let dust or
oil get on the Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
Always hold the battery by the edges, as shown.
WARNING Holding the battery across the contact points will
• Do not ingest the battery, Chemical Burn Haz-

seriously deplete the storage capacity.
ard (The remote control supplied with) This
product contains a coin button cell battery. If
the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it
can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours
and can lead to death.
• Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
WBI0014X
dren. If the battery compartment does not
Intelligent Key
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children. Replacement
• If you think batteries might have been swal- 1. Slide the locking pin to the unlock position.
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
2. Remove the key.
seek immediate medical attention.
3. Insert a flat blade screwdriver or a suitable tool
into the slot and twist it to open the lid.

DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS
4. Replace the battery with a new one with the

WARNING
same specifications.
Be sure the e-POWER system and power switch is
Use the following battery type: switched OFF and that the parking brake is en-
CR2032 gaged securely.
• Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as doing so could cause a malfunc-
tion. CAUTION
• Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of • Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can cause
the case, as illustrated.
WAI0357XZ
damage to the spark plugs.
• Always replace spark plugs with recom-
mended or equivalent ones.
1 Water pump
2 Crankshaft pulley REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the power switch is OFF. Otherwise the
cooling fan or the engine may start to operate
WBI0015XZ suddenly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear,

5. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, and
cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor
then push them together until it is securely
condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted
closed.
by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. SDI2670Z
6. Operate the buttons to check that the key works
2. Have the belst checked regularly for condition
correctly.
and tension in accordance with the maintenance
Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop if If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer or
schedule as shown in a separately provided War-
you need assistance for battery replacement. qualified workshop for servicing.
ranty Information and Maintenance booklet.

AIR CLEANER
Iridium platinum-tipped spark plugs WARNING

It is not necessary to replace the iridium platinum-
tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conven-
• Operating the engine without the air cleaner
filter, can cause you or others to be burned.
tional type spark plugs since they will last much The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake
longer. Follow the maintenance schedule shown in air, it also stops flame if the engine backfires.
the separate maintenance booklet. Do not reuse the If the air cleaner filter is not installed and the
iridium platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or engine backfires, you could be burned.
regapping.
• Do not drive without the air cleaner filter.
• Be careful when working on the engine with-
out the air cleaner filter. NDI1823
DRY PAPER FILTER ELEMENT Before opening the air filter cover, disconnect the
air intake duct from the air cleaner assembly. Use a
finger to press down on ➀, disconnect the two lock
tabs ➁, and pull the rubber duct forward (towards
you) to disconnect it from the air cleaner assembly.
Move the duct away from the air cleaner assembly.
To remove the filter, release the locking clips ➃ and
pull the filter cover forward and sideways ➄.
The filter can now be removed from the cover.
Check the filter element jA to see if it is dirty. If it is
NDI1822 dirty, shake the element to remove dust.
Clean or replace it according to the maintenance
schedule shown in the separately provided War-
ranty Information & Maintenance Booklet. When
cleaning or replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the
air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
Reassemble the filter, cover and duct in the reverse
order of disassembly.

WIPER BLADES
CLEANING FRONT WINDOW WIPER REAR WINDOW WIPER

If the windscreen or tailgate window is not clear REPLACEMENT REPLACEMENT
after using the window washer or if a wiper blade It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer or
chatters when running, wax or other material may qualified workshop if checking or replacement are
be on the blade or windscreen. required.
Clean the outside of the windscreen or tailgate win-
dow with a washer solution or a mild detergent. The
WINDSCREEN WASHER NOZZLE
windscreen or tailgate window is clean if beads do The windscreen washer nozzles are integrated into
not form when rinsing with clear water. the wiper arms.
Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer or
washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the qualified workshop if a washer nozzle is clogged or
blade with clear water. If the windscreen or tailgate any malfunction occurs. Do not attempt to clean
NDI1795
window is still not clear after cleaning the blades the nozzle using a needle or a pin. Doing so may
and using the wiper, replace the blades. damage the nozzle.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
CAUTION 2. Open jA , using a suitable tool, and then move the
• After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper blade down as shown to remove.
wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise it
3. Install the new wiper blade in the reverse order
may be damaged when the bonnet is opened.
of removal.
• Make sure the wiper blade contacts the glass.
4. Slide the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm
Otherwise, the arm may be damaged by wind
until a click sounds.
pressure.
A.
5. Close j

FUSES
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
NDI1820
Secondary fuse box LHD models
NDI1796
NDI1791 Primary fuse box RHD models

Primary fuse box LHD models

The affected circuits are shown on the inside of the
fuse box lid, and on the back of the glove compart-
ment for LHD models.
1. Make sure the power switch is OFF and the head-
light switch is in the OFF position.
2. Open the fuse box lid or for the LHD secondary
fuse box, remove the glove compartment and
side panel (see “Removing the glove
compartment” later in this section).
SDI1753Z 3. Locate and remove the fuse with the fuse puller
➀ (where fitted).
NOTE
CAUTION The fuse puller is stored in the fuse box.
• Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage
A , replace it with a new fuse
4. If the fuse is open j
rating than that specified on the fuse box
jB.
cover.
• Never pull the harness or wires when discon- 5. Close the fuse box lid, or for the LHD secondary
fuse box, refit the glove compartment and side
necting the connector.
panel (see “Removing the glove compartment”
• Be careful not to damage the connector sup- later in this section).
port bracket when disconnecting the
connector. NOTE
If the new fuse opens again, after installing,
NDI1816 If any electrical equipment does not operate, check have the electrical system checked and re-
for an open fuse. paired by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
Secondary fuse box RHD models
shop.
LHD models: The primary fuse box is located in the
lower part of the left hand side of the instrument
panel. The secondary fuse box is located behind the
glove box.
RHD models: The primary fuse box is located in the
glove box. The secondary fuse box is located in the
lower part of the right hand side of the instrument
panel

Removing the glove compartment
To access the secondary fuse box on LHD models, it
is necessary to remove the glove compartment and
side panel.
NDI1821 NDI1820
A.
2. Remove the 7 fixing screws j 4. The secondary fuse box fuse box can now be ac-
cessed. A list of the fuses and their locations is
NDI1817 provided on the back of the glove box.
5. Refit the glove box in the reverse order of re-
1. Using a suitable tool, remove the side panel. moval.
NDI1819
3. Disengage the metal fixing clips in the order

shown, then remove the glove box.
NDI1818
Disconnect the harness connector from the
glove box light.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.
CAUTION
4. Pinch the locking tabs found on each side of the Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rat-
extended storage fuse switch ➂. ing than that specified on the fuse box cover.
5. Pull the extended storage fuse switch straight
out from the fuse box. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check
for an open fuse.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Make sure the power switch is OFF and the head-
light switch is in the OFF position.
2. Open the bonnet. For details, see “Bonnet” in the
NDI1792
“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.
3. Using a trim tool other appropriate tool if neces-
Extended storage fuse switch sary, release the three locking tabs and remove
To reduce battery drain, the extended storage fuse the engine compartment fuse box cover.
switch ➀ comes from the factory switched off. Prior 4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is pushed in 5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller (where fit-
(switched on) and should always remain on. NDI1814 ted). The fuse puller is located in the fuse box of
If any electrical equipment does not operate, re- the passenger compartment.
move the extended storage fuse switch and check A , replace it with a new fuse
6. If the fuse is open j
for an open fuse. jB.
NOTE 7. Install the fuse box cover.
If the extended storage fuse switch malfunctions 8. Close the bonnet.
or if the fuse is open, it is not necessary to replace NOTE
the switch. In this case, remove the extended stor-
age fuse switch and replace it with a new fuse of If the new fuse opens again, after installing,
the same rating. have the electrical system checked and re-
paired by a NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
How to remove the extended storage fuse shop.
switch:
SDI1753Z
1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch, be
sure the power switch is OFF.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF posi-
tion.

LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS EXTERIOR LIGHTS INTERIOR LIGHTS

LED headlight Item Wattage (W) Item Wattage
Front combination light (W)
The LED headlight uses an LED module without ser-
viceable parts. Daytime running light*1 LED Room light/Map lights (where fitted) 5
Headlight (High beam) *1 LED Reading lights — rear (where fitted) *1 5

CAUTION Headlight (Low beam) *1 LED Rear room light (where fitted) 5
• To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to Front turn signal light *1 21 or LED Luggage compartment light 5
modify or disassemble the LED headlights as-
Front side light *1 LED *1: If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN
sembly.
• Front fog light *1 LED dealer or qualified workshop.
If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN
dealer or qualified workshop. Side turn signal light *1 LED
Rear combination light *1
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the ex- Turn signal light *1 21 or LED
terior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A tempera- Brake/Tail light *1 LED
ture difference between the inside and the outside Reverse light *1 16
of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction.
High-mounted brake light *1 LED
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, con-
tact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop. Number plate light 5 or LED
Rear fog light *1 LED
*1: If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN


LIGHT LOCATIONS
➀ Side turn signal light
➁ Room light/Map lights (where fitted)
➂ Daytime Running Light (DRL)
➃ Front side light
➄ Front turn signal light
➅ High beam headlight/Adaptive Driving Beam
(Type A only)
➆ Low beam headlight
➇ Front fog light (where fitted)
➈ Footwell light (where fitted)
➉ Room light/Reading lights — rear (where fit-
ted)
11 High mounted brake light
j
12 Number plate light
j
13 Rear fog light (where fitted)
j
14 Reverse light
j
15 Rear turn signal light
j
16 Brake light
j
NSD1043 NSD1044
Light locations (Type A) Light locations (Type B) 17 Tail light
j

Replacing procedures
NDI1779 NDI1780
NDI707 Room light/Map lights (where fitted) Room light — rear (where fitted)
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D or LED.
REMOVE
m
INSTALL
m

WHEELS AND TYRES
In case of a flat tyre, see “Flat tyre” in the “6. In case

of emergency” section.
TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE

Periodically check the tyre pressure (including the
spare tyre). An incorrect tyre pressure may adversely
affect tyre life and vehicle handling. After adjusting
the tyre pressure, perform a TPMS temperature cali-
bration (see “TPMS temperature calibration (where
possible)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section).
NDI1803
NOTE
Number plate light
Incorrectly inflated tyres can also lead to poor
steering ability and make the driver suspect a
steering problem: keep the vehicle's tyres
inflated to the correct pressure at all times.
The tyre pressure should be checked when tyres
are COLD. Tyres are considered COLD after the ve-
hicle has been parked for three or more hours, or
driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile). COLD tyre pressures
are shown on the tyre placard affixed to the driver's
side centre pillar.
Insufficient pressure can lead to an overheating of
the tyre and subsequent internal damage. At high
speeds, this could result in tread separation and
even bursting of the tyre.
NDI1782
Luggage compartment light

TYPES OF TYRES Summer tyres SNOW CHAINS
NISSAN specifies summer tyres as standard fit. Use of snow chains may be prohibited in some ar-
CAUTION These tyres provide superior performance under eas. Check the local laws before installing snow
• When changing or replacing tyres, be sure all typical mild weather conditions. chains. When installing snow chains, make sure they
four tyres are of the same type (i.e., summer, If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy are of proper size for the tyres on your vehicle and
all season or snow) and construction. conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW are installed according to the chain manufacturer's
• A NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop may be or ALL SEASON tyres on all four wheels. suggestions. Use chain tensioners when recom-
mended by the snow chain manufacturer to ensure
able to help you with information about tyre
Snow tyres a tight fit. Loose end links of the snow chain must
type, size, speed rating and availability.
• If snow tyres are needed, it is necessary to select be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of
Replacement tyres may have a lower speed whipping action damage to the fenders or under-
tyres equivalent in size and load rating to the origi-
rating than the factory equipped tyres, and carriage.
nal equipment tyres. If you do not, it can adversely
may not match the potential maximum ve-
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,
hicle speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tyre. Generally, snow tyres will have lower speed ratings your vehicle can be damaged and/or vehicle han-
• than factory equipped tyres and may not match the dling and performance may be adversely affected.
Speedometer calibration may be affected if
potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the Snow chains must be installed only on the front
wheels and/or tyres of a different size to fac-
maximum speed rating of the tyre. wheels and not on the rear wheels.
tory equipped wheels and/or tyres are fitted
to the vehicle (for example, winter wheels). For additional traction on icy roads, studded tyres
Consult a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop may be used. However, some provinces and states CAUTION
before fitting alternative size wheels and/or prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tyres. Skid and trac-
• Never install snow chains on a temporary-use
tyres. or small size spare tyre.
tion capabilities of studded snow tyres, on wet or
dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-stud- • Do not drive with snow chains on paved roads
All season tyres ded snow tyres.
which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in
such conditions can cause damage to the vari-
NISSAN specifies all season tyres on some models
ous mechanisms of the vehicle due to some
to provide good performance for use all year
overstress.
around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All
season tyres are identified by ALL SEASON and/or
M&S on the tyre sidewall. Snow tyres have better
snow traction than all season tyres and may be
more appropriate in some areas.

TYRE ROTATION NOTE TYRE AGE
Models with Tyre Pressure Monitoring System Remember tyre age. Never use a tyre over six years
(TPMS). old, regardless of whether they have been used or
After rotating the tyres, the TPMS must be reini- not.
tialised. For details, see “Activation” in the Tyres degrade with age as well as the use they are
“5. Starting and driving” section. subjected to. Have the tyres checked and balanced
frequently by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
TYRE WEAR AND DAMAGE
Report all accidents where the tyre is knocked even
if it is minor.
CHANGING TYRES AND WHEELS

NDI762Z
WARNING
NISSAN recommends that tyres be rotated every Do not install a deformed wheel or tyre even if it
10,000 km (6,000 miles). has been repaired. Such wheels or tyres could
have structural damage and could fail without
However, the timing for tyre rotation may vary ac-
warning.
cording to your driving habits and the road surface
conditions. See “Flat tyre” in the “6. In case of SDI1663Z
emergency” section for tyre replacing procedures. When replacing a tyre, use the same size, speed rat-
ing and load carrying capacity as originally
WARNING Tyres should be periodically inspected for wear, equipped. Recommended types and sizes are men-
• After rotating the tyres, adjust the tyre pres-

cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If
excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are
tioned in “Wheels and Tyres” in the “9. Technical
information” section.
sure.
found, the tyre should be replaced.
• Retighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle
The original tyres have a built-in tread wear indica-
The use of tyres other than those recommended or
the mixed use of tyres of different brands, construc-
has been driven for the first 1,000 km (600
tor ➀. When the wear indicator is visible, the tyre tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
miles) (also in cases of a flat tyre, etc.).
should be replaced. can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling,
• Do not include the temporary-use spare tyre
The wear indicator locations are indicated by the
ground clearance, body-to-tyre clearance, snow
in the tyre rotation.
location marks ➁.
chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight
• Incorrect tyre selection, fitting, care or main- aim and bumper height.
tenance can affect vehicle safety with risk of
accident and injury. If in doubt, consult a
NISSAN dealer or the tyre manufacturer.

WARNING Emergency tyre puncture repair kit CARE OF WHEELS
Some of these effects may lead to accidents and
(where fitted) For details, see “Care of wheels” in the “7. Appear-
could result in serious personal injury. The emergency tyre puncture repair kit is supplied ance and care” section.
to the vehicle instead of a spare tyre. The repair kit
must be used for temporarily fixing a minor tyre
WHEEL BALANCE puncture. After using the repair kit, see a NISSAN
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and dealer or qualified workshop as soon as possible for
tyre life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of tyre inspection and repair/replacement.
balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as re-
quired. CAUTION
Wheel balance service should be performed with Do not use the emergency tyre puncture repair
the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the front kit under the following conditions. Contact a
wheels on the vehicle could lead to vehicle damage. NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop or profes-
sional road assistance.
SPARE TYRE
• when the sealant has passed its expiration
Conventional spare wheel/tyre date (shown on the label attached to the seal-
(where fitted) ant bottle)
A standard wheel/tyre is supplied with your vehicle. • when the cut or the puncture is approximately
4 mm (0.16 in) or longer
Temporary-use spare wheel/tyre
(where fitted) • when the side of the tyre is damaged
The temporary-use spare wheel/tyre can be identi- • when the vehicle has been driven with a con-
fied by the temporary-use spare tyre label which siderable loss of air from the tyre
contrasts to the standard road wheels. If in doubt, • when the tyre is completely displaced inside
contact a NISSAN dealer, qualified workshop or see or outside the rim
“Spare tyre” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.
• when the tyre rim is damaged
• when two or more tyres are flat
See “Spare tyre” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-

tion for more details.

NOTE

9 Technical information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities ................ 468 Air conditioner specification label (where
Fuel information ................................................................................... 470 fitted)............................................................................................................. 473
Recommended SAE viscosity number................................. 470 Additional data recording (where fitted)............................ 473
Air conditioner system refrigerant and Installation of an RF transmitter ...................................................... 474
lubricant...................................................................................................... 470 Approval numbers....................................................................................... 474
Engine................................................................................................................... 471 Intelligent Key system...................................................................... 474
Wheels and Tyres ......................................................................................... 471 Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Dimensions....................................................................................................... 472 (Transmitter)............................................................................................ 476
When travelling or registering in another country............. 472 Radar systems ....................................................................................... 478
Vehicle identification................................................................................. 472 Audio systems........................................................................................ 479
Vehicle identification label............................................................ 472 Telematics Control Unit (where fitted)................................. 480
Vehicle identification number (VIN) (chassis Radio frequency approval ..................................................................... 481
number) ...................................................................................................... 473 CE approval details............................................................................. 482
Engine serial number........................................................................ 473 UKCA approval details...................................................................... 485
Tyre placard ............................................................................................. 473
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following values are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different from them. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type Metric US Imperial Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

measure measure measure
14–1/2
Fuel 55 L 12–1/8 gal • See “Fuel information” later in this section.
gal
• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SP” or “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recom-
With oil filter change 5.1 L 5–3/8 qt 4–1/2qt mended. · If the above motor oil is not available, use “NISSAN Motor Oil“ or
Engine oil KR15DDT equivalent that matches the following grade and viscosity.
Without oil filter change 5L 5–1/4 qt 4–3/8 qt – Oil grade: – API: SN or SP, ILSAC GF-5 or GF-6
– SAE Viscosity: See “Recommended SAE viscosity number” later in this section
• “NISSAN Genuine Engine Coolant L255N” or equivalent
Total system capacity 8.15 L 8-5/8 qt 7-1/4 qt • Use “NISSAN Genuine Engine Coolant L255N” or equivalent in its quality, in order
Engine coolant with
to avoid possible aluminium corrosion within the engine cooling system caused
reservoir
Reservoir max level 0.83 L 7/8 qt 3/4 qt by the use of non-genuine engine coolant. Note that any repairs for the
incidents within the engine cooling system while using non-genuine engine
coolant may not be covered by the warranty, even if such incidents occurred
Total system capacity 5.37 L 5-3/4 qt 4-3/4 qt during the warranty period. Contact a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop for
Inverter coolant with
more information regarding the coolant type and capacity.
reservoir
Reservoir max level 0.55 L 5/8 qt 1/2 qt • If dilution of new coolant is necessary to achieve the correct concentration, only
use demineralised or distilled water for dilution.

Capacity (approximate)
Fluid type Metric US Imperial Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
measure measure measure
• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF.
Using gear fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deteriora-
Gear oil 1.54 L 1–5/8 qt 1–1/2 qt
tion in drivability and gear box durability, and may damage the gear box; such
damage is not covered by the warranty.
Refill to the correct level according
to the instructions in the “8. • Genuine “NISSAN Brake Fluid” or equivalent
Brake fluid
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” • DOT 4 (US FMVSS No. 116)
section.
Multi-purpose grease – – – • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
550 g • For Europe: HFO-1234yf
Air conditioning system refrigerant
500 g • Except for Europe: HFC-134a (R-134a)
Air conditioning system lubricants – – – • SP-A2 oil or equivalent

FUEL INFORMATION RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Petrol engine NUMBER REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT
Outside Temperature Range For Europe: The air conditioner system of your ve-
CAUTION Anticipated Before Next Oil Change hicle must be charged with the refrigerant
Do not use leaded petrol. Using leaded petrol will HFO1234yf (R1234yf) and the lubricant NISSAN A/C
damage the catalytic converter. System Oil Type SP-A2 or equivalents.
Except for Europe: The air conditioner system of
Compatible Fuels for Petrol Engines your vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant
The petrol engines are compatible with current and HFC-134a and the lubricant NISSAN A/C System Oil
future European standards for bio-fuel. Type SP-A2 or equivalents.
Petrol conforming to EN228 and mixed
m
with a bio-fuel conforming to EN15376. CAUTION
m (Only applicable to Europe, Turkey,
Chile, New Caledonia, Tahiti, Hong Kong,
Use of any other refrigerants or lubricants will
cause severe damage, and you may need to re-
Singapore.
place your vehicle’s entire air conditioner system.
m Not applicable to Morocco, Algeria,
Tunisia, Mongolia, Ukraine.)
The release of refrigerants into the atmosphere is
For Europe, Turkey, Chile, New Caledonia, Tahiti, prohibited in many countries and regions. The re-
Hong Kong, Singapore: frigerant in your vehicle will not harm the Earth’s
ozone layer. However, it may contribute in a small
Use UNLEADED PREMIUM petrol with an octane rat-
part to the global warming effect. NISSAN recom-
ing of at least 95 (RON).
mends that the refrigerant be appropriately recov-
For Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia, Mongolia, Ukraine, ered and recycled. Air conditioner system should
Australia, New Zealand, South Africa and other only be serviced by trained and certified technicians
destinations: to ensure proper and safe operation. Contact a
If UNLEADED PREMIUM petrol is not available, UN- NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop when servic-
LEADED REGULAR petrol with an octane rating of at
Engine oil ing the air conditioner system.
least 91 (RON) may be used at slightly reduced per- • KR15DDT engine:
formance. However, for maximum vehicle perfor- 0W-20 is preferable. If 0W-20 is not available, se-
mance and the best driveability, the use of unleaded lect the viscosity from the chart, that is suitable
premium petrol with an octane rating of at least 95 for the outside temperature range.
(RON) is recommended.

ENGINE WHEELS AND TYRES
Unit: mm (in)
Model KR15DDT
Type Petrol, 4-cycle, DOHC Item Size Offset
Cylinder arrangement 3-cylinder in–line Steel *1 18 X 4T*1 30 (1.18)
Bore x Stroke Road 18 x 7.5J 45 (1.77)

wheel Aluminium* 19 x 7.5J 45 (1.77)
when compression ratio = 8 mm (in) 84.0 × 90.1 (3.307 × 3.547)
when compression ratio = 14 mm (in) 84.0 × 88.9 (3.307 × 3.500) 20 x 8.0J 40 (1.57)
Displacement 235/55R18 100V*

Conventional 235/50R19 99V*
when compression ratio = 8 cm3 (cu in) 1,497 (91.4) 235/45R20 100V XL*
Tyre size
3
when compression ratio = 14 cm (cu in) 1,477 (90.1) 215/55R18 99V *1
Spare
Idling speed rpm 1500+/-125 145/80R18 109M *1
Spark plug Standard ILMAR8G8GS
*: where fitted
Spark plug gap mm (in) 0.8 (0.031)
*1: Temporary-use spare tyre (where fitted)
Camshaft operation Timing chain

DIMENSIONS WHEN TRAVELLING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
Unit: mm (in) When planning to travel in another country, you VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION LABEL
mm (in.) should first find out if the fuel available is suitable
for your vehicle's engine.
Overall length 4,425 (174.2)
Using fuel with too low octane rating may cause
Overall width excl. mirrors 1,835 (72.2)
engine damage. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle
incl. mirrors 2084 (82.1) to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
Overall height incl. antenna 1,625 (64.0)
When transferring your vehicle registration to an-
excl. antenna 1,610 (63.4) other country, check with the appropriate authori-
Front track 18” and 19” 1,580 (62.2) ties that the vehicle complies with the requirements
wheels as it may not be possible to adapt it. In some cases,
20” wheels 1,590 (62.6) a vehicle cannot meet the legal requirements and
in other cases, it may be necessary to modify the NTI524
Rear track 18” and 19” 1,580 (62.2)
(beam suspen- wheels vehicle to meet specific laws and regulations.
sion) The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis- The label is affixed on the B pillar as shown.
Rear track 18” and 19” 1586 (62.4) sion control and safety standards vary according to
(multi-link wheels the country; therefore, vehicle specifications may
suspension) 20” wheels 1,596 (62.8) differ.
Wheelbase 2,665 (104.9) NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience
when the vehicle is taken and registered into an-
other country. The necessary modifications,
transportation and registration are the owner's
responsibility.
NTI558
➀ Type approval number

➁ Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
➂ Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
➃ Maximum Laden Mass of the Combination
➄ Maximum mass on the axle front
➅ Maximum mass on the axle rear

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
(VIN) (chassis number) LABEL (where fitted)
NTI557
NTI554 KR15DDT engine STI0739Z
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

Open the bonnet. The label is affixed at the front
TYRE PLACARD
section of the bonnet.
ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING

(where fitted)
If your vehicle is fitted with the ProPILOT Assist sys-
tem, it will also be fitted with supplemental data
recording function intended to assist in under-
standing how the ProPILOT Assist system performs
in certain non-trival crash or near-crash scenarios.
JVT0352XZ Specifically, supplemental recording is designed to
capture the following:
NTI268
The Vehicle identification number (VIN) is located as • Driver operational status of the accelerator,
shown. brakes, steering, etc.
•
1 Right Hand Drive models
To access the VIN stamped on the floor cross mem- Detection status of a vehicle ahead and lane
2 Left Hand Drive models
ber, pull back the carpet ➀ to expose the VIN ➁. markers.
The cold tyre pressure is shown on the tyre placard
fixed to the side of the driver's side centre pillar.
• Vehicle information including distance to vehicle
ahead and lateral position.

INSTALLATION OF AN RF APPROVAL NUMBERS
TRANSMITTER
• Information on the operation of the ProPILOT For countries conforming to UN regulation No.10 All radio frequency or audio frequency products fit-
Assist system and other crash avoidance fea- or equivalent: ted to the NISSAN range during production conform
tures. The installation of an RF transmitter in your vehicle to the requirements of the R&TTE Directive.
• ProPILOT Assist system malfunction diagnosis could affect electric equipment systems. Be sure to INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
information. check with your NISSAN dealer or qualified work-
• External images from the multi-sensing front shop for precautionary measures or special instruc-
tions regarding installation. Upon request, your
Intelligent Key hand unit (where fitted)
camera (Available only when the SRS air bag or Model TXPZ1, Passive entry system (hand unit):
IEB system is activated). NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop will provide the
Hereby, Continental Automotive GmbH., declares
detailed information (frequency band, power, an-
The ProPILOT Assist system does not record con- that the radio equipment type TXPZ1 is in compli-
tenna position, installation guide, etc.) regarding in-
versations, sounds or images of the inside of the ance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
stallation.
vehicle. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is
To read this supplemental data, special equipment available at the following internet address:
is required and access to the vehicle or the record- https://continental-homologation.com/nissan
ing unit is needed. This supplemental data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner • Manufacturer name:
Continental Automotive GmbH
or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by
law. • Importer name, address:
Nissan International SA
If downloaded, NISSAN and third parties entrusted
Zone d’activités La Pièce 12
by NISSAN may use the data recorded for the pur-
1180 Rolle, Switzerland
pose of improving NISSAN’s vehicle safety perfor-
mance. • Operating frequency band: 433.92 MHz.
NISSAN and third parties entrusted by NISSAN will • Maximum radio-frequency power: ≤10 dBm
not disclose/provide the recorded data to a third
party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with
the consent of the lessee.
• In response to an official request from law en-
forcement, court order, governmental agency, or
other legally enforceable request.
• For research purposes after the data is modified
such that it is no longer tied to a specific vehicle
or vehicle owner (anonymously)

NTI548
For Morocco
Intelligent Key system control unit

(where fitted)
Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equip-
ment type HFM401 is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU.
available at the following internet address:
https://continental-homologation.com/nissan
• Manufacturer name, address:
Continental Automotive GmbH
NTI573 Siemensstraße 12, D-93055 NTI546
For Ukraine Regensburg, Germany For Ukraine
• Importer name, address:

Nissan International SA
Zone d’activités La Pièce 12
1180 Rolle, Switzerland
• Operating frequency band: 433.92 MHz.
• Maximum radio-frequency power: ≤10 dBm

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equip-
ment type TIS-09DL is in compliance with Directive
SYSTEM (TPMS) (Transmitter)
2014/53/EU.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
available at the following internet address:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
https://continental-homologation.com/nissan
and
2) this device must accept any interference • Frequency band: 433.92 MHz.
received, including interference that may cause • Maximum transmitter power: –17 dBm
undesired operation.
CAUTION TO USERS: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user`s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
NTI445
For Ukraine
NTI454
NTI450
For Ukraine

NTI451 NTI453 NTI485
For Israel For Israel For Palestine
NTI452 NTI462
For Israel For Morocco

RADAR SYSTEMS Side radar sensor (where fitted)
Front radar sensor (where fitted) Simplified EU Hereby, APTIV, 42367 Wuppertal
declaration declares that this RN5TR is in
Simplified EU Hereby, Robert Bosch GmbH of conformity compliance with the essential
declaration declares that the radio equipment requirements and other relevant
of conformity type FR5CPEC is in compliance with provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU
Directive 2014/53/EU. (RED). The original declaration of
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be accessed at the
conformity is available at the fol- following internet address:
lowing internet address: www.aptiv.com/
http://eu-doc.bosch.com automotive-homologation
NTI562
Frequency band(s) in which the
For Israel
radio equipment operates:
76-77 GHz
Maximum radio-frequency power
transmitted in the frequency
band(s) in which the radio equip-
ment operates:
30 dBm (1 W)
NTI560
For Ukraine
NTI564
For Morocco
NTI566
For Ukraine
NTI482
For Ukraine

AUDIO SYSTEMS
FM AM radio (where fitted)
Simplified Hereby Visteon Automotive
EU declara- Electronics Co., Ltd. declares that
tion of this system is in compliance with
conformity Directive 2014/53/EU.
Frequency band(s) in which the radio
equipment operates:
2400–2483.5 MHz
NTI567 Maximum radio-frequency power
For Ukraine transmitted in the frequency band(s)
in which the radio equipment oper-
ates:
Bluetooth <10 mW (EIRP)
NTI571
For Morocco
NTI480

TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
(where fitted)
Hereby, Valeo declares that the radio equipment
type A-IVC-EU-01 is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of
conformity is available at the following internet ad-
dress:
https://www.valeo.com/
declaration-of-conformity/
NTI445 Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equip-
For Ukraine ment type IVC Telematic Control Unit is in compli-
ance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the
EU declaration of conformity is available at the fol-
lowing internet address:
http://www.continental-homologation.com/
nissan
NTI528
For Morocco
NTI572
For Israel

RADIO FREQUENCY APPROVAL
All radio frequency products fitted to the vehicle range during production conform to the requirements of the Radio Equipment Directive (RED) 2014/53/EU.
The countries covered by this directive, or those which accept it, are: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia & Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Den-
mark, Estonia, Finland, France, French Guiana, Georgia, Germany, Greece, Guadeloupe, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Kosovo, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Lux-
embourg, Macedonia, Malta, Martinique, Mayotte, Monaco, Montenegro, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Reunion, Romania, Saint Pierre & Miquelon, San
Marino, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, Tuvalu, United Kingdom.
VEHICLE RADIO FUNCTIONS
Frequency Range Technology Power/Magnetic Field
125 kHz (119 – 135 kHz) Remote Keyless Entry Transponder Ring ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
433 MHz (433.05 – 434.79 MHz) Tyre Pressure Monitoring ≤ 10 mW e.r.p.
433.92 MHz (433.05 – 434.79 MHz) Remote Keyless Entry ≤ 10 mW e.r.p.
20 kHz (9 – 90 kHz) Keyless Go system ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
2.4 GHz (2400 – 2483.5 MHz) Bluetooth®, Wi-Fi ≤ 100 mW e.i.r.p.
824 – 894 MHz GSM 850 (2G) ≤ 39 dBm e.i.r.p.
880 – 960 MHz GSM 900 (2G) ≤ 39 dBm e.i.r.p.
1710 – 1880 MHz GSM 1800 (2G) ≤ 36 dBm e.i.r.p.
1850 – 1890 MHz GSM 1900 (2G) ≤ 33 dBm e.i.r.p.
1922 – 2168 MHz W-CDMA Band I (3G) ≤ 24 dBm e.i.r.p.
24.05 – 24.25 GHz 24 GHz ISM Radar ≤ 100 mW e.i.r.p.
24.25 – 26.65 GHz 24 GHz UWB Radar ≤ -41,3 dBm/MHz e.i.r.p. mean
≤ 0 dBm/50 MHz e.i.r.p. peak
76 – 77 GHz 77 GHz Radar ≤ 55 dBm e.i.r.p.

CE APPROVAL DETAILS
NSY0105

CE1J12

CE2J12

UKCA APPROVAL DETAILS
NTI495

UKCA1J12

UKCA2J12

NOTE

10 Regulatory information
Environmental information.................................................................. 490 Consumer and user safety information

Environmental concern .................................................................. 490 (REACh) ........................................................................................................ 490
Compliance at every step ............................................................. 490 Protect the environment when driving .............................. 490
We build our vehicles with recycling in mind.................. 490 AIRBAG LABEL (where fitted)............................................................... 492
ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERN Manufacturing phase CONSUMER AND USER SAFETY

NISSAN plants based in the UK already achieve a INFORMATION (REACh)
recycling rate of over 90% and are looking for fur- REACh is the chemical regulation in the EU, focusing
Today, the efforts made by NISSAN to fulfil our re-
ther improvements. The UK plant installed 10 wind on Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Re-
sponsibilities to protect and sustain the environ-
turbines to cut carbon dioxide emissions at power striction of Chemicals manufactured in or imported
ment are far-reaching. Within NISSAN, we promote
plants by more than 3,000 tonnes per year. into the European Economic Area. Nissan complies
the highest levels of practice in every region and in
every area of operations. Production and distribution phase with REACh obligations, and fully supports its un-
derlying goals: to protect human health and reduce
COMPLIANCE AT EVERY STEP Using resources efficiently to reduce the amount of
the environment from risks posed by chemicals. For
waste generated during the production and distri-
NISSAN focuses on ensuring that end of life vehicle more information, visit:
bution stage. NISSAN promotes activities based on
components are reused, recycled or recovered, and www.nissan-safetysheets.com
Reducing, Reusing, and Recycling materials when-
guarantees compliance with EU legislation (the End This website provides information on substances
ever possible. NISSAN's goal is to achieve a 100%
of Life Vehicle Directive). present in the Nissan product(s) that you buy, and
recycling rate for operations in Japan and globally.
recommendations for their safe use.
WE BUILD OUR VEHICLES WITH Use and service phase
RECYCLING IN MIND PROTECT THE ENVIRONMENT
NISSAN dealers are our window to you, our cus-
Reducing landfill waste, emissions, conserving
WHEN DRIVING
tomer. In order to meet your expectations they pro-
natural resources, and enhancing recycling activi- vide not only high quality services but are also envi- Your driving behaviour has significant impact on
ties are emphasised daily in our manufacturing, ronmentally responsible. NISSAN promotes activi- fuel economy and the environment. Follow the tips
sales and service operations and in the disposal of ties to recycle the waste generated as a result of below for better fuel-efficiency, better driving hab-
end of life vehicles (ELV). service centre activities. its, and to be environmentally friendly by reducing
emissions:
Design phase Disposal phase
To reduce environmental impact we have devel-
Fuel efficient driving
Recycle your end of life vehicle or its components.
oped your NISSAN vehicle to be 95% recoverable. When your NISSAN reaches the end of its life, and is Anticipating traffic conditions and acting accord-
We mark the components to facilitate dismantling, no longer suitable for daily use, it still has value. You ingly reduces fuel consumption, helping to protect
recycling and to reduce hazardous substances. We can help prevent waste affecting the environment of our natural environment. Take your foot off the
carefully verify and control substances of concern. by bringing your NISSAN to be recycled at our col- accelerator while approaching traffic lights and
We have already reduced to a minimum the cad- lection networks in your area. Our collection net- avoid last minute braking when the light turns red.
mium, mercury and lead in your NISSAN vehicle. works guarantee no cost for the treatment of your Avoid speeding, harsh acceleration, and strong
NISSAN includes recycled material in your vehicle ELV. For further information on how and where to braking. The gain in time does not offset pollution
and looks for opportunities to increase the percent- dispose of your ELV refer to your local NISSAN dealer of the environment. Try to maintain speed when
age of recycled materials used. or consult: www.nissan-europe.com. driving uphill to reduce fuel consumption and pollu-
tion. Maintain speed or allow the vehicle to go
slower where traffic allows.

Close windows when driving Maintain a safe distance
Driving with a window open at 100 km/h (62 MPH) Anticipate traffic conditions for a smoother drive
increases fuel consumption by up to 4%. Driving and to assure comfort and safety during your trip.
with the windows closed allows for better fuel Drive and maintain a safe distance from other ve-
economy. hicles while in traffic. This will help reduce fuel con-
sumption as you will not be constantly tapping your
Use the roof rack only when necessary brakes.
Only install the roof luggage system when you re-
ally need it, otherwise put it inside the vehicle or Check your tyre pressure
store it in your garage. Do not drive around with an Low tyre pressure increases fuel consumption as
empty roof rack, kayak holder, or ski rack, this will well as the use of non-recommended tyres. Correct
reduce your aerodynamic drag significantly. tyre pressure will maximise the grip of your vehicle
and optimise fuel consumption.
Optimise the use of air conditioning
The air conditioning system has a positive effect on Have your car serviced regularly
driving and vehicle safety through comfort cooling Regular service allows you to run your vehicle in
and dehumidifying, drivers are more alert and have optimal condition and with the best fuel efficiency.
better visibility when window demisting/defogging Have your vehicle serviced by your NISSAN dealer or
becomes necessary. However, use of the air condi- a qualified workshop to ensure that it is maintained
tioning system will increase fuel consumption sub- to its original standard.
stantially in an urban environment. Optimise the use
of air conditioning by using the vents as much as
possible.
Use the parking brake on slopes

Use the parking brake when holding your vehicle on
a slope. Avoid using the accelerator to hold your
vehicle as this leads to unnecessary fuel consump-
tion and wear.

AIRBAG LABEL (where fitted)

NOTE

11 Index
– Specification label ............................................................................ 473

A
Antenna ............................................................................................................. 211
Anti-Theft System (NISSAN) ............................................................... 168
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .................................................... 407
Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians (VSP)
– Warning light .......................................................................................... 86
system ................................................................................................................. 29
Accident
Approval numbers ................................................................................... 474
– Emergency Response System ................................................ 414
Armrests ............................................................................................................ 36
Aids
– Storage ..................................................................................................... 140
– Blind Spot Warning (BSW) .......................................................... 257
Audible reminders ...................................................................................... 95
– Chassis control .................................................................................. 409
Audio ................................................................................................................. 208
– Emergency Lane Assist system ............................................ 289
– Bluetooth® audio streaming .................................................... 221
– Hill Start Assist (HSA) ...................................................................... 410
– FM AM radio ........................................................................................... 213
– Intelligent Around View Monitor (IAVM) ........................... 190
– FM AM radio with USB .................................................................... 212
– Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention ...................................... 257
– iPod® player operation .................................................................. 218
– Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) ................................... 359
– NissanConnect ................................................................................... 224
– Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) ............ 354
– Precautions .......................................................................................... 208
– Intelligent Lane Intervention system ..................... 284, 349
– Settings ..................................................................................................... 213
– Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) .................................................. 371
– Steering-wheel switches ........................................................... 230
– Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ................................... 279, 345
– USB Connection Port ...................................................................... 217
– Moving Object Detection (MOD) ............................................ 199
Audio system
– Overview ..................................................................................................... 14
– Precautions ........................................................................................... 226
– Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system ............................ 269
Automatic brake hold ............................................................................ 174
– Rear Ultrasonic Parking Sensor System ......................... 399
– Ultrasonic parking sensors ........................................... 394, 398
Air bags B
– Repair and replacement ................................................................ 73
– Supplemental restraint System ............................................... 63 Battery ............................................................................................................. 449
Air cleaner filter .......................................................................................... 453 – Caution label ....................................................................................... 449
Air conditioner – Gauge ........................................................................................................... 81
– Automatic .............................................................................................. 204 – Information .......................................................................................... 450
– Heater and air conditioner ....................................................... 203 – Intelligent Key battery discharge ........................................ 249
– Servicing ................................................................................................. 207 – Jump starting ..................................................................................... 426
– Key battery replacement ........................................................... 450
C
– Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery ........................................................... 19
– Saver system ....................................................................................... 248
Capacities and recommendations ............................................. 468
– Warning light .......................................................................................... 87
– Brake and clutch fluid .................................................................. 468
Blind Spot Intervention
– Coolant .................................................................................................... 468
– Driving situations ............................................................................. 265
– Fuel ............................................................................................................. 470
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ................................................................... 257
– Oil ................................................................................................................. 468
– Driving situations ............................................................................. 265
– Refrigerant ............................................................................................ 468
– Warning light .......................................................................................... 86
Cargo compartment
Bluetooth® ..................................................................................................... 225
– Cargo floor ............................................................................................. 144
– Audio streaming ................................................................................ 221
Changing
– Hands-Free Phone System ....................................................... 230
– Engine coolant ................................................................................... 442
– Operation ................................................................................................ 219
– Engine oil ................................................................................................ 445
– Phone settings ................................................................................... 230
– Inverter coolant ................................................................................ 444
– Precautions ............................................................................................. 211
– Tyres and wheels ............................................................................. 464
– Settings .................................................................................................... 219
Chassis control .......................................................................................... 409
– Texting ...................................................................................................... 225
– Intelligent Trace Control ............................................................ 409
Bonnet
Checking
– Release ...................................................................................................... 170
– Brake pedal ........................................................................................... 447
Boot ..................................................................................................................... 144
– Coolant level ............................................................................. 442, 444
Brakes .................................................................................................... 406, 447
– Engine oil level .................................................................................... 445
– Adjustment ........................................................................................... 447
– Parking brake ...................................................................................... 447
– Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............................................ 407
Child restraints .............................................................................................. 47
– Automatic brake hold .................................................................... 174
– Anchorage ................................................................................................ 55
– Checking ................................................................................................. 447
– ISOFIX ........................................................................................................... 54
– Electric Parking Brake .................................................................... 173
– ISOFIX installation ............................................................................... 55
– Fluid ............................................................................................................ 448
– Precautions .............................................................................................. 47
– Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) ................................... 359
– Seat belt installation ......................................................................... 58
– Precautions .......................................................................................... 406
Child safety .............................................................................................. 40, 46
– Rear Automatic Braking RAB) ................................................. 274
Cleaning
– Regenerative brake ............................................................................ 19
– Alloy wheels .......................................................................................... 433
– Trailer ........................................................................................................ 403
– Automatic anti-dazzling inside mirror ............................. 435
– Warning light .......................................................................................... 86
– Chrome parts ...................................................................................... 433
Brightness
– Exterior .................................................................................................... 432
– Intelligent Around View Monitor (IAVM) ............................ 197
– Glass ................................................................................................ 433, 435
– Interior ...................................................................................................... 434
496 Index
– Plastic parts ......................................................................................... 435 Dimensions ................................................................................................... 472
– Rear-view camera lens ................................................................ 433 – Engine ........................................................................................................ 471
– Removing spots ................................................................................ 432 Display
– Underbody ............................................................................................ 433 – Head up display .................................................................................. 125
– Washing ................................................................................................... 432 – Rear-view Monitor ............................................................................ 184
– Waxing ...................................................................................................... 432 – Vehicle information ........................................................................... 96
– Wheels ...................................................................................................... 433 Doors
Coat hooks ...................................................................................................... 141 – Child safety ............................................................................................ 163
Cold weather ................................................................................................. 411 – Locks ............................................................................................................ 161
– Battery ....................................................................................................... 411 – Map pocket ............................................................................................. 141
– Corrosion protection ...................................................................... 412 – Power door lock switch ................................................................ 163
– Engine coolant ..................................................................................... 411 – Precautions ............................................................................................ 157
– Equipment ............................................................................................... 411 – Remote keyless entry system ................................................. 154
– Winter equipment .............................................................................. 411 Drive belt ......................................................................................................... 452
Console box .................................................................................................. 140 Drive modes .................................................................................................... 24
Coolant Driving .............................................................................................................. 250
– Changing engine coolant .......................................................... 442 – Care ............................................................................................................ 246
– Changing inverter coolant ....................................................... 444 – Cold weather ......................................................................................... 411
– Checking coolant level ..................................................... 442, 444 – Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) ................................... 359
– Cold weather ......................................................................................... 411 – Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) ............ 354
– Engine cooling system ................................................................. 442 – Precautions ........................................................................................... 239
– Inverter cooling system .............................................................. 443 – Wet road .................................................................................................. 246
Corrosion protection ............................................................................. 435 – Winter conditions ............................................................................. 246
– Environmental factors ................................................................. 435 Driving Position Memory System
Cruise control .............................................................................................. 295 – Memory storage ................................................................................. 177
– Operation ................................................................................... 296, 300 – System operation .............................................................................. 177
– Precautions .......................................................................................... 296
Cup holders .................................................................................................... 141
– Bottle holder .......................................................................................... 141 E
e-Pedal Step .................................................................................................... 27

D e-POWER system .......................................................................................... 18
– Before starting ................................................................................... 239
Defogger – Precautions ............................................................................................. 20
– Switch ........................................................................................................ 130 eCall ..................................................................................................................... 414
Efficient use of your vehicle ................................................................ 23
Index 497
Electric motors ............................................................................................... 18
F
Electric power steering ....................................................................... 405
Electric shift control system ............................................................ 250
Filter
– Driving ...................................................................................................... 250
– Air cleaner .............................................................................................. 453
Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) system ................... 408
– Engine oil ................................................................................................ 445
– Deactivation ........................................................................................ 409
Flat tyre ............................................................................................................. 418
Emergency
Floor .................................................................................................................... 144
– Response System ............................................................................. 414
Floor mats ..................................................................................................... 434
Emergency Lane Assist system .................................................... 289
Fluids
Emergency shut-off system ................................................................ 22
– Brake ......................................................................................................... 448
Emergency tyre puncture repair kit ........................................... 465
– Gear ............................................................................................................ 447
– Location .................................................................................................. 423
– Window washer ................................................................................ 448
Engine
Fog lights ........................................................................................................ 459
– Air cleaner filter ................................................................................. 453
– Front — Location .............................................................................. 460
– Changing engine coolant .......................................................... 442
– Front — Operation ............................................................................ 134
– Changing engine oil ....................................................................... 445
– Rear — Location ................................................................................ 460
– Checking coolant level ................................................................. 442
– Rear — Operation .............................................................................. 135
– Checking engine oil level ........................................................... 445
– Rear — Replacement ...................................................................... 461
– Cooling system .................................................................................. 442
Frequency approval numbers ............................................... 227, 481
– Data ............................................................................................................. 471
Fuel
– Engine overheat ............................................................................... 428
– Capacities .............................................................................................. 468
– Oil ................................................................................................................. 445
– Gauge ........................................................................................................... 81
– Serial number ...................................................................................... 473
– Information ........................................................................................... 470
– Spark plugs ........................................................................................... 452
Fuses .................................................................................................................. 455
– Starting ................................................................................................... 250
– Engine compartment ................................................................... 458
– Three-way catalyst ......................................................................... 245
– Extended storage ............................................................................ 458
– Turbocharger ...................................................................................... 246
– Passenger compartment ........................................................... 455
EV mode ............................................................................................................. 26
Exhaust gas (Carbon Monoxide) .................................................. 240
Exterior G
– Cleaning .................................................................................................. 432
– Lights ........................................................................................................ 459 Gasoline particulate filter ................................................................... 245
Gauges
– Battery ......................................................................................................... 81
– Fuel ................................................................................................................. 81
– Meters and gauges ............................................................................ 77
498 Index
– Power gauge .......................................................................................... 80 – Vents ......................................................................................................... 202
– Speedometer ......................................................................................... 80 Hill Start Assist (HSA) .............................................................................. 410
Gear – Indicator light ......................................................................................... 93
– Fluid ............................................................................................................ 447 Horn ..................................................................................................................... 136
Glass cleaning ............................................................................................. 433
Glass roof ........................................................................................................ 148
– Sunshade operation ....................................................................... 148 I
Glove box ........................................................................................................ 140
Immobiliser
– NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ........................................ 168
H Indicator lights .............................................................................................. 84
Injured persons .............................................................................................. 41
Hands-Free Phone System ............................................................... 230 Inside rear-view mirror .......................................................................... 179
Hazard warning flasher switch ...................................................... 414 Intelligent Around View Monitor (IAVM) ................................... 190
Head restraints .............................................................................................. 37 Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention .............................................. 257
– Adjustment .............................................................................................. 38 – Warning light .......................................................................................... 86
– Installation ............................................................................................... 38 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ....................................................... 299
– Removal ..................................................................................................... 38 Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) ........................................... 359
Head up display .......................................................................................... 125 – Activation ............................................................................................... 362
Headlights – Operation ................................................................................................ 361
– Adaptive Driving Beam ................................................................. 133 – Warning light ............................................................................... 88, 362
– Aiming control ..................................................................................... 135 Intelligent Key .................................................................................... 156, 247
– Dynamic high beam assistant ................................................ 132 – Battery discharge ............................................................................ 249
– Operation ................................................................................................ 130 – Battery replacement ..................................................................... 450
– Replacement (bulb) ........................................................................ 459 – Locking ............................................................................................ 155, 158
– Switch ......................................................................................................... 131 – Operating range ................................................................................. 157
Heated seats – Operation ................................................................................................ 157
– Operation ................................................................................................ 137 – Operation failure ................................................................................ 155
– Precautions ............................................................................................ 137 – Remote keyless entry system ................................................. 154
Heated steering wheel – Starting ..................................................................................................... 159
– Operation ................................................................................................ 136 – Unlocking ...................................................................................... 155, 158
– Precautions ........................................................................................... 136 Intelligent Lane Intervention system ............................. 284, 349
Heated windscreen .................................................................................. 129 Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) .......................................................... 371
Heater and air conditioner ............................................................... 203 – Bay parking ........................................................................................... 375
– Automatic air conditioner ......................................................... 204 – Deactivation ......................................................................................... 372
– Servicing ................................................................................................. 207 – Interruption .......................................................................................... 373
Index 499
– Malfunction ........................................................................................... 377 – Operation (Intelligent Key) .......................................................... 157
– Operation ............................................................................................... 373 – Operation failure ................................................................................ 155
– Parallel parking .................................................................................. 373 – Radio approval number and information ...................... 474
– Precautions ............................................................................................ 371 – Remote keyless entry system ................................................. 154
– Tips .............................................................................................................. 377 – Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 160
Intelligent Trace Control .................................................................... 409
Interior
– Lights — Information ..................................................................... 459 L
– Lights — operation ........................................................................... 149
Inverter Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ........................................... 279, 345
– Changing inverter coolant ....................................................... 444 – Operation .................................................................................... 280, 346
– Checking coolant level ................................................................ 444 Legal requirements .................................................................................... 47
– Cooling system .................................................................................. 443 Licences ........................................................................................................... 229
iPod® Lights
– Operation ................................................................................................ 218 – Exterior .................................................................................................... 459
ISOFIX – Fog light switch .................................................................................. 134
– Anchor locations ................................................................................. 54 – Hazard warning flasher switch .............................................. 414
– Child restraints ...................................................................................... 54 – Headlight aiming ............................................................................... 135
– Installation ............................................................................................... 55 – Headlight and turn signal switch ......................................... 130
– Headlight switch ................................................................................. 131
– Headlights ............................................................................................. 459
J – Indicator lights ...................................................................................... 84
– Interior ............................................................................................ 149, 459
Jump starting ............................................................................................. 426 – LED headlight ...................................................................................... 459
– Locations ............................................................................................... 460
– Replacement ........................................................................................ 461
K – Turn signal switch ............................................................................ 134
– Warning lights ....................................................................................... 84
Keys ..................................................................................................................... 152 Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery ................................................................... 19
– Battery replacement ..................................................................... 450 Locks
– Emergency key ................................................................................... 153 – Child safety ............................................................................................ 163
– Immobiliser ............................................................................................ 152 – Door .............................................................................................................. 161
– Intelligent Key ............................................................................ 156, 247 – Inside door handle ........................................................................... 162
– Intelligent Key battery discharge ........................................ 249 – Power door lock switch ................................................................ 163
– Mechanical key ................................................................................... 153 – Steering ................................................................................................... 249
– NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ......................................... 152 – Super Lock system ............................................................................ 161
– Operating range (Intelligent Key) .......................................... 157
500 Index
– Vehicle battery discharged ....................................................... 162
O
Luggage compartment ........................................................................ 144
Odometer/trip/twin trip odometer .............................................. 80
M Oil
– Capacities and recommendations ..................................... 468
Maintenance – Changing engine oil ....................................................................... 445
– Camera unit ........................................................ 283, 288, 348, 353 – Checking engine oil level ........................................................... 445
– ELA .............................................................................................................. 295 – Disposal ................................................................................................... 447
– General maintenance ................................................................... 438 – Engine oil ................................................................................................ 445
– Precautions .......................................................................................... 440 – SAE viscosity number ................................................................... 470
– Requirements ..................................................................................... 438 – Warning light .......................................................................................... 88
– Seat belts .................................................................................................. 45 Overheat
Map data ......................................................................................................... 226 – Engine overheat ............................................................................... 428
Meters and gauges .................................................................................... 77
– Battery ......................................................................................................... 81
P
– Fuel ................................................................................................................. 81
– Odometer/trip/twin trip odometer ..................................... 80
Parcel shelf ..................................................................................................... 143
– Power gauge .......................................................................................... 80
– Installation ............................................................................................. 143
– Speedometer ......................................................................................... 80
– Removal ................................................................................................... 143
Mirrors ................................................................................................................ 179
Parking ............................................................................................................. 370
– Adjustment (Power) ........................................................................ 180
– Brake ........................................................................................................... 173
– Automatic anti-dazzling ............................................................. 180
– Intelligent Around View Monitor (IAVM) ........................... 190
– Folding ...................................................................................................... 180
– Rear Ultrasonic Parking Sensor System ......................... 399
– Rear-view (Inside) .............................................................................. 179
– Ultrasonic parking sensors ....................................................... 394
– Rear-view (Outside) ......................................................................... 180
Petrol
– Vanity mirror .......................................................................................... 181
– Engine oil ................................................................................................ 470
Mobile phone integration for FM AM radio with CD
– Gauge ........................................................................................................... 81
player ................................................................................................................ 230
– Information ........................................................................................... 470
Moving Object Detection (MOD) .................................................... 199
Phone
– Bluetooth® ............................................................................................. 225
N – Bluetooth® Hands-Free ............................................................... 230
– Hands-Free Phone System ....................................................... 225
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) – Mobile phone integration .......................................................... 230
– NATS key .................................................................................................. 152 – Texting ...................................................................................................... 225
– Radio approval number and information ...................... 474
Index 501
Power Push-button power ................................................................................ 247
– Door lock switch ................................................................................ 163
– Electric power steering ............................................................... 405
– Outlet .......................................................................................................... 137 R
– Switch ....................................................................................................... 247
– Switch — positions .......................................................................... 248 Radio
– Windows .................................................................................................. 146 – Approval number and information ..................................... 474
Power gauge .................................................................................................. 80 – FM AM radio ........................................................................................... 213
Precautions – FM AM radio with USB .................................................................... 212
– Audio ......................................................................................................... 208 – NissanConnect ................................................................................... 224
– Brakes ....................................................................................................... 406 Radio transmitter ..................................................................................... 474
– Child restraints ...................................................................................... 47 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) ........................................................ 274
– Cruise control ..................................................................................... 296 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
– Door locks ............................................................................................... 157 – Operation ............................................................................................... 270
– e-POWER system ................................................................................. 20 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system ..................................... 269
– Exhaust gas ......................................................................................... 240 Rear seats ......................................................................................................... 35
– Intelligent Emergency Braking (IEB) ................................... 359 – Folding ......................................................................................................... 35
– Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) ............ 354 Rear-view Monitor .................................................................................... 184
– Intelligent Parking Assist (IPA) .................................................. 371 – Settings .................................................................................................... 188
– Maintenance ....................................................................................... 440 Rear-view Monitor
– Predictive guide lines ..................................................................... 185 – Guide lines .............................................................................................. 185
– Push-button power switch ....................................................... 247 Regenerative brake .................................................................................... 19
– Safety ......................................................................................................... 184 Remote keyless entry system ......................................................... 154
– Seat belts .................................................................................................. 39 – Operation ................................................................................................ 155
– Starting and driving ....................................................................... 239 Repairing
– Supplemental Restraint System .............................................. 63 – Flat tyre .................................................................................................... 423
– Towing ...................................................................................................... 429 – Headlights ............................................................................................. 459
– Trailer ........................................................................................................ 403 Replacement
Pregnant women ......................................................................................... 41 – Air bags ....................................................................................................... 73
ProPILOT Assist ........................................................................................... 315 – Air cleaner filter ................................................................................. 453
– Operation ................................................................................................ 316 – Engine coolant ................................................................................... 442
ProPILOT Park .............................................................................................. 377 – Engine oil ................................................................................................ 445
Protection – Engine oil filter ................................................................................... 445
– Corrosion ................................................................................................. 412 – Inverter coolant ................................................................................ 444
– Environment ........................................................................................ 447 – Spark plugs ........................................................................................... 452
Push starting ............................................................................................... 427 – Wiper blades ........................................................................................ 454
502 Index
Road accident cautions ......................................................................... 22 – Adjustment (Power) .......................................................................... 34
Roof – Head restraints ...................................................................................... 37
– Glass ........................................................................................................... 148 – Heating ...................................................................................................... 137
– Sunshade operation ....................................................................... 148 – ISOFIX child restraints .................................................................... 49
Roof rail ............................................................................................................. 142 – Rear ............................................................................................................... 35
Security system
– Alarm system ....................................................................................... 168
S – Interior movement sensors ...................................................... 169
– NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ............................... 152, 168
SAE viscosity number ........................................................................... 470 Servicing
Safety – Air conditioner .................................................................................... 207
– Chains (Trailer) ................................................................................... 403 Settings
– Child safety rear door locks ...................................................... 163 – Intelligent Around View Monitor (IAVM) ........................... 190
– Children .............................................................................................. 40, 46 – Moving Object Detection (MOD) ............................................ 199
– Head restraints ...................................................................................... 37 Shift control system .............................................................................. 250
– Injured persons ...................................................................................... 41 Shifting
– Precautions ........................................................................................... 184 – Electric shift control system .................................................... 250
– Pregnant women ................................................................................. 41 Snow chains ................................................................................................. 463
– Road Accident Emergency Response System ............ 414 SOS Switch ..................................................................................................... 414
Safety information .................................................................................. 224 Spare tyre ........................................................................................................ 417
Seat belts ................................................................................................... 39, 43 Spark plugs ................................................................................................... 452
– Adjustment .............................................................................................. 44 Speed limiter ...................................................................................... 297, 342
– Child restraint installation ............................................................ 58 – Operation .................................................................................... 298, 343
– Child safety ...................................................................................... 40, 46 Speedometer ................................................................................................. 80
– Children - Infants ................................................................................. 47 Starting
– Children - Larger .................................................................................. 47 – Before starting ................................................................................... 239
– Cleaning .................................................................................................. 435 – e-POWER system .............................................................................. 250
– Legal requirements ............................................................................ 47 – Jump starting ..................................................................................... 426
– Maintenance ........................................................................................... 45 – Precautions ........................................................................................... 239
– Precautions ............................................................................................. 39 – Push starting ....................................................................................... 427
– Rear centre position ......................................................................... 45 Steering wheel
– Reminder .................................................................................................... 41 – Adjustment ............................................................................................ 179
– Warning light .................................................................................. 84, 90 – Electric power steering ............................................................... 405
– Warnings ..................................................................................................... 41 – Heating ..................................................................................................... 136
Seats ..................................................................................................................... 32 – Lock ............................................................................................................ 249
– Adjustment (Manual) ........................................................................ 33 – Switches — Audio control .......................................................... 230
Index 503
– Switches — Hands-free telephone control ................... 230 – Steering-wheel — Phone ............................................................. 231
– Warning light .......................................................................................... 87 – ThermaClear ......................................................................................... 129
Storage ............................................................................................................. 140 – Wiper and washer ............................................................................. 127
– Boot ............................................................................................................. 144
– Bottle holder .......................................................................................... 141
– Coat hooks .............................................................................................. 141 T
– Console box .......................................................................................... 140
– Cup holders ............................................................................................ 141 Texting .............................................................................................................. 225
– Glove box ................................................................................................ 140 ThermaClear Heated Windscreen
– Luggage hooks ................................................................................... 145 – Operation ................................................................................................ 129
– Map pocket ............................................................................................. 141 Three-way catalyst
– Roof rail ..................................................................................................... 142 – Care ............................................................................................................ 245
– Seat pocket ............................................................................................ 142 – Information ........................................................................................... 245
– Trays ........................................................................................................... 140 Tilting steering wheel ............................................................................. 179
Sun visors ........................................................................................................ 179 Tools .................................................................................................................... 418
Sunshade Towing
– Operation ................................................................................................ 148 – Eye ............................................................................................................... 430
Super Lock system .................................................................................... 161 – Precautions .......................................................................................... 429
– Emergency release ........................................................................... 161 – Tow bar installation ....................................................................... 404
Supplemental Restraint System ...................................................... 63 – Tow truck towing ............................................................................. 429
Switches – Towing e-POWER models .......................................................... 429
– Automatic brake hold .................................................................... 174 – Trailer ........................................................................................................ 403
– Defogger .................................................................................................. 130 Trademarks ................................................................................................... 229
– e-Pedal Step ............................................................................................ 27 Traffic sign recognition (TSR) .......................................................... 254
– eCall ............................................................................................................. 414 Trailer
– Electric Parking Brake .................................................................... 173 – Brakes ....................................................................................................... 403
– EV mode ..................................................................................................... 26 – Precautions .......................................................................................... 403
– Fog light ................................................................................................... 134 – Tow bar Installation ....................................................................... 404
– Front passenger air bag ................................................................ 69 – Towing ..................................................................................................... 403
– Hazard warning .................................................................................. 414 Transferring registration to another country ..................... 472
– Headlight aiming ............................................................................... 135 Travelling ......................................................................................................... 472
– Headlight and turn signal ........................................................... 130 Troubleshooting
– Power door lock ................................................................................. 163 – Keys ............................................................................................................. 160
– Push-button power ........................................................................ 247 TSR ...................................................................................................................... 254
– SOS .............................................................................................................. 414 Turbocharger .............................................................................................. 246
– Steering-wheel — Audio ............................................................. 230
504 Index
Turn signal
V
– Operation ................................................................................................ 134
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ............................. 240
Vehicle identification ............................................................................. 472
– Meter information ........................................................................... 243
– Air conditioner label ....................................................................... 473
– Settings ................................................................................................... 244
– Engine serial number .................................................................... 473
Tyres
– Label ........................................................................................................... 472
– Age .............................................................................................................. 464
– Number (VIN) (chassis number) ............................................. 473
– Changing tyres and wheels ..................................................... 464
– Tyre placard .......................................................................................... 473
– Emergency tyre puncture repair kit ........................ 423, 465
Vehicle information display ................................................................. 96
– Equipment ............................................................................................... 411
Vehicle security ............................................................................... 168, 405
– Flat tyre .................................................................................................... 418
– Alarm system ....................................................................................... 168
– Inflation pressure ............................................................................. 462
– Interior movement sensors ...................................................... 169
– Placard ...................................................................................................... 473
Vents .................................................................................................................. 202
– Repairing flat tyre ............................................................................ 423
– Rotation .................................................................................................. 464
– Sizes ............................................................................................................. 471 W
– Snow chains ........................................................................................ 463
– Spare ........................................................................................................... 417 Warning labels
– Spare tyre ............................................................................................... 465 – Air bag ......................................................................................................... 66
– Temporary-use spare tyre .......................................................... 417 Warning lights
– Trailer tyre pressure ....................................................................... 403 – Air bag - Passenger ........................................................................... 67
– Types ......................................................................................................... 463 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ............... 84
– Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....................... 421 Washing ........................................................................................................... 432
– Wear and damage ........................................................................... 464 Waxing .............................................................................................................. 432
– Wheels and tyres .............................................................................. 462 Wheels
– Balance .................................................................................................... 465
– Blocking ................................................................................................... 418
U
– Care ............................................................................................................ 433
– Changing tyres and wheels ..................................................... 464
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
– Cover .......................................................................................................... 419
– Connection Port ................................................................................. 217
– Installation ............................................................................................ 420
– Operation ................................................................................................ 217
– Removal ................................................................................................... 419
– Precautions .......................................................................................... 208
– Sizes ............................................................................................................. 471
– Stowing .................................................................................................... 421
– Tools and spare wheel .................................................................. 418
– Wheels and tyres .............................................................................. 462
Index 505
Windows ........................................................................................................... 146
– Automatic function ......................................................................... 146
– Locking ..................................................................................................... 146
– Power ......................................................................................................... 146
Wipers ................................................................................................................. 127
– Blade replacement .......................................................................... 454
– Operation (Rear window) ............................................................ 128
– Operation (Windscreen) ................................................................ 127
– Rain-sensing auto wiper ............................................................. 128
– Reverse synchronisation ............................................................. 129
– Washer nozzle .................................................................................... 454
– Window washer cleaner fluid ................................................. 448
506 Index
QUICK REFERENCE
• In case of emergency ... 6-414

(Flat tyre, engine will not start, overheating,
towing)
• How to start the e-POWER system ... 5-250
• How to read the meters and gauges ... 2-77
• Maintenance and do-it-yourself ... 8-438
• Technical information ... 9-438

2023 Nissan Qashqai E-Power Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Nissan Qashqai E-Power Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 Nissan Qashqai E-Power Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NISSAN QASHQAI

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS! READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

Air bag warning labels (where fitted):

The Blue Citizenship symbol indicates environmentally friendly information and

“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Examples of the batteries that the vehicle contains:

Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Seat belts and supplemental restraint system..................... 2 Instrument panel ......................................................................................... 8

10. Front supplemental side-impact air bags

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags 5. Front central seat-mounted side-impact

2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Bonnet (P. 3-170) 4. Towing eye (P. 6-430)

Illustrated table of contents 3

9. Rear turn signal light

1. Rear window (Defogger switch, P. 2-130) 6. Tail light

4 Illustrated table of contents

14. Driving Position Memory System switches

Illustrated table of contents 5

6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-127)

6 Illustrated table of contents

RIGHT HAND DRIVE — Speed limiter* (P. 5-297)

Illustrated table of contents 7

10. Driver supplemental front-impact air bag

LEFT HAND DRIVE — without NissanConnect* (P. 4-212)

8 Illustrated table of contents

RIGHT HAND DRIVE — without NissanConnect* (P. 4-212)

Illustrated table of contents 9

1. Power gauge (P. 2-80)

10 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 11

12 Illustrated table of contents

System name Abbreviation Icon Description Page

14 Illustrated table of contents

Illustrated table of contents 15

16 Illustrated table of contents

NISSAN e-POWER system....................................................................... 18 When driving............................................................................................ 23

This vehicle has two types of electric motors.

1 Petrol engine 6 Lithium ion (Li-ion) battery

18 e-POWER system overview

e-POWER system overview 19

20 e-POWER system overview

a. Inverter • Electric motor noise from the engine compart-

e-POWER system overview 21

22 e-POWER system overview

– You can accelerate the vehicle with less NOTE

e-POWER system overview 23

There are three drive modes of the e-POWER system.

Drive Mode Features HOW TO CHANGE THE DRIVE MODE

24 e-POWER system overview

[ECO Cruise Control] • The [ECO Climate Control] setting maintains

e-POWER system overview 25

• When the outside temperature is low, the engine

26 e-POWER system overview

System Activation • The vehicle’s brake lights illuminate when the

e-POWER system overview 27

28 e-POWER system overview

• When the vehicle speed is within 30 km/h